Enabling Works Specification

MALL OF OMAN
PACKAGE 1
VOLUME 2, BOOK 2.2.1
ENABLING WORKS SPECIFICATION
ISSUED FOR TENDER REV T2
07 JUNE 2016
Specification
Prepared for
Majid Al Futtaim
Prepared by
AECOM Middle East Limited

PO Box 53, Capital Gate, Abu Dhabi
United Arab Emirates
www.aecom.com
07 June 2016
AECOM
The information contained in this document produced by AECOM Middle East Limited is solely
for the use of the Client identified on the cover sheet for the purpose for which it has been
prepared and AECOM Middle East Limited undertakes no duty to or accepts any responsibility
to any third party who may rely upon this document.
All rights reserved. No section or element of this document may be removed from this
document, reproduced, electronically stored or transmitted in any form without the written
permission of AECOM Middle East Limited.
Quality Information
Document
Package 1 - Enabling Works Specification
Ref OMA-004-001-AEC-CE-SPN-00-0007-T2 Date 07 June 2016

Prepared by
C. Lakshmanan Reviewed by Infrastructure and Structural Teams
Revision History
Authorised
Revision
Revision Date
Details
T0
01 May 2016
Issued for Tender
Name/Position
Anthony Ray
Project Manager
Anthony Ray
T1
01 June 2016
Issued for Tender Rev T1
T2
07 June 2016
Project Manager
Anthony Ray
Project Manager
Signature
Table of Contents
015213 - Field Offices And Sheds

015600 - Hoarding And Signboards
020100 - Maintenance Of Existing Conditions
024100 - Demolition
031100 - Concrete Forming
031500 - Concrete Accessories
032000 - Concrete Reinforcing
033000 - Cast-In Place Concrete
034100 - Precast Concrete
101453 - Traffic Signage
134713 - Cathodic Protection
260543 - Underground Ducts and Raceways - Electrical
265600 - Exterior Lighting
270543 - Underground Ducts and Raceways - Communication
311000 - Site Clearing
312300 - Excavation And Fill
312319 - Dewatering
312333 - Trenching And Backfill
314100 - Shoring
321116 - Subbase Courses
321216 - Asphalt Paving
321600 - Curbs And Gutters
331000 - Water Utilities
333000 - Sanitary Sewerage Utilities
334000 - Storm Drainage Utilities
Appendices
MALL OF OMAN
PACKAGE 1
VOLUME 2, BOOK 2.2.1
ENABLING WORKS SPECIFICATION
ISSUED FOR TENDER REV T2
07 June 2016
REVISIONS
REVISION DESCRIPTION
REVISION
BY
DATE
Deleted Clauses referring to 132 KV transmission lines in

Sections 020100 and 024100
T1
Infrastructure
Team
01 June 2016
Added Section 134713 Cathodic Protection
T1
Infrastructure
Team
01 June 2016
Added Clause 2.3G for stockpiling fill material to

Section 312300
T1
Infrastructure
Team
01 June 2016
Added Clause 3.2 C to Section 024100
T2
Infrastructure
Team
07 June 2016
Added Clause 2.3 G 3 to Section 312300
T2
Infrastructure
Team
07 June 2016
Mall of Oman - Package 1

Enabling Works
SECTION 015213 -- FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
1.2
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1.3
SUBMITTALS
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
2.2
ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL
2.3
CONTRACT ADMINISTRATOR'S OFFICES
2.4
CONTRACT ADMINISTRATOR'S OFFICE EQUIPMENT
2.5
SITE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
3.2
INSTALLATION
3.3
MAINTENANCE AND CLEANING
3.4
REMOVAL
Enabling Works Specification

Issued for Tender - Rev T2
01 June 2016
015213
AECOM Middle East

FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS

Enabling Works
SECTION 015213 -- FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
General: Read this Section in conjunction with other related Sections, the Employer General
Requirements, Design Drawings and the Contract Conditions.
B.
Section Includes: Adequate air conditioned/ heated and furnished office accommodation for the use of
the Contract Administrator within the area indicated within the Contract Drawing. Work includes:
1.2
1.
Temporary Field Offices.
2.
Maintenance and Cleaning.
3.
Removal.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Design, supply and erect field offices and sheds in accordance with statutory requirements and
instructions of the Contract Administrator.
B.
Obtain approvals from Authorities having jurisdiction, pay fees and provide guarantees as required.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Manufacturer's Data: Prior to procurement the Contractor shall submit for acceptance, copies of
manufacturer's specifications for all field offices and equipment substantiating that those products comply
with the requirements.
B.
Shop Drawings: Prior to procurement Contractor shall submit layout plans for all field offices to Contract
Administrator for review and acceptance.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Serviceable, new, adequate for required purpose.
B.
Portable or mobile buildings, or buildings constructed with floors raised above ground, securely fixed to
foundations, with steps and landings at entrance doors.
C.
Construction: Structurally sound, secure, weather-tight enclosures for office and storage spaces.
Maintain during progress of the Work and until removal is authorized by the Contract Administrator.
D.
Temperature Transmission Resistance of Floors, Walls and Ceilings: Compatible with occupancy and
storage requirements.
E.
Exterior Materials: Weather-resistant and heat insulated finished in one color acceptable to the Contract
Administrator.
F.
Interior Materials in Offices: Sheet type materials for walls and ceilings, heat and sound insulated prefinished or painted; resilient floors and bases. Provide false ceiling and recessed type light fittings in all
rooms.
G.
Lighting for Offices: Fluorescent to all rooms, 500 Lux at desk-top height, exterior lighting at entrance
doors.
H.
Fire Extinguishers: Appropriate type fire extinguisher at each office area and each storage area.
I.
Interior Materials in Storage Sheds: As required to provide specified conditions for storage of products.

01 June 2016
015213 / 1
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
J.
Interior Flooring: Carpeting in all rooms including corridors.
K.
Windows: Minimum of size approx. 10% of floor area with operable sash and insect screens. Locate
according to accepted Shop Drawings to provide views of construction area wherever practical. All
windows shall be provided with venetian blinds.
L.
Electrical Distribution Panel: MCB and number of ways as required.
M.
Minimum four, 13A, 240 volt single convenience outlets, one on each wall of each room.
N.
Telephone: One telephone instrument per room.
O.
Sanitary and Kitchen Facilities: As specified.
P.
Furniture and equipment: New as specified including maintenance.
Q.
Back-up Power: Generators including power supply for construction purposes.
2.2
ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL
A.
Heating, Cooling and Ventilating for Offices: Automatic equipment to maintain comfortable ambient
conditions to the satisfaction of the Contract Administrator.
B.
Storage Spaces: Ventilation as needed to maintain products in accordance with Contract Documents;
adequate lighting for maintenance and inspection of products.
C.
Exhaust fan with automatic shutter, one per W.C. (fitting) and kitchen.
2.3
CONTRACT ADMINISTRATOR'S OFFICES

A.
A separate space for sole use of the Contract Administrator with new lock and two keys to main entrance
provided within 30 days of the Date of Commencement. Provide one sign board (1m) with English and
Arabic lettering to indicate Contract Administrator's offices.
B.
Contract Administrator's Offices (to be confirmed)

1.
2.
Staff Rooms: Rooms as shown on Design Drawings, or as advised by the Contract Administrator
(each room shall be a minimum floor area of 15m). The following are to be provided to each room:
a)
1 No. "Standard Type" Desk Size 1800mm x 800mm approx. with armchair.
b)
1 No. Credenza size 1000mm x 600mm.
c)
1 No. Table size 2000mm x 1000mm approx. for drawings.
d)
2 No. chairs for visitors.
e)
1 No. Shelved Filing Cabinet.
f)
1 No. Tack boards (fiber board) size 2400mm x 1200mm approx.
g)
Drawing rack capacity 6 holders minimum (5 No. Sets Only in Total).
h)
2 Sets of 3 filing trays.
i)
1 No. bin.
Secretary's Room:
a)
1 room - 12m Area.
b)
1 No. Secretary's desk and chair.

01 June 2016
015213 / 2
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
c)
1 No. Computer side table.
d)
2 No. Chairs for visitors.
e)
2 Sets of 3 filing trays.
f)
1 No. bin.
C.
Corridor: Notice Board: Fiberboard with wood framing overall size 1200mm x 600mm approx.
D.
Conference Room if shown on Design Drawingsor as advised by the ~$architect$, ~for fifteen (15)
Persons (45m floor area)
E.
1.
1 No. Table and Chairs to seat 20 persons.
2.
1 No. Fiber board wall board size 2400mm x 1200mm approx.
3.
1 No. Telephone Table or shelf.
4.
1 No. Bin.
Kitchen
1.
1 No. Refrigerator/ Freezer 256 Liter.
2.
1 No. Waste Bin (plastic with cover).
3.
1 No. Minimum of 1200mm length floor cabinet with stainless steel sink and 1200mm wall cabinet.
4.
1 No. microwave oven.
5.
Crockery, Cutlery, Glassware for coffee and tea making and serving (Max 20 people).
6.
1 No. Kitchen Table (1.5m x 1.5m) & 4 No. Seats.
7.
1 No. Electrical Kettle.
8.
1 No. Water Cooler.
9.
1 No. Vacuum Cleaner.
10. Refrigerator.
F.
G.
Sample Storage and Filing Room

1.
Two (2) Rooms Each 15m Area.
2.
Complete shelving of 30cm. wide and 210cm, high in six tiers covering the whole room perimeter.
3.
One set of three filing trays and one waste paper bin to each room.
4.
2 No. Tables (One per Room) size 2.40m x 2.40m.
Toilets
1.
For male toilet (9m overall):

a)
2.
1 W.C. with flexible hose, toilet roll holder, coat hooks, 1 wash basin with hot and cold water
supplies, 1 towel holder, 1 mirror 60mm x 50mm, 1 urinal.
For female toilet (6m) include the following fixtures:

01 June 2016
015213 / 3
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
a)
H.
Car Parks
1.
2.4
1 Western W.C. with flexible hose, and toilet roll holder, coat hook, 1 wash basin with hot and
cold water supplies, 1 towel holder, 1 mirror 60cm x 50cm.
Shaded car park for a minimum of 12 cars.
CONTRACT ADMINISTRATOR'S OFFICE EQUIPMENT

A.
Contract Administrator's Offices: Provide the following new office equipment items including assembly,
delivery, installation, maintenance and consumables at the Contract Administrator's office within 30 days
of the Date of Commencement. All items shall become the property of the Contractor two months after
Taking-Over except those marked with *.
1.
Photocopier: Provide one (1) heavy duty automatic fast speed photocopier model Toshiba e-Studio
600 Digital Copier, Network Printing and Scanning unit or equivalent, providing A4 and A3 size
copying with document feeder, sorter, collator, stapler, large capacity tray, menu reader.
2.
Fax Machine: Provide one (1) heavy duty Minolta 1600e Fax Machine (telephone, A-4 size) machine
with dedicated M.O.C. telephone lines. Provide table and consumables for Fax Machine.
3.
Computers as required and connected to printers as follows:
4.
a)
HP Dx6120 UT PC.
b)
Intel Pentium-4 @ 3.2 Ghz.
c)
1 GB DDR Memory.
d)
DVD-CDRW Combo Drive.
e)
120 GB Hard Disk Drive.
f)
10/ 100/ 1000 LAN Card.
g)
Integrated VGA.
h)
Integrated Sound.
i)
Ultra Tower Chassis.
j)
17" HP Flat Screen (LCD) Monitor.
k)
HP Keyboard + Mouse.
l)
3 Years HP Standard warranty.
HP 5550n Laser Printer - 1 No. as follows:

a)
Additional A3 Paper Tray.
b)
Ethernet Interface and Category 5 Certified Ethernet Cabling.
c)
Stabilized power supply.
d)
Dust Covers.
5.
Minimum 512 Kbps ADSL Internet Connection.
6.
Scientific Calculators - 4 Nos.
7.
Construction hard hats (ANSI-289.1 1986 Class A) - 10 Nos.

01 June 2016
015213 / 4
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
8.
1 No. Comprehensive first aid kit.
9.
HP LaserJet 2550N - (Color) A4 only without NIC - (1 No.).
10. Digital Cameras: CASIO - Exlim (EX-Z50), 3x optical zoom, 5.0 Mega.
11. Pixels, (1 No.).
12. Safety shoes (10 Nos.).
13. Safety jackets (10 Nos.).
14. External DVD Writer / Sony or equal and approved (USB base).
B.
C.
2.5
Software: Provide the following computer software items latest version with original packing and serial
numbers including delivery, installation and maintenance within 30 days of the Date of Enterprise. All
items shall become the property of the Contractor two months after Taking-Over except those marked
with *.
1.
Additional Client Access License for Windows 2003 Server - 7 Nos*.
2.
Norton Antivirus Corporate 10.0 with 7 User License + Media CD*.
3.
Window XP Arabic/ English (Bilingual) Edition - 7 Nos *.
4.
MS Office Pro OEM Pack Arabic/ English (Bilingual) Edition - 7 Nos*.
5.
AutoCAD 2005 Full Version SLM or latest Version (1 No. copy) *.
Consumables & Office Maintenance throughout Contract Period Plus two (2) Months - Non returnable
to Contractor.
1.
Paper, diskettes for computers and optical jukebox toners, replacement of first aid kit items used,
all other consumables and full maintenance for photocopier, fax, computers and printers.
2.
Stationery items for all members of the supervision staff in accordance with Contract Administrator's
requirements, i.e. files, pens, markers, pads, scales, etc.
SITE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

A.
The Contractor shall supply 3 No. Mobile Phones (Value AED500.00) including Sim Cards and to provide
AED 200.00 prepaid credit per month for each handset for the duration of the project.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
3.2
Fill and grade sites for temporary structures to provide drainage away from buildings.
INSTALLATION
A.
3.3
Install office spaces ready for occupancy within 30 days after Date of Commencement.
MAINTENANCE AND CLEANING
A.
Attendance: Provide power, water, and clean and maintain offices and sheds daily.
B.
Daily janitorial services for offices and sanitary facilities and daily cleaning and maintenance for office
and vehicles.
C.
Maintain and clean etc. offices including equipment and furnishings for construction period plus two
months.

01 June 2016
015213 / 5
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
D.
Maintain approach walks free of mud and water.
E.
Provide delivery service between the Contractor's and Contract Administrator's offices.
F.
The Contractor shall provide one (1) full time office boy for the offices of Contract Administrator. The
said office boy shall be employed by the Contractor for the full duration of the Construction Period and
part of the Defect's Liability Period until all remedial works and the like are completed to the Contract
Administrator's acceptance.
G.
Provide all necessary consumables, i.e. tea, coffee, milk, etc., cleaning materials for offices, kitchen and
toilets, toilet paper, hand towels, etc., in connection with kitchen, toilet, Contract Administrator's staff and
janitorial services for construction period plus two months.
H.
Provide bottled mineral water for complete Contract Administrator's office during construction period plus
two months.
3.4
REMOVAL
A.
At completion of specified period and subject to the Employer's approval remove furniture, buildings,
foundations, utility services and debris. Restore areas.
B.
As a minimum the offices shall be maintained until all work including remedial works, additional works
and testing and commissioning are completed to acceptance of the Contract Administrator.
C.
Obtain Contract Administrator's acceptance to discontinue facilities and services and to remove buildings.
END OF SECTION

01 June 2016
015213 / 6
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
SECTION 015600 -- HOARDING AND SIGNBOARDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
1.2
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1.3
SUBMITTALS
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
DESIGN CRITERIA
2.2
MATERIALS
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
3.2
MAINTENANCE
3.3
REMOVAL

01 June 2016
015600
AECOM Middle East

HOARDING AND SIGNBOARDS

Enabling Works
SECTION 015600 -- HOARDING AND SIGNBOARDS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
Section Includes the provision of hoarding and signboards around the work areas, including the following:
1.2
1.
Installation.
2.
Maintenance.
3.
Removal.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Hoarding and signboards shall be as specified within the Contract documents to completely enclose the
Site and prevent unauthorized persons violating the Site area.
B.
The hoarding and signboards should be positioned to comply with the following requirements:
1.3
1.
To fully enclose the work around the "limit of the contract" lines as indicated in the drawings.Design
Drawings
2.
To provide sufficient and secure access gates as necessary.
3.
To make any adjustments as necessary to suit the various phases of the work and to suit the
Contractor's approved Construction Schedule.
4.
To fully enclose the Project Field Offices and sheds.
5.
To comply with any instructions of the Contract Administrator in accordance with the requirements
of the Contract Documents.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit to the Contract Administrator Shop Drawings under provisions of Section 013300 Submittal
Procedures.
B.
Show layout, details of construction, foundations, sizes and grades of members.
C.
Obtain Contract Administrator acceptance and approvals of Authorities.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Design in accordance with statutory requirements and instructions of the Contract Administrator.
B.
Design fences and signboards to withstand 45m/ sec. wind velocity.
C.
Finish: Adequate to withstand weathering, fading and chipping for duration of project.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
DESIGN CRITERIA
A.
2.2
Refer to Design Drawings for layout and configuration of fences and project signboards.
MATERIALS

01 June 2016
015600 / 1
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
A.
Materials and products shall be as specified within the Contract Documents.

1.
Wood Enclosure Fence: Plywood framed with steel posts and rails and anchored to concrete
pedestals, preservative-treated and painted, and graphic design as necessary, all in accordance
with Design Drawings.
2.
Gate Hardware: Secure locks and bolts to all gates.
3.
Painted galvanized steel signboard on galvanized iron framework and anchored to concrete
foundation, with weatherproof lighting, all in accordance with Design Drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install hoarding and signboards complete before areas of work may commence.
B.
Erect hoarding and signboards in location as accepted by the Contract Administrator.
C.
Erect hoarding and signboards posts and framing on secure foundation, rigidly braced and framed to
resist wind loadings.
D.
Install hoarding and signboards to plumb and level. Anchor securely.
3.2
MAINTENANCE
A.
3.3
Maintain hoarding and signboards including cleaning and repairing deterioration and damages as required
by the Contract Administrator at no extra cost.
REMOVAL
A.
Remove hoarding and signboards at completion of project after getting permission from the Contract
Administrator.
END OF SECTION

01 June 2016
015600 / 2
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
SECTION 020100 -- MAINTENANCE OF EXISTING CONDITIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
1.2
SUBMITTALS
1.3
CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5
PROJECT CONDITIONS
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
DESIGN CRITERIA
2.2
MATERIALS
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
3.2
PREPARATION
3.3
INSTALLATION
3.4
SITE QUALITY CONTROL
3.5
ADJUSTING
3.6
PROTECTION

01 June 2016
020100
AECOM Middle East

MAINTENANCE OF EXISTING CONDITIONS

Enabling Works
SECTION 020100 -- MAINTENANCE OF EXISTING CONDITIONS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
General: Read this Section in conjunction with other related Sections, Employer General Requirements,
the Design Drawings and the Contract Conditions.
1.
The Contractor shall refer to the latest edition of the Standard Specifications issued by Muscat
Municipality, Directorate General of Civil Defense - Royal Oman Police, Public Authority for Electricity
and Water (PAEW), Oman Electricity Transmission Company (OETC), Oman Waste Water Services
Company (Haya), Sultanate of Oman Highway Design Standards, Muscat Electricity Distribution
Company (MEDC), Oman Electricity Transmission Company (OETC), Omantel and all other service
authorities for specification clauses that are not listed hereunder.
2.
Where clauses hereunder are similar to the clauses within the Standard Specifications issued by
the service authorities described in the earlier clause, the more stringent shall apply, provided such
stringent clauses, if within the specification hereunder, fulfill all local conditions and authority
regulations.
Delegated Design Work

1.
Refer to the Contractor's Design Responsibilities in Section 011000 Summary for specific
requirements.
2.
Complete the Detailed Design, manufacture, supply, install and warrant the work, complying with
the visual intent indicated and specified design and performance requirements.
3.
Where no material, product or supplier is specified, propose suitable materials and systems prior
to the Contract Award which comply with the visual intent indicated and specified design and
performance requirements, and be fully responsible for the Detailed Design of the work.
4.
Where a particular material, product or supplier is specified, the material, product or supplier shall
be deemed indicative representing the Contract Administrator's Design Intent only. Complete the
installation using the specified or other product acceptable to the Contract Administrator, in writing.
Be fully responsible for the Detailed Design and performance of the work.
5.
Complete the Detailed Design of all interfaces with adjoining trades prior to commencement of
manufacture.
6.
Ensure that all interfaces are fully coordinated prior to commencement.
Section Includes
1.
Relocation of underground and overhead power cables and ancillary works of utility providers such
as, but not limited to PAEW, MEDC, OEDC and Omantel as shown on Design Drawings.
2.
Protection of underground and overhead power cables and ancillary works of utility providers such
3.
Diversion of underground and overhead power cables and ancillary works of utility providers such
4.
Removal and plugging of abandoned lines.
5.
Connection to existing buried pipelines.
6.
Provision of temporary power from 11kva transformer to site offices and signboard.
7.
Decommissioning of well situated within the plot area.
8.
Removal and relocation of billboards located within the site area.

01 June 2016
020100 / 1
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
D.
Definitions
1.
1.2
Class C Concrete is defined as 'lean concrete'. Refer to Section 033000 Cast-in-Place Concrete
for further information.
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Comply with the requirements of the Employer General Requirements and submit the following.
B.
Shop Drawings
1.
General: Review and comments by the Contract Administrator on the Shop Drawings shall not
relieve the Contractor of the full responsibility for all protection and precautions against damages
of utilities or services during execution of the Work and all requirements as required by all Contract
Documents.
2.
Prepare and furnish all necessary Shop Drawings of the permanent or temporary Work required to
complete the adjustment to finished grade or level. The Shop Drawings must be approved by the
government departments, utility agencies and their designated consultants and reviewed by the
Contract Administrator.
3.
Prepare Shop Drawings for utility protection work and obtain the approval of the government
departments, utility agencies and their designated consultants before commencing with construction
work.
4.
Prepare Shop Drawings for services reservation areas relocation scope and protective housing
work and obtain approval from the government departments, utility agencies and their designated
consultants before commencing this work.
C.
Grout Mix Design and Method Statement: Submit proposed grout mix design and proposed method
statement of grouting the pipes.
D.
Refer to Section 312300 Excavation and Fill for all statutory authority procedures to be implemented for
this Section.
1.3
CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A.
General: Comply with the requirements of the Employer General Requirements.
B.
A final inspection shall be carried out following the conclusion of the construction project. The Contractor
shall, with the approval of the Employer, engage an independent structural assessor to carry out the
required measures for the preservation of existing structures and civil engineering work in the vicinity of
the Site. The following shall be present at the scheduled dates for the preservation:
1.4
1.
The independent structural assessor.
2.
The Employer.
3.
The legitimate rights holder or where appropriate, the lease holder, or tenant and the owners in the
case of plots that are not the property of the Employer.
4.
A representative of the relevant authority in the case of public facilities.
5.
Each of the parties concerned shall receive 1 No. copy of an assessment report, and the Employer
shall receive 2 No. copies.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
References
1.
Obtain the latest version of the directive or instructions issued by the government departments,
utility agencies and their designated consultants regarding the process for submitting Notice of Intent.
a)

01 June 2016
Comply with the Notice of Intent requirements of the government departments, utility agencies
and their designated consultants and as specified in this Section.
020100 / 2
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
B.
1.5
Comply with the local law and provisions of the Specification concerning the safety and protection of
utility lines.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
The locations of all existing service facilities including but not limited to all utility or service vaults, valve
boxes, manholes, inlets and joining boxes may not be indicated on the Design Drawings. Uncover and
verify the existence and locations of such utility facilities by manual excavation.
B.
Pipelines shall be indicated on the Shop Drawings, but the right is reserved for the Employer, acting
through the Contract Administrator, to make such modifications in locations as may be found desirable
to avoid interference with existing utilities.
C.
Existing condition of neighboring structures and civil engineering work shall be inspected for cracks and
other damage and these are to be documented and photographed as part of the preservation of evidence.
This applies to the surrounding terrain, road and street network, existing utilities, as well as other facilities
such as masts, etc.
D.
For adjacent newer buildings, the relevant as-built documentation can be sourced independently. Should
documentation not be available, and also for older buildings, a walk-through of the cellars and where
necessary, an exploratory trial pit along the exterior walls shall be required.
E.
Ascertain the type of foundation (flat or deep) and substructure (pile, single, strip or slab) for the adjacent
buildings with the help of exploratory trial pits. The type of building materials and their condition (cracked,
offset, tilted) must also be determined.
F.
Where necessary, neighboring structures shall be reinforced by way of underpinnings, etc. Foundation
details to adjoining buildings may not be necessarily available and the actual conditions must be explored
by the Contractor.
G.
Verify that field measurements are as indicated on the Design Drawings.
H.
Where necessary, neighboring structures shall be reinforced through underpinnings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A.
Protecting Existing Services

1.
General: At all times during which the services have to be protected, the Contractor shall fully coordinate with the relevant service authority, and comply with the latest specifications issued by such
authorities such as, but not limited to, protection measures and procedures.
2.
Description: Protection of above and below grade services/ utilities during the execution of the works
to ensure no disruption or failure of the provided utility/ service.
3.
The locations of all existing service facilities including, but not limited to all utility pipelines, cables,
service vaults, valve boxes, manholes, inlets and joining boxes may not be indicated on the Design
Drawings. Verify the existence and locations of such utility facilities by manual excavation. Refer to
the requirements of Section 023219 Exploratory Excavations.
4.
Confirm all temporary and/ or permanent protection works for each service/ utility for the duration
of the enabling works and ensure health and safety compliance for all Site operatives, visitors and
other parties who may be affected by the undertaking of the works.
5.
Pipelines shall be indicated on the Shop Drawings, but the right is reserved for the Employer, acting
through the Contract Administrator, to make such modifications in locations as may be found
desirable to avoid interference with existing utilities.
6.
Obtain the approval of the government departments, utility agencies and their designated
consultants before commencing with construction work.
7.
Submit proposed grout mix design and proposed Method Statement of grouting the pipes.
8.
Except as indicated, or as specifically authorized by the Contract Administrator or where existing

utilities must be removed, reconstruct utilities with new material of the same size, type, and quality
as that being removed.

01 June 2016
020100 / 3
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
9.
Provide all new utility installations or alterations in accordance with government departments, utility
agencies and their designated consultants' requirements.
10. Where indicated on the Design Drawings or directed by the Contract Administrator, the Contractor
shall remove and cap abandoned utility and service lines as directed and accepted by the Contract
Administrator. The method of capping the lines shall comply with the requirements of the government
departments, utility agencies and their designated consultants and the Contract Administrator.
B.
C.
Protecting Existing Buildings

1.
Description: Protection of existing structures, or structures completed prior to or during the

undertaking of ground works.
2.
For adjacent newer buildings, the relevant as-built documentation can be sourced independently.
Should documentation not be available, and also for older buildings, a walk-through of the cellars
and where necessary, an exploratory trial pit along the exterior walls shall be required.
3.
Ascertain the type of foundation (flat or deep) and substructure (pile, single, strip or slab) for the
adjacent buildings with the help of exploratory trial pits. The type of building materials, and their
condition (cracked, offset, tilted) must also be determined.
4.
Where necessary, neighboring structures shall be reinforced by way of underpinnings. Foundation

details to adjoining buildings may not be necessarily available and the actual conditions must be
explored by the Contractor.
5.
The Contractor shall, with the approval of the Employer, engage an independent structural assessor
to carry out the required measures for the preservation of existing structures and civil engineering
work in the vicinity of the Site. The following shall be present at the scheduled dates for the
preservation:
a)
The independent structural assessor.
b)
The Employer.
c)
The legitimate rights holder or where appropriate, the lease holder, or tenant and the owners
in the case of plots that are not the property of the Employer.
d)
A representative of the relevant authority in the case of public facilities.
e)
Each of the parties concerned shall receive 1 No. copy of the report, and the Employer shall
receive 2 No. copies.
Relocation of Existing Services

1.
General: At all times during the relocation operations the Contractor shall fully co-ordinate with the
relevant service authority, and comply with the latest specifications issued by such authorities such
as, but not limited to, materials and installation procedures.
2.
Description: Dismantling, relocating and recommissioning of existing services as indicated on the

Design Drawings that comprise of, but not limited to, the following:
a)
Underground 11 kV cables and trenches including markers and all necessary accessories.
b)
11 kV overhead transmission lines including poles and pole mounted transformers.
c)
Underground 33 kV cables and trenches including markers and all necessary accessories.
d)
Underground low voltage cables and trenches including markers and all necessary
accessories.
e)
Underground fiber optic cables and trenches including manholes, ducts, cabinets and all
necessary accessories.
f)
Telecommunication ducts, manholes, trenches and other ancillaries.

01 June 2016
020100 / 4
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
g)
3.
2.1
Telecommunication cabinets.
The Contractor shall provide full surveying of the works and provide detailed Method Statements
confirming the following:
a)
Condition of existing components and suitability to be removed and reused in new locations.
b)
Method or removal and reinstatement works.
c)
Details of all required works to enable removal, relocation and recommissioning.
d)
Details of all new components required to restore full function of the works in their new locations.
e)
Lists of tests to be undertaken.
4.
Agree with the Contract Administrator the warranty requirements for any new components.
5.
Following the acceptance of the works and successful demonstration to the Contract Administrator
of the full and correct function, the Contractor shall be responsible for any subsequent failure of the
works or component of for a period as stipulated in the contract conditions after handing over.
6.
Arrange for all temporary and permanent works required for the relocation of each system.
DESIGN CRITERIA
A.
2.2
General
1.
Refer also to the requirements of Section 024100 Demolition and Site Clearing, Section 312300
Site Grading - Excavation and Fill, Section 312333 Trenching and Backfill and Section 333113
Public Sanitary Utility Sewage Systems for material, performance and best practice requirements
of associated works required in the execution of these protection and relocation works.
2.
Inspect existing condition of neighboring structures and civil engineering work for cracks and other
damage. Findings are to be documented and photographed as part of the preservation of evidence.
This applies to the surrounding terrain, road and street network, existing utilities, as well as other
facilities such as masts.
3.
Verify that field measurements are as indicated on the Design Drawings.
4.
Where any utility or service vaults shall be constructed under a separate contract by the government
departments, utility agencies and their designated consultants on the Site and concurrent with the
execution of the Work, cooperate with the other separate contractors and coordinate the construction
operations to avoid interference with the other contractors' operations.
MATERIALS
A.
Except as indicated or as specifically authorized by the Contract Administrator where existing utilities
must be removed, reconstruct utilities with new material of the same size, type, and quality as that
removed, provide all new utility installations in accordance with government departments, utility agencies
and their designated consultants' requirements.
B.
Refer to trench crossing condition indicated on the Design Drawings.
C.
If indicated within the regulations of government departments, utility agencies and their designated
consultants, provide acceptable materials to perform connections to existing buried pipelines.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Test Pits: Excavate test pits to field verify the locations, depth of bury, diameter, and pipe material of
existing underground utilities at crossings and at tie-in points before ordering materials or commencing
excavation. Immediately notify the Contract Administrator if conflicts are encountered.

01 June 2016
020100 / 5
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
B.
3.2
Connections to Existing Buried Pipelines

1.
Line Stopping: Expose the existing pipeline and determine the pipe wall thickness prior to ordering
the line stop materials. If wall thickness cannot be visually ascertained, utilize pipe thickness testing
using ultrasonic technology.
2.
Tapping: Expose the existing pipeline to be tapped. Verify material of construction and outside
diameter prior to ordering tapping materials.
PREPARATION
A.
Where utilities are parallel to or across the work area, but do not conflict with work, notify the government
departments, utility agencies and their designated consultants in advance of construction at the crossing.
Coordinate the construction schedule with the government departments, utility agencies and their
designated consultants' requirements for this condition.
B.
Coordinate connection work to existing buried pipelines to be performed at the pipeline with personnel
from the government departments, utility agencies and their designated consultants.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Compaction: Loadbearing Areas. The Contractor shall carry out compaction of loadbearing areas as
specified in the following procedure. The procedure outlined below shall not relieve the Contractor of his
duties to determine the most suitable procedure for compaction and all such procedures shall be subject
to the acceptance of the Contract Administrator.
1.
Existing loadbearing subgrade which does not have a minimum soaked CBR value of 5 when
compacted to a maximum dry density of 95% for a minimum depth of 450mm below the top of the
finished subgrade shall be removed and replaced with loadbearing borrow material.
2.
Existing loadbearing subgrade which has a soaked CBR value of 5 or greater but less than 10 when
compacted to a maximum dry density of 95% for a minimum depth of 300mm below the top of the
finished subgrade shall be removed and replaced with loadbearing borrow material.
3.
When loadbearing borrow is required and after carrying out the grading, leveling, scarifying,
pulverizing, and other required work of the fill layer to be compacted in accordance with the
Specification, add the necessary amount of water to permeate the pulverized fill in the quantity
required, all in accordance with the directions of the Contract Administrator.
4.
The fill shall then be thoroughly turned over after adding each lot of water so as to achieve a
homogeneous moisture content in the whole thickness of the layer.
5.
After Fill Testing: In the event that the testing reading is more than Optimum Moisture Content, the
area of subgrade on the Site represented by the tested sample shall be scarified and aerated until
the moisture content is within -2% and +4% of the Optimum Moisture Content. The fill shall then
be primarily leveled in order to commence fill compaction.
6.
After primary leveling referred to above, continue compaction by means of accepted rollers
depending on the type of material being compacted in order to obtain the required density. Placement
of borrow materials or fills shall be in layers not exceeding 150mm compacted thickness.
7.
The rolling shall be carried out in the direction of the road axis until the fill reaches the required
density. In crowned sections, rolling shall start from both edges of the road in the direction of the
axis. If the road is super-elevated, rolling shall commence from the lower side and continue to the
higher side. In order to compensate for the amount of water lost in evaporation in the course of
compaction, additional quantities of water shall be added as required.
8.
Thereafter, the surface shall be leveled longitudinally and transversely by motor graders and finally
rolled to achieve uniform compaction free from undulations, soft spots and depressions all in
compliance with the allowable tolerances for evenness of surfaces.
9.
Compaction of sloped sections of the road fills and drainage ditches shall be carried out as specified
in this Section with regard to pulverization of fill, addition of the necessary water, shaping, and
compaction to the required degree of compaction and the required design sections.
10. Provide all machinery, equipment and attachments required for the effective and efficient shaping
and compaction of these sloped sections.
01 June 2016
020100 / 6
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
B.
Placement, Non-loadbearing Areas: Non-loadbearing borrow material shall be placed in 150mm lifts
and shall be free of voids, lumps, undulations and depressions.
C.
Connections to Existing Buried Pipelines, Line Stopping
3.4
1.
Install concrete and support thrust blocks before installing the temporary pressure tapping machinery
and valve.
2.
Dispose of water/ sewer and existing pipeline at no additional cost to the Contract Price.
3.
Carry out line stopping work with end caps or in accordance with the requirements of government
departments, utility agencies and their designated consultants.

A.
Fill Testing: Before compacting, samples from the pulverized fill shall be taken and tested in the laboratory
in order to establish the natural moisture content.
1.
B.
3.5
Note field testing using "Speedy Moisture Device" or similar instruments giving direct readings for
the field moisture content may be used for guidance only.
Compaction Testing, Fill Material: When tested in place, borrow material for loadbearing area shall have
a minimum density, in percentage of maximum dry density, of 95% with a minimum CBR of 25 to a
minimum depth of 300mm below the top of subgrade or to the top of the accepted compacted existing
subgrade which shall have a minimum CBR of 10, unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Design
Drawings or directed by the Contract Administrator.
ADJUSTING
A.
Repair: If existing utilities that shall be retained are damaged, immediately notify government departments,
utility agencies and their designated consultants, and repair to the department's, agencies' and
consultants' satisfaction in addition to the Contract Administrator's acceptance.
B.
Connections to Existing Buried Pipelines, Line Stopping: Repair any damage that occurs to fittings,
accessories, or existing pipeline.
3.6
PROTECTION
A.
General, Existing Utilities: Protect utilities in place, unless abandoned, and maintain the utility in service,
unless otherwise indicated on the Design Drawings or specified in this Section. During construction
activities, use all necessary precautionary and protective measures required to maintain existing utilities,
services and appurtenances that must be kept in operation as may be required due to the construction
operations.
1.
In particular, take adequate measures to prevent undermining of utilities and services currently in
service.
2.
Permanent protection of certain items shall be required if necessary in accordance with the Site
conditions.
3.
Where indicated on the Design Drawings or directed by the Contract Administrator, the Contractor
shall remove and cap abandoned utility and service lines as directed and accepted by the Contract
Administrator. The method of capping the lines shall comply with the requirements of the government
departments, utility agencies and their designated consultants and the Contract Administrator.
4.
Where indicated on the Design Drawings or directed by the Contract Administrator, abandoned
utility and service lines shall be completely filled by pressure grouting.
a)

01 June 2016
The grout shall have a 28 day compressive strength in excess of 5N/ mm and volumetric
shrinkage shall be less than 2%. No grouting shall commence until the Contract Administrator's
acceptance has been obtained regarding grout mix design and method statement for pipe
grouting by the Contractor.
020100 / 7
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
B.
5.
Do not remove any utility or service line, conduit or any structures, above or below the ground,
within the limits of the Work until written permission has been received from the government
departments, utility agencies and their designated consultants of the supply or service and submit
the written permission to the Contract Administrator for acknowledgment and acceptance prior to
commencing removal work.
6.
Adjust to finished grade or level all items including but not limited to existing utility or service vaults,
valve boxes, manholes, inlets and joining boxes within the limits of the Contract.
7.
Service Reservation Areas: Carry out work in accordance with government departments, utility
agencies and their designated consultants' requirements.
a)
Relocate certain utilities to services reservation areas as indicated on the Design Drawings
and as specified under other Sections of the Specification.
b)
This work may only include the construction of necessary protective housing, including but not
limited to box culverts, slabs and concrete encased sleeves, in the services reservation areas
for utility lines to be relocated.
General, New Utilities: Protect new utilities and services where required by the construction operations
and as directed by the Contract Administrator. Assume responsibility for bracing and supporting utilities
and services to prevent their settlement, displacement or damage.
1.
The adjustment to the new finished grade or level of any existing service facilities such as utility or
service vaults, valve boxes, joining boxes and similar structures occurring in pavement or sidewalks
or similar areas shall be adjusted in accordance with the requirements of government departments,
utility agencies and their designated consultants and relocated inlet, manhole and service facility
requirements indicated in the Specification.
2.
Where any utility or service vaults shall be constructed under a separate contract by the government
departments, utility agencies and their designated consultants on the Site and concurrent with the
execution of the Work, cooperate with the other separate contractors and coordinate the construction
operations to avoid interference with the other contractors' operations.
3.
All the new utilities should be laid in accordance with government departments, utility agencies and
their designated consultants' requirements.
END OF SECTION

01 June 2016
020100 / 8
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
SECTION 024100 -- DEMOLITION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
1.2
SUBMITTALS
1.3
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
3.2
DEMOLITION
3.3
ADJUSTING
3.4
PROTECTION

01 June 2016
024100
AECOM Middle East

DEMOLITION

Enabling Works
SECTION 024100 -- DEMOLITION

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
Section Includes
1.2
1.
The removal of existing structures, sidewalk/ pavement, curbs, walks, walls, foundations and other
obstructions existing at Site, and shall be as specified in this Section and as may be required to
complete the Work under the Contract.
2.
All operations needed for the demolition and disposal work as required and specified in this Section,
including breaking, loading, hauling and dumping in accordance with the provisions of the Contract,
shall be deemed to be included in the Tender.
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Comply with the requirements of Employer General Requirements.
B.
Shop Drawings: The Contractor shall prepare Shop Drawings for the existing structures at Site, and
submit description and method statement for their demolition.
C.
Demolition Plan: Submit drawings to a proper scale. Include description of sequence, methods and
equipment used for demolition, including disposal.
D.
Letter: Provide letter verifying survey marker reestablishment on Site.
1.3
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
Reference Standards: Coordinate and comply with the requirements of the Demolition Department
Section of the local Municipality prior to commencing the demolition work.
1.5

A.
Storage
1.
Salvage: Store material and equipment to be salvaged or relocated as directed by the Contract
Administrator.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Survey Markers
1.
Store removed markers during demolition work and replace upon completion of work.
2.
Reestablish survey markers in conformance with recorded reference points. Forward letter to
Contract Administrator, verifying reestablishment of survey markers.

01 June 2016
024100 / 1
AECOM Middle East

DEMOLITION

Enabling Works
B.
Burning of demolition debris shall be prohibited.
C.
Immediately upon award of the Contract and prior to the wrecking of any structures, paint or stencil the
following sign in Arabic and English, appropriately spaced and with stacked text. The sign shall have
contrasting colors of an oil or lead-based paint. Install on all 4 sides of residences and on 2 opposite
sides of other structures indicated on the Design Drawings.
1.
BUILDING TO BE DEMOLISHED - KEEP AWAY

a)
D.
The signs shall be positioned in a prominent location on the structure to ensure that they can
be seen and read easily, and at a sufficient height to prevent defacing.
Do not cause any undue damage to existing sidewalk/ pavement, utilities, structures and appurtenances.
1.
Provide temporary work for protection when necessary and so required and in all cases assume
responsibility for any damage resulting from any carelessness or negligence. Carry out temporary
work for the purposes of protection and safety, at the Contractor's expenses.
E.
Protect existing structures, equipment and appurtenances that remain prior to demolition work
commencement.
F.
Where fences, boundaries, tarmac, foundations and other obstructions have to be demolished, coordinate
and comply with Demolition Department Section requirements of the local Municipality prior to
commencing the work.
G.
The Demolition Department Section of the local Municipality may require a minimum period of advance
notice before any obstruction is cleared. Upon demolition of the obstruction, the Contractor must occupy
the Site immediately.
H.
Comply with all local laws regarding the demolition, clearing and occupying of a cleared Site.
I.
The Contractor shall provide all necessary assistance to the Demolition Department Section of the local
Municipality for inspections.
J.
Obtain permission from the Contract Administrator before abandoning or removing existing structures,
materials, equipment, and appurtenances.
K.
Provide all safety measures in areas where demolition work shall be performed and as directed by the
L.
Maintain circulation of traffic within the area at all times during demolition operations.
M.
Make necessary arrangements and perform all necessary work required by government departments,
utility agencies, and their designated utility consultants for discontinuance or interruption of utility services
due to demolition work.
N.
Confine apparatus, storage of materials, demolition work, new construction, and operations of workmen
to areas that will not interfere with continued use and operation of entire facility. Provide and maintain
lights, barriers, and temporary passageways for free and safe access.
O.
Upon receipt of notification by the Contract Administrator, take over all responsibility of the acquired and
vacant building or buildings and proceed with the removal thereof as specified in the Specification.
P.
Inspect each building designated for removal and determine for the work scope involved and the
equipment and the materials required for such demolition work.
Q.
Provide shoring or bracing where necessary to prevent settlement or displacement of existing or new
structures.
3.2
DEMOLITION
A.
The Contractor shall arrange for the discontinuance of all utility services that serve the building or buildings
in accordance with the respective requirements and regulations of the government departments, utility
agencies and their designated utility consultants.

01 June 2016
024100 / 2
AECOM Middle East

DEMOLITION

Enabling Works
1.
Disconnect and properly seal, in a manner acceptable to the government departments, utility
agencies and their designated utility consultants and the Contract Administrator, all sewer outlets
that serve any building or buildings that are designated for removal. Inform the Contract Administrator
of the proposed plan for the performance of any work in connection with the sealing off of such
outlets in order that proper inspection may be provided at the time that the work is performed on Site.
B.
Demolish and remove existing construction, utilities, equipment, and appurtenances that are shown on
Design Drawings, and as required by the Contract Administrator.
C.
Demolition and removal of existing structures shall include the slaughter house boundary wall.
D.
Assume responsibility for removing any additional small "out" buildings or miscellaneous structures which
have not been indicated on the Design Drawings. Alert the Contract Administrator regarding any
discovered buildings and structures and obtain acceptance prior to commencing demolition work.
E.
Conduct demolition operations in such a manner as to avoid hazard to persons and vehicles. After work
is started on any building, the work on that building shall be continued to completion, promptly and
expeditiously.
F.
Protect persons and property throughout progress of work. Provide safe working conditions for personnel.
G.
Wet down work during demolition operations to prevent dust arising. Minimize spread of dust and airborne
particles.
H.
Unless otherwise indicated on the Design Drawings or directed by the Contract Administrator, complete
the demolition and removal of buildings and structures together with all foundations and retaining walls,
piers, partitions and columns down to the proposed ultimate grade level in the area for the main works.
1.
Walls shall be broken into pieces not exceeding 6000mm for any area of surface.
2.
Basement floor slabs shall be broken and displaced into pieces not exceeding 6000mm for any
area of surface and shall be left in place when acceptable to the Contract Administrator.
I.
Complete demolition work on upper levels before disturbing supporting members on lower levels.
J.
Provide for the removal and disposal of debris, the removal of all other foundations, concrete floor slabs,
sidewalks, signs, sheds, garages and fences and all other incidental and collateral work necessary to
fully complete the removal of the buildings and appurtenances.
K.
Concrete slabs resting on earth and forming walks, driveways, or the first floor slabs of buildings without
basements except as indicated on the Design Drawings shall be broken up and removed from the Site.
L.
Remove and dispose of existing underground storage tanks on the Site or within the buildings. Take all
necessary precautions during the removal of the fluid within the tanks and the removal of the existing
tanks in accordance with local Municipality requirements.
M.
Cap or plug with concrete pipes and other conduits which are abandoned in place.
N.
Removed materials, equipment, and appurtenances, not designated for relocation, become the property
of the Contractor and shall be disposed of off Site and in accordance with Employer General
Requirements.
3.3
ADJUSTING
A.
3.4
Restoration: Repair damaged items or remove items that are damaged beyond repair. Repair and install
damaged items to a condition at least equal to that which existed prior to start of work.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect salvaged items from damage during work.

END OF SECTION

01 June 2016
024100 / 3
AECOM Middle East

DEMOLITION
Rev T2

Enabling Works
SECTION 031100 -- CONCRETE FORMING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
1.2
SUBMITTALS
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
DESIGN CRITERIA
2.2
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
2.3
MATERIALS
2.4
FABRICATION
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
3.2
PREPARATION
3.3
INSTALLATION
3.4
REMOVAL OF FORMWORK
3.5
REUSE OF FORMS
3.6
SHORING AND RESHORING
3.7
3.8
CLEANING

01 June 2016
031100
AECOM Middle East

CONCRETE FORMING

Enabling Works
SECTION 031100 -- CONCRETE FORMING

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
Section Includes
1.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Post Contract Submittals

1.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate the following:

a)
Formwork and temporary work details. Fittings, features, associated formwork and temporary
work for installation shall be included. Typical details shall not be accepted.
b)
All interfaces particularly in respect to corner junctions, services and interfaces with other
Trades.
c)
Proposed day joint locations and details of proposed methods of construction for agreement
with the Contract Administrator
2.
Calculations: Include design calculations indicating arrangement of forms, sizes and grades of
supports (lumber), panels, and related components. Furnish drawings and calculations of shoring
and re-shoring methods proposed for floor and roof slabs, spandrel beams and other horizontal
concrete members.
3.
Formwork design data, such as permissible rate of concrete placement and temperature of concrete
in forms.
4.
Method Statement: Provide for the following:

a)
Cranes or Other Construction Equipment: Include details of crane and any other construction
equipment which shall be used to erect formwork and place concrete and method for
dismantling and removal of crane and other construction equipment upon Completion of Work.
b)
Earth Forms: Method and sequence of erection and stripping of earth forms.
c)
Formwork: Method and sequence of erection and stripping of formwork, falsework, shoring
and reshoring.
5.
Quality Control Procedures.
6.
Material Certificates: For form materials and form-release agents, signed by manufacturers.
Post Contract Samples

1.
1.3
Formwork for cast-in place concrete.
Representative samples of the materials proposed to be used for temporary and permanent
formwork, including ties passing through the concrete when recommended to be used by the
Contractor, to the acceptance of the Contract Administrator.
QUALITY ASSURANCE

01 June 2016
031100 / 1
AECOM Middle East

CONCRETE FORMING

Enabling Works
A.
Standards, General: All Building Codes, Industry Standard specifications and applicable by-laws referred
to in the Specification shall be the current published editions including all latest revisions, amendments,
addendums and additions.
1.
Refer to all relevant ASTM International and ACI Standards for this Section of work. Where there
is no relevant ASTM or ACI standard, the Contractor shall make reference to the relevant British
Standard.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
DESIGN CRITERIA
A.
Refer to the Design Drawings for the size and shape of forms.
B.
Unless otherwise specified or agreed, the faces of formwork for all finish types shall have a uniform
texture and a matt (not a shiny or polished) surface finish. The edges of the formwork shall be straight,
square and sealed at the edges.
C.
Select formwork materials to provide the required finish and to meet the standards specified herein.
Regular shuttering layout based upon sheets of plywood centered on columns shall be submitted to the
Contract Administrator for acceptance. No more than 1 No. knot replacement in any 300mm x 300mm
area shall occur. The plywood or other substrate shall be subject to acceptance and from one source
throughout the work.
2.2
A.
Formwork, including supports, shall be sufficiently rigid to maintain the forms in their correct position and
to correct shape and profile ensuring that the final concrete structure is within the limits of the dimensional
tolerances specified. The supports shall be designed to withstand the worst combination of self weight,
formwork weight, formwork forces, reinforcement weight, wet concrete weight, construction loads and
wind loads, together with all incidental dynamic effects caused by placing, vibrating and compacting the
concrete. Refer to Section 033000 Cast-in-Place Concrete where applicable.
B.
Formwork shall be arranged in such a manner that it can be readily dismantled and removed from the
cast concrete without shock, disturbance or damage. Where necessary, the formwork shall be arranged
that the soffit form, properly supported by shoring, can be retained in position for such period as may be
required by maturing conditions or the Specification.
C.
Formwork shall be provided with suitable means of access and safety guard-rails for operatives working
above ground.
D.
In addition to the above, formwork shall be provided to the top surface of concrete where the slope or
the nature of the work requires.
E.
Provisions shall be made for forming holes and chases for services and for building in pipes, conduits
and other fastenings indicated on the Design Drawings and Shop Drawings.
F.
Where conditions arise and it is necessary to position ties to pass through the concrete, these conditions
shall be reviewed with the Contract Administrator prior to implementation. Where part of a metal tie
remains embedded in the concrete it shall not have less cover than the reinforcement. Any holes left
after the removal of ties shall be filled with concrete or mortar to the acceptance of the Contract
Administrator.
2.3
MATERIALS
A.
Formwork, General
1.
Temporary formwork shall be constructed from materials to the acceptance of the Contract
Administrator prior to implementation.
2.
Formwork shall be wood, metal, plastic or other material which shall produce the specified finish.
3.
Steel formwork for the construction of exposed exterior walls shall be insulated and in place at least
7 days.

01 June 2016
031100 / 2
AECOM Middle East

CONCRETE FORMING

Enabling Works
B.
C.
4.
Plywood for formwork shall have a close, uniform grain and the edges shall be sealed with barrier
paint, polyurethane varnish or other impermeable material.
5.
Formwork shall not have any splits, cracks or other defects. The faces and edges of formwork shall
be clean and formwork faces shall be free of projecting nails.
6.
Formwork which has been previously used shall be repaired and the edges resealed before it is
erected. Formwork which in the opinion of the Contract Administrator has deteriorated to an extent
such that it will not produce the specified finish shall not be used. Formwork faces shall be cleaned
before release agents are applied. Concrete, reinforcement and built-in components shall not be
contaminated by release agents.
7.
Formwork ties and components shall be a type such that any removable part can be removed
without damaging the concrete; any part left in the concrete shall be at least 40mm or the specified
nominal cover to the reinforcement, whichever is greater, from the concrete surface.
8.
Form stripping agents shall be a colorless mineral and free of kerosene.
Smooth Forms: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces.
Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.
1.
Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.
2.
Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1, and as
follows:
a)
High-density overlay, Class 1 or better.
b)
Medium-density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill-release agent treated and edge sealed.
c)
Structural 1, B-B or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.
d)
B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1 or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.
Rough Forms: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material.

1.
Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
2.
Provide lumber that is square edged or tongue-and-groove boards, free of raised grain, knotholes,
or other surface defects.
D.
Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 19mm by 19mm, minimum.
E.
Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal.
F.
Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated, chemically active release agents containing compounds
that react with free lime in concrete resulting in water insoluble soaps.
1.
2.
G.
Form-release agent shall have the following characteristics:

a)
Shall not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces.
b)
Shall not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.
c)
Shall not affect the bond between the concrete and subsequent coverings.
d)
Shall not affect the hardening of the concrete.
Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.
Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties
designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on
removal.

01 June 2016
031100 / 3
AECOM Middle East

CONCRETE FORMING

Enabling Works
H.
2.4
1.
Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 25mm to the plane of exposed concrete
surface.
2.
Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 25mm in diameter in concrete
surface.
3.
Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive damp-proofing or
waterproofing.
Earth Forms
1.
Hand trim sides and bottoms and remove loose earth from excavations before placing concrete.
2.
Reinforced concrete footings shall have plywood side forms unless otherwise indicated by the
FABRICATION
A.
B.
General
1.
Formwork panels for all finishes shall be the same size unless otherwise specified and shall form
a regular pattern consented to by the Contract Administrator. Size and layout shall be in accordance
with the Design Drawings.
2.
Unless otherwise permitted by the Contract Administrator, chamfers shall be provided for all exterior
angles of 90 or less in concrete surfaces with plain or fine finishes as indicated on the Design
Drawings.
3.
Formwork for curved concrete surfaces shall not be made up of a series of facets, unless indicated
on the Design Drawings.
4.
Unless otherwise specified or accepted, use matt finish forms with uniform texture. Edges shall be
true, straight, square and sealed.
5.
For regular shuttering, center formwork panels on centerlines of columns.
6.
Select formwork panels with maximum 1 No. knot replacement for every 300mm x 300mm area.
7.
Fabricate formworks and molds watertight and to withstand the weight and pressure of the concrete
during placing and vibrating, and to withstand heat stresses during hydration.
Molds
1.
Use molds for curved or circular shapes producing finishes to match adjacent work. Provide molds
for repetitive use as applicable. Molds shall have uniform visible faces.
2.
Accurately construct molds to dimensions indicated on the Design Drawings, with exposed faces
flat or to the required profile, and without visible joints.
3.
Provide molds that permit de-molding without damage to the units.
4.
Do not use through-ties to support the faces of the mold.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verification of Conditions
1.
Prior to commencing installation, examine adjacent construction and conditions in which the Work
shall be installed.
2.
Examine the excavation and foundations for adequate working room and support for the Work of
this Section.

01 June 2016
031100 / 4
AECOM Middle East

CONCRETE FORMING

Enabling Works
3.
Notify the Contract Administrator of unsatisfactory conditions.
B.
Check field dimensions before beginning installation. If dimensions vary too much from design dimensions
for proper installation, notify the Contract Administrator and wait for instructions before beginning
installation.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Forms shall be shaded from the sun for a minimum of 3 hours before concrete is poured.
B.
Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt and other
debris just before placing concrete.
C.
Treat formwork with release agent in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Protect
concrete reinforcement from contamination by release agent.
D.
Release Agents
1.
Release agents shall be a proprietary type to the acceptance of the Contract Administrator. Barrier
paint, polyurethane varnish, wax or other materials shall not be used instead of a release agent.
2.
Release agents used on steel formwork shall contain a rust-inhibiting agent.
E.
Use 25mm chamfer strips on exterior corners and/ or 25mm fillets at interior corners of concrete members,
joints, unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Form chases, slots, openings, drips, recesses, expansion and control joints as indicated on the Design
Drawings.
G.
Construct forms for architectural concrete, and place ties as indicated and/ or as directed. Joint pattern
shall not necessarily be based on utilizing standard size panels or maximum permissible spacing of ties.
H.
Build in anchors, sleeves, and other inserts required to accommodate work specified in other Sections.
Assure that all anchors and inserts do not protrude beyond surfaces designated to receive applied
finishes, including painting.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Erect, shore, brace and maintain formwork in accordance with ACI 347 and ACI 301, to support vertical,
lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support
such loads.
B.
Accurately construct formwork, shoring and bracing to meet the design requirements ensuring that the
resultant finished concrete conform to the shapes, lines and dimensions of the members indicated on
the Shop Drawings within the tolerances stipulated in this Section, and within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
C.
Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.
D.
Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush
or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined
surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.
1.
Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.
2.
Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.
E.
Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and
slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off
templates or compacting-type screeds.
F.
Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is
inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of
concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.

01 June 2016
031100 / 5
AECOM Middle East

CONCRETE FORMING

Enabling Works
G.
Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain
proper alignment.
H.
Camber: Make allowances for any deflection of formwork that is likely to arise due to the weight and
pressure of fresh concrete and due to construction loads, ensuring that the hardened concrete conforms
to the specified line and level. Refer to General Notes requirements within the Design Drawings for all
camber requirements to beams and slabs.
3.4
REMOVAL OF FORMWORK
A.
General: Formwork for sides of concrete members that do not support weight of concrete may be removed
after cumulatively curing at not less than 10C for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be
hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and curing and protection operations need
to be maintained.
1.
Do not remove forms, shores and bracing until the concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry
its own weight.
2.
Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that supports weight
of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 70% of its 28-day design compressive
strength.
3.
Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or
disturbing shores.
B.
For structural concrete made with Portland cement only, on the absence of control cubes the period
before striking shall be in accordance with the requirements of ACI 318M and the relevant ASTM standard.
No formwork shall be removed less than 24 hours after concreting unless curing can be applied
immediately to the exposed concrete surface.
C.
Where the concrete compressive strength is confirmed by tests on concrete cubes stored under conditions
that simulate the field conditions, formwork supporting concrete in bending may be struck when the cube
strength is 20 N/ mm or three times the stress to which the concrete in bending shall be subjected,
whichever is the greater. The stress shall be determined using an elastic method and shall be based on
the nominal loads at the stage under consideration.
D.
Shorings to cantilevers shall not be removed before the counter balance construction and the cantilever
construction has been completed and fully matured.
E.
The following timeframes shall be the minimum time that forms should remain in place under ordinary
conditions, unless otherwise specified, but compliance with these requirements shall not relieve the
Contractor of his obligation to delay the removal of forms if the concrete has not set sufficiently so as
not to cause any damage whatsoever.
F.
3.5
1.
Beam Soffits: 28 days or 7 days if re-shored.
2.
Sides of Beams and Slabs: 4 days.
3.
Soffits of Slabs: 28 days or 7 days if re-shored.
4.
When formwork is removed within the 7-day curing period, particular care shall be exercised to
avoid damage to the concrete, especially to arrises and features. The provision of suitable curing
methods shall immediately follow the removal of the formwork and the concrete shall be protected
from high temperatures by means of suitable shielding. Do not cure by the application of cold water.
Where the finished surface has re-entrant angles formwork shall be removed at the earliest time
possible to avoid shrinkage cracks.
Any stripping sequence at an accelerated rate than that indicated above, provide sequence proposal
submittal for the acceptance of the Contract Administrator prior to implementation.
REUSE OF FORMS
A.
General: Reuse forms provided that the structural integrity of concrete and the aesthetics of exposed
concrete are not compromised. Forms shall not be reused for Architectural Concrete if there is evidence
of surface wear or defect that would impair the quality of the surface.

01 June 2016
031100 / 6
AECOM Middle East

CONCRETE FORMING

Enabling Works
B.
Clean, remove fins and laitance and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed,
delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material shall not be acceptable for exposed surfaces.
Apply new form-release agent.
C.
Tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for
exposed concrete surfaces unless accepted by the Contract Administrator.
3.6
SHORING AND RESHORING

A.
Comply with ACI 318/ ACI 318M and ACI 301 for design, installation, and removal of shoring and reshoring.
B.
Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is complete.
C.
Provide a positive means for adjustment of shores and struts and to take up settlement of formwork
during placing of concrete.
D.
In multistory construction, extend shoring or reshoring over a sufficient number of stories to distribute
loads in such a manner that no floor or member will be excessively loaded or will induce tensile stress
in concrete members without sufficient steel reinforcement.
E.
Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and provide
adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection.
F.
Reshore concrete elements where forms are removed prior to the specified time period. Do not permit
elements to deflect or accept loads during form stripping or reshoring. Perform reshoring operations to
prevent subjecting concrete members to overloads, eccentric loading, or reverse bending.
G.
Provide reshoring elements with the same load-carrying capabilities as original shoring and spaced
similar to original shoring. Firmly secure and brace reshoring elements to provide solid bearing and
support.
3.7

A.
Inspect and check the complete formwork, shoring and bracing to ensure that the work is in accordance
with the formwork design as submitted to the Contract Administrator.
B.
If requested, submit test data on patented and proprietary devices and assemblies that are proposed for
use on the work to the acceptance of the Contract Administrator.
3.8
CLEANING
A.
Clean the forms as erection proceeds to remove foreign matter. Remove cuttings, shavings and debris
from within the forms prior to project use.
END OF SECTION

01 June 2016
031100 / 7
AECOM Middle East

CONCRETE FORMING

Enabling Works
SECTION 031500 -- CONCRETE ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
1.2
SUBMITTALS
1.3
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5
1.6
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
1.7
GUARANTEE
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION
2.2
2.3
MATERIALS
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
3.2
PREPARATION
3.3
INSTALLATION
3.4

01 June 2016
031500
AECOM Middle East

CONCRETE ACCESSORIES

Enabling Works
SECTION 031500 -- CONCRETE ACCESSORIES

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
Section Includes
1.2
1.
Waterstops.
2.
Joint filler.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.

1.
Shop Drawings and calculations for all materials covered in this Section for review of the Contract
Administrator.
a)
2.
Provide detailed plans, sections and layout identifying detail of waterstops, fillers, sealants and
shear connectors.
Technical Details and Product Data associated with Samples: Include the following information:
a)
Full material analysis and properties, both initial-term and long-term.
b)
Shelf-life and pot-life.
c)
Instructions for handling, mixing, installing, finishing, curing and protecting, including Health
and Safety and Control of Substances Hazardous to Health (COSHH).
d)
Requirements for joint preparation and condition, backing, debonding and priming.
e)
Behavior under imposed movements, cross-joint pressure and fatigue.
f)
Special instructions for jointing and interfaces.
g)
Colors of visible/ exposed materials for review and acceptance of the Contract Administrator.
3.
Supplementary Product Literature: Include a statement from the manufacturer for the design life of
the system.
4.
Statement of manufacturer's review confirming suitability of specified materials.
5.
List of tests included.
6.
Summary of deviations from the Specification.
7.
Outline technical specifications reflecting proposed materials/ systems.
8.
A list of proposed suppliers and Subcontractors intended to be used.
9.
Method Statement.
10. Quality Control Procedures.

01 June 2016
031500 / 1
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
11. Certified Test Data.

C.
1.3

1.
Unopened standard packs of each sealant type including all components and 300mm of finished
sealants, 300mm x 300mm of fillers and 300mm of strip products.
2.
Each type of proposed waterstop, with samples of each welded connection type.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Comply with the requirements of Employer General Requirements, and submit the following.
1.
1.4
Warranties.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
1.
Refer to all relevant ASTM International and ACI Standards for this Section. Where there is no
relevant ASTM or ACI standard, the Contractor shall make reference to the relevant British Standard.
2.
All work shall be in accordance with the requirements of the local Municipality.
Manufacturer's Qualifications
1.
A firm who has at least 5 years' experience in producing similar products/ systems specified in this
Section.
2.
Certification to ISO 9001 or operates a similar quality system acceptable to the Contract
Administrator.
Installer's Qualifications
1.
D.
E.
1.5
Experienced operators who have at least 5 years' successful experience in performing similar work.
Preconstruction Testing/ Reports

1.
Submit reports of independent tests demonstrating that the products and systems comply with the
specified performance requirements.
2.
The provision of testing data or the carrying-out of tests does not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibilities regarding the durability or service life requirements.
Testing Requirements: Refer to Site Quality Control in Part 3 of this Section.

A.
Delivery: Clearly mark the following on the material itself when delivered to Site. Impose this requirement
upon the manufacturer.
1.
Name of manufacturer and product.
2.
Batch reference.
3.
Date of manufacture.
4.
Shelf-life and conditions of storage.
5.
Date of usage and location in the work.

01 June 2016
031500 / 2
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
B.
Delivery to Site, storage and use of all materials shall be clearly controlled and fully documented by the
Contractor. All documentation shall be opened for inspection by the Contractor and provided to the
Contract Administrator when requested.
C.
Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil and other contaminants.
D.
Steelwork shall not be placed directly on the ground.
E.
Lifting points shall be suitably wrapped and protected and steel slings shall not be allowed to come into
direct contact with coated steelwork.
1.6
A.
General: Install materials and components in weather conditions recommended by the manufacturer.
Do not install any work on surfaces that are dirty, wet or contaminated such that a proper bond or fastening
cannot be ensured.
B.
Temperature: Make allowance for differences between design temperature and temperatures on Site
during installation of concrete accessories.
1.7
GUARANTEE
A.
The materials as installed shall be guaranteed by the Contractor against failure under the design
conditions during a period of 10 years for sealants and joint fillers and 20 years for waterstops unless
otherwise indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION
A.
Obtain each product from a single manufacturer with at least 5 years' experience of producing similar
items.
B.
Obtain auxiliary materials and components from, or under the direction of, the principal products
manufacturer.
C.
Products visible in the finished work shall be obtained from a single production run to ensure uniformity.
2.2
A.
Movements
1.
B.
Integrity
1.
C.
The installation shall accommodate movements in the substrate/ background due to thermal
expansion and contraction or due to changes in moisture content.
The work shall be capable of withstanding any pressures to which it may be subjected.
Under normal service conditions a factor of safety shall be provided against failure of any kind. Where
necessary, materials shall be designed to resist:
1.
Abrasion and other effects of traffic or flow of materials over joints.
2.
Chemical and biological attack.
3.
Fire.
4.
Degradation from ultraviolet light, thermal effects and other natural phenomena.
5.
Degradation by ageing (e.g. ultra-violet) or fatigue (e.g. vibration).

01 June 2016
031500 / 3
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
D.
Materials shall be properly formulated for their intended use and shall be within their movement and
fatigue capability, taking into account the construction tolerance.
E.
Materials shall be physically and chemically stable at handover.
F.
Materials to be mixed on Site shall have adequate pot-life taking into account the size of container and
the conditions under which the operators shall be working.
G.
Materials in contact with potable water shall be agreed under the Water Research Center's Testing
Scheme.
2.3
MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
General
1.
Materials shall be new and of compounds formulated for use in hot climates.
2.
Materials shall be compatible with other materials against which they abut.
3.
Exposed/ visible materials shall present a neat appearance, without bleeding and staining adjacent
work.
4.
Exposed/ visible materials shall be resistant to attack by vermin.
Waterstop
1.
Flexible Rubber Waterstops: In accordance with CE CRD-C 513, with factory-installed metal eyelets
for embedding in concrete. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes.
2.
Chemically Resistant Flexible Waterstops: Thermoplastic elastomer rubber waterstops with factoryinstalled metal eyelets for embedding in concrete; resistant to oils, solvents, and chemicals. Factory
fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes.
3.
Flexible PVC Waterstops: In accordance with CE CRD-C 572, with factory-installed metal eyelets
for embedding in concrete. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes.
4.
Self-Expanding Butyl Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip, butyl rubber
with sodium bentonite or other hydrophilic polymers, for adhesive bonding to concrete.
5.
Self-Expanding Rubber Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip, bentonitefree hydrophilic polymer modified chloroprene rubber, for adhesive bonding to concrete.
Joint Filler and Sealants

1.
Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: In accordance with ASTM D1751, asphalt-saturated

cellulosic fiber or ASTM D1752, cork or self-expanding cork.
2.
Semi-rigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semi-rigid, 100% solids, epoxy resin with a Type A shore
durometer hardness of 80, in accordance with ASTM D2240.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine surfaces where concrete accessories shall be installed for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of work.
B.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare substrates in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

01 June 2016
031500 / 4
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
B.
Remove contaminants such as dust, loose particles, moisture, oils or greases from the joint faces. The
surrounding material shall be allowed to dry out. Any solvents present shall be allowed to evaporate.
Rough or other unsuitable surfaces shall be improved to satisfy the manufacturer's recommendations
for the product to be applied.
C.
Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of
these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint
sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing
out joints with oil free compressed air.
D.
Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete. Grind surfaces to remove old joint sealers,
water repellents and other contamination; provide a smooth surface.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Waterstops
1.
B.
General
a)
Install continuous waterstops where indicated on the Design Drawings in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
b)
Waterstops shall be firmly held perpendicular to the joint face during concreting.
c)
Waterstops shall not be pierced with nails, screws or ties except where additional flaps or eyes
are provided specifically for this purpose. Double-ended nails shall be used when nailing
exterior waterstops to formwork.
d)
Shutters shall be in a split-form for centrally located waterstops. 'Crow bars' shall not be used
to strike shutters for surface waterstops.
e)
Use effective means of retaining the waterstop in the horizontal position where internal
horizontal waterstops are used in vertical faces. Concrete shall be poured to cover the bar.
The exclusion of air and compaction under the bar shall be completed before continuing the
embedment.
f)
Where vertical bars are used on horizontal joints, concrete shall be placed to cover the bar.
Check verticality of the bar before continuing the pour. If pouring prohibits access for this, the
bar shall be held by 'forks' or be tied to the reinforcement.
g)
All waterstops shall be free of contaminants prior to concreting. Laitance and fins caused by
first stage concreting shall be removed before the second part of the joint is poured.
h)
Do not displace reinforcement when installing waterstops.
i)
Waterstops shall be provided as a complete system for each structure, by one manufacturer.
Joints and junctions shall be provided to Site prefabricated by the manufacturer, leaving only
simple flat butt connections for Site fabrication.
2.
Flexible Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other joints indicated on the Design Drawings
forming a continuous diaphragm. Install in longest lengths practicable. Support and protect exposed
waterstops during progress of the Work. Field fabricate joints in waterstops according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
3.
Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other locations indicated on
the Design Drawings according to manufacturer's written instructions, adhesive bonding,
mechanically fastening, and firmly pressing into place. Install in longest lengths practicable.
Joint Fillers and Sealants to Expansion Joints

1.
Joints shall be prepared, primed, sealed, cured and protected strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
2.
Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least 1 month. Do not fill joints until construction traffic
has permanently ceased.

01 June 2016
031500 / 5
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
3.
Adjacent surfaces shall be masked as necessary to avoid migration or spillage of joint sealants.
Work shall be carried out to leave a neat, smooth, clean appearance without smears to adjacent
construction. Surface finishing shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. Exposed and visible
work shall be consistently finished to a high standard and any substandard work shall be removed.
4.
Joint fillers shall be firm and suitable for casting. They shall be stable in the temperature range of
-30C to +70C and shall not bleed oil or bitumen or other constituent at any time.
5.
Install semi-rigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 50mm deep in formed joints.
Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.
6.
For joints up to 50mm the filler shall be a high density closed cell polyethylene foam of density 70kg/
m capable of 50% compression with a minimum 95% recovery at a maximum stress of 0.2N/ mm.
7.
Sealants shall be high performance polysulphide type or approved similar with a minimum of 50%
movement accommodation factor.
8.
Unless otherwise agreed, sealants shall be to the dimensions indicated on the Design Drawings
and to the minimum required by the manufacturer. They shall be placed against a firm backing.
Where necessary for the performance of the material, the backing shall have a bond-breaking
surface.
9.
Sealants shall have good adhesion with the adjacent surfaces. Detailed consideration shall be given
to the order in which corrosion-resistant or decorative finishes shall be applied in order to achieve:
a)
Adhesion of the sealant.
b)
Corrosion protection of adjoining construction.
c)
A neat finish at the joint.
10. Sealants shall not stain or discolor adjacent surfaces which shall be visible when the work is
completed.
11. Where no joint filler is present or when the sealant manufacturer recommends the provision of such
a strip, a circular pre-formed closed-cell foamed polyethylene back-up strip shall be provided. The
surface shall have a bond-breaking finish.
12. When joint filler is present and the sealant manufacturer recommends the provision of a bondbreaker tape, a pressure-sensitive one-sided-adhesive polyethylene tape shall be provided.
3.4
a)
Where the sealant manufacturer recommends the provision of a primer, it shall be provided in
accordance with his requirements.
b)
Joints subject to pressure shall have sealant that is fully supported by a rigid material. There
shall be no void underneath the sealant.

A.
Testing and Inspecting: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and
inspections and prepare test reports.
B.
Manufacturer's Site Service: Arrange for a technical representative from the manufacturer to do Site
visits for one full day at the start of the installation, and once a week as the work progresses. Technical
representative shall provide surveillance of the materials installation, and monitor and report installation
procedures and unacceptable conditions.
C.
At the start of the work the Contractor shall carry out trials which may at the discretion of the Contract
Administrator be incorporated in the final work. The quality of the work shall be to the acceptance of the
Contract Administrator. Once a satisfactory standard of work has been reached, the trials shall be used
as a standard for the acceptance of the work as a whole.
D.
Joint fillers shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D545 and ASTM D2240.

01 June 2016
031500 / 6
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
E.
Joints exposed to the weather shall be water-jet tested in the presence of the Contract Administrator.
The jet shall be from a 19mm hose under minimum 2kN/ mm pressure held 600mm from the joint and
moved along the joint at 600mm/ minute. The joints shall be waterproof.
F.
Joints required to resist water or other pressure shall be tested for compliance with the Specification as
directed by the Contract Administrator.
END OF SECTION

01 June 2016
031500 / 7
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
SECTION 032000 -- CONCRETE REINFORCING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
1.2
SUBMITTALS
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.4
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION
2.2
DESIGN CRITERIA
2.3
MATERIALS
2.4
FABRICATION
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
3.2
PREPARATION
3.3
INSTALLATION
3.4
3.5
CLEANING

01 June 2016
032000
AECOM Middle East

CONCRETE REINFORCING

Enabling Works
SECTION 032000 -- CONCRETE REINFORCING

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
Section Includes
1.
1.2
Concrete reinforcing.
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: In accordance with the requirements of Employer General Requirements.
B.
C.
1.3
1.
Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes,
quantities, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar
arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports
for concrete reinforcement.
2.
Product data on materials for use.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Method Statement.
7.
Quality Control Procedures.
8.
Certified test data.
Preconstruction Testing Reports

1.
Include for testing by an accredited independent testing specialist or provide independently certified
test data to demonstrate compliance with the Specification.
2.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Standards, General: All reinforcing for use in accordance with all Building Codes, Standard specifications
and by-laws referred to in the Specification. They shall be current editions including all revisions,
amendments, addendums and additions.
1.
Refer to all relevant ASTM International and ACI Standards for this section of work. Where there is
no relevant ASTM or ACI standard the Contractor is to make reference to the relevant British
Standard.
2.
Refer to the latest publication of Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI).
3.
Comply with the following ACI Publications unless modified by requirements in the Contract
Documents:
a)

01 June 2016
ACI 301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete."
032000 / 1
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
b)
B.
ACI 117 "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."
Manufacturer's/ Installer's Qualifications

1.
A specialist who has at least 5 years' successful experience in performing similar work.
2.
Certification to ISO 9001 or operates a similar quality system acceptable to the Contract
Administrator.
C.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction in

Sultanate of Oman, qualified according to ASTM E329 for testing indicated.
D.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1/ D1.1M,
"Structural Welding Code - Steel."
E.
Certifications
F.
G.
1.
Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that products furnished comply with
requirements.
2.
Welding certificates.

1.
2.
Where test results for a material or product are not available, undertake testing to show compliance
with the Specification at an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the Contract Administrator.
3.
Testing Requirements
1.
1.4
Refer to Site Quality Control in Part 3 of this Section.

A.
Deliver reinforcing bars bundled, tagged and marked. Tags shall be metal indicating bar size, length and
other information pressed in by machine. Marks shall correspond with those used on the placing drawings.
B.
Bar sizes shall be identifiable even if bundles are broken and tags removed.
C.
Reinforcing bars shall not be subjected to rough handling, shock loading or dropping from a height.
D.
Store reinforcement of different sizes and shapes in separate piles or racks raised above the ground,
under cover and on level supports and in a manner which shall not result in damage or deformation to
the reinforcing or in contamination of the reinforcing.
E.
Protect reinforcement from contaminants such as grease, oil, dirt and from contamination by chloride
from sea spray or windblown salts, and rusting that can take place as a result of dew at night.
F.
Reinforcing shall not be stored on or adjacent to concrete surfaces which form part of the permanent work.
G.
Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Steel

1.
Schedule deliveries of epoxy coated bars to Site to avoid the need for long term storage.
2.
Record coating lot on each delivery notice and carefully identify and re-tag bar bundles from bending
plant.

01 June 2016
032000 / 2
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
3.
Provide systems for handling coated bars which have padded contact areas, nylon slings, etc. Lift
bundled coated bars with strong back, multiple supports, or platform bridge to prevent sagging and
abrasion. Pad bundling bands where in contact with bars. Do not drop or drag bars or bundles.
4.
Store coated bars both in shop and in field, above ground, on wooden or padded cribbing. Space
the dunnage close enough to prevent excessive sags. Stack large quantities of straight bars with
adequate protective blocking between layers.
5.
Protect from direct sunlight and weather.
6.
Cover bars to be stored longer than 12 hours at the job site with opaque polyethylene sheeting or
other suitable equivalent protective material.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION
A.
2.2
Source of Supply: Obtain products from a single manufacturer with at least 5 years experience of
producing similar items.
DESIGN CRITERIA
A.
Refer to Section 033000 Cast-in-Place Concrete where applicable.
B.
Refer to the Design Drawings for the grade, position and number of reinforcing bars to be used in the
principal types of concrete elements including, but not limited to, foundations, walls, columns, beams
and slabs.
C.
Supports for reinforcing bars shall be sufficient in number and sufficiently heavy to carry the reinforcement
they support. Do not use supports to support runways for concrete conveying equipment and similar
construction loads.
D.
No splices shall be made in the reinforcements except where indicated on the Design Drawings or
accepted by the Contract Administrator. Location of splices for beams and slabs shall be away from
points of maximum stress.
1.
2.3
Mechanical splices shall not be used unless the Contract Administrator agrees in writing.
MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
General
1.
Materials shall be clean and free of all deleterious material. All deleterious material shall be removed
in a manner acceptable to the Contract Administrator.
2.
Any reinforcing which has become corroded which may not substantially affect its properties and
its long term durability shall be removed from Site.
Steel Reinforcement
1.
Reinforcing Bars: In accordance with BS 4449 and to grades as shown on Design Drawings.
2.
Steel Bar Mats: Deformed bars, assembled with clips.
Reinforcement Accessories
1.
Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening
reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire,
plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater
compressive strength than concrete and as follows:
a)

01 June 2016
For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use
CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.
032000 / 3
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
b)
D.
2.4
For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use epoxy-coated or other dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar

supports.
Mesh Fabric: Sheets of steel mesh fabric reinforcing shall overlap each other by at least twice the wire
spacing in the direction of the lap or as indicated on the Design Drawings and shall be securely fastened
at the ends or edges.
FABRICATION
A.
Reinforcing shall be cut and bent in accordance with CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice" and ACI 117
to the specified shapes and dimensions at temperature of at least 5C and not exceeding 100C.
B.
Reinforcing shall not be rebent or straightened after bending.
C.
Location of splices other than those indicated on the Shop Drawings shall be subject to review by the
D.
Tolerances on cutting and bending reinforcing shall be in accordance with CRSI "Manual of Standard
Practice" and ACI 117.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Prior to commencing work, examine reinforcements for rust, contamination, surface defects, and damage.
B.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Reinforcements shall be inspected immediately prior to pouring of concrete. Reinforcements shall be

clean and free from loose mill scale, loose rust or any substance that would reduce the bond or affect
the reinforcing or concrete chemically. The reinforcements shall be maintained clean until concrete is
placed around it.
B.
If the surface condition of the reinforcements deteriorates such that it is not in accordance with the
requirements stated above, the reinforcements shall be cleaned or dealt with by other methods to the
acceptance of the Contract Administrator.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.
1.
B.
Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing
concrete.
Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement.

1.
Reinforcing bars may be relocated to avoid interference with other reinforcement, or with conduit,
pipe or other embedded items. If any reinforcing bar is moved a distance exceeding one bar diameter
or specified tolerance, resulting arrangement of reinforcement shall be to the acceptance of the
2.
Embedded items indicated on the Design Drawings shall be fastened in the positions indicated
within the specified tolerances.
3.
Embedded items shall not be supported by welding to reinforcing.
C.
Use side form spacers for column, beam, and wall construction to secure reinforcing against displacement
and maintain required cover distance between the reinforcing and the vertical formwork.
D.
Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. Weld reinforcing bars in accordance with AWS D1.4/ D 1.4M,
where indicated.

01 June 2016
032000 / 4
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
E.
Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
F.
Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize
sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining
sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire.
G.
Where concrete members contain galvanized or stainless steel reinforcing, or embedded items as well
as ordinary uncoated mild or high-yield steel reinforcing, then contact between dissimilar metals shall
be prevented, if necessary by inserting electrically insulating material between them.
H.
Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement: Repair cut and damaged epoxy coatings with epoxy repair coating in
accordance with ASTM D3963/ D3963M. Use epoxy-coated steel wire ties to fasten epoxy-coated steel
reinforcement.
I.
Reinforcing shall be covered and immediately prior to placement of concrete shall be wetted.
J.
Tolerances
3.4
1.
For clear protection of reinforcing: 5mm.
2.
Lateral spacing of bars shall be within 25mm of the specified spacing.
3.
For longitudinal location of bends and ends of bars: 50mm except discontinuous ends: 20mm.

A.
Routine Inspection and Testing

1.
Testing and Inspecting: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and
inspections and prepare test reports.
2.
Inspections:
a)
Steel reinforcement placement.
b)
Steel reinforcement welding.
B.
Conduct mill test for physical and chemical analysis of reinforcing steel.
C.
Dowel Bars: Where indicated on the Design Drawings, dowel bars shall be debonded with an agreed
debonding compound or proprietary dowel bar sleeve. The Contract Administrator may require a
demonstration to ascertain the efficiency of the method of debonding by carrying out the test described
below.
1.
3.5
The average bond stress on debonded bars cast into concrete specimens and subjected to the pull
out tests at 7 days shall not exceed 1.4MN/ m and the total movement of dowel bar relative to the
concrete shall be not less than 0.25mm at the stress. The concrete specimens shall be 150mm x
150mm in section and 450mm long and made with the same mix proportions as used in the Work.
The number of tests shall be at the discretion of the Contract Administrator.
CLEANING
A.
Remove unused materials from Site upon completion and dispose in designated areas.
END OF SECTION

01 June 2016
032000 / 5
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
SECTION 033000 -- CAST-IN PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
1.2
SUBMITTALS
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.4
DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING
PART 2 PRODUCTS
11
2.1
GENERAL
11
2.2
DESIGN CRITERIA
11
2.3
15
2.4
MATERIALS
19
PART 3 EXECUTION
22
3.1
EXAMINATION
22
3.2
PREPARATION
22
3.3
INSTALLATION
23
3.4
34

01 June 2016
033000
AECOM Middle East

CAST-IN PLACE CONCRETE

Enabling Works
SECTION 033000 -- CAST-IN PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
Section Includes
1.
1.2
Cast-in-Place Concrete.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
1.
At least 10 days prior to commencing work, inform the Contract Administrator of proposed source
of aggregates and provide access for sampling.
2.
At least 10 days prior to commencing work, submit to the Contract Administrator samples of the
following materials proposed for use:
a)
10kg of each type of Portland Cement.
b)
3kg of each type of supplementary cement material.
c)
5L of admixtures.

1.
Shop Drawings.
a)
2.
Manufacturer Test Data Certificates.

a)
3.
Show locations and details of construction and control joints in concrete.
Obtain certificates of compliance with the relevant standards and all other requirements of this
Section from the producers of the constituent materials or ready-mixed concrete prior to project
use. Any change in materials or supplier shall require new certificates of compliance which
shall also be submitted to the Contract Administrator for review and comment prior to
implementation on the project.
Method Statement for Concrete Work: Prior to the commencement of concrete work, provide the
Contract Administrator with fully detailed proposals of the method of placing, compacting, finishing
and curing the concrete. The method statements, which shall be subject to the acceptance of the
Contract Administrator, shall cover all principal types of concrete elements, including but not limited
to foundations, walls, columns, beams and slabs.
a)
Provide details of all curing liquids, compounds, membranes and methods proposed for use
and subsequent removal.
b)
Provide details of the mortar composition and mix proportions together with test data taken
from tests carried out by an independent testing authority to confirm compliance with the test
requirements.
4.
Quality Control Procedures: Minimum 21 days prior to starting concrete work, submit proposed
quality control procedures for the Contract Administrator's review for the following items: formwork
erection, hot weather concreting, curing, finishes, formwork removal and joints.
5.
Submit evidence to the Contract Administrator that the final cast-in place concrete shall perform in
accordance with this Section for a minimum design life of 50 years.

01 June 2016
033000 / 1
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
a)
6.
7.
Concrete Mix Designs: Submit to the Contract Administrator for review the proposed concrete mix
designs for each class and strength of concrete to be utilized in the project as shown on the Design
Drawings, including pump mix designs and also the name of the supplier. Required information
shall include:
a)
The nature and source of each constituent material.
b)
Nominal grading details in tabular and graphical form of the fine and coarse aggregates.
c)
Nominal grading details in tabular and graphical form of the combined aggregate together with
details of the proportions in which the fine and coarse aggregates are combined; the designed
workability, having due regard to the final location and dimensions of the concrete.
d)
The methods of manufacturing, placing and curing, and the batching plant that shall be used.
e)
Full details of tests on trial mixes carried out in accordance with Clauses within this Section.
f)
The quantities of each material per cubic meter of fully compacted concrete;
Admixtures for Concrete Mix: Obtain the Contract Administrator's acceptance prior to the use of
admixtures in each mix. The suitability of admixture shall be verified by trial mixes.
a)
b)
8.
All concrete testing and sampling for both strength and durability shall satisfy the requirements
of this Section and the design life of the concrete.
Both the amount of admixture to be added and the method of use require the acceptance of
the Contract Administrator for whom the following data shall be provided:
1.
The chemical name(s) of the main active ingredient(s) in the admixture.
2.
Whether or not the admixture contains chlorides and the chloride content and alkali content
of the admixture.
3.
The typical dosage and detrimental effects of under-dosage and over-dosage.
4.
Whether or not the admixture leads to the entrainment of air when used at the
manufacturer's recommended dosage.
5.
Long-term and short-term effects of the admixture on concrete, and the effect of different
types of cement and aggregate.
6.
Storage life and any special storage requirements.
7.
Health and Safety precautions in handling.
8.
Availability of on-Site technical service.
Any admixture or ingredient other than cement, aggregate or water-reducing admixture, used
by the Contractor in accordance with the absorption requirement shall be indicated by an
independent authority to have been used in concrete exposed to a coastal or marine
environment without significant deterioration of the cement matrix, embedded reinforcing steel
or measurable reduction in performance of the product on absorption. This shall be indicated
prior to implementation for project use.
Concrete Mix Design Adjustments: Any changes in the source of material or in mix proportions
(except changes in the cementitious content of not more than 20 kg/ m) shall be subject to
acceptance by the Contract Administrator prior to implementation for project use.
a)

01 June 2016
Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Submit documents detailing proposed mix design adjustments
when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances
warrant, at no additional cost to the Employer. New field data, data from new trial mixtures,
or evidence that indicates that the change shall not adversely affect the relevant properties of
the concrete shall be submitted for acceptance by the Contract Administrator before use.
033000 / 2
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
9.
Method Statement for Temperature Measurement Procedure: Submit to the Contract Administrator
details of the proposed methods and equipment for the measurement and logging of concrete
temperatures.
10. Method Statement for Control of Alkali Aggregate Reaction: Demonstrate to the Contract
Administrator's acceptance that the cement-aggregate combination shall be stable and not liable
to excessive internal expansion due to alkali-aggregate reaction. Method statements shall be
submitted and shall take account of the time necessary for any testing. Under exceptional
circumstances, the demonstration may be based on previous long term experience of the materials
to the acceptance of the Contract Administrator. Otherwise, undertake a program of tests using an
independent testing laboratory in accordance with the following requirements:
a)
Aggregates shall be in accordance with the Aggregates Table A in Appendix 033000.
b)
Aggregates shall be initially assessed for reactivity in accordance with ASTM C289 and C1260
and if potential reactivity is indicated, perform tests in accordance with ASTM C227 and ASTM
C586.
11. Method Statement for Placing Concrete in Hot Weather: Full details of the placement method
proposed shall be submitted in advance to the Contract Administrator for acceptance before placing
begins.
12. Hot Weather Protection: Submit detailed proposals and method statement for review and comment
by the Contract Administrator. In the method statement, demonstrate how the following shall be
achieved:
a)
Limit temperature differential between the hottest and coolest position in the concrete to less
than 20C by means of adequate thermal insulation of exposed surfaces throughout the curing
period.
b)
Arrange pouring sequence to avoid external restraint movement and in particular to avoid
"trapped bays".
c)
Ensure the adequacy of the supply of concrete, the means of placing, compaction and covering
to guarantee that a pour, once commenced, shall be completed.
d)
Provide all necessary means of measuring and recording concrete temperature, both inside
and on the surface of the concrete, to ensure that temperature differentials shall be kept within
the required limits and to assist in determining formwork stripping times.
e)
All necessary equipment, material and personnel provisions shall be made to ensure the
continuity of the operation.
f)
Details of all plant, personnel and standby arrangements.
13. Method Statement for Pumped Concrete: Prior to commencing work with pumped concrete define
the following:
a)
The extent of each pour and the maximum length of pipeline that shall be used.
b)
The special measures that shall be taken to reduce the possibility of early shrinkage cracking.
c)
Details of plant and labor to be employed including type/ make, model of pumps, pipe diameters
and the manufacturer's recommendations regarding maximum height and reach of equipment.
1.
d)
Provide such spare items of plant as the Contract Administrator considers necessary to
avoid delays due to mechanical breakdown.
Details of the proposed mix design in conformity with this Section.
14. Method Statement for Water-Resistant Concrete: Prior to commencing work define the proposed
methods for supporting and maintaining the water-bars in the correct position while the concrete is
placed.
15. Provide list of all tests included for concrete work.

01 June 2016
033000 / 3
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
16. Submit all certified test data as indicated within this Section.
17. Submit Dry Bulb temperature calculations as they shall be performed.
18. Provide full technical information relating to the proposed water-bar system.
19. Submit proposals for the supply of silica fume to the Contract Administrator for review.
20. Submit silica fume certification on delivered loads.
21. Only certified aggregates whose source contains a sufficient quantity of aggregate to complete the
work shall be used. The following information shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator for
acceptance prior to the commencement of the work:
1.3
a)
The name and location of the pit or quarry.
b)
Groups classification in accordance with BS EN 932: Part 1.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.
B.
no relevant ASTM or ACI standard the Contractor is to make reference to the relevant British
Standard.
Codes
1.
2.
American Concrete Institute, ACI Standards:

a)
ACI 117 Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials and Commentary.
b)
ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete.
c)
ACI 305 Hot Weather Concreting.
d)
ACI 308 Standard Practice for Curing Concrete.
e)
ACI 347.2R Guide for Shoring/ Re-shoring of Concrete Multistorey Buildings.
f)
ACI 347 Guide to Formwork for concrete.
g)
ACI 440.1R Guide for the Design and Construction of Structural Concrete Reinforced with FRP
Bars.
h)
ACI 440.3R Guide for Test Methods for Fiber Reinforced Polymers (FRP) for Reinforcing and
Strengthening Concrete Structures.
i)
ACI 318/ ACI 318M Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary.
BSI Group, (BS) British Standards:

a)
BS 812 Testing aggregates.
b)
BS 1377 Method of test for soils for Civil Engineering purposes.
c)
BS 1881: Part 122 Testing concrete. Method for determination of water absorption.
d)
BS 1881: Part 124 Testing concrete. Methods for analysis of hardened concrete.
e)
BS 4027 Sulfate-resisting Portland Cement.

01 June 2016
033000 / 4
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
f)
BS 4483 Steel fabric for the reinforcement of concrete.
g)
BS 4449 Carbon steel bars for the reinforcement of concrete.
h)
BS 5835 Recommendations for testing of aggregates.
i)
BS 5975 Code of practice for temporary works procedures and the permissible stress design
of falsework.
j)
BS 6100 Building and civil engineering. Vocabulary.
k)
BS ISO 6707: Part 1 Buildings and civil engineering works. Vocabulary. General terms.
l)
BS 6177 Guide to selection and use of elastomeric bearings for vibration isolation of buildings.
m)
BS 6463: Part 101 Quicklime, hydrated lime and natural calcium carbonate. Methods of
preparing samples for testing.
n)
BS 7542 Methods of test for curing compounds for concrete.
o)
BS 8000 Workmanship on building sites.
p)
BS 8102 Protection of structures against water from the ground.
q)
BS 8500 Concrete - Complementary British Standard to BS EN 206-1.

1.
BS 8500: Part 1 Method of specifying and guidance for the specifier.
2.
BS 8500: Part 2 Specification for constituent materials and concrete.
r)
BS 8666 Bending dimensions and scheduling of bars for the reinforcement of concrete.
s)
BS EN 196 Methods of testing cement.
t)
1.
BS EN 196: Part 2 Chemical analysis of cement.
2.
BS EN 196: Part 5 Pozzolanicity test for pozzolanic cements.
BS EN 197 Cement.
1.
BS EN 197: Part 1 Composition, specifications and conformity criteria for common

cements.
u)
BS EN 206 Concrete. Specification, performance, production and conformity.
v)
BS EN 450 Fly ash for concrete.
w)
BS EN 480 Admixtures for concrete, mortar and grout. Test methods.

01 June 2016
1.
BS EN 480: Part 4 Determination of bleeding of concrete.
2.
BS EN 480: Part 5 Determination of capillary absorption.
3.
BS EN 480: Part 6 Infrared analysis.
4.
BS EN 480: Part 8 Determination of the conventional dry material content.
5.
BS EN 480: Part 10 Determination of water soluble chloride content.
6.
BS EN 480: Part 11 Determination of air void characteristics in hardened concrete.
033000 / 5
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
7.
BS EN 480: Part 12 Admixtures for concrete, mortar and grout. Test methods.
Determination of the alkali content of admixtures.
x)
BS EN 932 Test for general properties of aggregates.
y)
BS EN 933 Tests for geometrical properties of aggregates.
z)
BS EN 934 Admixtures for concrete, mortar and grout.

1.
BS EN 934: Part 2 Concrete admixtures. Definitions, requirements, conformity, marking

and labeling.
2.
BS EN 934: Part 6 Sampling, conformity control and evaluation of conformity.
aa) BS EN 990 Test methods for verification of corrosion protection of reinforcement in autoclaved
aerated concrete and lightweight aggregate concrete with open structure.
bb) BS EN 992 Determination of the dry density lightweight aggregate concrete with open structure.
cc) BS EN 1008 Mixing water for concrete.
dd) BS EN 1097 Tests for mechanical and physical properties of aggregates.
ee) BS EN 1351 Determination of flexural strength of autoclaved aerated concrete.
ff)
BS EN 1367 Test for thermal and weathering properties of aggregates.
gg) BS EN 1504 Products and systems for the protection and repair of concrete structures.
hh) BS EN 1744 Tests for chemical properties of aggregates.
ii)
BS EN 1992-1-1 Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures. General rules and rules for
buildings.
jj)
BS EN 1992: Part 3 Eurocode 2. Design of concrete structures. Liquid retaining and containing
structures.
kk) BS EN 1997: Part 1 Eurocode 7. Geotechnical design. General rules.

ll)
BS EN 12350 Testing fresh concrete.
mm) BS EN 12390 Testing hardened concrete.

nn) BS EN 12504 Testing concrete in structures.
oo) BS EN 12620 Aggregates for concrete, including amendments.
pp) BS EN 12878 Pigments for the coloring of building materials based on cement and/ or lime.
Specifications and methods of test.
qq) BS EN 13055 Lightweight aggregates.
rr)
BS EN 13813 Screed material and floor screeds.
ss) BS EN 13791 Assessment of poured-in-place compressive strength in structures and precast

concrete components.
tt)
BS EN 13263 Silica fume for concrete.
uu) BS EN 14216 Cement. Composition, specifications and conformity criteria for very low heat
special cements.
vv) BS EN 14889 Fibers for concrete. Steel fibers. Definitions, specifications and conformity.
01 June 2016
033000 / 6
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
ww) BS EN 15167: Part 1 Ground granulated blast furnace slag for use in concrete, mortar and
grout. Definitions, specifications and conformity criteria.
xx) BS EN 15743 Supersulfated cement. Composition, specifications and conformity criteria.
yy) BS EN 45011 General requirements for bodies operating product certification systems.
zz) BS EN ISO 17660: Part 1 Welding. Welding of reinforcing steel. Load-bearing welded joints.
aaa) BS EN ISO 17660: Part 2 Welding. Welding of reinforcing steel. Non load-bearing welded joints.
bbb) BS EN ISO 3766 Construction drawings. Simplified representation of concrete reinforcement.
ccc) DD 147 Method of test of curing compounds for concrete.
3.
International Standards:
a)
BRE Special Digest 1 Concrete in Aggressive Ground.
b)
CIRIA Publication C511 Controlled Permeability Formwork.
c)
CRSI Placing Reinforcing Bars.
d)
CSTR No. 11 Concrete Society Technical Report No. 11.
e)
Nordest Method NT Build 492 Chloride Migration Coefficient from Non-Steady-State Migration
Experiments.
f)
NT Build 443 Accelerated Chloride Penetration.
g)
NT Build 492 Chloride Migration Coefficient from Non-Steady-State Migration Experiments.
h)
PD 6682-1 Aggregates. Aggregates for concrete. Guidance on the use of BS EN 12620.
i)
PD 6682-4 Aggregates. Lightweight aggregates for concrete, mortar and grout. Guidance on
the use of BS EN 13055: Part 1.
j)
BRE Digest 357 Shrinkage of natural aggregates in concrete.
k)
BRE Digest 330 Alkali aggregate reactions in concrete.
l)
Concrete Society Technical Report 30 Alkali Silica Reaction - minimizing the risk of damage
to concrete spacers for reinforced concrete.
C.
In addition to the above, the work shall be in accordance with the requirements of the local Municipality.
D.
Also read this Specification in conjunction with CIRIA Guide SP 31 'The CIRIA Guide to Concrete
Construction in the Gulf Region'.
E.
Cement shall be ordinary Portland cement in accordance with BS standards and shall be supplied by a
manufacturer who holds a current BSI Certificate of Registration as a BSI Registered Firm of Assessed
Capability.
F.
Certificates: Minimum 10 days prior to starting concrete work submit to the Contract Administrator
manufacturer's test data and certification by qualified independent inspection and testing laboratory that
the following materials shall meet specified requirements:
1.
Portland cement.
2.
Supplementary cement materials.
3.
Grout.

01 June 2016
033000 / 7
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
4.
Admixtures.
5.
Aggregates.
6.
Water.
7.
Waterstops.
8.
Waterstop joints.
9.
Joint filler.
10. Provide certification that mix proportions selected shall produce concrete of quality, yield and strength
as specified in concrete mixes, and shall be in accordance with standards defined in this section.
11. Provide certification that all plant, equipment, and materials used in the concrete work shall be in
accordance with requirements of this Section.
G.
Mock-ups:
1.
H.
Before concrete work filling commences, demonstrate that proposals for grouting and packing shall
be satisfactory by carrying out a trial on a sample representative of the work, using the proposed plant.
Testing: The results of all testing shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator for review and comment.
1.
In addition to the requirements described within Part 3 Site Quality Control for testing, provide the
following testing.
2.
Tests shall be carried out on, or certificates shall be provided for each delivered batch of GGBS
(Ground Granulated Blastfurnace Slag) in accordance with BS EN 15167: Part 1 for at least the
following criteria:
3.
4.
a)
Loss on ignition.
b)
Moisture content.
c)
Fineness.
d)
Specific gravity.
e)
SO3 content.
f)
Magnesia (MgO) content.
Tests shall be carried out on, or certificates shall be provided for each batch of PFA (Pulverized
Fuel Ash) in accordance with BS 3892 for at least the following criteria:
a)
Loss on ignition.
b)
Moisture content.
c)
Fineness.
d)
Specific gravity.
Aggregate Testing: Before any material from a particular source is used, obtain representative
samples of fine and coarse aggregates and carry out the necessary tests and analyses to show
that the samples shall be in accordance with this Section. During the progress of the work, the
grading and chemical characteristics shall be checked at frequent intervals.
a)

01 June 2016
The results of these tests shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator for review and
comment before any of the material is used in the work. Part of each sample shall be required
for concrete trial mixes and part shall be retained for comparison with subsequent deliveries.
033000 / 8
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
b)
Sampling for testing and analysis shall be carried out, where applicable, in accordance with
BS EN 1097: Part 5.
c)
Carry out routine testing of aggregates for compliance with this Section during the period in
which concrete is being produced for the permanent work. The tests set out below shall be
performed on aggregates from each separate source. The frequency of routine testing on
aggregates shall be in accordance with the Aggregates Table B in Appendix 033000.
d)
Drying shrinkage and potential reactivity of aggregates shall be determined initially at the start
of the project or whenever there is a change in the source of supply or where in the opinion of
the Contract Administrator the material is deemed to be changed.
e)
Take account of the fact that when the chloride content is variable it may be necessary to test
every load in order to prevent excessive amounts of chloride contaminating the concrete. For
this purpose use the rapid field test also known as the Quantab test.
1.
5.
6.
Water Testing: Water used for mixing and concrete curing shall be tested in accordance with ASTM
C94.
a)
The initial setting times of cement, determined from a test block manufactured using the
proposed water and a control test block manufactured using distilled water, tested in accordance
with BS EN 196, shall not differ by more than 30 minutes.
b)
The average compressive strength of test cubes manufactured using the proposed water and
control test cubes manufactured using distilled water tested in accordance with BS EN 196,
shall be at least 90% of the average compressive strength of the control cubes.
Ready Mix Concrete Testing: Durability test results shall be provided with testing results determined
within the 12 months of submittal. Durability test is required for Mix types 1 and 4 as provided on
the Design Drawings.
a)
b)
1.4
In the event of disagreement regarding the results of the field test, the chloride content
of the aggregate shall be determined in the laboratory as described in BS 812 for the
Volhard test.
The CIRIA modified guidelines from SP32 shall be required as follows:

1.
Water Absorption to BS 1881: Part 122: Maximum 1.5%.
2.
Water Permeability to DIN 1048-5: 7.8: Maximum 8mm.
3.
Chloride Permeability to ASTM C1202: Maximum1000 coulombs. Testing with and without
admixture shall be required and both results shall be submitted. Three results from each
mix shall be required.
4.
Porosity to ASTM C642: Maximum 10%.
The average 28 day durability measures achieved in the trials shall be designated as the Target
Mean and from this the 'Actual Characteristic Value' shall be calculated for each mix in
accordance with the relevant American Standards indicated within this Section.
1.
The Actual Characteristic Value equals the Target Mean Value minus a margin of 1.64
times the standard deviation.
2.
The Actual Characteristic Strength so determined shall be used throughout the duration
of the project as the primary indicator of control of mix proportions and water/ cement ratio.
DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING

A.
Delivery
1.
Each consignment of cement shall bear manufacturer's name and identification number. Type of
cement shall be the same as mentioned in the analysis report. Each separate consignment of
cement shall be tested by the manufacturer before delivery and certified copies of such tests shall
be supplied to the Contract Administrator before any part of the consignment is used in the work.
The Contract Administrator reserves the right to order the re-test of cement at any time with the
necessary samples to be drawn from the stocks on-Site.

01 June 2016
033000 / 9
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
B.
2.
Cement shall be transported to the Site in containers accepted by the Contract Administrator.
3.
Cement shall be delivered in bulk, or with the Contract Administrator's consent, shall be supplied
in sealed bags which shall bear the manufacturer's name and the date of manufacture. Each
consignment shall be accompanied by a copy of the manufacturer's test certificate and certificate
of guarantee.
4.
Each consignment of cement shall be stored separately and labeled ensuring that it can be identified
and used in order of delivery.
5.
Any consignment of cement not used within 2 months from the date of manufacture shall not be
allowed to be used in the work.
6.
Only one brand of cement shall be used throughout the work unless otherwise authorized by the
Contract Administrator in writing.
7.
Each delivery of aggregates shall be inspected and, if required by the Contract Administrator, tested
in accordance with BS 812.
8.
For Ready Mix Concrete: Keep a record book on Site and make the book available for inspection
by the Contract Administrator at all times. This shall contain the following information relating to
each delivery of concrete to the Site:
a)
Registration number of truck, name of supplier and location of the batching plant.
b)
Time of introduction of cement to the mix.
c)
Date and time of arrival of the truck at the concreting location.
d)
Time when concrete is placed in position and left undisturbed.
e)
Mix proportions, including water/ cement ratio, type of cement, nominal maximum aggregate
size, and admixtures if any used on the project and grade of concrete.
f)
Position where the concrete was placed.
g)
Whether test cubes were taken from the delivery, and details of cube markings.
h)
Slump test results.
i)
Temperature of mixed concrete immediately prior to discharge.
j)
Quantity of concrete brought to Site and quantity placed in work.
k)
Serial number of the delivery certificate.
l)
Refer to Section 033500 Concrete Finishing for any additional requirements.
Storage
1.
Bulk cement shall be stored in weatherproof purpose built silos which shall bear a clear indication
of the type of cement contained in them. Different types of cement shall not be mixed in the same
silo. Cement stored in silos shall be adequately protected against rain, humidity and dewfall. Silo
charging and discharging points shall be properly sealed. Silo aeration equipment shall, if necessary,
incorporate de-humidifiers. Cement silo charging pipes shall be clearly marked with cement type.
Precautions shall be taken to reduce the effect of solar radiation on the temperature of the silos.
2.
Provide sufficient storage capacity for cement to ensure that the anticipated program of work is not
interrupted due to lack of cement.
3.
Fully protect the cement from the weather and from carbonation and air setting during transportation
and Site storage. Different brands or types of cement shall be stored separately and shall not be
mixed together for use in the work, unless otherwise indicated.

01 June 2016
033000 / 10
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
4.
Aggregates shall be stored in separate hoppers, or different stacks which shall be well separated
from each other.
5.
All aggregates shall be stockpiled before use in order to prevent segregation of material, to ensure
uniform moisture content and to provide uniform conditions for proportioning plant control. Variations
in moisture content shall be controlled and compensated for by continuous read-out moisture meters
in either the aggregate storage bins or the weigh hoppers.
6.
Stockpiling of aggregates shall be in the manner accepted by the Contract Administrator, and in
addition, every precaution shall be taken to prevent segregation. Segregation shall be prevented
by making no layer higher than 1.5m and if 2 or more layers shall be required, each successive
layer shall not be allowed to "cone" down over the next lower layer.
7.
Aggregates shall not be stockpiled against the supports of proportioning hoppers and weighing
devices.
8.
Cement and Cementitious Additions:
9.
a)
Different cements, PFA and GGBS shall be stored in separate silos. Alternatively, these
materials may be stored in bags in dry weatherproof sheds with raised floors. Each consignment
shall be kept separate and distinct.
b)
Silos for storing PFA and GGBS shall be equipped with aerators to ensure free flow within the
silo.
c)
Cement, PFA, GGBS and Microsilica batches shall be used in order of delivery to the Site.
d)
Transportation to and storage on Site of cementitious additions shall be in containers accepted

by the Contract Administrator. All cementitious materials shall be fully protected from the
weather during both transportation and Site storage.
Admixtures: Admixtures shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations

in containers which shall be clearly marked to show the contents.
a)
C.
Admixtures shall be stored so as to avoid deterioration and segregation and in accordance

with the manufacturer's specification.
Handling
1.
The temperature of cement shall not exceed 50C at the time of incorporation within the mix.
2.
Cement which has been deleteriously affected by moisture shall not be used in the work and shall
be removed from Site immediately.
3.
The use of equipment or methods of handling aggregates which result in the degradation and
contamination of the aggregates is strictly prohibited. Bulldozers with metal tracks shall not be used
on coarse aggregate stockpiles. All equipment used for handling aggregates shall be accepted by
the Contract Administrator.
4.
All aggregates shall be kept free from contact with deleterious matter with adequate provision for
drainage, and shall be stored and handled so as to avoid segregation and inter-mixing.
5.
Segregated aggregates shall not be used until they have been thoroughly re-mixed and the resultant
pile is of uniform and acceptable gradation at any point from which a representative sample is taken.
a)
Re-mix aggregate piles when directed by the Contract Administrator prior to project use.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
2.2
Provide new materials equal in all respects to those specified within this Section.
DESIGN CRITERIA

01 June 2016
033000 / 11
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
A.
The concrete work has been designed as continuous construction to cater for temperature effects in
accordance with International Building Code (IBC). Refer to the Design Drawings for information that
outlines the requirements of pour strips to cater for the effect of shrinkage regarding the extent of pours.
B.
All structural concrete has been designed in accordance with the requirements of ACI 318M where
appropriate unless otherwise indicated in this Section or on the Design Drawings. All concrete work shall
be in accordance with ACI 301. Any differences between these requirements and this Section shall be
submitted to the Contract Administrator for acceptance.
C.
Concrete work shall consist of furnishing all materials and constructing structures of the forms, shapes
and dimensions indicated on the Design Drawings or as directed in accordance with the details indicated
on the Design Drawings and the Specification.
D.
The Design Drawings have been prepared to indicate the design reinforcement required for all structural
members. It is the Contractor's responsibility to use the Design Drawings to prepare shop details and
reinforcement bending schedules for all the structural elements.
E.
Concrete General Requirements

1.
Provide concrete which is described by the Contract Administrator by reference to a combination

of characteristic properties. These shall include but shall not be limited to the performance
requirements described in the Design Drawings.
2.
Mixes for structural concrete shall be designed by the Contractor to meet the performance
requirements outlined in this Section and as indicated in the Design Drawings.
3.
The Contractor is responsible to the Contract Administrator for demonstrating that the proposed
mix is in accordance with the performance requirements.
4.
Concrete shall be in accordance with ACI 318M, except where BS EN 1992: Part 3 or this Section
differs. Sampling for test purposes shall be in accordance with ASTM C172.
5.
If air-entrainment is specified the average air content at the time of placing measured in accordance
with BS EN 12350 shall be: concrete containing 20mm maximum size aggregate 5% 1%. Concrete
for water-retaining elements shall be watertight and shall be in accordance with the
recommendations of BS EN 1992: Part 3. Air-entrainment admixtures shall be in accordance with
ASTM C260.
6.
If concrete specimens shall be cured at higher temperatures or for longer periods than BS EN 12390
requires, the adjusted CCS (Characteristic Compressive Strength) shall be calculated as follows:
a)
b)
100 f1/ f = A + B log {24D (T+12)/ 1000}:

1.
f1 = adjusted CCS.
2.
f = specified CCS.
3.
T = curing temperature.
4.
D = age at testing in days.
A + B shall be coefficients given as follows:

1.
For Recorded Cube Strength Mpa of less than 15, A equals 10.0 and B equals 67.5.
2.
For Recorded Cube Strength Mpa between 15 to 35, A equals 20.0 and B equals 60.0.
3.
For Recorded Cube Strength Mpa greater than 35, A equals 30.0 and B equals 52.5.
c)
The above equation applies only to OPC (Ordinary Portland Cement), MSRPC (Moderate
Sulfate Resisting Portland Cement), SRPC (Sulfate Resisting Portland Cement) and concrete
containing silica fume.
d)
This calculation shall be applied for curing at temperatures up to 27C.

01 June 2016
033000 / 12
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
7.
Before placing concrete obtain acceptance from the Contract Administrator for the mixes proposed
for each class of concrete and the average target strengths. The mixes shall be designed to achieve
the minimum workability for the Contractor to place and compact the concrete with the equipment
proposed for use.
8.
The design mean strength shall exceed the minimum CCS specified in the performance requirements
by a margin of 1.64 times the standard deviation expected from the concreting plant, except that
no standard deviation less than 4 MPa shall be used as a basis for designing a mix.
9.
The total acid soluble chloride content of the concrete arising from all the mix constituents when
calculated from certified chloride ion concentrations or when determined in accordance with BS
1881: Part 124, shall not exceed 0.1% expressed as the percentage of ion by weight of cementitious
material.
10. The total acid soluble sulphate content of the concrete arising from all the mix constituents expressed
as SO3, when calculated from certified sulphate ion concentrations or determined in accordance
with BS 1881: Part 124, shall not exceed 4.0% SO3 by weight of cementitious material.
F.
G.
Concrete Strength and Current Margin

1.
The strength of concrete for trial mixes and production mixes shall be assessed in accordance with
ACI 301. The target strength shall exceed the characteristic strength by a sufficient margin to
consistently meet the compliance criteria.
2.
Control of Alkali Aggregate Reaction: Control of alkali aggregate reaction shall be achieved through
the guidance presented in Concrete Society Technical Report No 30 'Alkali-silica reaction: minimizing
the risk of damage to concrete' (CSTR 30) and submitted to the Contract Administrator for review.
Trial Mixes
1.
Give sufficient notice, as defined in the Division 01 and the Contract documents, to ensure the
Contract Administrator shall be present at the making of trial mixes and the preliminary testing of
cubes.
a)
Prepare trial mixes cast-in panels, using samples of the agreed materials, plant and equipment
typical of those proposed for use in the work, to the acceptance of the Contract Administrator
before the commencement of concreting. Trial panels shall contain reinforcement typical of
the configuration to be used in the work.
2.
Sampling and testing procedures shall be in accordance with the relevant ACI and ASTM standards
indicated within this Section.
3.
The concreting plant shall be similar to the corresponding plant to be used in the work. A clean dry
mixer shall be used and the first batch discarded. Test cubes shall be taken from trial mixes as follows:
a)
For each concrete mix with no specific early strength requirements a set of 6 cubes shall be
made from each of 3 consecutive batches. 3 cubes from each set of 6 shall be tested for
compressive strength at an age of 7 days and 3 at an age of 28 days. And, 3 cubes from each
set of 6 shall be tested for durability at an age of 28 days and 3 cubes at an age of 56 and 90
days. The tests shall be carried out at a laboratory accepted by the Contract Administrator.
b)
For concrete with early strength requirements an additional 3 cubes shall be made for each
of the 3 consecutive batches and tested for compressive strength at an age of 24 hours or
such time proposed by the Contractor to match that at which loading shall occur in the work.
4.
The target mean strength, defined as the average strength of the 9 cubes (3 from 3 consecutive
batches) tested at 28 days, shall exceed the specified characteristic strength by the current margin.
In addition, for concrete with early strength requirements the target mean strength, defined as the
average strength of the 9 cubes (3 from 3 consecutive batches) tested at 24 hours or the time
proposed by the Contractor, shall exceed the specified characteristic strength by the current margin.
5.
Preliminary laboratory tests shall be carried out to determine if the mixes satisfy the Specification
requirements.
6.
Trial mixes shall be tested to determine the following properties of mixes proposed for initial field tests:
a)

01 June 2016
Bleeding shall be in accordance with ASTM C232, non-vibrating method shall not exceed 0.5%.
033000 / 13
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
b)
Drying Shrinkage of Aggregates shall be in accordance with BS EN 1367: Part 4.
c)
Air content, if applicable shall be in accordance with BS EN 12350: Part 7.
d)
Free water/ cement ratio.
e)
Workability tests shall be in accordance with BS EN 12350: Part 2, BS EN 12350: Part 3, BS

EN 12350: Part 4 and BS EN 12350: Part 5.
f)
Fresh and hardened concrete densities shall be in accordance with BS EN 12350: Part 6 and
BS EN 12390: Part 7 respectively.
g)
Compressive strength shall be in accordance with BS EN 12390: Part 3. The CCS of the
concrete shall be determined on test specimens obtained and prepared in accordance with
BS EN 12390: Part 1 and BS EN 12390: Part 2.
h)
Tensile strength shall be in accordance with BS EN 12390: Part 5.
i)
Water Permeability shall be in accordance with DIN 1048.
j)
Water absorption shall be in accordance with BS 1881: Part 122.
k)
Initial surface absorption shall be in accordance with BS EN 12390: Part 7, BS 1881: Part 121,
BS 1881: Part 122, BS 1881: Part 208 and BS 1881: Part 209.
l)
Chloride Permeability shall be in accordance with AASHTO T277.
m)
Chloride and sulphate levels shall be in accordance with BS 1881: Part 124.
n)
Coefficient of linear expansion shall be in accordance with US Army Corps of Engineers CRDC 39-81.
o)
Perform other tests as dictated by concrete performance requirements or directed by the

7.
If the values obtained are not in accordance with the Specification or shall not be to the acceptance
of the Contract Administrator then the mixes shall be re-designed.
8.
At least 28 days before commencement of concreting agreed trial mixes shall be prepared under
full scale Site conditions and tested in accordance with the relevant standards.
9.
a)
3 trial batches of each mix shall be made and from each batch 6 cubes shall be made. 3 cubes
shall be tested; at 7 days and 3 cubes at 28 days by a laboratory accepted by the Contract
Administrator. The results shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator within 24 hours of
testing.
b)
Further trial mixes shall be made if the range (the maximum minus the minimum of the 3 cube
results in any batch) exceeds 15% of the average of that batch, or if the range of the 3 batch
averages exceeds 20% of the overall average of the batches.
Actual Characteristic Strength

a)
The average 28 day cube strength achieved in the trials shall be designated as the Target
Mean Strength and from this the 'Actual Characteristic Strength' shall be calculated for each
mix in accordance with the relevant British Standards.
b)
The Actual Characteristic Strength equals the Target Mean Strength minus a margin of 1.64
times the standard deviation, except that the margin shall not be less than 3MPa.
c)
In no case shall the Actual Characteristic Strength be less than the minimum CCS specified
in the performance requirements of this Section.
d)
The Actual Characteristic Strength so determined shall be used throughout the duration of the
project as the primary indicator of control of mix proportions and water/ cement ratio.

01 June 2016
033000 / 14
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
10. The Contract Administrator shall review the Contractor's trial-mixes and all test results as submitted
under the submittal requirements of this Section.
a)
The Contract Administrator shall then determine which of the trial mixes shall be used. If none
of the trial mixes for a class of concrete is in accordance with the requirements of the
Specification, the Contract Administrator shall direct the Contractor to prepare additional trial
mixes. No class of concrete shall be prepared or placed until its job-mix proportions have been
accepted by the Contract Administrator.
11. The acceptance of the job-mix proportions by the Contract Administrator in establishing those
proportions, in no way relieves the Contractor of the responsibility of producing concrete which is
in accordance with the requirements of this Section.
12. The Contract Administrator shall also require practical tests to be made on Site by filling trial molds
incorporating the reinforcing details as required to confirm the suitability of the mix for the work. In
these tests, the type of plant used for mixing, the method of placing and compaction used and the
type of formwork intended for use in the work shall be used.
13. Prior to the commencement of each section of work, provide on Site trial tests to include: 1 mass
concrete foundation, 1 first floor beam, 1 ground bearing slab panel, 1 concrete wall panel, 1
suspended poured-in-place slab panel.
14. All costs connected with the preparations of trial-mixes and the design of the job-mixes shall be
borne by the Contractor.
15. When the mix has been accepted by the Contract Administrator, no variations shall be made in the
proportions, the source of the cement and aggregates, or in the type, size and grading zone of the
latter without the consent of the Contract Administrator who prior to giving such consent may require
further tests to be made.
16. The trials shall be undertaken to determine the optimum quantities of constituents required to obtain
the desired properties of the concrete.
17. Additional Trial Mixes: During production the Contractor shall carry out such trial mixes and tests
as shall be required by the Contract Administrator, before changes shall be made in the materials
or in the proportions of materials to be used.
18. Aggregates: Single-sized coarse aggregates and fine aggregates or suitably graded all-in
aggregates shall be used. The relative proportions of the coarse and fine aggregates to be used
shall be determined on the basis of the trial mixes.
2.3
a)
The overall grading of the aggregates shall be such as to produce concrete of the specified
quality that shall work readily into position without segregation or exhibiting a depth of bleed
water in excess of 0.5% of the height of the pour.
b)
The overall grading shall be controlled throughout the work ensuring that it conforms closely
to that assumed in the selection of the mix proportions.
c)
The Contractor shall measure the free moisture content of the aggregate prior to batching, at
regular interval and not less than twice per day. The free moisture in the aggregate shall be
allowed for in the quantity of water to be added to the concrete.
d)
Copies of the results of routine control tests carried out by the aggregate producer shall be
retained by the Contractor.
A.
Slumps
1.
The workability of the fresh concrete shall be such that the concrete is suitable for the conditions
of handling and placing as described in this Section ensuring that after compaction it surrounds all
reinforcement and completely fills the formwork. Workability shall be measured for each batch in
accordance with BS EN 12350: Part 2 for traditionally placed concrete or in accordance with ASTM
C1611 for self-compacting concrete and shall be within the following limits of the required values:
Slump 25mm 1/ 3 of the required value, whichever is the greater.

01 June 2016
033000 / 15
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
B.
2.
Where proposed cohesive mixes provide lower values of slump, submit criteria to the Contract
Administrator for acceptance prior to implementation, acceptance is contingent upon adequate
compaction of formwork being demonstrated.
3.
Concrete which is not in accordance with the required workability shall not be used in the permanent
work.
Admixtures: Admixtures used in the concrete shall be in accordance with ASTM C494 and ASTM C260,
and with the following requirements:
1.
The quantity and method of adding admixtures shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and in all cases shall be subject to the review and comment of the Contract
Administrator.
2.
Any admixture which contains a chloride ion content in excess of 2% by weight of admixture or
0.03% by weight of the cementitious content of the concrete mix shall not be used.
3.
Calcium chloride shall not be used in any form.
4.
Admixtures shall be stored and used in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. The
shelf life of any admixture shall not be exceeded. Any admixture, which has exceeded its shelf life,
shall be immediately removed from the work.
5.
The Contractor shall demonstrate the action of any proposed admixture by means of trial mixes,
and acceptance of the Contract Administrator.
C.
Kickers: Kickers shall not be less than 150mm high.
D.
Aggregates: Aggregates shall be assembled in such quantities that sufficient material is available to
complete any continuous pour necessary for any element. The batching plant shall be of adequate size
to permit the stockpiling of sufficient, un-segregated materials, having proper and uniform moisture
content, to ensure continuous and uniform operation. Aggregates shall enter the mixer in a manner to
ensure that no matter foreign to the concrete or matter capable of changing the desired proportions is
included. In the event 2 or more sizes or types of coarse or fine aggregates shall be used on the same
project, only 1 size or type of each aggregate may be used on one continuous concrete pour unless
otherwise accepted by the Contract Administrator.
E.
Batching and Mixing

1.
Cast-in-place concrete shall be ready mixed concrete, batched off the Site, generally as defined in
ACI 301 but as amended in this Section.
2.
Concrete shall only be mixed at a depot to the acceptance of the Contract Administrator.
3.
Unless accepted by the Contract Administrator, the concrete shall be mixed and the water added
to the mixer at the depot. No additional water shall be added at any stage from batching to placing.
When the Contract Administrator is asked to accept dry batching, the Contractor shall demonstrate
that appropriate steps shall be taken to ensure the quality, consistency and strength of the concrete
as placed and that the water shall be added to the dry ingredients under properly controlled conditions
to the acceptance of the Contract Administrator prior to implementation.
4.
The quantities of cement, aggregate and water shall be measured by weight.
5.
Separate weighing machines shall be used for cementitious materials. Alternatively, cementitious
materials may be measured by using a whole number of bags in each mix.
6.
Cement and aggregates shall be measured to the tolerances stated in mixing concrete below.
7.
The mixing water shall be measured by weight or by volume. In either case the measurement shall
be accurate to within 1% throughout the range of use.
8.
All admixtures shall be measured by weight.
9.
Admixtures shall be dispensed by a system to the acceptance of the admixture supplier and the
Contract Administrator and shall be capable of dispensing liquid to an accuracy of 1% by volume.

01 June 2016
033000 / 16
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
10. The quantity of water shall be adjusted to make allowance for the free moisture content of the
aggregate.
11. The batch weight of aggregate shall be adjusted to allow for the free moisture content of the aggregate
being used.
12. All measuring equipment shall be maintained in a clean and serviceable condition. The accuracy
of measuring equipment shall be checked over the range to be used, when set up at each Site, and
maintained thereafter. Weekly checks on the accuracy of the weigh batching equipment shall be
made unless otherwise accepted by the Contract Administrator.
13. The accuracy of the equipment shall fall within the following limits:
a)
The measurement of the cementitious material shall be 3% of the quantity of cementitious

material in each batch.
b)
The measurement of the water shall be 3% of the quantity of water in each batch.
c)
The measurement of the aggregates shall be 3% of the total quantity of aggregate in each
batch.
d)
The measurement of the admixture shall be 5% of the quantity of admixture in each batch.
14. Mixing Equipment:

a)
The mixer shall be operated in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Care shall
be taken to ensure that all components shall be thoroughly mixed and in particular any
admixtures shall be uniformly distributed throughout the batch.
b)
The mixing blades of pan mixers shall be maintained within the tolerances specified by the
manufacturer of the mixer and the blades shall be replaced when it is no longer possible to
maintain the tolerances by adjustment.
c)
Adequate standby equipment shall be available ensuring that in the event of a breakdown of
mixing plant, critical concreting operations shall not be interrupted.
d)
The mixing time shall be established during the trials but shall be not less than that
recommended by the manufacturer of the mixer, subject to the Contract Administrator's review
and comment of the trial mixes.
e)
Mixers that have been out of use for more than 30 minutes shall be thoroughly cleaned before
any fresh concrete is mixed. The first batch of concrete through the mixer shall then contain
only two-thirds of the normal quantity of coarse aggregate. The mixer shall be cleaned prior
to mixing of a concrete containing a different cement or binder type.
f)
Unless otherwise accepted by the Contract Administrator, concrete shall be mixed in a batch
type mixer manufactured in accordance with BS 1305. Where appropriate the batch capacity,
method of loading, mixing time and drum speed shall conform to the details furnished in
accordance with the requirements of BS 3963 for the mix which corresponds most closely to
the mix proportions being used. The mixing blades of pan mixers shall be maintained within
the tolerances specified by the manufacturer of the mixer and the blades shall be replaced
when it is no longer possible to maintain the tolerance by adjustment. The period of mixing,
judged from the time that all the ingredients including water shall be in the mixing drum shall
be as ordered by the Contract Administrator's representative and shall be in accordance with
the mixer manufacturer's recommendations.
15. The quantities of all of the constituents, the temperatures of the cement and water when added to
the mix, the time of mixing and the temperature of the mixed concrete immediately before discharge
shall be recorded for each batch.
16. The temperature of the cement when added to the mix shall not exceed 30C.
17. The temperature of the concrete immediately after mixing shall not exceed 30C and 25C for large
pours.
18. No re-mixing of partially hardened concrete with or without additional cement, aggregate or water
shall be allowed.
01 June 2016
033000 / 17
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
19. The stockpiles and the mixing plant shall be protected from the accumulation of dust.
20. The weighing and water-dispensing mechanisms shall be maintained in good order. Their accuracy
shall be maintained within the tolerances described in BS 1305 and checked against accurate
weights and volumes when required by the Contract Administrator.
21. The mass of the fine and coarse aggregates shall be adjusted to allow for the free water contained
in them. The water to be added to the mix shall be reduced by the quantity of free water contained
in the fine and coarse aggregates, which shall be determined by the Contractor by a method accepted
by the Contract Administrator immediately before mixing begins and further as the Contract
Administrator requires.
22. The method of discharge from the mixer shall be such as to cause no segregation whether partial
or otherwise of the concrete materials.
23. Ensure that the constituent materials of the concrete shall be sufficiently cool to prevent the concrete
from stiffening in the interval between its discharge from the mixer and compaction in its final position.
Precautions shall include the shading of aggregate stockpiles and the use of chilled water.
24. The concrete shall be carried in purpose-made agitators, operating continuously, or truck mixers.
The concrete shall be compacted and in its final position within 1 hour of the introduction of cement
to the aggregates, unless a longer time is accepted by the Contract Administrator. The time of such
introduction shall be recorded on the delivery note together with the weight of the constituents of
each mix.
25. Truck mixer units and their mixing and discharge performance shall be to the satisfaction of the
Contract Administrator. Mixing shall continue for the number and rate of revolutions recommended
in the manufacturer's instructions, in the absence of which mixing shall continue for not less than
100 revolutions at a rate of not less than 7 revolutions per minute.
26. Pumping concrete through delivery pipes may be permitted but only with the prior acceptance of
27. Re-mixing of concrete which has commenced to set shall not be allowed and in no case shall such
concrete be used in the work.
F.
Adjustment to mix proportions: Adjustments to mix proportions shall be made in order to minimize the
variability of strength and to maintain the target mean strength. Such adjustments shall not be taken to
imply any change in the current margin.
G.
Change of current margin: When required, recalculate the current margin. The recalculated value shall
then be adopted and it shall become the current margin for concrete produced subsequently.
H.
Construction Joints: In general, incorporate both horizontal and vertical construction joints in accordance
with typical details indicated on the Design Drawings.
1.
Concreting shall be carried out continuously up to construction joints.
2.
Construction joints shall be prepared by removing the surface skin and laitance of the previous pour
by light mechanical means. Hardened surfaces shall not be `hacked'.
3.
Formwork retarding agents shall not be used without the acceptance of the Contract Administrator.
4.
The joint surface shall be clean and damp but free of standing water immediately before any fresh
concrete is placed against it. Wetting shall be undertaken sufficiently early to allow the construction
joint to be saturated but free from standing water. The practice of first placing a layer of mortar or
grout when concreting joints shall not be undertaken.
5.
The position and detail of any construction joints not described in the Design Drawings shall be
subject to the acceptance of the Contract Administrator and shall be so arranged to minimize the
formation of shrinkage cracks.

01 June 2016
033000 / 18
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
6.
The timetable for the depositing of concrete between construction joints shall be so arranged that
no face of concrete shall be left for more than 30 minutes before fresh concrete is deposited against
it. Pauses for meals, servicing of machines, changes of shift, and similar events and the distribution
of concrete among the positions where work may be proceeding simultaneously shall be carefully
organized to ensure that the above mentioned interval shall not be exceeded to the acceptance of
7.
When the continuous placement of concrete in any structural member is interrupted or delayed, for
any reason, for a period longer than 30 minutes, the Contract Administrator shall declare such joint
a cold joint and the Contractor shall immediately remove the previously partially placed concrete
from the forms. The Contract Administrator may suspend all or any part of subsequent concrete
work until he deems the Contractor has corrected the cause for the cold joint occurrence.
8.
Where dowels, reinforcing bars or other adequate ties shall not be required by the Design Drawings,
keys shall be as made by embedding water soaked beveled woods in soft concrete. The key shall
be sized as directed by the Contract Administrator and shall be removed when the concrete has
set. In resuming work the surface of the concrete previously placed shall be thoroughly cleaned of
dirt, scum, laitence or other soft material with stiff wire brushes, and if deemed necessary by the
Contract Administrator, shall be grit blasted followed by pre-wetting for a period of at least 12 hours
after which concreting of the next pour may proceed.
9.
The surface of lifts of concrete walls and columns shall be horizontal and if the formwork extends
above the joint on the exposed face, it shall be cleaned of adhering concrete before the next lift is
placed. The concrete placed immediately above a horizontal construction joint shall be a modified
mix with the same properties as the regular mix but with a lower coarse aggregate content. It shall
be thoroughly compacted and worked against the existing concrete.
10. Where sections of the work shall be carried out in pours the reinforcement projecting from the pour
being cast shall be adequately supported to prevent movement of the bars during the casting and
setting of the concrete.
11. Expansion joints shall be constructed at the locations of the materials and to the dimensions indicated
2.4
MATERIALS
A.
Cement, General Requirements

1.
The cement for the project concrete work shall be Portland Cement obtained from manufacturers
certified in writing and shall be as described under one of the following headings:
a)
OPC (Ordinary Portland Cement): Cement in accordance with ASTM C150 Type I, but
containing not less than 7% and not more than 12% by weight of tricalcium aluminate (C3A).
b)
MSRPC (Moderate Sulfate Resisting Portland Cement): Cement in accordance with ASTM
C150 Type II, but containing not less than 5% and not more than 9% by weight of tricalcium
aluminate (C3A). In either case the cement lie shall not contain more than 2.7% by weight of
sulfur trioxide (S03).
c)
SRPC (Sulfate Resisting Portland Cement): Cement in accordance with ASTM C150 Type V,
but containing not more than 4% by weight of tricalcium aluminate (C3A).
2.
In addition to the above requirements, the cement for the project concrete work shall have the acid
soluble alkali level measured as (Na2O + 0.658 K2O) and shall not exceed 0.6% by weight. Also
the heat of hydration at 7 days in accordance with ASTM C186 shall not exceed 290 kJ/ kg and the
fineness (specific) in accordance with BS EN 196: Part 6 shall not be less than 280 m2/ kg, where
measured by the Air Permeability method.
3.
Cement shall be free flowing and free of lumps. It shall be supplied in the manufacturer's sealed
and unbroken bags or in bulk.
4.
Cement which has become hardened or lumpy or fails in accordance with this Section in any way
shall be removed immediately from the Site.
5.
High alumina cement shall not be used.
6.
The Contract Administrator may order additional tests on cement and the Contractor shall draw the
necessary samples from the stocks on Site.

01 June 2016
033000 / 19
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
7.
B.
Cement which has been deleteriously affected by moisture shall not be used in the work and shall
be immediately removed from the Site.
Aggregates
1.
Except as permitted to be modified within this Section the aggregate, both fine and coarse, for all
types of concrete shall be in accordance with BS EN 12620 'Aggregates for concrete' and meet the
requirements of ASTM C33.
2.
The aggregates used in the permanent work shall be naturally occurring crushed materials obtained
only from certified and accepted sources. Aggregates subject to high drying shrinkage shall not be
used. Aggregates shall be clean hard, durable and shall not contain iron pyrites, iron oxides, mica,
shale, coal or other laminar, soft or porous materials or hollow shells.
3.
The maximum size of the coarse aggregate shall be 20mm, except where mass concrete is used,
or where the spacing of reinforcement allows a larger aggregate size to be successfully placed and
compacted. The Contract Administrator shall accept any use of aggregate greater than 20mm prior
to the implementation on the project. The maximum size of the aggregate shall not be larger than
20% of the narrowest dimension between sides of the member for which the concrete is to be used
and 75% of the maximum clear distance between reinforcing bars or the side form.
4.
Fine Aggregate shall be clean sharp natural and/ or crushed sand and shall be in accordance with
the requirements within BS EN 12620.
5.
Beach sand or marine dredged aggregates shall not be permitted for use in concrete mixes.
6.
Coarse aggregate shall be crushed aggregate obtained from a quarry accepted by the Contract
Administrator.
7.
Unless otherwise indicated, by the Contract Administrator, coarse aggregate shall be delivered to
the batching plant in separate sizes according to the maximum specified aggregate size for each
grade of concrete.
8.
Coarse aggregate shall be prepared as single sized aggregate and blended to produce normal size
grading. The combined grading shall be within the appropriate grading limits given in BS EN 12620.
9.
Mechanically washing aggregate to remove salts and other impurities in order to meet the
requirements within this Section shall be acceptable.
10. Refer to the following tables within Appendix 033000 for Aggregates Table A 'Table of Limits for
Physical, Chemical and Mechanical Properties of Aggregates for Concrete' and Aggregates Table
B 'Table of Frequency of Routine Tests on Aggregates' for additional requirements.
C.
Water
1.
Water used for mixing and curing of concrete shall be clean and free from salt and other impurities
to the acceptance of the Contract Administrator.
2.
Water used for mixing and curing of concrete shall have a pH value in the basic range of 7 to 9 and
the soluble solids shall not exceed the following limits:
a)
Total dissolved solids: 2000 mg/ l.
b)
Chlorides (NaC2): 250 mg/ l.
c)
Sulfate (SO3): 350 mg/ l.
d)
Alkali Carbonates & Bicarbonates: 500 mg/ l.
3.
The temperature of mixing water for concrete should not be less than 5C nor more than 25C.
Water may be cooled by the gradual addition of chilled water or flaked ice where this is the case
no ice particles shall be present when the water is added to the mix. The ice used shall be the
product of water which complies with the above acceptance criteria.
4.
Water shall be potable and shall be in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C94.

01 June 2016
033000 / 20
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
D.
E.
5.
Water direct from the sea shall not be used.
6.
Where water for use in the work is not available from a public utility it shall be in accordance with
the specific requirements of ASTM C94
7.
The water shall be clean and free from industrial wastes and other deleterious material. Water which
is highly colored or which has a pronounced odor or in which algae is growing shall not be used.
Admixtures
1.
Admixtures shall be used strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions unless otherwise
indicated by the Contract Administrator.
2.
The shelf life of the admixture shall not be exceeded where this is the case the admixture shall be
immediately removed from Site.
3.
Calcium chloride shall not be used. Any admixture containing chlorides or sulfates shall not be used
without the prior consent of the Contract Administrator. The supplier shall demonstrate to the Contract
Administrator that any admixture or ingredient used, or their combination, does not detrimentally
affect the strength or other properties of the concrete.
4.
Admixtures shall be in accordance with the following standards, unless otherwise indicated and
accepted by the Contract Administrator: ASTM C494, ASTM C260, ASTM C1017, BS EN 480 and
BS EN 934: Part 2, BS EN 934: Part 6, BS EN 480: Part 4, BS EN 480: Part 5, BS EN 480: Part 6,
BS EN 480: Part 8, BS EN 480: Part 10, BS EN 480: Part 11 and BS EN 480: Part 12 as applicable.
5.
Air entrainment agents shall be such that the air content can be maintained within the limits specified
even if the mixing time is extended to 30 minutes.
6.
Admixtures from different suppliers shall not be used in the same concrete mix. Two or more
admixtures from the same supplier may be used subject to successful trial mixes and acceptance
by the supplier and the Contract Administrator.
Ready Mix Concrete

1.
Concrete Mixes: Provide concrete mixes in accordance with the requirements as indicated in the
structural General Notes drawing within the Design Drawings.
a)
Strength Requirements: Compressive strength requirements shall be indicated on the Design

Drawings and shall be based on cube tests at indicated age. Concrete made with high-early
strength cement shall have a 7 day strength equal to the specified 28 day strength for concrete
made with Type III Portland cement.
1.
Type III Portland cement shall be used only where specifically noted on the Design
Drawings.
b)
Cement Content for Slabs: Not less than those indicated in ACI 301.
c)
Water/ Cementitious Material Ratio: Not to exceed limits indicated on the Design Drawings.
d)
Air Entrainment: Use air entraining admixture in exterior exposed concrete as indicated on
the Design Drawings.
e)
Slump: Determine slump. Each concrete mix submitted shall have the slump specified. Slump
tolerances shall meet the requirements of ACI 117.
f)
Admixtures: Concrete may contain admixtures, such as water reducers, super plasticizers, or
set retarding agents to provide special properties to the concrete. When admixtures shall be
specified or required for workability for particular parts of the work, use the types specified.
g)
Chloride Ion: Maximum water soluble chloride ion concentrations in hardened concrete at
ages 28 to 42 days contributed from the ingredients, including water, aggregates, cementitious
materials and admixtures, shall not exceed a maximum, by weight of cement, of 0.08%, in
accordance with ACI 222R, 'Table 3.1-Chloride limits for new construction'.

01 June 2016
033000 / 21
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
2.
F.
Ready-mixed concrete shall be in accordance with this Section, including the following special
requirements:
a)
The concrete shall be carried in purpose-made agitators, operating continuously, or truck

mixers. The concrete shall be compacted in its final position within 2 hours of the introduction
of cement to the aggregate, unless a longer or shorter time is accepted by the Contract
Administrator. The time of such introduction shall be recorded on the Delivery Note together
with the weights of the constituents of each mix.
b)
When truck-mixed concrete is used, water shall be added under supervision either at the Site
or at the central batching plant as accepted by the Contract Administrator, but under no
circumstances shall water be added in transit.
Grout: Non-shrink grout shall be premixed 'Emaco' non-shrink grout as manufactured by Master Builders
Technologies Ltd or acceptable equivalent.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Ensure that no water is present to those areas in which concrete shall be placed. No flooding water is
permitted on foundation beds and skim coats where footings and other concrete work shall be placed.
B.
Ensure that foundations bear on undisturbed soil or on accepted compacted fill. If bearing surfaces shall
not be acceptable because conditions shall not meet those anticipated during design, make adjustments
only as directed by the Contract Administrator. No extra payment shall be made for adjustments made
necessary because of damage to bearing surfaces caused by weather, traffic, or by presence of adjacent
construction or services incorporated in the work.
C.
Ensure that compacted fill has been placed to meet specified requirements.
D.
Keep excavations dry while placing concrete. Pump as required.
E.
Notify the Contract Administrator of unsatisfactory conditions. Proceed with installation only after
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Reinforcement shall be stored in such a manner that it is off the ground, and kept free of mud and foreign
matter.
B.
Reinforcement shall be fixed rigidly in position and secured against displacement.
C.
A sufficient number of intersecting and lapping bars shall be tied using tying wire to prevent movement
of the reinforcement. The ends of tying wire, tying devices and clips shall not encroach into the cover
to the reinforcement.
D.
Laps and joints in reinforcement shall be made only at the specified positions and by the specified method.
E.
Sufficient numbers of cover spacers, chairs, supports and spacers other than cover spacers shall be
provided to maintain the reinforcement in the correct location and to maintain the specified cover at all
positions. Cover spacers, chairs, supports and spacers other than cover spacers shall be placed at a
maximum spacing of 1.5m. Chairs, supports and spacers other than cover spacers shall be positioned
adjacent to or above cover spacers and shall have at least the same cover as the reinforcement.
F.
Reinforcement which is to be left exposed shall be protected by a method accepted by the Contract
Administrator. This includes the protection of starter bars.
G.
The cover to reinforcement shall be within 5mm of the specified cover.
H.
Before concrete is placed, all reinforcing steel, accessories and hangers, inserts, conduits, sleeves, and
outlets, shall be securely tied in place and reviewed.
I.
All dirt, clips, sawdust, water, and other foreign matter shall be removed from forms and reinforcing steel.

01 June 2016
033000 / 22
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
J.
The bottom of excavations for footings and foundations shall be undisturbed soil or compacted fill, clean,
free from water, properly leveled off and accepted by the Contract Administrator prior to the placing of
concrete.
K.
Concreting Final Preparation and Inspection

1.
The Contract Administrator shall accept final preparation work prior to concrete placement.
2.
Formwork and thermal protection shall be left in place until the difference between maximum concrete
temperature and minimum ambient temperature is less than 20C. Do not commence stripping
formwork or thermal protection without the acceptance of the Contract Administrator.
3.
Prior to commencing work with pumped concrete the Contractor shall define the following:
4.
3.3
a)
The extent of each pour and the maximum length of pipeline that shall be used.
b)
The special measures that shall be taken to reduce the possibility of early shrinkage cracking.
c)
Details of plant and labor that shall be employed including make, model of pumps, pipe
diameters and the manufacturer's recommendations regarding maximum height and reach of
equipment.
d)
Details of the proposed mix design demonstrating its conformity with this Section. Provide such
spare items of plant as the Contract Administrator considers necessary to avoid delays due to
mechanical breakdown.
e)
Precautions shall be taken to avoid depositing water or grout in the work during starting-up
operations or in flushing or clearing of the pipe-line. The concrete shall pass through the pipeline in not more than 20 minutes.
Extent of Pours: The limit of individual pours and the height of lifts shall be as accepted by the
Contract Administrator. The sequence of pours shall be arranged to minimize thermal and shrinkage
strains.
INSTALLATION
A.
General, Workmanship
1.
B.
Provide a competent and experienced supervisor or foreman who shall be present on the Site
continuously throughout each working day.
Placing Concrete
1.
No concrete shall be mixed or placed when the light is insufficient, unless an adequate artificial
lighting system is operated and such night work is permitted by the Contract Administrator.
2.
As a minimum requirement, preparations for concreting shall follow the guidelines given in ACI 305R.
3.
The concrete-mixing plant, mixers, pipelines, pumps, chutes and transport equipment shall be
shaded and/ or painted white. L Pump lines and other surfaces shall be kept cool by insulating them
or by covering them with a hessian layer kept damp by spraying with water.
4.
Surfaces on which concrete is to be placed shall be moist but free of standing water at the time of
concreting. This shall be achieved by spraying the forms and reinforcement prior to placing concrete.
Shading shall be provided to prevent solar heat gain of forms and reinforcement.
5.
When daytime temperature and drying conditions shall be critical the concreting shall be scheduled
to begin during the late afternoon to prevent the occurrence of severe thermal effects. Consideration
should also be given to night time concreting.
6.
Give the Contract Administrator at least 48 hours written notice before concreting to allow time for
the final inspection.
7.
The planned casting shall be made continuously without stopping.

01 June 2016
033000 / 23
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
8.
Concrete shall be conveyed to the place of final deposit by methods which shall prevent the
segregation or loss of material.
9.
The methods of transporting and placing concrete shall be subject to the review and comment of
the Contract Administrator and shall be in accordance with ACI 318M, unless otherwise required
by this Section.
10. Concrete shall be compacted in its final position within 30 minutes of discharge from the mixer
unless carried in purpose-made agitators, operating continuously, when the time shall be within 2
hours of the introduction of cement to the aggregates and within 30 minutes of discharge from the
agitator, provided that the concrete is sufficiently workable.
11. Conveying and placing equipment shall be such that when concreting has started, the depositing
of concrete shall be at such a rate and of such sequence that the concrete is at all times sufficiently
plastic to ensure proper bonding of successive layers or panels. Fresh concrete shall not be placed
against poured-in-place concrete which has been in position for more than 30 minutes unless the
poured-in-place concrete has been kept damp with a layer of wet hessian and protected from the
weather. When poured-in-place concrete has been in place for 4 hours or if the concrete has
reached its initial set, no further concrete shall be placed against it for a further 24 hours and a
construction joint shall be formed.
12. Conveying and placing equipment shall be kept free from hardened concrete and foreign material
and shall be cleaned at frequent intervals.
13. Concrete shall be deposited in the forms as close as it is practicable to its final position to avoid
segregation due to rehandling or flowing and in approximately horizontal lifts to maintain a level
surface.
14. Concrete shall not be dropped into place from a height exceeding 1m except with the use of trunking
and/ or chutes. When trunking or chutes shall be used they shall be kept clean and used in such
a way as to avoid segregation.
15. While concrete is being placed it shall be consolidated thoroughly and uniformly by means of tamping,
hand tools, vibrators or finishing machines to secure a dense, homogeneous structure, close bond
with reinforcement and with smooth formed surfaces. Internal vibrators shall be used wherever
practicable. The placing and compaction of concrete shall be carried out in such a way as not to
cause displacement or other disturbance to reinforcement or formwork or to damage the faces of
formwork. The reinforcement projecting above the lift shall be adequately supported so as to prevent
movement of the bars during the casting and setting of the concrete.
16. Internal vibrators shall be applied at the point of deposit in the areas of freshly placed concrete,
allowed to sink by their own weight in the concrete until they penetrate into the previous layer of
concrete. They shall be withdrawn immediately at the same speed at which they sank, moved
approximately 300mm to a new location and the process repeated. Extreme care shall be taken
to ensure that internal type vibrators do not disturb the reinforcing steel or the forms.
17. Concrete, when deposited, shall have a temperature of not less than 20C.
18. Reinforcement which is hot enough to dry the concrete on contact shall be cooled by spraying it
with mixing-quality water immediately before concrete is placed, surplus water should not be left
standing in the formwork.
19. Concrete shall be thoroughly compacted by vibration, during the operation of placing, and thoroughly
worked around the reinforcement, embedded fixtures and into corners of the formwork to form a
solid mass free from voids. When vibrators shall be used to compact the concrete, vibration shall
be applied continuously during the placing of each batch of concrete until the expulsion of air has
practically ceased and in a manner that does not promote segregation of the constituents.
20. Concrete shall be deposited in horizontal layers to a compacted depth not exceeding 450mm where
internal vibrators shall be used or 150mm in all other cases.
21. Surfaces upon which concrete is to be placed shall be clean and free from standing water. Loose,
shattered or unsound concrete fragments shall be removed.
22. A sufficient number of vibrators in serviceable condition shall be on Site to ensure that spare
equipment is always available in the event of breakdowns.

01 June 2016
033000 / 24
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
23. Vibration shall not be applied by way of the reinforcement. Where vibrators of the immersion type
shall be used, contact with reinforcement and all inserts shall be avoided as far as is practicable.
Internal vibrators shall operate at not less than 10,000 cycles per minute and external vibrators at
not less than 3,000 cycles per minute. Vibration shall not be used as a means of distributing heaped
concrete into position.
24. Concrete should not be re-vibrated.
25. Concrete shall not be subjected to disturbance between 2 hours and 24 hours after compaction.
Whenever vibration shall be applied externally, the design of formwork and disposition of vibrators
shall ensure efficient compaction and the avoidance of surface blemishes.
26. The method of transport and placing concrete shall be to the acceptance of the Contract
Administrator. Concrete shall be so transported and placed that contamination, segregation or loss
of the constituent materials does not occur.
27. Prior to placing any concrete for reinforced elements on natural surfaces a blinding layer of concrete
shall be laid to a minimum of 50mm thickness unless otherwise indicated on the Design Drawings.
Blinding shall be suitably cured prior to subsequent concrete placement. The blinding shall be clean
and free from any dust or impurities prior to subsequent concrete placement.
28. No concrete shall be placed in a foundation until the extent of excavation and the character of
bearing material have been verified by the Contractor and accepted by the Contract Administrator.
29. No concrete shall be placed in any structure until the placement of reinforcing steel and the adequacy
of the forms and falsework have been accepted.
30. Concrete shall not be placed in any part of the work until the Contract Administrator's acceptance
has been given. If concrete has not started within 24 hours of such acceptance being given, review
shall again be requested. Concreting shall then proceed continuously over the area between
construction joints.
C.
D.
Concrete in Hot Weather

1.
Hot weather shall be defined as any combination of high air temperature, low relative humidity and
wind velocity tending to impair the quality of fresh or hardened concrete. The climatic factors affecting
concrete in hot weather shall be high air temperature and reduced relative humidity, the effects of
which may be considerably more pronounced with increases in wind velocity. The effects of hot
weather on concrete shall be most critical during periods of rising temperature, falling relative
humidity or both.
2.
When trunking or chutes shall be used they shall be kept clean and used in such a way as to avoid
segregation. Where steep slopes shall be required for placing concrete with chutes, the chutes shall
be equipped with baffle boards or be in short lengths that reverse the direction of the movement.
Chutes and the use of chutes shall be accepted by the Contract Administrator. All chutes shall be
kept clean and free from coating of hardened concrete by thoroughly flushing with water after each
run. The water used for flushing shall be discharged clear of the concrete already in place.
3.
Concrete shall not be placed using chutes or conduits of aluminum or aluminum alloy.
4.
No concrete shall be placed in flowing water. Underwater concrete shall be placed in position by
tremie or by pipeline from the mixer.
5.
Where the concrete is placed by the tremie, its size and method of operation shall be in accordance
with BS EN 1997: Part 1. During and after concreting under water, pumping or dewatering operations
in the immediate vicinity shall be suspended until the Contract Administrator permits them to be
continued.
6.
Measures shall be taken to avoid premature stiffening of concrete placed in contact with hot, dry
surfaces. Surfaces including reinforcement against which concrete is to be placed shall be shielded
against the direct rays of the sun and shall be sprayed with water to prevent excessive absorption
by the surfaces of water from the fresh concrete.
7.
A complete record shall be kept of the date, time, temperature and conditions of placing the concrete
in each portion of the work and shall be available for inspection by the Contract Administrator at
any time.
Hot Weather Protection Requirements

01 June 2016
033000 / 25
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
1.
Attention shall be drawn to specific clauses in this Section that relate to environmental conditions
which affect concreting and curing, primarily the temperature and occurrence of drying winds. In
addition, no concreting shall be attempted during periods of inclement weather including storms
and dust storms, at the discretion of the Contract Administrator. Where ambient daytime temperature
is greater than 35C concreting shall not take place until after 17:00 hours.
2.
Precautions shall be taken by the Contractor to ensure the maximum temperature of the concrete
mix at time of placing is less than 30C, and 25C for large pours. The constituents, including
reinforcement, may be shaded from the sun prior to the pour. Aggregates shall be stored in shaded
bunkers. Cold, potable water shall be sprayed on the stockpiles to further reduce temperature.
Precautions and monitoring shall be undertaken to ensure there is no significant increase in the
level of dust, chlorides or sulfates present in the aggregate through this procedure.
3.
During transportation, delivery and placing of concrete the Contractor shall take precautions to
prevent evaporation of water from the concrete and to minimize the increase in temperature through
exposure to sunlight. To this end, concreting shall be carried out at such times that avoid the hottest
parts of the day.
4.
Formwork shall be examined before concreting and shall be clean, correctly and rigidly fastened in
position, and free of dust or other materials. The formwork shall be kept as cool as possible before
and during concreting, and, where practicable, shall be shaded from direct sunlight. The formwork
shall be leak proof and not move during concreting.
5.
When the rate of evaporation of surface moisture from concrete is expected to approach 1 kg/ m/
hr, using Fig. 2.1.5 in ACI 305R, or when the shade air temperature is 35C and rising, precautions
shall be taken, including the following:
a)
Dampening the forms.
b)
Reducing the concrete temperature to the lowest practical level by procedures such as:
1.
Shading the aggregate.
2.
Cooling the mixing water before use.
c)
Screening the mixing plant and transporting vehicles from wind, rain and sun.
d)
Erecting wind breaks and sunshades at the concrete placing location.
e)
Reducing the time between the placing of the concrete and the start of curing to the minimum
possible.
f)
Minimizing evaporation (particularly during the first few hours subsequent to placing the
concrete) by suitable means such as applying moisture by fog spraying.
6.
Demonstrate that all precautions shall be available for use prior to any concreting operations. All
precautions to be taken shall be subject to the Contract Administrator's acceptance.
7.
In the event that conditions become such that these requirements cannot be met, concreting shall
be suspended immediately and not resumed until the requirements can be met again. Under such
circumstances, additional precautions may have been taken to avoid the temperatures being
exceeded on future pours.
8.
Ensure that the concrete work is not adversely affected by the climate factors, namely, higher air
temperature, low relative humidity and wind velocity. Calculations or experiments showing that the
dry bulb temperature of the placed concrete, taking into consideration the heat of hydration of
cement, does not exceed 38C and that the rate of water evaporation does not exceed 980 g/ m
per hour shall be submitted for the Contract Administrator's review and comment.
9.
Air concrete thermometers shall be kept on the Site. Concrete shall not be placed if the shade
temperature exceeds 36C or the concrete temperature exceeds 30C, and 25C for large pours.
10. Special precautions shall be taken if the shade temperature exceeds 28C. Between May and
August inclusive, placing of concrete shall not be done after 09:00 hours and before 12:00 hours,
time stated as 24 hour clock, and if necessary shall be carried out at night in which case, adequate
lighting shall be arranged.

01 June 2016
033000 / 26
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
11. When the air temperature is expected to approach 38C or the rate of water evaporation is expected
to reach 980g/ m per hour, precautions consisting of dampening the subgrade and the forms,
erecting sunshades and windbreaks and reducing time between placement of concrete and start
of curing shall be taken.
12. Take precautionary measures to prevent or to minimize undesirable hot weather effects, in
accordance with ACI 318M except as modified in this Section. Lower the water temperature by
mechanical refrigeration or by mixing water with crushed ice, or by pre-cooling the aggregates
ensuring that the temperature of the concrete as delivered shall not exceed 26C for large pour
construction and 30C for other concrete structures. Ice, when used as part of and for cooling
mixing water, shall be limited to a maximum of 90% of the total water content. Ice shall be completely
melted in mixing water prior to adding water to the mixer.
13. Evaporation shall be minimized, particularly during the first few hours subsequent to placing
concrete, by suitable means such as applying moisture by fog spraying or any other means accepted
by the Contract Administrator. A water-reducing, set-retarding chemical admixture in accordance
with the requirements of ASTM C494 and ASTM C260 shall be used in varying proportions under
different air temperature conditions. The admixture shall meet the requirements specified within
this Section. During the placing of all concrete exposed or subject to rapid evaporation from drying
conditions, including hot weather, drying winds, and sunlight, work shall be protected, immediately
following screeding, with a protective application of "Confirm" or acceptable equivalent.
14. Material shall be sprayed over the entire surface of fresh, plastic concrete in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations following screeding at a rate of not less than 10 gallons of
sprayable solution for each 2000m of surface area, 5m per liter.
15. Sprayable solution shall be prepared to ratio of 1 part "Confirm" or acceptable equivalent to 9 parts
of water.
16. Under severe drying conditions, additional applications shall be required following completion of
finishing.
17. For all concrete sections, take precautions to limit the effects of heat of hydration.
18. Concrete temperatures shall be measured and logged continuously from the start of the pour until
instructed to stop by the Contract Administrator.
19. If temperature measurements exceed any of the criteria above then action shall be taken in
accordance with the requirements on defective concrete within this Section.
E.
Troweling and Screeding

1.
No repairs to concrete shall be made until after inspection by the Contract Administrator and then
only in strict accordance with the Contract Administrator's directions. All repairs and replacements
specified shall be executed promptly by the Contractor entirely at his expense.
2.
Immediately on removal of the forms, all surfaces shall be carefully examined and any irregularities
found in the concrete surface shall be immediately rubbed down in a manner satisfactory to the
Contract Administrator to produce a smooth, uniform and continuous surface. Blowholes shall be
filled with a cementitious mortar. Concrete containing voids, holes, honeycombing or similar
depression defects shall be completely removed and replaced to the acceptance of the Contract
Administrator.
3.
Cement mortar for filling blowholes shall consist of cement and fine aggregate together with the
minimum amount of water necessary to achieve a consistency suitable for completely filling the
blowholes.
4.
Cement mortar for filling holes left by formwork ties and components shall consist of 1 part of cement
to 3 parts of fine aggregate together with the minimum amount of water necessary to achieve a
consistency suitable for compacting the mortar into the holes; the mix shall be adequately
compensated against shrinkage by use of a suitable admixture.
5.
Concrete to be waterproofed where membrane waterproofing is required, treat as exposed finish.

Obtain the review of and comments on the finished surfaces by the waterproofing Subcontractor.
6.
Where indicated in the Design Drawings and/ or within the Specification, floor slabs to be "sealed"
shall use a sealing compound in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

01 June 2016
033000 / 27
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
F.
Finishing and Tolerances

1.
Bring tops of floors to even level or sloping surfaces as indicated in the Design Drawings.
2.
Steel trowel all floor slabs, unless otherwise indicated in the Design Drawings and within the
Specification.
3.
Finished levels shall be determined by a 3m straightedge placed anywhere on the slab in any
direction.
4.
Tolerances: The concrete work shall be constructed to an accuracy which shall permit the proper
assembly of components and installations and shall be compatible with the finish. The accuracy of
the work shall be in accordance with the following tolerances:
a)
Plan setting out, Foundations: 20mm.
b)
Sections of concrete members, up to and including 300mm thick slabs: within range of +10mm
and -5mm.
c)
Foundations, surface against ground; underside: +50mm.
d)
Foundations, top surfaces of bases and piers: 20mm.
e)
Permitted deviation on Cast-in Fastenings:
f)
1.
No fastening shall be more than 5mm from the intended position.
2.
Refer to illustrated Tolerances, Diagram 2 within Appendix 033000.
Permitted deviation on Cast-in Foundation Bolts:

1.
g)
G.
Refer to illustrated Tolerances Diagram 3 within Appendix 033000 for pre-set foundation
bolt or bolt groups and wall bolt or bolt group deviation tolerance requirements.
The thickness of a slab shall not be less than 95% of the nominal thickness specified. Where
stated on the Design Drawings, slabs shall be laid to the specified falls. Gaps and slots for
sealant shall satisfy the requirements specified in other Sections. The structural tolerances
shall be based upon an acceptable degree of structural alignment so as to remain within the
structural design intent. The construction tolerances shall also be coordinated with mechanical
installations, electrical installations and the internal and external finishes as detailed in each
section of the Specification.
Curing
1.
Immediately after compaction and thereafter for the curing time, concrete shall be protected against
harmful effects of weather, including rain, rapid temperature changes, the drying effects of winds
and from drying out. All materials required for curing shall be ready for use before concreting begins.
Curing shall be applied to exposed concrete immediately after striking of formwork. Large horizontal
surfaces, such as slabs or floors, shall be shaded from the sun by means of wet hessian protected
from drying by secured, overlying plastic sheeting or shade netting frames for a minimum of 7 days
after construction or for a duration accepted by the Contract Administrator.
2.
The method of curing shall prevent loss of moisture from the concrete. Curing membranes shall be
deemed acceptable by the Contract Administrator. The curing procedures shall follow those outlined
in Section 14 of CIRIA Special Publication 31, Guide to construction in the Gulf Region.
3.
Immediately after compaction and for 14 days thereafter, concrete shall be protected from the
harmful effects of weather, including rain and rapid temperature changes, and from drying out. The
methods of protection shall be subject to the Contract Administrator's acceptance. The Contract
Administrator's acceptance shall be conditional upon the proposed curing method proving to be
satisfactory on Site.
4.
On concrete surfaces, which shall be waterproofed or coated, curing membranes shall not be used
unless accepted by the Contract Administrator. Details of all curing methods to be used shall be
subject to the review of the Contract Administrator.

01 June 2016
033000 / 28
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
5.
Water used for curing purposes shall be of the same quality as mixing water for concrete. Water
used for curing purposes shall be within 5C of the placed concrete temperature.
6.
Concrete surfaces shall be kept damp using soaked hessian sheeting. Polythene sheet covering
shall be used where directed by the Contract Administrator to minimize evaporation. The hessian
sheeting shall be maintained continuously damp for a minimum period of 14 days after casting for
normal curing periods, as listed within Table C 'Table for Normal Curing Periods' in Appendix 033000.
7.
Subject to the acceptance of the Contract Administrator, curing with an acceptable proprietary
product shall be used as an alternative to curing with water except that membrane curing product
shall not be applied to surfaces of concrete from which the shuttering has been struck, until the
concrete has been inspected and accepted by the Contract Administrator.
8.
The concrete curing compound shall be of an acceptable type which shall be readily distinguishable
upon the concrete surface for at least 4 hours after application. The curing compound shall be
compatible with subsequent surface finishes. The color, if any, shall become inconspicuous within
7 days of application.
9.
Refer also to Hot Weather Protection Requirements within this Section.
10. All equipment needed for curing and protection of the concrete shall be on hand and ready for use
before actual placing is started.
11. Liquid curing membranes shall not be used on concrete surfaces against which concrete has
subsequently to be placed.
12. The maximum temperature of the concrete during curing shall not exceed 70C. For concrete with
early strength requirements the maximum temperature during curing shall not exceed 75C unless
acceptable to the Contract Administrator.
13. The curing time shall be the number of days, as listed within Table C 'Table for Normal Curing
Periods' in Appendix 033000, unless the average surface temperature of the concrete during the
required number of days falls below 10C, in which case the period of curing shall be extended until
the maturity of the concrete reaches the value given in the Table C in Appendix 033000.
14. The curing for mass concrete foundations shall be as follows, unless otherwise indicated:
a)
Curing agent applied to the top surface followed by 1000 gage polythene sheeting + 50mm
polystyrene boards + 150mm loose fill material. The fill material is to be kept damp for a period
of 14 days, flooding is not acceptable.
15. Wheeling, handling, piling or storing of any material over or on new constructed slabs is prohibited
during the first 7 days after placing concrete, except such handling or wheeling on planked runways
16. Protect all freshly placed concrete from extreme heat, running water, and mechanical shock for the
duration of the curing period.
H.
Defective Concrete
1.
The Contract Administrator shall, before placement, reject any batch of concrete which in his opinion
does not conform with the acceptable mix design or is unsatisfactory in any respect or, in the case
of concrete mixed off-Site, for which a delivery docket containing the full information as specified
within this Section is not immediately available.
2.
Concrete not meeting the requirements of the Specification, the Design Drawings and the Shop
Drawings shall be considered defective concrete.
3.
Finished lines, dimensions and surfaces shall be correct and true within tolerances specified in this
Section.
4.
Concrete not in accordance with lines, details, quality and grade specified or as indicated on the
Design Drawings shall be modified or replaced to the acceptance of the Contract Administrator.
5.
Cores shall be drilled and tested from areas in question, as directed by the Contract Administrator
or load testing of the structural elements in accordance with the requirements of the Contract
Administrator.

01 June 2016
033000 / 29
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
6.
I.
Defective concrete shall be repaired or replaced to the Contract Administrator's acceptance.
Conduits, Pipes, Openings and Inserts

1.
Electrical conduit and other pipe embedded in the concrete shall not be of a material harmful to
the concrete and shall be as follows:
a)
Not a larger outside diameter than one-third the thickness of the slab, wall or beam in which
they shall be embedded.
b)
Not spaced closer than 3 diameters on center unless otherwise indicated on the Design
Drawings.
c)
Have a concrete covering of not less than 40mm, other than at exit/ entry points.
d)
Be installed in a manner that it shall not require cutting, bending or displacement of the
reinforcement or impair the structural strength of the system.
2.
Provide and cast-in all sleeves, frameouts, inserts and fastening devices indicated on the Design
Drawings unless otherwise indicated.
3.
Openings and driven fasteners required in the concrete work after the concrete is placed shall be
accepted by the Contract Administrator prior to installation.
4.
Check the Design Drawings and Specification for the requirements of other trades as they affect
the placing of concrete and make provisions for holes through structural members and be responsible
for all inserts, sleeves, conduits, and similar items as set.
a)
J.
Inform the Contract Administrator of any conditions that arise creating deviations from
documented requirements and proceed only upon acceptance by the Contract Administrator.
Grout and Packing

1.
General, wherever the Contractor is required to obtain the acceptance of the Contract Administrator,
this shall be requested in writing and obtained before the work concerned is put in hand.
2.
Grout Types:
a)
Except where non-shrinking grout or dry packing is used, all grout or packing shall be expansive.
b)
When non-shrinking grout is specified, the material shall be stored, handled, mixed and placed
strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
3.
All work which fails in accordance with this Section shall be rectified to the acceptance of the Contract
Administrator. Work which cannot be rectified shall be broken out and reconstructed to the specified
requirement standards.
4.
Only admixtures which have been accepted by the Contract Administrator shall be used for
expanding grout and concrete. Admixtures shall be used strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
a)
Admixtures shall not be used where high strength is specified. In such cases a suitable
proprietary cementitious grout shall be used to the acceptance of the Contract Administrator.
b)
Agreement shall not be given to admixtures which contain chlorides, nitrates, iron or foaming
agents.
5.
Proprietary cementitious materials shall be supplied pre-packed in the correct proportions, ready
for the addition of water only. The constituents shall be stored in sealed containers under cover
and used in strict rotation. Each consignment shall bear a batch number, date of production and
shelf life of the material. Materials containing calcium chloride or iron shall not be accepted.
6.
The compressive strength of the grout shall not be less than that of the concrete under the base
plate or unit, with a minimum of 40N/ mm at 28 days.

01 June 2016
033000 / 30
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
7.
The testing methods and compliance requirements shall be as specified in the test procedure.
8.
Expanding grout for filling areas where the least clear dimension is less than 50mm shall be of mix
proportions 1 to 2 respectively for cement to fine aggregate, by weight. The water/ cement ratio
shall be kept to a minimum compatible with flowability.
a)
9.
Flowability shall be measured using a flowmeter and the reading shall be between 350mm
and 650mm depending on grouting method used.
Dry packing mortar or concrete shall only be used where specified by the Contract Administrator or
where its use has been accepted by the Contract Administrator. Where it is used field trials shall be
carried out as specified within this Section to prove satisfactory performance. Sufficient water shall
be added such that the slump does not exceed 5mm.
a)
For spaces with least dimension less than 75mm, the mix proportions shall be 1 to 2 respectively
for cement to fine aggregate.
b)
For spaces with a least dimension greater than 75mm the mix proportions shall be 1 to 1 to 2
respectively for cement to fine aggregate to single sized 10mm coarse aggregate.
c)
The use of admixtures shall not be permitted. The optimum water content for each batch of
material shall be determined prior to use by flow tests under steel plates under similar conditions
to the actual application. Upon removal of the test plate, each quadrant of the upper surface
of the mortar shall not contain more than 5% area of voids.
10. To avoid any alkali-aggregate reaction in the concrete work, provide work in accordance with the
requirements given within this Section.
11. The surface of the concrete shall be thoroughly scabbled to provide a clean rough surface. All bolt
and other pockets shall be cleaned immediately before the baseplate or unit is placed in position.
Immediately before filling, the space between the concrete and the baseplate or unit shall be cleaned
again and thoroughly wetted. All pockets shall be free from water before filling.
12. Hand mixing shall not be permitted. Grout shall be mixed in a colloidal type mixer.
13. Bedding material shall be poured into the formwork and worked into position by straps, rods, or
other suitable means until the whole of the space is completely filled. Dry pack shall be rammed
against firm formers to ensure full compaction.
14. In all cases the grout shall be worked from one side and in one direction only, in a manner which
shall avoid the formation of air pockets and voids.
15. Except where it is specified that bolt sleeves shall be left unfilled, the bolt sleeves shall be filled to
within 50mm of the concrete foundation level prior to the grouting of the baseplate.
16. Expanding grout shall not be vibrated.
17. Edge formwork shall be fastened around each baseplate or unit as required to suit the placing
method. It shall be sufficiently robust to allow the bedding material to be placed without leakage.
Unless otherwise indicated on the Design Drawings, the horizontal clearance between the formwork
and the baseplate or unit shall be as small as possible. The gap should not exceed 75mm on the
entry side and 50mm elsewhere. A separate feeding hopper shall be used if necessary to maintain
the 75mm limit.
18. For wide baseplates or units where a well and plunger is used, the formwork shall be well anchored
down.
19. Where it is specified that the edge of the grout beyond the baseplate or unit is to be chamfered, bull
nosed or trimmed, the excess bedding material shall be cut off whilst it is still green.
20. Formwork shall not be struck earlier than 24 hours after completion of filling.
21. Curing shall be carried out by covering with moist hessian for a period of 5 days. During hot, dry
weather the hessian shall be frequently wetted to prevent drying out.

01 June 2016
033000 / 31
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
22. Grout Testing: Assume responsibility for all testing. All testing shall be accepted from the Contract
Administrator and shall be commercially independent from the Contractor. The Contract
Administrator shall be permitted access to the laboratories to witness any tests.
a)
Gang molds suitable for preparing 3 of 6 specimens simultaneously shall be constructed. The
molds shall be constructed to produce specimens 100mm x 100mm x 25mm with the 25mm
dimension uppermost.
b)
The molds shall be coated on all internal surfaces and joint faces with a release agent suitable
to the type of bedding material being molded.
c)
Where a batch of bedding material has been selected by the Contract Administrator for sampling
for the purpose of making test prisms, 1 prism shall be made from each of 6 samples. The
sampling shall be carried out in accordance with the appropriate British Standard. The test
prisms shall be made at the Site of application.
d)
The prisms shall be removed from the molds after 24 hours and shall be cured under the same
conditions as the bedding material to which they refer.
e)
Testing shall be in accordance with BS EN 12390. The compression testing machine shall be
in accordance with the requirements of BS EN 12390 and be maintained in an environment
between 15 and 25C. Three prisms shall be tested at 7 days and three at 28 days. The type
of failure shall also be recorded.
f)
The specified compressive strength shall been achieved if none of the 3 prisms has a strength
less than that specified or the average strength of the 3 prisms is not less than the specified
strength and the difference between the highest and lowest of the 3 strengths is not more than
20% of the average strength.
K.
Pumped Concrete: Precaution shall be taken to avoid depositing water or grout in the work during startingup operations or in flushing or clearing of the pipe-line. The concrete shall pass through the pipe-line in
not more than 20 minutes.
L.
Water-Resistant Construction for Structures, in contact with the Ground Water

1.
A continuous plastic or hydrofilic water-bar shall be placed in all joints and where indicated on the
Design Drawings.
2.
The water-bar shall be fully continuous when laid. Site joints shall be made as recommended by
the manufacturer and as indicated on the Shop Drawings.
3.
In so far as is possible, transverse joints shall be arranged to stagger where they intersect longitudinal
joints.
4.
The water-bar shall be correctly embedded in the concrete and the exclusion of all air pockets
ensured.
5.
All concrete shall be placed continuously between the pre-determined joints.
6.
The joints shall be constructed so as to achieve full continuity and complete watertightness. They
shall be prepared and treated as follows:
a)
The surface of the joint prior to the deposition of the next lift or section of concrete shall be
free from all laitence scum. The surface shall show a slightly rough texture in which the tips
of the aggregate shall be exposed, but which is not so grossly uneven as to cause porosity in
the next lift of concrete.
b)
For this purpose all joints shall be lightly chipped throughout as necessary to expose without
damage the projecting aggregate. Alternatively, for horizontal faced joints, the concrete shall
be placed just proud of the formwork and the laitance shall then be removed from the surface,
prior to setting with a fine mist spray of water or by wire brushing within 6 hours of casting.
c)
Immediately, prior to the assembly of the formwork for the next lift, the face of the joint shall
be wire brushed and swept clean, precautions shall be taken during assembly and prior to
concreting to prevent fouling of the contact surface.
d)
Immediately prior to depositing the new concrete, surfaces shall be wetted.

01 June 2016
033000 / 32
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
M.
e)
It is particularly important to ensure that the junction between the lower edge of the formwork
to the upper lift of concrete section shall form a close fit with the lower concrete section since
seepage of the cement paste from the newly made deposited concrete shall cause a
consequent potential point of failure in the watertightness of the structure.
f)
Where points of weakness shall be revealed which allow seepage of water, these defects shall
be rectified by pressure grouting or other manner subject to the Contract Administrator's
comment, in accordance with BS EN 1997: Part 1, and shall be made good at the Contractor's
expense.
Water-Resistant Concrete
1.
This Section relates requirements for retaining or excluding water or other aqueous liquids.
2.
The watertight structures shall be designed and detailed in accordance with the requirements of
this Section and with those of BS EN 1992: Part 3.
3.
Water Excluding Structures: The term 'Watertight' as applied to any wall, floor or other member shall
mean that 6 calendar months after the completion of the whole of the work including the
superstructure, or 6 calendar months after the cessation of all pumping of ground water on Site,
whichever is the latest, there shall be no seepage of water through any wall, floor or other member
nor any damp patch in excess of 0.5m in area visible on its internal face. The number of damp
patches shall not exceed 1 patch for every 200m, or part of 200m, of the total internal surface area
of walls, floor and other elements of structure surfaces of which shall be in contact with water.
4.
The maximum allowable drying shrinkage of aggregates shall be 0.05%.
5.
Assume full responsibility for ensuring that the resulting construction is completely watertight and
free from penetration of moisture. When, in the opinion of the Contract Administrator, damp patches
and/ or leakage of water in the finished work shall be due to failure of the Contractor in accordance
with this Section the affected work shall be made good at the Contractor's expense.
6.
The maximum length of wall panels placed in one continuous pour between vertical construction
and/ or movement joints shall be 15m. Where intermediate crack inducing joints at 5m maximum
centers shall be incorporated in the work then the only restriction on the length of wall panels cast
in one operation shall be the centers of the construction and movement joints indicated on the
Design Drawings or shall be the Contractor's capacity for making continuous pours whichever is
the lesser, but shall not exceed 15m.
7.
Kickers shall not be less than 150mm high and shall be cast monolithically with the base.
8.
Obtain the acceptance from the Contract Administrator of the layout and form of all additional
construction details other than those indicated on the Design Drawings prior to commencement of
the work.
9.
Particular care shall be taken to ensure full compaction of the concrete around all joints and
waterstops.
10. The concrete at the joint shall be bonded with that subsequently placed against it, without provision
for relative movement between the two. Concrete shall not be allowed to run to a feather-edge, and
all joints shall be formed against a stop end. Particular care shall be taken when forming the joints.
11. The surface of the first pour shall be roughened to increase the bond strength and to provide
aggregate interlock. If the joint surface is not roughened until the concrete has hardened, the larger
aggregate particles near the surface shall be exposed by sandblasting or by applying a scaling
hammer or other mechanical device. Powerful hammers shall not be used as they may damage or
dislodge aggregate particles so reducing, rather than increasing, the capacity of the joint to transfer
stresses.
12. Care shall be taken that the joint surface is clean immediately before the fresh concrete is placed
against it. It shall be dampened prior to the new concrete being placed, to prevent excessive loss
of mix water into it by absorption.
13. Water bars shall be provided in all construction and day work joints, in addition to any joint indicated
14. All construction joints in watertight concrete shall be formed as indicated on the Design Drawings,
unless otherwise indicated.
01 June 2016
033000 / 33
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
15. All water bars shall be jointed by welding, however all multiple joints and special intersections shall
be as manufactured by the supplier.
16. Care shall be taken at all times to ensure that water bars shall not be perforated or damaged in any
manner and the concrete shall be carefully placed and compacted around the water bars to ensure
dense void free impervious concrete.
17. The formwork shall be in accordance with the relevant clauses in this Section. Any bolt or fastening
embedded in or passing through the concrete shall be to the acceptance of the Contract Administrator
and shall not impair the watertightness of the structure. The use of through-bolts and throughsleeves shall be strictly prohibited.
18. All cast-in service holes shall incorporate sleeves with puddle flanges, and temporary openings for
services shall incorporate water bars.
19. Slotted inserts or sockets cast into the structural concrete shall be provided for all fastenings;
including services. The cutting of holes in watertight concrete shall be strictly prohibited.
20. Water-Resistant Concrete Testing:
3.4
a)
Ensure the program and method of construction allows for the satisfactory completion of tests
for watertightness on each water-retaining or water excluding structure following completion
of the work. Completed parts of structures may be tested subject to prior consent by the Contract
Administrator but no part shall be tested until all the concrete in a structure has reached the
specified strength.
b)
When filling is complete the structure shall be kept full for an absorption period of 7 days before
the test commences. On satisfactory completion of the test the water shall be disposed of in
a manner accepted by the Contract Administrator.
c)
Water Retaining Structures:

1.
For uncovered structures, where the plan area of the water does not exceed 1000m,
after the water retaining structure has been filled with water, and at the end of the
absorption period, an open topped steel tank shall be filled with water to the same depth
as the structure and shall be placed in the structure. This water tank shall have a plan
area of at least 1.5m and a capacity of at least 1.8m and shall previously have been
proved to be watertight. The levels of the water in the structure and in the tank shall be
equalized and recorded at intervals of 24 hours for 7 days following an absorption period
of 7 days. The structure shall be deemed to be watertight if the difference between the
water levels does not exceed 10mm at the end of the 7 days test period.
2.
When the uncovered plan area of the water exceeds 1000m, record the wet and dry bulb
temperatures, the humidity, for 7 days following an absorption period of 7 days. From the
information recorded, calculate the variation in the depth of water due to rainfall, sunshine,
and similar conditions during these 7 days, making allowance for the degree of exposure
of the Site. The resultant drop in water level due to leakage alone shall then be calculated.
The structure shall be deemed to be watertight if the reviewed calculations show that the
drop due to leakage is equivalent to a depth of less than 10mm. When the leakage
recorded exceeds this amount but is decreasing daily the structure shall be deemed to
be watertight if the requirement is achieved in the subsequent 7 days.
3.
Covered structures shall be deemed watertight if the drop in water level does not exceed
10mm at the end of 7 days following an absorption period of 7 days.

A.
B.
General
1.
Routine testing of production concrete materials strength and of proposed mix design materials and
strength shall be carried out by an independent inspection and testing company, accepted by the
Contract Administrator, and appointed by and paid by the Contractor.
2.
Any testing required by the Contractor to vary mix design, grade of steel, or to prove strength of
concrete in place, or load testing where specified design strengths shall not be attained, or where
errors have been made in construction, shall be done at the Contractor's expense.
Routine Inspection and Testing

01 June 2016
033000 / 34
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
1.
All sampling and testing of constituent materials shall be carried out in accordance with the
appropriate British Standard. In particular, sampling and testing of fresh and hardened concrete
shall be in accordance with ASTM C172 unless otherwise indicated within this Specification.
2.
If fresh concrete is not in accordance with the workability requirements of this Specification, then it
shall not be placed in the permanent work without acceptance from the Contract Administrator prior
to project use.
3.
Provide at least one person on Site trained and competent to sample concrete, undertake slump
tests and prepare test specimens in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C172. Cube
preparation shall only be undertaken by trained Contractor's personnel.
4.
The Contract Administrator shall review proposed concrete mix design and require check-testing if
considered necessary as the concrete work progresses.
5.
Concrete Strength Tests: Compliance with the specified characteristic strength shall be based on
tests made on cubes at an age of 28 days, unless there is satisfactory evidence that a particular
testing regime is capable of predicting the strength at 28 days, of concrete tested at an earlier age.
a)
For concrete with early strength requirements, compliance shall be based on tests made on
cubes at an age proposed by the Contractor. Loading shall not be applied to elements of the
work composed of the concrete with early strength requirements until such time as the minimum
strength requirement has been achieved, as demonstrated by cube test results from samples
manufactured from the concrete proposed for loading and cured in a manner identical to the
concrete in the work.
b)
Unless otherwise directed by the Contract Administrator, the rate of sampling shall be not less
than 4 samples on each day for each type of concrete grade and binder that is cast. In addition,
where multiple deliveries of the same concrete type shall be made, the rates of sampling shall
be as listed in the Other Tests, Table E in Appendix 033000, or until such time the Contract
Administrator is satisfied that the Contractor has demonstrated the concrete is of a consistent
quality.
c)
Perform a standard slump test for each set of samples.
d)
Provide 4 samples molded in 150mm x 150mm x 150mm steel molds, stored, and laboratory
cured in accordance with ASTM C172 for strength tests. 2 samples shall be compression
tested at 7 days and the remaining 2 samples at 28 days after.
e)
Each sample shall be taken from a randomly selected batch of concrete. Samples shall be
taken at the point of discharge from the delivery vehicle.
f)
On completion of curing, the cubes shall be tested and the mean of the 2 measured values
taken as the test result.
g)
When the difference between the two measured values divided by their mean exceeds 15%,
the test result shall be deemed invalid.
h)
The compliance criteria shall be in accordance with ACI 301 and the requirements of this
Section.
i)
The 'current margin' shall be calculated as specified.
j)
If only one test result fails to meet the compliance test requirement noted above, then that
result shall be considered to represent only the particular batch of concrete from which the
test cubes were taken.
k)
If the average strength of any group of 4 consecutive test results fails to meet the compliance
test requirement, then all the concrete in all the batches represented by all such results shall
be deemed not to be in accordance with the strength requirements. For the purposes of this
clause the batches of concrete represented by a group of 4 consecutive test results shall
include the batches from which samples were taken to make the first and the last cubes in the
group of 4, together with all the intervening batches.
l)
The action required in the case of non-compliance shall be determined by the Contract
Administrator, including but not limited to the testing of additional samples of the concrete or
the removal of the non-compliant concrete. All additional testing or remedial work shall be at
the Contractor's expense.

01 June 2016
033000 / 35
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
6.
7.
8.
m)
Identify and correlate reinforcing steel with mill test reports for compliance.
n)
Specimens of unidentified reinforcing steel shall be tested for each 10 tons of steel. The cost
of this inspection and testing shall be paid for by the Contractor.
o)
The frequency of sampling may vary as directed by the Contract Administrator if non-compliance
is found.
p)
The procedures shall be repeated when materials or design mixes are changed by the
Contractor.
q)
If the above criteria is not satisfied, the unit represented by the sample shall be deemed
questionable and any or all of the following actions shall be instructed by the Contract
Administrator at the Contractor's expense:
1.
Changing the concrete mix.
2.
Improving quality control.
3.
Cutting and testing cores from placed concrete.
4.
Non-destructive testing of placed concrete.
5.
Cutting-out and replacing defective concrete.
6.
In the event cutting and testing of cores shall be required, the Contractor shall cut cores
from acceptable locations to the Contract Administrator, and test them in accordance with
ASTM C172.
Flexural Tensile Strength Tests, not applicable to piling.

a)
Samples shall be taken and two beams cast to determine the tensile strength of the concrete
at 7 days and 28 days, as specified in ASTM C172.
b)
The samples shall be taken in accordance with the minimum test requirements for concrete
in this Specification and shall coincide with samples taken for test cubes.
Durability Tests
a)
Samples shall be taken in accordance with the minimum test requirements for concrete in this
Specification and shall coincide with samples taken for test cubes.
b)
The concrete shall be tested for durability properties by undertaking absorption and permeability
tests as directed within the tables in Appendix 033000, Durability Tests, Table D Part 1, Part
2, Part 3, Part 4 and Part 5.
Other Tests
a)
Submit to the Contract Administrator the proposed methods for complying with the creep strain
criteria of the performance requirements of the Specification. These shall include, but shall
not be limited to: Tests to establish the strength of the concrete and the static modulus of
elasticity of the concrete to ASTM C172.
b)
Sufficient tests shall be undertaken to allow an accurate assessment of the creep strain to be
made prior to, and during, the concreting operations. These tests shall only cease when directed
by the Contract Administrator.
c)
Large pour construction shall be tested for drying shrinkage and wetting expansion, for which
75mm x 75mm prisms shall be prepared and tested in accordance with BS EN 1367: Part 4.
d)
Cubes may be required and trials carried out to determine stripping times for formwork, the
duration of curing and to check testing and sampling errors, all shall be supplied at the
Contractor's expense.

01 June 2016
033000 / 36
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
e)
The air content of air-entrained concrete shall be determined in accordance with this
Specification.
f)
Compaction factor, slump, Vebe or other workability tests shall be carried out as required during
concreting of permanent work to control workability at the batching plant and at the Site of the
pour. For each sample the temperature of the concrete shall be measured and recorded with
the time the test was performed. The degree of workability shall be as for the trial mixes;
permitted tolerances shall be in accordance with ACI 301.
g)
Minimum test requirements for concrete samples shall be taken and specimens made for the
following tests for each class of concrete and for each particular application representing a
maximum quantity of concrete as listed in the Other Tests, Table E 'Table for the Rate of
Sampling Concrete' in Appendix 033000. Provide a set of 4 cubes for cube strength tests. Each
set of cubes shall be made from a separate batch. A minimum of 4 cubes for cube strength
tests shall be taken for each foundation.
h)
Initial sampling rates for concrete to be as listed in the Other Tests, Table E 'Table for the Rate
of Sampling Concrete' in Appendix 033000. The Contract Administrator may allow an increase
in sampling rates for intermediate structures, up to 50m and for heavy construction up to
100m, once initial trials and testing regime indicates that the concrete production is providing
a mix of proven strength and standard deviation. The Contract Administrator may revert the
sampling rate at any time back to the rates as listed Other Tests, Table E 'Table for the Rate
of Sampling Concrete' in Appendix 033000 should test results indicate a reduction in the control
of concrete production, including but not limited to lower average strengths or an increase in
standard deviation.
i)
C.
1.
Cement: One (1) 2kg sample for quality testing to ensure compliance with Part 2 of this
section shall be taken from each 1,500 bags or equivalent weight or one day's output of
the cement plant for each class of cement, whichever is the lesser.
2.
Water: One (1) 5L sample shall be obtained prior to use from each source for quality
testing in accordance with this Section.
3.
Samples of concrete, cement and water shall be taken and tested as described in the
above clauses at least once a week during concreting operations.
Reports: Testing company reports of test of materials and compression tests of concrete control
cubes shall be distributed as directed by the Contract Administrator.
1.
Concrete cube test reports shall contain the following information: whether specimens
laboratory or field cured, date cast, date received in lab, date tested, unit weight of
concrete, specified 28 day strength, correlation of the exact location of each pour with
the test cubes in question, concrete supplier, person who cast the cube, time mixer
charged, time cube cast, measured slump, temperature of concrete and air, whether or
not water was added at the job, nominal aggregate size, type of admixture, air-entrainment
agent, project identification and with sequential numerical identification.
2.
Should a crushed cube show a test result required by the Specification, the testing
company shall immediately advise the Contract Administrator by telephone of such
occurrence in order to expedite curing or remedial measures which may be required.
3.
In the event that test cubes indicate a strength of concrete below that which is specified,
the test report shall state the reason for the lack of strength: poor quality concrete in place,
cubes improperly taken, stored, capped, improperly handled or faulty testing procedure.
A correct analysis of the cause of poor tests shall save unnecessary inconvenience when
the report is submitted to all parties involved.
4.
The testing company shall supply written reports of tests or materials and reinforcing
steel, giving all pertinent information required by the Specification and applicable Standard
requirements.
Responsibility of the Testing Company

1.
The representative of the testing company shall not be required to supervise the work or to instruct
the Contractor. The tester's function shall be that of sampling and testing materials and cubes,
observing procedures and reporting of same to the Contract Administrator. If any material is at
variance with the Specification the tester shall immediately advise the superintendent and then
inform the Contract Administrator by telephone.

01 June 2016
033000 / 37
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
2.
D.
The testing company shall advise and cooperate with the Contractor regarding adequate handling
and storage of cubes.
Responsibility of the Contractor

1.
Cooperate with the representatives of the testing company.
2.
Advise the testing company and the Contract Administrator at least 24 hours in advance of the
placing of concrete.
3.
Provide suitable handling and storage of test cubes.
4.
Keep a record set of the Design Drawings upon which the Contractor's superintendent shall mark,
the time and date of pouring of each section of concrete, the date of removal of forms and a daily
record of the temperature.
E.
Retesting: Payment for retesting and reinspection of work, replacing that found defective following initial
inspection made under Contract Work, or as otherwise made evident, is the responsibility of the Contractor
and shall not be considered as additional work to this Section.
F.
Clean-Up
G.
1.
Upon satisfactory completion of the work, clear away from the Site, excess materials, waste materials
and debris and leave the premises in a condition acceptable to the Contract Administrator within
the Contract time.
2.
Do not unload excess concrete from concrete trucks during clean-up operations and do not deposit
in undesignated or unacceptable locations within the scope of work boundaries whether concealed
or not.
Defective Concrete
1.
The action to be taken in the event of non-compliance of test results with the Specification, including
but not limited to cube strength results, shall be determined by the Contract Administrator and may
range from qualified acceptance, additional testing to the acceptance of the Contract Administrator,
to rejection and removal of all or part of the affected work.
2.
The Contractor shall provide at his own expense all additional testing required by the Contract
Administrator, this consists of all records, samples, including core samples, tests and their results,
regardless of whether the concrete be finally accepted or not by the Contract Administrator.
END OF SECTION

01 June 2016
033000 / 38
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
SECTION 034100 -- PRECAST CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
1.2
SUBMITTALS
1.3
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5
1.6
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
DESIGN CRITERIA
2.2
2.3
MATERIALS
10
2.4
ACCESSORIES
16
2.5
FABRICATION
16
2.6
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
20
2.7
FINISHES
23
PART 3 EXECUTION
23
3.1
EXAMINATION
23
3.2
INSTALLATION
24
3.3
26
3.4
CLEANING AND ADJUSTING
26
3.5
PROTECTION
27

01 June 2016
034100
AECOM Middle East

PRECAST CONCRETE

Enabling Works
SECTION 034100 -- PRECAST CONCRETE

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
General: Read this Section in conjunction with other related Work Sections, Employer General
Requirements, the Design Drawings and the Contract Conditions.
B.
Delegated Design
C.
1.
Refer to Contractor's Design Responsibilities in the Employer General Requirements for specific
requirements.
2.
Complete the Delegated Design, manufacture, supply, install and warrant the work, complying with
the visual intent indicated and specified design and performance requirements.
3.
Where no material, product or supplier is specified, propose suitable materials and systems prior
to the Contract Award which comply with the visual intent indicated and specified design and
performance requirements, and be fully responsible for the Delegated Design of the Work.
4.
Where a particular material, product or supplier is specified, the material, product or supplier shall
be deemed indicative representing the Contract Administrator's Design Intent only. Complete the
installation using the specified or other product acceptable to the Contract Administrator, in writing.
Be fully responsible for the Working Design and performance of the work.
5.
Complete the Working Design of all interfaces with adjoining trades prior to commencement of
manufacture.
6.
Ensure that all interfaces are fully coordinated prior to commencement.
Section Includes
1.
1.2
Precast concrete units.
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Comply with the requirements of theEmployer General Requirements and submit the following.
B.

1.
2.
Shop Drawings: Include member locations, plans, elevations, dimensions, shapes and sections,
openings, support conditions, and types of reinforcement, including special reinforcement. Detail
fabrication and installation of precast concrete units.
a)
Indicate joints, reveals, and extent and location of each surface finish.
b)
Indicate separate face and backup mixture locations and thicknesses.
c)
Detail loose and cast-in hardware, lifting and erection inserts, connections, and joints.
d)
Indicate locations, tolerances, and details of anchorage devices to be embedded in or attached

to structure or other construction.
e)
Indicate location of each precast concrete unit by same identification mark placed on panel.
Design Calculations: Submit structural design calculations for record only with the seal and signature
of a licensed Professional Engineer. Each change of component configuration and design shall
have its own set of calculations. The Contractor shall furnish to the Contract Administrator for review
2 No. copies of design calculations and drawings. The Contract Administrator shall verify the correct
interpretation of his requirements, but not necessarily the dimensions. The Contract Administrator
shall mark a copy of the calculations and drawings with comments and return them to the Contractor.
An additional copy of each of the final drawings of the units shall be supplied to the Contract
Administrator.

01 June 2016
034100 / 1
AECOM Middle East

PRECAST CONCRETE

Enabling Works
3.
Product Data on Materials and Components: Submit for record only manufacturer's product data,
including specifications and installation instructions clearly marked to indicate all technical
information, including load tables where applicable, that specifies full compliance with requirements
of this section and Contract Documents for each type of insert, accessory and product specified.
4.
the system.
5.
Statement of manufacturer's review, confirming suitability of specified materials.
6.
Qualification Data: For Fabricator.
7.
Qualification Data: For Installer.
8.
Mix Designs: For each precast concrete mixture. Include compressive strength and water-absorption
tests.
9.
10. Summary of deviations from the Specification.

11. Outline technical specifications reflecting proposed materials/ systems.
12. A list of proposed suppliers and Subcontractors intended to be used.
13. Method Statement.
14. Quality Control Procedures.
15. Certified test data.
16. Material Certificates: Provide for the following, signed by manufacturer.
C.
a)
Cementitious materials.
b)
Reinforcing materials and prestressing tendons.
c)
Admixtures.
d)
Bearing pads.
e)
Structural-steel shapes and hollow structural sections.

1.
Sample of each precast concrete types using proposed formwork and mix, in sizes to be advised
2.
All fastening devices and anchors.
3.
Samples of stressing strands.
4.
Samples of all constituent materials shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator prior to casting
works.
a)
D.
Units shall not be cast until the Contract Administrator has reviewed and accepted the
constituent materials, which shall not be altered or replaced.
Pre-construction Testing Reports

1.
Include for testing by an accredited independent testing specialist or provide independently certified
test data to demonstrate compliance with the Specification.

01 June 2016
034100 / 2
AECOM Middle East

PRECAST CONCRETE

Enabling Works
2.
1.3
responsibilities regarding the durability or service life requirements, etc.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
General: Comply with the requirements of Employer General Requirements, and submit the following.
1.
Warranties: Comply with General Conditions of Contract with respect to repair and/ or replacement
of specified materials or Work that has deteriorated within the warranty period.
2.
Operation and Maintenance (O+M) Manuals: Include component list with manufacturer's reference
numbers, descriptions of materials and procedures for repairing and cleaning of finishes and cleaning
frequency.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
Standards, General: All Building Codes, Industry Standard specifications and applicable By-Laws referred
1.
no relevant ASTM or ACI standard the Contractor shall refer to the relevant British Standard.
2.
American Concrete Institute, ACI Standards

a)
ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete.
b)
ACI 318/ ACI 318M Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary.
Subcontractor's and Site Operative's Qualifications

1.
Subcontractors and Site operatives shall have a minimum of 10 years' experience in performing
similar work and shall be certified to the BS EN ISO 9001 or operates to a similar quality system
acceptable to the Contract Administrator.
2.
A precast concrete installer qualified and designated by PCI's Certificate of Compliance to install
precast units for load-bearing members.
3.
A precast concrete installer who has retained a "PCI-Certified Site Auditor" to conduct a Site audit
of a project in same category as this Project before installation of precast concrete and who can
produce an Installers' Post-Audit Declaration.
Fabricator Qualifications: A firm that assumes responsibility for engineering precast concrete units in
accordance with performance requirements. This responsibility includes preparation of Shop Drawings
and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer.
1.
Participates in PCI's plant certification program and is designated a PCI-certified plant for Load
Bearing Units.
2.
Operatives must have service or repair facilities not more than two hours from the Site.
D.
Testing Agency Qualifications: The testing agency shall be an independent testing agency that is
acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, and qualified according to ASTM C1077 and ASTM
E329 for the indicated tests.
E.
Design
Standards: In accordance with American Concrete Institute (ACI) 318 Building Code
Requirements
for Structural Concrete & Commentary/ 318M Metric Building Code Requirements
for Structural
Concrete & Commentary and design recommendations of Precast/ Pre-stressed
Concrete Institute (PCI) MNL 120, PCI Design Handbook - Precast and Pre-stressed Concrete, applicable
to types of
precast concrete units indicated.
F.
Quality-Control Standard: For manufacturing procedures and testing requirements, quality-control

recommendations and dimensional tolerances for types of units required, comply with
PCI MNL 117S
Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Architectural
Precast and Pre-stressed
Concrete Products.

01 June 2016
034100 / 3
AECOM Middle East

PRECAST CONCRETE

Enabling Works
G.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to American Welding Society (AWS) D1.1/ D.1.1M,
"Structural Welding Code - Steel"; and AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel."
H.
Fire-Test-Response Calculations: Where indicated, provide precast concrete units whose fire resistance
has been calculated according to ACI 216.1/ TMS 0216.1 Standard Method for Determining Fire
Resistance of Concrete and Masonry Construction Assemblies, or PCI MNL 124 Design for Fire
Resistance of Precast Pre-stressed Concrete, and is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
I.
Results and Certificates
J.
K.
1.5
1.
Tests and inspection results shall be submitted immediately upon receipt from the testing agency.
2.
Maintain, until the end of the defects liability period, records of all inspections and tests performed,
material certification, inspection and test plans, drawings and any other documentation to
substantiate conformity with the Specification, including those carried out by Subcontractors.
3.
The records shall be stored in such a way that they are identifiable to the component to which they
refer, and are retrievable.
4.
The records shall be available for inspection by the Contract Administrator and copies of records
shall be given to the Contract Administrator upon request. At the end of the defects liability period
they shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator.

1.
2.
The Contractor may provide data from previous independently certified tests to demonstrate that
the Contractor's proposed systems meet the performance requirements of the Specification. The
information shall be to the satisfaction of the Contract Administrator.
3.
4.
Independently certified test data, as applicable, shall include static and dynamic results and
Agrment certificates.
5.
responsibilities regarding the durability or service life requirements, etc.
Testing Requirements: Refer to Source Quality Control in Part 2 of this Section and Site Quality Control
in Part 3 of this Section.
A.
Deliver precast concrete units in such quantities and at such times to limit unloading units temporarily
on the ground.
B.
Support units during shipment on non-staining shock-absorbing material.
C.
Store units with adequate dunnage and bracing and protect units to prevent contact with soil to
prevent staining and to prevent cracking, distortion, warping or other physical damage.
D.
Place stored units so identification marks are clearly visible and units can be inspected.
E.
Handle and transport units in a position consistent with their shape and design in order to avoid
excessive stresses which would cause cracking or damage.
F.
Lift and support units only at designated points indicated on the Shop Drawings.
G.
The precast units shall be adequately protected at all stages of manufacture, handling and storage and
also during and after erection on site.

01 June 2016
034100 / 4
AECOM Middle East

PRECAST CONCRETE

Enabling Works
H.
Rejected units shall be replaced, and any delay caused by the rejections shall not relieve the Contractor
of his obligation to complete the project within the Contract Period.
I.
Precast units shall not be moved, struck or propped until the concrete has reached a cube strength of
at least 3 times the maximum stress to which it is subjected. Moving, striking or propping precast elements
shall be carried out in a manner such that shocks and vibration do not occur.
J.
Lifting shall be carried out through designed lifting points, and the units shall be suspended in the designed
manner.
1.6
A.
General: Install materials and components in weather conditions recommended by the manufacturer.
Do not install any work on surfaces that are dirty, wet or contaminated such that a proper bond, seating
or fastening cannot be ensured.
B.
Temperature: Make allowance for differences between design temperature and temperatures on Site
during installation when sizing construction and movement joints.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
DESIGN CRITERIA
A.
Comply with the general requirements of the National Structural Concrete Specification.
B.
The precast structural elements shall be designed to coordinate with the parameters set forth by the
Contract documents. Any changes required to the structural system, and/ or Contract documents, if
accepted by the Contract Administrator, shall be based on the Contractor bearing all costs of such changes
including the redesign costs of the Design Consultants.
C.
Design precast concrete units and connections to accommodate deflections and other structural
movements.
D.
The design shall properly account for the load distribution of concentrated and live loads and for effect
of openings.
E.
Design modifications shall be carried out as necessary to meet field conditions and to ensure proper
fitting of the Work, and only as acceptable to the Contract Administrator. Maintain general design concept
shown without increasing or decreasing the size of members, or altering the profiles and alignment
specified on the Design Drawings. Submit complete design calculations and drawings prepared by a
licensed Structural Engineer.
F.
All support systems shall be of adequate thickness and strength to meet the structural requirements and
eliminate risk of distortion in finished surfaces.
G.
Dimensions are deemed to be nominal but indicative to the Design Intent. The Contractor shall maintain
these dimensions and clearly state them on the Shop Drawings; deviations to these shall be stated with
the Tender.
H.
Materials used for fastening shall be stainless steel grade Grade 304 for internal use and Grade 316 for
external use of suitable design and strength to suit application. Fastenings shall be concealed or
inconspicuous to the acceptance of the Contract Administrator.
2.2
A.
General: Precast concrete assemblies shall comply with performance requirements without failure due
to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation or other defects in construction.
B.
Structural Performance: Provide precast structural concrete units and connections capable of
withstanding the following design loads:
1.
Wind Loads
a)

01 June 2016
Wind loading shall be accommodated safely, without detriment to the overall design, structural
integrity and performance of the Work.
034100 / 5
AECOM Middle East

PRECAST CONCRETE

Enabling Works
1.
b)
2.
3.
4.
Calculated pressure loads shall include the effect of internal air pressures within the building,
taking into account the presence of significant openings, which might arise occasionally within
the building enclosure.
Specific Movements
1.
The work shall withstand all movement of the structure under all design loads or
combination of loads without damage or reduction in performance.
2.
Expansion and movement joints shall accommodate the appropriate range of movement.
Specific Dead Loads

a)
The work shall accommodate its own dead loading without causing deflections or movements
which adversely affect the system itself or the supporting structure.
b)
Provide dead loading calculations for the installed system. This shall be expressed as the
weight in kN/ m, plus any other dead and imposed loadings transmitted to surrounding
construction.
1.
Superimposed Dead Loads: 0.3kN/ m.
2.
Screed (where applicable): 20kN/ m.
Specific Live Loads: The work shall be capable of accommodating the following specific live loads
without any reduction in performance:
a)
Horizontally applied loads acting on the surface of any component. The work shall sustain
safely, without reduction in performance and without permanent deformation to any component,
a static 500N load applied horizontally through a square of 100mm sides on any part of the
framing.
b)
A horizontal line load applied to the work, due to the occupants.

1.
c)
5.
6.
Wind Loads (where applicable): 1.25kN/ m.
Live Load: 5kN/ m.
Balustrade Live Load: 0.74kN/ m.
Load Combination:
a)
Ultimate load combination to ACI318.
b)
Service load combination to UBC97.
Seismic Performance: The work shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined
according to ASCE/ SEI 7.
a)

01 June 2016
Seismic Loads: Calculation in accordance with UBC 1997.

1.
Seismic Zone 2A.
2.
Z factor 0.15g.
3.
Site Class C.
4.
Site Coefficients: Ca = 0.18, Cv = 0.25.
5.
Building use category = 4.0.
6.
Importance factor = 1.0.
034100 / 6
AECOM Middle East

PRECAST CONCRETE

Enabling Works
7.
C.
Precast sizes: Refer to Contract Documents for requirement on minimum clear height and
dimensions.
Thermal Movements
1.
All components shall resist thermal movement resulting from the maximum and minimum surface
temperature differentials occurring. The design shall cater for all temporary and permanent
conditions envisaged for the work.
2.
The work shall be capable of accommodating changes in dimension and shape of its components
resulting from the varying surface temperatures without any reduction in the specified performance.
3.
Thermal movements shall not result in audible noise.
4.
Provide for thermal movements resulting from annual ambient temperature changes of 56C.
D.
Horizontal Building Movement (Interstory Drift): Allow for maximum horizontal building movement equal
to quotient resulting from dividing floor-to-floor height at any floor by 400, to the acceptance of the
Structural Engineer.
E.
Shrinkage and Creep for Concrete Frame Buildings Only: Allow for progressive vertical shortening of
building frame equal to 3mm in 3m.
F.
Deflections
1.
The work shall not deflect under loading in any way that is detrimental to any element of the Work
or adjacent structural or building elements.
2.
All components, couplings and fastenings shall be capable of accommodating all of the above
deflection without permanent distortion, deformation or failure.
3.
The work shall accommodate differential structural movements arising from any loads imposed by
adjacent structures.
4.
The magnitude of the allowable deflections shall be reduced if they are detrimental to any part of
the work, its support structure or finishes.
5.
Deflection Limits: Design panel frames to withstand design loads within limits and under conditions
indicated.
a)
b)
c)
G.
Vertical Deflection Limit:

1.
Live load deflection: Span/ 360.
2.
Total load deflection: Span/ 250.
Lateral Deflection Limit:

1.
Maximum inter storey drift due to seismic forces limited to 0.015 storey height.
2.
Maximum inter storey drift due to 10 year wind load limited to 1/ 500 storey height.
Provision for the following deflection of building structure:

1.
Deflection due to weight of dimension stone cladding system: Allow for 6mm vertical
deflection in 6m span of structural members supporting dimension stone cladding system.
2.
Live load deflection: Allow for 6mm vertical deflection in 6m span of structural members
supporting dimension stone cladding system, due to live loads imposed on building's
structural frame after stone installation.
Provisions for Fabrication and Installation Tolerances: Allow for fabrication and installation tolerances of
building's structural system.

01 June 2016
034100 / 7
AECOM Middle East

PRECAST CONCRETE

Enabling Works
H.
Environmental Performance Requirements

1.
2.
3.
Moisture Movement:
a)
The work shall withstand movement without permanent deformation or any reduction in the
specified performance:
b)
Due to changes in the moisture content of its components, resulting from variations in the
moisture content of the air.
Due to the expansion of absorbed or retained moisture.
2.
Caused by the flow of rainwater to the inside of the panels.
Thermal Performance Requirements:

a)
The average thermal transmittance (U-value) for the work shall be 0.35W/ mK or better.
b)
Provide U-value calculations including condensation calculations to justify insulation and vapor
barrier design.
Solar Performance Requirements:

a)
4.
1.
Exposure to sunlight during the service life of the work shall not result in degradation of
appearance or performance.
Air Permeability/ Infiltration: The work shall resist the passage of air such that its air leakage rates
and shall not be exceeded in both the initial and repeat tests.
a)
Air Infiltration: Air leakage through assembly of not more than 0.3L/ s per m of wall area when
tested in accordance with ASTM E283 at the following test-pressure difference:
1.
5.
Condensation: No condensation shall take place either on internal or external surfaces or within
the interstitial construction thickness of the works under the temperature and humidity conditions.
6.
Capillarity: Water migration caused by capillarity shall be prevented to areas that are designed to
remain dry.
7.
Weather and Water Penetration Resistance: The work, including flashings and junctions with
adjacent components, shall be fully weatherproof and watertight under all conditions with full
allowance made for deflections and other movements.
a)
Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested in accordance
with ASTM E331 at the following test-pressure difference:
1.
I.
Test-Pressure Difference: 75Pa.
Test-Pressure Difference: 300Pa.
b)
Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: No evidence of water leakage when tested
according to AAMA 501.1 under dynamic pressure equal to 20% of inward-acting, wind-load
design pressure of not less than 300Pa and not more than 575Pa.
c)
Water Leakage: As defined according to AAMA 501.1.
d)
Water Leakage: Uncontrolled water infiltrating the system or appearing on system's normally
exposed interior surfaces from sources other than condensation. Water controlled by flashing
and gutters that is drained back to the exterior and cannot damage adjacent materials or
finishes is not water leakage.
Acoustic Performance Requirements

1.
General: Refer to the Design Drawings for detailed performance requirements.

01 June 2016
034100 / 8
AECOM Middle East

PRECAST CONCRETE

Enabling Works
J.
2.
Works Site Performance: Ensure that the interfaces (including all movement and soft joints) between
elements making up the work are such that the laboratory sound insulation performances of all
elements are not degraded.
3.
Interfaces between the work and Other Elements: Provide details of all interfaces allowing sufficient
time for the Contractor to comment and to allow such comments to be implemented.
4.
Work's Self-noise:
2.
L.
The work, including all interfaces, shall be constructed so that any necessary expansion joints
are designed to permit noiseless movement.
b)
Air movement across the work shall not cause audible rattling, whistling or other attentioncatching noise inside the building.
Fire Performance Requirements

1.
K.
a)
Specific Fire Performance Requirements:

a)
Elements of the work shall be either non-combustible or not easily ignitable with low flame
spread characteristics and shall not produce excessive quantities of smoke or toxic gases.
b)
Surface Spread of Flame: In accordance with UL 723 and ASTM E84.
c)
Fire Rating: 2 hours.
Fire and smoke stopping:

a)
Provide all cavity barriers to meet the requirements of the NFPA.
b)
Fire and smoke stops shall be positively fastened in position in such a manner that they will
not become dislodged in the event of a fire.
Local Factors
1.
Accommodate local microclimatic conditions and grades of materials confirming their suitability and
durability.
2.
An assessment of microclimatic conditions shall be made with due allowance for any factors likely
to have an adverse effect upon materials intended for the work contract. More appropriate materials
shall be substituted if adverse effects are predicted.
Durability Performance Requirements

1.
2.
General:
a)
The performance criteria shall be satisfied for the full design life of the work, as stated by the
Specification, provided always that the maintenance has been carried out as specified.
b)
Metal sheets shall not suffer bowing, dimpling, oil canning, sagging, pillowing, rippling, warp,
abrupt transitions and other visual deformation or irregularity.
Impact and Abrasion Resistance:

a)
Generally, surfaces shall be sufficiently hard to resist heavy impacts from hand-held objects
without any noticeable change to the surface appearance. The work shall resist abrasion from
cleaning methods and maintenance systems without any noticeable change in surface
appearance.
b)
Impact tests shall be carried out on all work assemblies adjacent to pedestrian areas.
c)
The extent of any damage determined through testing shall be recorded and, where possible,
quantified. Samples shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator.

01 June 2016
034100 / 9
AECOM Middle East

PRECAST CONCRETE

Enabling Works
3.
M.
Details of tests shall be provided to demonstrate the performance of materials and finishes in
resisting abrasion from pedestrian traffic (hands, rings, luggage, cloth, shoes) and any other
abrasion resulting from adjacent traffic movements.
e)
Vehicular Impact Loads: Design spandrel beams acting as vehicular barriers for passenger
cars to resist a single 26.7kN service load and 44.5kN ultimate load applied horizontally in any
direction to the spandrel beam, with anchorages or attachments capable of transferring this
load to the structure. Design spandrel beams assuming the load to act at a height of 460mm
above the floor or ramp surface on an area not to exceed 0.93m.
Demountability:
a)
Elements of the work shall be individually and independently removable ensuring access for
maintenance and/ or replacement of panels in the event of damage.
b)
The removal of panels shall not affect the performance or safety of adjacent or any other part
of the work.
Exceptional Loads
1.
2.3
d)
If specifically required by the Contract Administrator, the system shall also be designed to withstand
exceptional loads such as blast pressures (e.g. terrorist bomb), high impact loads (e.g. vehicle
impact) and seismic loads (earthquakes). For such exceptional loads only, the system may be
allowed to sustain a degree of damage.
MATERIALS
A.
B.
General
1.
Aggregates for concrete shall conform to the requirements for fine and coarse aggregates in relevant
standards. Aggregates subject to high drying shrinkage such as quartz shall not be used. Fine and
coarse aggregates shall further be as specified in Section 033100 Structural Concrete.
2.
The Contractor shall obtain the Contract Administrator's acceptance prior to the use of admixtures
in each mix.
3.
Trial mixes shall verify the suitability of admixtures in accordance with Section 033100 Structural
Concrete.
4.
Cement and aggregates shall be obtained from the same source for casting all precast units with
the same visual appearance. Sufficient quantities of aggregate and other materials for casting all
the units shall be stockpiled for uninterrupted casting of precast units to the same visual appearance
and finish.
5.
The materials for mold construction shall be timber, steel, GRP, polypropylene, or concrete to the
6.
Cast-in Lifting Devices: Proprietary steel components selected so as not to interfere with grouting
of joints.
Mold Materials
1.
Molds: Rigid, dimensionally stable, non-absorptive material, warp and buckle free, that will provide
continuous and true precast concrete surfaces within fabrication tolerances indicated, nonreactive
with concrete and suitable for producing required finishes.
2.
Mold-Release Agent: Commercially produced liquid-release agent that will not bond
with, stain or adversely affect precast concrete surfaces and will not impair
subsequent surface or joint treatments of precast concrete.
3.
Form Liners: Units of face design, texture, arrangement, and configuration to match
those used for precast concrete design reference sample. Furnish with manufacturer's
recommended liquid-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect
precast concrete surfaces
and will not impair subsequent surface or joint
treatments
of precast concrete.

01 June 2016
034100 / 10
AECOM Middle East

PRECAST CONCRETE

Enabling Works
4.
C.
Surface Retarder: Chemical set retarder, capable of temporarily delaying final

hardening of newly-placed concrete mixture to depth of reveal specified.
Reinforcing Materials
1.
Recycled Content of Steel Products: Post-consumer recycled content plus of pre-consumer

recycled content not less than 25% or 60%, as suitably required.
2.
Reinforcing Bars: In accordance with ASTM A615/ A615M, Grade 420, deformed.
3.
Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: In accordance with ASTM A706/ A706M, deformed.
4.
Galvanized Reinforcing Bars: In accordance with ASTM A615/ A615M Grade 420 or ASTM A706/
A706M, deformed bars, ASTM A767/ A767M, Class II zinc coated, hot-dip galvanized and chromate
wash treated after fabrication and bending.
5.
Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: In accordance with ASTM A615/ A615M, Grade 420 or ASTM A706/
A706M, deformed bars, ASTM A775/ A775M or ASTM A934/ A934M epoxy coated.
6.
Steel Bar Mats: In accordance with ASTM A184/ A184M, fabricated from ASTM A615/ A615M Grade
420 or ASTM A706/ A706M, deformed bars, assembled with clips.
7.
Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: In accordance with ASTM A1064, fabricated from as-drawn
or galvanized steel wire into flat sheets.
8.
Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: In accordance with ASTM A1064/ A1064M, flat sheet.
9.
Epoxy-Coated-Steel Wire: In accordance with ASTM A884/ A884M, Class A coated, plain or
deformed, flat sheet, Type 1 bendable or Type 2 non-bendable coating.
10. Supports: Suspend reinforcement from back of mold or use bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other
devices for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in
place according to PCI MNL 117S.
D.
Prestressing Tendons
1.
Prestressing Strand: In accordance with ASTM A416/ A416M, Grade 1720 or Grade 1860, uncoated,
7-wire or ASTM A886/ A886M, Grade 1860, indented, 7-wire, low-relaxation strand.
2.
Unbonded Post-Tensioning Strand: In accordance with ASTM A416/ A416M, Grade 1860, uncoated,
7-wire, low-relaxation strand.
a)
3.
E.
Coat unbonded post-tensioning strand with corrosion inhibitor in accordance with ASTM D1743
and ACI 423.6, and sheath with polypropylene tendon sheathing complying with ACI 423.6.
Include anchorage devices and coupler assemblies.
Post-Tensioning Bars: In accordance with ASTM A722, uncoated high-strength steel bar.
Concrete Materials
1.
Portland Cement: In accordance with ASTM C150, Type I or Type III, gray, unless otherwise indicated.
a)
2.
For surfaces exposed to view in finished structure, mix gray with white cement, of same type,
brand and mill source.
Supplementary Cementitious Materials:

a)
Fly Ash: In accordance with ASTM C618 Class C or Class F, with maximum loss on ignition of
3%.
b)
Metakaolin Admixture: In accordance with ASTM C618, Class N.
c)
Silica Fume Admixture: In accordance with ASTM C1240, with optional chemical and physical
requirement.

01 June 2016
034100 / 11
AECOM Middle East

PRECAST CONCRETE

Enabling Works
d)
3.
Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: In accordance with ASTM C989, Grade 100 or Grade
120.
Normal-Weight Aggregates: Except as modified by PCI MNL 117S, ASTM C33, with coarse
aggregates complying with Class 5S. Stockpile fine and coarse aggregates for each type of exposed
finish from a single source (pit or quarry) for the Project.
a)
Face-Mixture-Coarse Aggregates: Selected, hard, and durable, free of material that reacts with
cement or causes staining, to match selected finish sample.
1.
b)
Face-Mixture-Fine Aggregates: Selected, natural or manufactured sand of same material as

coarse aggregate, unless otherwise accepted by the Contract Administrator.
4.
Lightweight Aggregates: Except as modified by PCI MNL 117S, ASTM C330, with absorption less
than 11%.
5.
Coloring Admixture: In accordance with ASTM C979, synthetic or natural mineral-oxide pigments
or colored water-reducing admixtures, temperature stable and non-fading.
6.
Water: Potable; free from deleterious material that may affect color stability, setting or strength of
concrete and complying with chemical limits of PCI MNL 117S.
7.
Air-Entraining Admixture: In accordance with ASTM C260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible

with other required admixtures.
8.
Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to not
contain calcium chloride, or more than 0.15% chloride ions or other salts by weight of admixture.
9.
F.
Gradation: Uniformly graded.
a)
Water-Reducing Admixtures: In accordance with ASTM C494/ C494M, Type A.
b)
Retarding Admixture: In accordance with ASTM C494/ C494M, Type B.
c)
Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: In accordance with ASTM C494/ C494M, Type D.
d)
Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: In accordance with ASTM C494/ C494M, Type E.
e)
High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: In accordance with ASTM C494/ C494M, Type F.
f)
High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: In accordance with ASTM C494/

C494M, Type G.
g)
Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: In accordance with ASTM C1017/ C1017 M.
Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, anodic inhibitor or mixed cathodic and

anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a protective barrier and minimizing chloride reactions with steel
reinforcement in concrete.
Steel Connection Materials

1.
Carbon-Steel Shapes and Plates: In accordance with ASTM A36/ A36M.
2.
Carbon-Steel-Headed Studs: In accordance with ASTM A108, AISI 1018 through AISI 1020, cold
finished, AWS D1.1/ D1.1M, Type A or Type B, with arc shields and with minimum mechanical
properties of PCI MNL 117S, Table 3.2.3.
3.
Carbon-Steel Plate: In accordance with ASTM A283/ A283M.
4.
Malleable Iron Castings: In accordance with ASTM A47/ A47M.
5.
Carbon-Steel Castings: In accordance with ASTM A27/ A27M, Grade 415-205.
6.
High-Strength, Low-Alloy Structural Steel: In accordance with ASTM A572/ A572M.

01 June 2016
034100 / 12
AECOM Middle East

PRECAST CONCRETE

Enabling Works
7.
Carbon-Steel Structural Tubing: In accordance with ASTM A500, Grade B.
8.
Wrought Carbon-Steel Bars: In accordance with ASTM A675/ A675M, Grade 450.
9.
Deformed-Steel Wire or Bar Anchors: In accordance with ASTM A496 or ASTM A706/ A706M.
10. Carbon-Steel Bolts and Studs: In accordance with ASTM F568M, Property Class 4.6, carbon-steel,
hex-head bolts and studs; carbon-steel nuts, ASTM A563M; and flat, unhardened steel washers,
ASTM F844.
11. High-Strength Bolts and Nuts: In accordance with ASTM A325M, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural
bolts, heavy hex carbon-steel nuts, ASTM A563M and hardened carbon-steel washers, ASTM
F436M.
12. Shop-Primed Finish: Prepare surfaces of non-galvanized steel items, except those surfaces to be
embedded in concrete, according to requirements in SSPC-SP 3 and shop-apply lead and chromatefree, rust-inhibitive primer, complying with performance requirements in MPI 79/ SSPC-Paint 25
according to SSPC-PA 1.
13. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.
G.
Stainless Steel Connection Materials

1.
Stainless Steel Plate: In accordance with ASTM A666, Type 304, of grade suitable for application.
2.
Stainless Steel Bolts and Studs: In accordance with ASTM F593, Alloy 304 or Alloy 316, hex-head
bolts and studs, stainless-steel nuts and flat, stainless-steel washers.
a)
3.
H.
Stainless Steel Headed Studs: In accordance with ASTM A276, with minimum mechanical properties
of PCI MNL 117S, Table 3.2.3.
Bearing Pads
1.
I.
Lubricate threaded parts of stainless-steel bolts with an anti seize thread lubricant during
assembly.
Provide one of the following bearing pads for precast concrete units as recommended by precast
fabricator for application:
a)
Elastomeric Pads: AASHTO M 251, plain, vulcanized, 100% polychloroprene (neoprene)

elastomer, molded to size or cut from a molded sheet, Type A durometer hardness of 50 to 70,
in accordance with ASTM D2240, minimum tensile strength 15.5MPa, ASTM D412.
b)
Random-Oriented, Fiber-Reinforced Elastomeric Pads: Preformed, randomly oriented

synthetic fibers set in elastomer. Type A durometer hardness of 70 to 90, in accordance with
ASTM D2240, capable of supporting a compressive stress of 20.7MPa with no cracking,
splitting, or delaminating in the internal portions of pad. Test 1 No. specimen for every 200
pads used in the Project.
c)
Cotton-Duck-Fabric-Reinforced Elastomeric Pads: Preformed, horizontally layered cottonduck fabric bonded to an elastomer; Type A durometer hardness of 80 to 100, in accordance
with ASTM D2240, complying with AASHTO's "AASHTO Load and Resistance Factor Design
(LRFD) Bridge Design Specifications, Division II, Section 18.10.2, or with MIL-C-882E.
d)
Frictionless Pads: Tetrafluoroethylene (Teflon), glass-fiber reinforced, bonded to stainless or

mild-steel plate, of type required for in-service stress.
e)
High-Density Plastic: Multimonomer, non-leaching, plastic strip.
Grout Materials
1.
Sand-Cement Grout: Portland cement, in accordance with ASTM C150, Type I, and clean, natural
sand, ASTM C144 or ASTM C404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2 parts sand, by volume, with
minimum water required for placement and hydration.

01 June 2016
034100 / 13
AECOM Middle East

PRECAST CONCRETE

Enabling Works
J.
2.
Non-metallic, Non-shrink Grout: Premixed, non-metallic, non-corrosive, non-staining grout

containing selected silica sands, Portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, plasticizing and
water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C1107, Grade A for drypack and Grades B and C for
flowable grout and of consistency suitable for application within a 30-minute working time.
3.
Epoxy-Resin Grout: Two-component, mineral-filled epoxy resin, in accordance with ASTM C881/
C881M, of type, grade and class to suit installation requirements.
Thin Brick Units and Accessories

1.
2.
K.
Thin Brick Units: In accordance with ASTM C216 or ASTM C1088, Grade Exterior, with a tolerance
of 1.6mm.
a)
Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30g/ 194m per minute; in accordance with ASTM C67.
b)
Efflorescence: Tested in accordance with ASTM C67 and rated "not effloresced".
c)
Surface Coating: Thin brick with colors or textures applied as coatings shall withstand 50 cycles
of freezing and thawing, in accordance with ASTM C67 with no observable difference in applied
finish when viewed from 3m.
Sand-Cement Mortar: Portland cement, in accordance with ASTM C150, Type I, and clean, natural
sand in accordance with ASTM C144.
Concrete Mixtures
1.
Prepare design mixtures for each type of precast concrete required.

a)
L.
Limit use of fly ash and silica fume to 20% of Portland cement by weight; limit metakaolin and
silica fume to 10% of Portland cement by weight.
2.
Design mixtures may be prepared by a qualified independent testing agency or by qualified precast
plant personnel at precast concrete fabricator's option.
3.
Limit water-soluble chloride ions to maximum percentage by weight of cement permitted by ACI
318M or PCI MNL 117S when tested according to ASTM C1218/ C1218M.
4.
Normal-Weight Concrete Mixtures: Proportion face mixtures/ face and backup mixtures/ full-depth
mixture/ face and backup mixtures or full-depth mixtures, at fabricator's option by either laboratory
trial batch or Site test data methods according to ACI 211.1, with materials to be used on the Project,
to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties:
a)
Compressive Strength (28 Days): 34.5MPa minimum.
b)
Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45.
5.
Water Absorption: 6% by weight or 14% by volume, tested according to PCI MNL 117S.
6.
Lightweight Concrete Backup Mixtures: Proportion mixtures by either laboratory trial batch or Site
test data methods according to ACI 211.2, with materials to be used on the Project, to provide
lightweight concrete with the following properties:
a)
Compressive Strength (28 Days): 34.5MPa.
b)
Unit Weight: Calculated equilibrium unit weight of 1842kg/ m, 48kg/ m, according to ASTM
C567.
7.
Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of

placement having an air content complying with PCI MNL 117S.
8.
When included in design mixtures, add other admixtures to concrete mixtures according to the
manufacturer's written instructions.
Metalwork General: All materials and components shall be durable and to the minimum standards set
out in the Specification.

01 June 2016
034100 / 14
AECOM Middle East

PRECAST CONCRETE

Enabling Works
M.
N.
Stainless Steel
1.
Unless otherwise specified, use austenitic, non-magnetic, Type 316 to suit the application.
2.
Specific grade designations shall be either as specified in the relevant sections of the Specification
or, where not identified specifically, selected to meet the performance criteria specified for the
particular element or components.
3.
Plate: In accordance with ASTM A666, Type 316.
4.
Bar Stock: In accordance with ASTM A276, Type 316.
5.
Tubing: In accordance with ASTM A269, Type 316, seamless welded.
6.
Sheet: In accordance with ASTM A240/ A240M or ASTM A666, Type 316, stretcher-leveled standard
of flatness. Tension leveled.
7.
Finish: In accordance with AISI No.4 or No.6 (satin finish).
8.
Fasteners, Bolts, Screws, Nuts and Fastenings: Stainless steel grade A2 or grade A4. Select the
property Class of fastenings to meet the specified performance requirements.
Aluminum
1.
O.
P.
Q.
Aluminum shall be in accordance with:

a)
Aluminum Extrusions: In accordance with ASTM B221M, aluminum alloy and temper as
recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish.
b)
Aluminum Sheet: In accordance with ASTM B209M, with temper as required for forming, or
as otherwise recommended by metal manufacturer for required finish.
c)
Aluminum Castings: In accordance with ASTM B26/ B26M, Alloy 319.
d)
Structural aluminum shall comply with AA ASM 35 and AA ADM 1.
e)
Only appropriate grades, strengths and thicknesses of aluminum shall be used to ensure that
all structural and finishing requirements of the Specification are met. The wall thicknesses of
aluminum extrusions shall be sufficient to ensure their rigidity in the lengths required in the
final installation.
Stainless Steel Castings

1.
Shall be of austenitic stainless steel and the casting alloy shall be determined by the Contractor to
meet the requirements of the Specification but shall be equal or superior to grade 1.4408 with
respect to corrosion resistance.
2.
The surface roughness of the casting surface prior to any subsequent finishing process shall be
SCRATA A2 (Steel Castings Research and Trade Association) or better.
3.
Make allowance for two post production finishing processes to be utilized. The processes shall be
agreed with the Contract Administrator and shall include blast finishes (including bead blasting) and
electropolishing or acid pickling.
Corrosion-Resistant Coating
1.
Cold-applied, compounded for 0.4mm dry film thickness per coat.
2.
Provide inert-type non-corrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components and other
deleterious impurities.
Sealants
1.
Refer to Architectural Specification, Section 079200 Joint Sealants.

01 June 2016
034100 / 15
AECOM Middle East

PRECAST CONCRETE

Enabling Works
2.
Where the sealant location involves special requirements, comply with the following:
a)
2.4
Where the sealant is required to achieve a period of fire resistance, provide independent
performance certification of the proposed sealants to show the sealant satisfies the required
fire resistance requirement.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Precast Accessories: Provide clips, hangers, plastic or steel shims and other accessories required to
install precast concrete units.
B.
Concrete Accessories: Provide water-stops, joint fillers, and sealants, refer to Section 031500 Concrete
Accessories.
2.5
FABRICATION
A.
General
1.
The precast concrete units shall be manufactured to sizes, patterns and profiles as indicated on
the Design Drawings and be within the specified tolerance deviations.
2.
The precast concrete units shall be manufactured in a controlled factory environment in accordance
with Precast/ Pre-stressed Concrete Institute (PCI) MNL 117S.
3.
Check the overall dimensions, straightness, squareness, twist and flatness of the molds immediately
before each reuse and of each unit as soon as possible after de-molding. Make adjustments to
molds as necessary.
4.
All hand forming details shall be carried out before the material has achieved its initial set, to ensure
complete bonding.
5.
Curing methods shall be adopted to achieve sufficient strength for the de-molding process.
B.
Cast-in Anchors, Inserts, Plates, Angles and Other Anchorage Hardware: Fabricate anchorage
hardware with sufficient anchorage and embedment in accordance with design requirements.
Accurately position for attachment of loose hardware and secure in place during pre-casting
operations. Locate anchorage hardware where it does not affect position of main reinforcement
or
concrete placement.
C.
Reinforcement: Comply with recommendations in PCI MNL 117S for fabricating, placing and
supporting reinforcement.
D.
1.
Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, and other materials that reduce or destroy
the bond with concrete. When damage to epoxy-coated reinforcing exceeds specified limits, repair
with patching material compatible with coating material and epoxy coat bar ends after cutting.
2.
Accurately position, support and secure reinforcement against displacement during concreteplacement and consolidation operations. Completely conceal support devices to prevent exposure
on finished surfaces.
3.
Place reinforcement to maintain at least 19mm minimum coverage. Arrange, space and securely
tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position while placing concrete. Direct wire tie
ends away from finished, exposed concrete surfaces.
4.
Place reinforcing steel and pre-stressing strand to maintain at least 19mm minimum concrete cover.
Increase cover requirements for reinforcing steel to 38mm when units are exposed to corrosive
environment or severe exposure conditions. Arrange, space and securely tie bars and bar supports
to hold reinforcement in position while placing concrete. Direct wire tie ends away from finished,
exposed concrete surfaces.
5.
Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full
mesh spacing and wire tie laps, where required by design. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent
continuous laps in either direction.
Reinforce precast concrete units to resist handling, transportation and erection stresses.

01 June 2016
034100 / 16
AECOM Middle East

PRECAST CONCRETE

Enabling Works
E.
1.
Pre-stress tendons for precast concrete units by either pre-tensioning or post-tensioning methods.
Comply with PCI MNL 117S.
2.
Delay de-tensioning or post-tensioning of precast, pre-stressed concrete units until concrete has
reached its indicated minimum design release compressive strength as established by test cylinders
cured under same conditions as concrete.
3.
De-tension pre-tensioned tendons either by gradually releasing tensioning jacks or by heat- cutting
tendons, using a sequence and pattern to prevent shock or unbalanced loading.
4.
If concrete has been heat cured, de-tension while concrete is still warm and moist to avoid
dimensional changes that may cause cracking or undesirable stresses.
5.
Protect strand ends and anchorages with bituminous, zinc-rich or epoxy paint to avoid corrosion
and possible rust spots.
Mold Fabrication
1.
Molds: Accurately construct molds, mortar tight, of sufficient strength to withstand pressures due
to concrete-placement operations and temperature changes and for pre-stressing and de-tensioning
operations. Coat contact surfaces of molds with release agent before reinforcement is placed. Avoid
contamination of reinforcement and pre-stressing tendons by release agent.
a)
2.
Place form liners accurately to provide finished surface texture indicated. Provide solid backing
and supports to maintain stability of liners during concrete placement. Coat form liner with
form-release agent.
Maintain molds to provide completed precast concrete units of shapes, lines, and dimensions
indicated, within fabrication tolerances specified.
a)
Form joints are not permitted on faces exposed to view in the finished work.
b)
Edge and Corner Treatment: Uniformly chamfered or on a radius as instructed by the Contract
Administrator.
F.
Comply with requirements in PCI MNL 117S and requirements in this Section for measuring, mixing,
transporting and placing concrete. After concrete batching, no additional water may be added.
G.
Place face mixture to a minimum thickness after consolidation of the greater of 25mm or 1.5 times the
maximum aggregate size, but not less than the minimum reinforcing cover specified.
H.
Place concrete in a continuous operation to prevent seams or planes of weakness from forming in
precast concrete units.
1.
Place backup concrete mixture to ensure bond with face-mixture concrete.
I.
Thoroughly consolidate placed concrete by internal and external vibration without dislocating or
damaging reinforcement and built-in items and minimize pour lines, honeycombing or entrapped
air on
surfaces. Use equipment and procedures complying with PCI MNL 117S.
J.
Comply with PCI MNL 117S for hot- and cold-weather concrete placement.
K.
Identify pickup points of precast concrete units and orientation in structure with permanent markings,
complying with markings indicated on the Shop Drawings. Imprint or permanently mark casting
date
on each precast concrete unit on a surface that will not show in finished structure.
L.
Cure concrete, according to requirements in PCI MNL 117S, by moisture retention without heat or by
accelerated heat curing using low-pressure live steam or radiant heat and moisture. Cure units
until
compressive strength is high enough to ensure that stripping does not have an effect on
performance
or appearance of final product.
M.
Discard and replace precast concrete units that do not comply with requirements, including structural,
manufacturing tolerance and appearance, unless repairs meet requirements in PCI MNL 117S
and the
Contract Administrator's acceptance.
N.
Fabrication Tolerances

01 June 2016
034100 / 17
AECOM Middle East

PRECAST CONCRETE

Enabling Works
1.
Fabricate precast concrete units straight and true to size and shape with exposed edges and corners
precise and true so each finished unit complies with PCI MNL 117S product tolerances as well as
position tolerances for cast-in items.
2.
Fabricate precast concrete units straight and true to size and shape with exposed edges and corners
precise and true so each finished unit complies with the following product tolerances:
a)
Overall height and width of units, measured at the face exposed to view, as follows:
1.
3m or under, 3mm.
2.
b)
3m to 6m, to +3mm, -5mm.
3.
6m to 12m, 6mm.
4.
Each additional 3m, 1.5mm.
Overall height and width of units, measured at the face not exposed to view, as follows:
1.
3m or under, 6mm.
2.
O.
3m to 6m, +6mm, -10mm.
3.
6m to 12m, 10mm.
4.
Each additional 3m, 3mm.
Metalwork, General
1.
The Detailed Design of sections, material thicknesses and the dimensions indicated on the Design
Drawings shall be maintained within specified tolerances.
2.
Before and after making permanent connections in frames and other structural elements, which are
assembled before delivery to Site, the fit shall be checked for accuracy.
3.
Fabricate components carefully and accurately to ensure compliance with the Design Drawings and
the Specification.
4.
Do not permit contact between dissimilar metals in components that are to be fastened where
moisture may be present or occur.
5.
Unless otherwise specified, concealed items shall be mill finished aluminum in internal conditions
only or hot dip galvanized steel in accordance with ASTM A123/ A123M. Any cut edges shall be
treated to ensure that the level of protection is maintained.
6.
Finished components shall be rigid and free from distortion, cracks, burrs and sharp arrises. Moving
parts shall move freely and without binding.
7.
Unless specified otherwise, miter corner junctions of identical sections.
8.
Cold Formed Work: Use brake presses or cold rolling to produce accurate profiles with straight
arrises.
9.
Adhesive Bonding:
a)
Prepare surfaces of metals to receive adhesives by degreasing and abrading mechanically or

chemically.
b)
Use adhesives to the manufacturer's written recommendations.
c)
Form bond under pressure.
10. Welding/ Brazing General:

01 June 2016
034100 / 18
AECOM Middle East

PRECAST CONCRETE

Enabling Works
a)
Thoroughly clean surfaces to be joined.
b)
Ensure accurate fit using clamps and jigs where practicable. Use tack welds only for temporary
attachment.
c)
Make joints with parent and filler metal fully bonded throughout with no inclusions, holes,
porosity or cracks.
d)
Prevent weld spatter falling on surfaces of materials that will be self-finished and visible in
completed work.
e)
Remove all traces of flux residue, slag and weld spatter.
f)
Metal arc welding shall be to American Welding Society (AWS) D1.1/ D1.1M, "Structural
Welding Code - Steel" and AWS D1.2/ D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum.", or other
methods subject to review by the Contract Administrator.
g)
Where Site or shop welding is required, it shall be by the process known as manual inert gas
tungsten-arc welding and it shall be carried out by a procedure qualified and certified to AWS
D1.1/ D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel" and AWS D1.2/ D1.2M, "Structural Welding
Code - Aluminum."
h)
1.
Welds shall be continuous and of a material and technique suitable to the sections being
assembled.
2.
Weld finish shall be smooth with all flux residues removed and no surface defects (e.g.
undercut, porosity, deep ridges, etc.).
Finishing Welded/ Brazed Joints: Visible butt joints in completed work shall be smooth and
flush with adjacent surfaces.
P.
Visible fillet joints in completed work shall be executed neatly. Grind smooth where specified.
Q.
Mild Steel
R.
S.
1.
Welding procedures shall be such that distortion is reduced to a minimum and local distortion
rendered negligible in the final fabrication. Corrections, if necessary, shall be undertaken by a method
which has been agreed to by the Contract Administrator.
2.
No welds other than those indicated on the Shop Drawings, even for temporary attachments or
repairs, shall be acceptable unless agreed in advance by the Contract Administrator. If welded
temporary connections are agreed upon, then the welding and removal of the connection shall be
in accordance with AWS D1.1/ D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel".
3.
External visible lines and depressions caused by the internal welding of hollow section steelwork
shall be positioned in the work so as to be non-visible.
Aluminum
1.
All extruded aluminum alloy members shall be fabricated from the appropriate grade of aluminum
alloy complying with the performance requirements.
2.
Aluminum panels shall be manufactured such that the grain on each runs in the same direction.
3.
Aluminum extrusions containing score lines resulting from poorly polished surfaces shall not be
acceptable.
4.
Aluminum sheets shall not suffer bowing, dimpling, oil canning, sagging, pillowing, rippling, warp,
abrupt transitions or other visible deformation or irregularity.
Stainless Steel
1.
Unless otherwise specified, welds to visible areas of stainless steel shall be ground smooth to
achieve a seamless surface. Heat tints shall be removed using light abrasives, pickling paste, wire
brushing or similar to achieve continuity with the specified finish. Areas difficult to access shall be
manually finished if necessary.

01 June 2016
034100 / 19
AECOM Middle East

PRECAST CONCRETE

Enabling Works
2.
All welds shall comply with American Welding Society (AWS) D1.1/ D1.1M, "Structural Welding
Code - Steel". Distortion due to thermal movement shall be minimized using jigs or other methods
as appropriate during welding. Welding methods and consumables shall be chosen as most
appropriate to the type, thickness, shape and location of joints to meet the performance levels
required and have mechanical properties at least equal to the original base metal. In addition,
consumables shall have an equal or superior corrosion resistance to the base metal being welded.
All welding recommendations required to meet other relevant standards as specified shall also
apply. Electrodes for manual metal arc welding shall comply with AWS requirements.
3.
Stress corrosion or cracking shall not occur and all necessary precautions in the fabrication and
installation of stainless steel elements/ materials shall be undertaken, avoiding the simultaneous
presence of any of the following:
4.
T.
2.6
Tensile stresses.
b)
Residual stresses after cold working or welding.
c)
Aggressive local environmental conditions.
d)
Metal temperatures that in conjunction with the above may induce stress corrosion cracking.
Thermal Cutting of Stainless Steel: After cutting, grind off material that is liable to corrode.
Accuracy of Fabrication
1.
Exact Site dimensions shall be taken as necessary before starting fabrication. Report any
discrepancies to the Contract Administrator without delay and obtain instructions before proceeding.
2.
Permissible deviations for panels:
3.
U.
a)
a)
Length: 1.5mm.
b)
Width: 1.5mm.
c)
Squareness: 1.5mm in 1m (taking the longer of 2 sides at any corner as a baseline and
measuring the deviation of the shorter side from the baseline perpendicular).
d)
Flatness (of panels with a core thickness of 12mm and over, as delivered to Site): 1mm under
a 600mm straightedge.
Finished dimensions of components must be such that the required accuracy of the finished linings/
paneling and joints can be achieved.
Stainless Steel Castings

1.
Shall be manufactured using the lost wax process or such other process as may be proposed by
the Contractor and accepted by the Contract Administrator.
2.
The surface finish of the castings shall be determined by the submission of samples for review and
acceptance by the Contract Administrator. Samples once accepted should be the standard required
for all subsequent castings to be used in the work.

A.
General
1.
Quality-Control Testing: Test and inspect precast concrete according to PCI MNL 117S requirements.
If using self-consolidating concrete, also test and inspect according to PCI TR-6, "Interim Guidelines
for the Use of Self-Consolidating Concrete in Precast/ Pre-stressed Concrete Institute Member
Plants."
2.
Employ an independent testing agency to evaluate precast concrete fabricator's quality-control and
testing methods.

01 June 2016
034100 / 20
AECOM Middle East

PRECAST CONCRETE

Enabling Works
a)
3.
Strength of precast concrete units will be considered deficient if units fail in accordance with American
Concrete Institute (ACI) 318M requirements for concrete strength.
4.
Testing Requirements:
a)
B.
C.
1.
A minimum of three representative cores shall be taken from units of suspect strength
from locations directed by the Contract Administrator.
2.
Cores shall be tested in an air-dry condition.
3.
Strength of concrete for each series of 3 cores shall be considered satisfactory if average
compressive strength is equal to at least 85% of 28-day design compressive strength and
no single core is less than 75% of 28-day design compressive strength.
4.
Test reports shall be furnished by the manufacturer in accordance with the Specification.
The manufacturer shall submit certified test reports independently verified for each type
and class of precast unit. Reports shall verify that the material will meet all performance
requirements of the Specification. Previously completed test reports will be acceptable if
current and indicative of products used on this Project.
5.
Patching: If core test results are satisfactory and precast concrete units comply with
requirements, clean and dampen core holes and solidly fill with precast concrete mixture
that has no coarse aggregate and finish to match adjacent precast concrete surfaces.
1.
Air infiltration when tested according to ASTM E283.
2.
Repeat air filtration when tested according to ASTM E283.
Weatherproofing and Water-tightness Tests
2.
E.
If there is evidence that strength of precast concrete units may be deficient or may not comply
with ACI 318M requirements, pre-caster will employ an independent testing agency to obtain,
prepare and test cores drilled from hardened concrete to determine compressive strength
according to ASTM C42/ C42M.
Air Permeability Tests
1.
D.
Allow testing agency access to material storage areas, concrete production equipment,
concrete placement and curing facilities. Cooperate with testing agency and provide samples
of materials and concrete mixtures as may be requested for additional testing and evaluation.
Tests shall be carried out adopting either the static or the dynamic procedures, as appropriate to
the system type and expected conditions, set out below:
a)
Water penetration under static pressure when tested according to ASTM E331.
b)
Water penetration under dynamic pressure when tested according to AAMA 501.1.
Repeat water penetration under static pressure when tested according to ASTM E331.
Wind Resistance Tests

1.
Perform wind tunnel testing as specified in 'Wind Tunnel Testing Specification' by the Structural
Engineer, to establish various governing wind pressures for the wall assembly.
2.
Provide structural-performance preloading at 50% of the specified wind-load design pressure when
tested according to ASTM E330.
3.
Structural performance at maximum 150% of positive and negative wind-load design pressures
when tested according to ASTM E330.
Structural-Test Performance in accordance with ASTM E330 as follows:

1.
When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies do not evidence
deflection exceeding specified limits.

01 June 2016
034100 / 21
AECOM Middle East

PRECAST CONCRETE

Enabling Works
F.
G.
H.
I.
2.
When tested at 150% of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies, including
anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent deformation of
main framing members exceeding 0.2% of span.
3.
Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds.
Off Site Test Sequence

1.
The Testing Authority shall witness the installation and dismantling of the prototypes, record any
variations to the agreed details on a set of the prototype assembly drawings prepared by the
Contractor and shall also record the extent of water penetration into the system.
2.
No test shall be carried out unless all previous tests in the sequence have been passed to the
satisfaction of the Testing Authority.
3.
If any modification is made to the prototype, repeat testing shall be undertaken. However, if any
modification is undertaken that, in the opinion of the independent testing authority or witness,
invalidates earlier test results, the sequence shall commence again at the first test. This requirement
is not applicable to glass breakage during the wind resistance safety test when replacement of a
pane of glass may be carried out without re-starting the whole sequence.
Acoustic Testing - Initial Advance Test

1.
Identify the glass configurations and incorporate any acoustically enhanced configurations that may
be necessary to meet the Specification.
2.
Immediately following the appointment of the cladding Subcontractor, arrange laboratory acoustic
tests of the proposed glass configurations using similar framing to that intended with similar
dimensions and mass per meter run of framing. These prototypes will not be used as visual samples
and will not include glass coatings or heat treatments but shall be used to confirm compliance with
the specified acoustic data.
3.
From initial results of acoustic testing, provide detailed acoustic assessment of each cladding type
for review.
Discretionary Tests - Thermal Cycling

1.
The prototypes shall be tested in order to determine the effects of thermal movements on the
performance of the work, in particular the joints.
2.
Testing shall be carried out in accordance with the CWCT Standard for Systemized Building
Envelopes.
Testing of Fastening
1.
As the panels are manufactured, the Contractor shall arrange for testing of the primary brackets
and fastening to be carried out to selected panels to confirm compliance with the Specification and
the requirements of Local Building Regulations.
2.
1 in every 5 panels manufactured shall have their fastenings subjected to pull-out and shear testing.
3.
The primary fastenings shall be subjected to test loading that is equivalent to the design load with
a factor of 1.1 for both pull-out and shear. The direction of the test loads shall be consistent with
the design principles and shall allow for the most onerous design conditions.
4.
The Contractor shall submit to the Contract Administrator for review proposals for these tests, which
shall be suitably modified to allow for the primary bracket design.
5.
The Contractor shall arrange for Test Reports to be produced at appropriate intervals by the
Independent Testing Authority and submitted to the Contract Administrator for review. Where
fastenings are displaced by more than 0.1mm, this shall be brought to the attention of the Contract
Administrator immediately.
6.
Depending on the initial test results, the frequency of testing may be reviewed and modified with
prior agreement.

01 June 2016
034100 / 22
AECOM Middle East

PRECAST CONCRETE

Enabling Works
J.
2.7
Sealants: Written confirmation from the sealant manufacturer shall be obtained and submitted to the
Contract Administrator for consideration of the suitability of the sealant for the application intended. Refer
to Architectural Specification, Section 079200 Joint Sealants.
FINISHES
A.
General
1.
B.
Panel faces shall be free of joint marks, grain and other obvious defects. Corners, including false
joints, shall be uniform, straight and sharp. Finish exposed-face surfaces of precast concrete units
to match approved sample panels and as follows:
a)
PCI's "Architectural Precast Concrete - Color and Texture Selection Guide," of plate numbers
indicated.
b)
As-Cast Surface Finish: Provide surfaces free of pockets, sand streaks and honeycombs.
c)
Textured-Surface Finish: Impart by form liners or inserts to provide surfaces free of pockets,
streaks and honeycombs, with uniform color and texture.
d)
Bushhammer Finish: Use power or hand tools to remove matrix and fracture coarse aggregates.
e)
Exposed-Aggregate Finish: Use chemical retarding agents applied to concrete forms and
washing and brushing procedures to expose aggregate and surrounding matrix surfaces after
form removal.
f)
Abrasive-Blast Finish: Use abrasive grit, equipment, application techniques, and cleaning
procedures to expose aggregate and surrounding matrix surfaces.
g)
Acid-Etched Finish: Use acid and hot-water solution, equipment, application techniques and
cleaning procedures to expose aggregate and surrounding matrix surfaces. Protect hardware,
connections and insulation from acid attach.
h)
Honed Finish: Use continuous mechanical abrasion with fine grit, followed by filling and rubbing
procedures.
i)
Polished Finish: Use continuous mechanical abrasion with fine grit, followed by filling and
rubbing procedures.
j)
Sand-Embedment Finish: Use selected stones placed in a sand bed in bottom of mold, with
sand removed after curing.
k)
Finish exposed surfaces of precast concrete units to match face-surface finish.
l)
Finish exposed surfaces of precast concrete units by smooth, steel-trowel finish.
m)
Finish unexposed surfaces of precast concrete units by float finish.
Sealants: Written confirmation from the sealant manufacturer shall be obtained and submitted to the
Contract Administrator for consideration of the suitability of the sealant for the application
intended. Refer to Architectural Specification, Section 079200 Joint Sealants.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verification of Conditions: Prior to commencing installation, examine the structural openings,

substrate, adjacent construction and the conditions in which the work will be installed. Verify
dimensions and levels, and surfaces to receive the work of this Section. Notify the
Contract
Administrator of unsatisfactory conditions.
B.
Examine supporting structural frame or foundation and conditions for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, true and level bearing surfaces, and other conditions affecting
performance.

01 June 2016
034100 / 23
AECOM Middle East

PRECAST CONCRETE

Enabling Works
C.
D.
Do not install precast concrete units until supporting cast-in-place building structural framing has
attained minimum allowable design compressive strength or supporting steel or other structure
is
complete.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
General
1.
Install clips, hangers, bearing pads and other accessories required for connecting precast concrete
units to supporting members and backup materials.
2.
Install precast concrete level, plumb and square within specified allowable tolerances. Provide
temporary supports and bracing as required to maintain position, stability and alignment as units
are being permanently connected.
a)
Install temporary steel or plastic spacing shims or bearing pads as precast concrete units are
being installed. Tack weld steel shims to each other to prevent shims from separating.
b)
Maintain horizontal and vertical joint alignment and uniform joint width as installation
progresses.
c)
Remove projecting lifting devices and grout fill voids within recessed lifting devices flush with
surface of adjacent precast surfaces when recess is exposed.
d)
Unless otherwise indicated, maintain uniform joint widths of 19mm.
B.
Connect precast concrete units in position by bolting, welding, grouting or as otherwise indicated on
the Shop Drawings. Remove temporary shims, wedges and spacers as soon as practical after
connecting and grouting are completed.
C.
Do not permit connections to disrupt continuity of roof flashing.
D.
Welding: Comply with applicable AWS D1.1/ D1.1M and AWS D1.4 for welding, welding electrodes,
appearance, quality of welds and methods used in correcting welding work.
E.
1.
Protect precast concrete units and bearing pads from damage by Site welding or cutting operations
and provide non-combustible shields as required.
2.
Welds not specified shall be continuous fillet welds, using no less than the minimum fillet as specified
by AWS.
3.
Clean weld-affected metal surfaces with chipping hammer followed by brushing and apply a minimum
0.1mm thick coat of galvanized repair paint to galvanized surfaces according to ASTM A780.
4.
Clean weld-affected metal surfaces with chipping hammer followed by brushing and reprime
damaged painted surfaces.
5.
Remove, reweld or repair incomplete and defective welds.
At bolted connections, use lock washers, tack welding or other approved means to prevent loosening of
nuts after final adjustment.
1.
Where slotted connections are used, verify bolt position and tightness. For sliding connections,
properly secure bolt but allow bolt to move within connection slot. For friction connections, apply
specified bolt torque and check 25% of bolts at random by calibrated torque wrench.
F.
Grouting Connections: Grout connections where required or indicated. Retain grout in place until hard
enough to support itself. Pack spaces with stiff grout material, tamping until voids are completely
filled. Place grout to finish smooth, level and plumb with adjacent concrete surfaces. Keep grouted
joints damp for not less than 24 hours after initial set. Promptly remove grout material from
exposed
surfaces before it affects finishes or hardens.
G.
Movement: Install movement joints. Keep joints clear of obstructions. Prevent friction between moving
surfaces to ensure unrestricted and noiseless movement.

01 June 2016
034100 / 24
AECOM Middle East

PRECAST CONCRETE

Enabling Works
H.
Installed work to be true to detail with continuous profiles, free from marks, defects, flaws, steps, waves
or damage.
I.
Fastenings: Refer to Architectural Specification, Section 050523 Metal Fastenings.

1.
J.
Fastening Directly to Structure

a)
Provide and install all fastening devices, including framing, bearing brackets and movement
fastenings and carry out all necessary preparation work such as drilling, plugging, screwing,
bolting, cutting for anchor bolts or sockets to be cast in, making good, including grouting-in of
anchor bolts, and fastening whatsoever necessary.
b)
All fastenings shall be to the slab edge face condition, to be coordinated with the superstructure
design.
Installation Tolerances
1.
Install precast concrete units level, plumb, square, true, and in alignment without exceeding the
noncumulative installation tolerances of PCI MNL 117S, Appendix I.
2.
Install precast concrete units level, plumb, square and true, without exceeding the following
noncumulative installation tolerances:
a)
Plan location from building grid datum: 13mm.
b)
Plan location from centerline of steel: 13mm.
c)
Top Elevation from nominal top elevation as follows:
d)
e)
3.
1.
Exposed Individual Panel: 6mm.
2.
Non-Exposed Individual Panel: 13mm.
3.
Exposed Panel Relative to Adjacent Panel: 6mm.
4.
Non-Exposed Panel Relative to Adjacent Panel: 13mm.
Support Elevation from nominal support elevation as follows:

1.
Maximum Low: 13mm.
2.
Maximum High: 6mm.
Maximum plumb variation over the lesser of height of structure or 30m: 25mm.
1.
Plumb in any 3m of element height: 6mm.
2.
Maximum jog in alignment of matching edges: 6mm.
3.
Joint Width (Governs over Joint Taper): 6mm.
4.
Maximum Joint Taper: 10mm.
5.
Joint Taper in 3m: 6mm.
6.
Maximum jog in alignment of matching faces: 6mm.
7.
Differential bowing or camber, between adjacent members of same design: 6mm.
8.
Opening Height between Spandrels: 6mm.
Submit a detailed list of tolerances to which the work will be installed for review by the Contract
Administrator. As a minimum this shall include the following:

01 June 2016
034100 / 25
AECOM Middle East

PRECAST CONCRETE

Enabling Works
K.
3.3
a)
Position on plan.
b)
Level.
c)
Alignment.
d)
Joints between.
e)
Diagonal.
f)
Eccentricity.
g)
Inclination.
4.
Sufficient analysis of the installation sequence and the overall method statement shall be performed
to ensure that the installation tolerances stated above are met.
5.
The Shop Drawings show the dimensional and detailed provisions intended to accommodate the
construction tolerances of surrounding elements in order to ensure that all aspects of the work relate
satisfactorily to the Work as a whole.
Metalwork
1.
All inaccessible steel shall be properly protected against corrosion for the design life of the Work.
2.
Adequate measures shall be taken to prevent bimetallic corrosion between dissimilar metals and
to isolate aluminum components from cementitious surfaces.
3.
No welds other than those indicated on the Shop Drawings, even for temporary attachments or
repairs, shall be acceptable unless agreed in advance by the Contract Administrator. If welded
temporary connections are agreed upon, then the welding and removal of the connection shall be
in accordance with AWS requirements.
4.
Vent holes in hollow sections shall be sealed in a manner that shall prevent the ingress of moisture.
The proposed method of achieving this requirement shall be submitted for review by the Contract
Administrator.

A.
Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform installation inspections and
prepare reports.
B.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test
reports.
1.
C.
Repair or remove and replace work where tests and inspections indicate that it does not comply with
specified requirements.
1.
D.
3.4
Testing agency shall report test results promptly and in writing to the Contractor and the Contract
Administrator.
Additional testing and inspecting, at the Contractor's expense shall be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
Testing of Fastenings: As the work proceeds, allow for the bolts to be proof load tested as required
and witnessed by the Contract Administrator.
A.
Cleaning
1.
Remove debris and unused materials from Site upon completion and dispose of safely. Clean
exposed surfaces using methods recommended by the material manufacturers and without
scratching surfaces. Do not use abrasive cleaners or materials that will damage adjacent work.

01 June 2016
034100 / 26
AECOM Middle East

PRECAST CONCRETE

Enabling Works
B.
3.5
2.
Clean mortar, plaster, fireproofing, weld slag and other deleterious material from concrete surfaces
and adjacent materials immediately.
3.
Perform cleaning procedures, if necessary, according to precast concrete fabricator's

recommendations. Clean soiled precast concrete surfaces with detergent and water, using stiff fiber
brushes and sponges, and rinse with clean water. Protect other work from staining or damage due
to cleaning operations.
4.
Do not use cleaning materials or processes that could change the appearance of exposed concrete
finishes or damage adjacent materials.
Adjusting
1.
Make good adjacent surfaces marred during installation, to the acceptance of the Contract
Administrator. Repair or replace damaged or defective items to the acceptance of the Contract
Administrator.
2.
Repair precast concrete units to the acceptance of the Contract Administrator. The Contract
Administrator reserves the right to reject repaired units that do not comply with requirements.
3.
Precast concrete manufacturer shall develop appropriate repair mixtures and techniques during the
production sample approval process.
4.
Mix patching materials and repair units so cured patches blend with color, texture and uniformity of
adjacent exposed surfaces and show no apparent line of demarcation between original and repaired
work when viewed in typical daylight illumination from a distance of 6m.
5.
Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings with galvanizing repair paint according to ASTM
A780.
6.
Wire brush clean and paint damaged prime-painted components with same type of shop primer.
7.
Remove and replace damaged precast concrete units when repairs do not comply with requirements.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect exposed surfaces during and after installation, with boards, coverings, low tack tapes and
adhesive film. Remove and replace protection as instructed, for inspection; remove immediately before
Taking-Over.
END OF SECTION

01 June 2016
034100 / 27
AECOM Middle East

PRECAST CONCRETE

Enabling Works
SECTION 101453 -- TRAFFIC SIGNAGE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
1.2
SUBMITTALS
1.3
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
DESIGN CRITERIA
2.2
PRODUCT SELECTION
2.3
FABRICATION
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
3.2
CLEANING

01 June 2016
8
8
10
101453
AECOM Middle East

TRAFFIC SIGNAGE

Enabling Works
SECTION 101453 -- TRAFFIC SIGNAGE

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
1.
Municipality, Public Authority for Electricity and Water (PAEW), Sultanate of Oman Highway Design
Standards, Muscat Electricity Distribution Company (MEDC), and all other service authorities for
specification clauses that are not listed hereunder.
2.
regulations.
Section Includes
1.
C.
1.2
Traffic Signs.
Definitions for Signage Terms: The following are definitions of terms used in this Section.
1.
Brightness: A measurement of the ratio of the quantity of incident light per unit area returned to an
observer from a reflector. This measurement is expressed in units of candlepower per footcandle
per unit area.
2.
Divergence Angle: The angle at the reflector between the observer's line of sight and the axis of
the incident light beam.
3.
Entrance Angle: The angle at the reflector between the axis of the incident light beam and the normal
to the reflective surface.
4.
Intensity: A measurement of the ratio of the quantity of incident light per total area returned to an
observer from a reflector. This measurement is expressed in units of candlepower per footcandle.
5.
Legend: Characters, letters, numbers, and symbols including the border appearing on the
background on the sign face.
6.
Sign Face: That part of a sign panel facing toward oncoming traffic.
7.
Sign Panel: The structural part of a sign made of assembled units or sheet metal, including
reflectorized material applied to the face and bearing a legend, but excluding the supporting posts
or structure.
8.
Sign Supports: The posts, beams and structural tubes necessary to support the sign panels shall
be as indicated on the Design Drawings.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Comply with the requirements of Employer General Requirements and submit the following.
1.
Certificates: Provide material certificates from manufacturer stating that materials used meet
specified requirements for the following. Submit certificates to the Contract Administrator for
acceptance.
a)
Show compliance with the color requirement for traffic signage sheet reflective materials.
2.
Test Results: Provide material test results.
3.
Shop Drawings: Provide for all traffic signage components indicated on the Design Drawings include
a full size layout of each sign panel.

01 June 2016
101453 / 1
AECOM Middle East

TRAFFIC SIGNAGE

Enabling Works
1.3
4.
Samples: Prior to commencement of the Work, furnish samples of 3kg of the proposed glass beads
and the manufacturer's specification for review and acceptance.
5.
Submit full detailed descriptions of each item of equipment, together with the appropriate
manufacturer's catalogs, technical data, and/ or pamphlets of the machinery or equipment to be
utilized on Site prior to commencement of the Work.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Provide in accordance with Employer General Requirements.

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Standards and other Codes of Practice: The Work shall be in accordance with the following standards
and codes.
1.
2.
B.
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials, AASHTO Standards:

a)
AASHTO M247
b)
AASHTO M248
c)
AASHTO M249 White and Yellow Reflective Thermoplastic Striping Material (Solid Form).
d)
AASHTO T180 Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 4.54kg (10-lb) Rammer and a
457mm (18in) Drop.
American Society for Testing and Materials, ASTM International Standards:

a)
ASTM A36 Structural Steel.
b)
ASTM A53 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless.
c)
ASTM A123/ A123M Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on
Iron and Steel Products.
d)
ASTM A153 Zinc-Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.
e)
ASTM A307 Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners.
f)
ASTM A775 Specification for Epoxy Coated Reinforcing Steel.
g)
ASTM C150 Portland Cement.
h)
ASTM D523 Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss.
i)
ASTM D4956 Standard Specification for Retroreflective Sheeting for Traffic Control.
j)
ASTM E1347 Standard Test Method for Color and Color-Difference Measurement by
Tristimulus Colorimetry.
k)
ASTM G152 Standard Practice for Operating Open Flame Carbon Arc Light Apparatus for
Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials.
l)
ASTM G153 Standard Practice for Operating Enclosed Carbon Arc Light Apparatus for
Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials.
m)
TT-P-343.
n)
TT-P-00442.
Provide testing and inspection in accordance with Employer General Requirements.

01 June 2016
101453 / 2
AECOM Middle East

TRAFFIC SIGNAGE

Enabling Works
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.5
Testing, General: At discretion of the Contract Administrator, samples may be tested by Contract
Administrator before acceptance or material may be accepted for use based on either of following data
furnished by Contractor.
1.
Test report showing proposed batch meets specified requirements.
2.
Test report, using same formulation as that used in manufacturer's proposed batch, showing previous
batch manufactured met specified requirements and report showing test results for the proposed
batch reporting the following properties required as given in this Section: weight per gallon, viscosity,
fineness of grind, drying time and gradation.
Color Testing: Through instrumental color testing the diffuse day color of the reflective material shall
comply with the requirements of Color Specification Limits, Table A within Appendix 101453 and shall be
determined in accordance with ASTM E1347.
1.
Standard Method of Test for 45, 0-Degree Directional Reflectance of Opaque Specimens by Filter
Photometry: Geometric characteristics must be confined to illumination incident within 10 of, and
centered about, a direction of 45 from the perpendicular to the test surface; viewing is within 15
of, and centered about, the perpendicular to the test surface. Conditions of illumination and
observation must not be interchanged.
2.
The standards to be used for reference shall be the Munsell Papers designated in Color Specification
Limits, Table A within Appendix 101453. The papers must be recently calibrated on a
spectophotometer. The test instrument shall be one of the following, or acceptable equivalent:
a)
Manufacturer: Gardner, Product: Multipurpose Reflectometer.
b)
Manufacturer: Gardner, Product: Model AC2a Color Difference Meter.
c)
Manufacturer: Meeco, Product: Model V Colormaster.
d)
Manufacturer: HunterLab, Product: D25 Color Difference Meter.
Reflective Sheeting Testing Requirements

1.
Shrinkage: A 229mm x 229mm reflective sheeting specimen with liner shall be conditioned a
minimum of 1 hour at 23C and 50% relative humidity. The liner shall be removed and the specimen
placed on a flat surface with the adhesive side up. 10 minutes after liner is removed and again after
24 hours, the specimen shall be measured to determine the amount of dimensional change. The
reflective sheeting shall not shrink in any dimension more than 0.80mm in 10 minutes nor more
than 3.20mm in 24 hours.
2.
Flexibility: Type III Sheeting Material: The sheeting, with the liner removed and conditioned for 24
hours at 22C and 50% relative humidity, shall be sufficiently flexible to show no cracking when
slowly bent, in 1 second's time, around a 3.20mm mandrel with adhesive contacting the mandrel.
Note: For ease of testing, spread talcum powder on adhesive to prevent sticking to the mandrel.
If materials are accepted based on reports furnished by the Contractor, samples shall be retained by the
Contract Administrator for possible future testing should material appear defective during or after
application. When tested and samples fail to meet the Specification requirements, materials represented
by samples shall be replaced and cost of testing will be deducted from payments due to the Contractor.
A.
General: Materials shall be delivered, stored and handled in order to assure the preservation of their
quality and fitness for the Work. Materials, even though approved before storage or handling, may again
be inspected and tested prior to use in the Work.
B.
Storage
1.
Do not store material used for construction on the pavement or shoulder.
2.
Signs stored on or near the Site shall be under a roof or otherwise covered for protection against
weather and dirt.
3.
Materials shall be stored in such a manner that they shall not be on the ground or come in contact
with surface runoff water.

01 June 2016
101453 / 3
AECOM Middle East

TRAFFIC SIGNAGE

Enabling Works
4.
Stored materials shall be located to facilitate their prompt inspection. All storage sites shall be
restored to their original condition at the Contractor's expense prior to acceptance of the Work.
C.
Materials that do not comply with the requirements of this Section shall be rejected by the Contract
Administrator and removed immediately from the Site, unless otherwise instructed by the Contract
Administrator. No rejected materials shall be used in the Work.
D.
Furnish paint in sealed containers that legibly indicate at time of use designated name, formula or
specification number, batch number, color, date of manufacturer, manufacturer's name, formulation
number and directions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
DESIGN CRITERIA
A.
Sign Face Layout: The preparation of the legend and backgrounds to be applied to the structural portion
of the sign panel shall comply with the following requirements unless modified by the Contract
Administrator.
1.
Sign Layout, Traffic Signs.: The legend shall be applied to the reflective sheeting in the manner
recommended by the manufacturer, as specified in this Section and as indicated on the Design
Drawings.
2.
Sign Layout, Guide Signs: The shape, size, legend and colors of all guide signs shall be as indicated
a)
b)
c)
The lettering shall consist of the Arabic script and English letters applied to the background in
the sizes, types and character spacing indicated on the Design Drawings.
1.
The Arabic letters shall comply with the proportions as established by the Contract
Administrator.
2.
The English capital and upper case letters shall have the height indicated on the capitals
and numerals shall be Series E upper case, but with the stroke width widened to one-fifth
of the letter height..
3.
Upper case letters shall be one-third higher than the nominal loop height of the lower
case letters. The capitals and numerals shall be Series E upper case but with the stroke
width widened to one-fifth of the letter height.
The overall heights of Arabic letters shall be in proportion to the first letter of the Arabic alphabet,
the "aleph", a simple downstroke. The standard Arabic script shall be such that an aleph height
of 300mm generally shall be used on signing on motorways, freeways or similar roads and an
aleph height of 240mm used on signing on arterial roads, all as indicated on the Design
Drawings.
1.
The corresponding English letter height shall be 270mm used on signing on motorways,
freeways or similar roads and a height of 200mm on arterial roads.
2.
The stroke or width of all script or letters shall be in proportion to the height of the script
or letter.
3.
Include a full size layout of each sign panel with the Shop Drawings submittal.
The width of the border shall be 50mm and 30mm on signs having the largest Arabic letter
height of 400mm and 300mm, respectively. The corner radii shall be approximately equal to
one-eighth of the lesser sign dimension, but shall not exceed 300m. The borders shall have
the same color as the legend, unless indicated otherwise on the Design Drawings.
B.
Glass Bead Requirements: Glass beads shall comply with all requirements as specified in this Section.
The glass beads shall be dispensed by a pneumatic spray-type apparatus made specifically for that
purpose. The glass beads shall be applied at the rate as specified in this Section.
C.
Reflective Sheeting, Intended Use

01 June 2016
101453 / 4
AECOM Middle East

TRAFFIC SIGNAGE

Enabling Works
2.2
1.
The reflective sheeting specified in this Section is intended for use on surfaces of highway signs to
assure their optimum visibility by day and at night when exposed to a light source and whether dry
or totally wet by rain.
2.
Select colors as accepted by the Contract Administrator and in accordance with the preferred options
permitted in this Section and provide the proposed selections indicating the following features to
the Contract Administrator for review.
a)
The desired level of SIA as appropriate for anticipated use and durability.
b)
The type of adhesive backing either Class 1, pre-coated pressure sensitive adhesive or Class
2, heat activated adhesive or other type of non-adhesive backing as required.
c)
All other materials for signs shall be as indicated on the Design Drawings and as specified in
this Section.
3.
General: All materials shall be new and shall be handled and installed in a workmanlike manner in
compliance with this Section, the Design Drawings and as directed by the Contract Administrator.
4.
Letters, Numerals, Arrows, Symbols, Border: Letters, numerals, arrows, symbols, border and other
features of the sign message shall be of the type, size and series indicated on the Design Drawings.
a)
Colors shall be as specified in this Section or as indicated on the Design Drawings. Completed
letters, numerals and other units shall be formed to provide continuous stroke width with smooth
edges and shall present a flat surface free of warp, blisters, wrinkles, burrs and splinters.
b)
Units of the sign message of the type indicated on the Design Drawings such as the letters,
numerals, symbols, border and other features of the sign message shall be cut from Type III
reflective sheeting of the color specified on the Design Drawings and applied to the reflective
sheeting of the sign field in accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer of the reflective
sheeting.
PRODUCT SELECTION
A.
Traffic Signs, Sheet Reflective Materials

1.
Type III, A - Glass Bead Retro-Reflective Element Material, Encapsulated Lens (High Intensity
Grade) shall be required for signs as indicated on the Design Drawings unless otherwise directed
2.
Type III Sheeting consisting of spherical lens elements adhered to a synthetic resin and encapsulated
by a flexible transparent weatherproof plastic having a smooth outer surface. The sheeting shall
have a pre-coated adhesive backing protected by a removable liner and be one of three levels of
reflective intensity as specified on the Design Drawings.
3.
Reflective Intensity: The reflective sheeting shall have the minimum Specific Intensity per Unit Area
(SIA) as indicated in SIA Limits, Table B within Appendix 101453 expressed as candelas per
footcandle per square foot [(C d fc-1) ft. -2]. Four levels of performance relative to SIA are available
to be selected by the purchaser for specific uses. Measurement of SIA shall be conducted in
accordance with the method as directed by the Contract Administrator.
4.
Specular Gloss: The reflective sheeting shall have an 85 specular gloss of not less than 50 for
Type III when tested in accordance with ASTM D523.
5.
Color Processing: The sheeting shall permit cutting and color processing with compatible transparent
and opaque process inks in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations at temperatures
of 15C to 38C and relative humidity at 20% to 80%. The sheeting shall be heat resistant and permit
force curing without staining of applied or unapplied sheeting at temperatures as recommended by
the manufacturer. Color processing for Type III material shall be restricted to sheeting with heat
activated adhesive backing unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer.
6.
Adhesive: The reflective sheeting shall include a pre-coated pressure sensitive adhesive backing,
Class 1 or a tack-free heat activated adhesive backing, Class 2 either of which may be applied
without necessity of additional adhesive coats on either the reflective sheeting or application surface.
a)

01 June 2016
The Class 1 adhesive backing shall be a pressure sensitive adhesive of the aggressive tack
type requiring no heat, solvent or other preparation for adhesion to smooth clean surfaces.
101453 / 5
AECOM Middle East

TRAFFIC SIGNAGE

Enabling Works
B.
The Class 2 adhesive backing shall be a tack-free adhesive activated by applying heat in
excess of 80C to the material as in the heat-vacuum process of sign fabrication.
c)
The protective liner attached to the adhesive shall be removed by peeling without soaking in
water or other solvents without breaking, tearing or removing any adhesive from the backing.
The protective liner shall be easily removed following accelerated storage for 4 hours at 71
C under a weight of 17kPa.
d)
The adhesive backing of the reflective sheeting shall produce a bond to support a 0.79kg
weight for 5 minutes, without the bond peeling for a distance of more than 50.8mm when
applied to a smooth aluminum surface.
7.
Impact Resistance: Type III reflective sheeting materials, applied according to the manufacturer's
recommendations to a cleaned, etched aluminum panel of alloy 6061-T6, 1.0mm x 76mm x 127mm
and conditioned for 24 hours at 23C and 50% relative humidity, shall show no cracking when the
face of the panel is subjected to an impact of a 0.9kg weight with a 16.0mm rounded tip dropped
from a 1.13N meter setting on a Gardner Variable Impact Tester, Model IG-1120/ IG-1121, or
acceptable equivalent.
8.
Accelerated Weathering: When applied in accordance with recommended procedures, the reflective
material shall be weather-resistant and, following cleaning in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations, shall show no appreciable discoloration, cracking, blistering or dimensional
change. Following exposure, the panels shall be washed with a 5% HCI solution for 45 seconds,
rinsed thoroughly with clean water, blotted with a soft clean cloth, brought to equilibrium at standard
conditions and tested. Type III reflective sheeting shall have not less than 80% specific intensity
per unit area (SIA) when subjected to accelerated weathering, in accordance with ASTM D4956.
Aluminum Sign Panels

1.
Extruded aluminum channels shall be used for all Guide Signs and shall be as indicated on the
Design Drawings.
2.
The traffic sign panel blanks for "Warning and Regulatory Signs" shall be of sheet aluminum with
reflective sheeting all as specified in this Section and as indicated on the Design Drawings.
a)
Sheet aluminum sign blanks 0.58m or less in area shall not be less than 2.03mm thick.
b)
Sheet aluminum sign blanks 0.58m to less than 2.25m in area shall not be not less than
3.175mm thick.
c)
Sign panels 2.25m and larger shall be extruded aluminum as specified in this Section.
3.
The surface area shall be determined by calculating the area of the smallest rectangle that will
circumscribe an individual sign, except in the case of a triangular sign. The area of a triangular sign
shall be the net triangular area.
4.
The aluminum sign blanks shall be free from laminations, blisters, slivers, open seams, pits from
heavy rolled-in scale, ragged edges, holes, turned down corners or other defects which may affect
appearance or use for the intended purpose.
5.
C.
b)
a)
All blanks shall be as nearly uniform in thickness as is practicable and shall be commercially
flat. All shearing, cutting and punching shall be done prior to preparing the sign blanks for the
application of reflective material.
b)
The sheared edges of all sign blanks shall be straight and free from tears and raggedness and
distortion of the metal. All punched or drilled holes shall be round, free from tears and
raggedness.
Aluminum sign blanks shall not come in contact with the steel posts. Provide a 1.6mm thick neoprene
pad between aluminum sign blanks and steel posts.
Special Designation Signs

1.
Special Designation Signs shall be erected in locations as directed by the Contract Administrator.
Appropriate sign messages for each landmark shall be approved by the Contract Administrator.

01 June 2016
101453 / 6
AECOM Middle East

TRAFFIC SIGNAGE

Enabling Works
2.3
2.
The size and shape of the sign panels for Special Designation Signs shall vary in accordance with
the sign message given in both Arabic and English. Arabic lettering height shall be nominal 100mm
and English lettering height shall be nominal 70mm. Sign messages shall be white lettering on a
blue background with a 30mm wide white border. All reflective sheeting shall be high intensity grade.
3.
Signs wider than 1m shall be mounted on 2 No. posts.
FABRICATION
A.
Aluminum Sign Panels

1.
2.
Aluminum sign base material, before the application of reflective sheeting, shall be prepared as
follows:
a)
The blank panel shall be given a preliminary cleaning by being completely submerged in a 3%
solution of an inhibited alkaline cleanser at 70C to 80C for 3 minutes, followed by a thorough
rinse with clean, cold running water. As an alternative, a grease solvent such as naptha, or
trichloroethylene may be used, provided the application is in strict accordance with the
directions of the manufacturer of the cleaner.
b)
Preliminary cleaning shall be followed by etching. This shall consist of immersion for at least
3 minutes in a 6% to 8% solution of phosphoric acid at 40C. The blank panels shall then be
rinsed in a spray of cold water, followed by immersion for 1 minute in circulating hot water at
80C. They shall then be dried by forced warm air or infrared lamps.
c)
If total immersion is impossible because of the length of the panels, 6% to 8% phosphoric acid
at 40C may be applied to the surface by swabbing, brushing or spraying, allowed to remain
for 5 minutes and then removed by a cold water rinse, followed by drying with warm or forced
air.
d)
The metal shall not be handled except by a device or clean canvas gloves between all cleaning
and etching operations and the application of reflective sheeting. There shall be no opportunity
for the metal to come in contact with greases, oils or other contamination prior to the application
of reflective sheeting.
e)
If a chemical conversion coating is used, the coating shall be light, tight and free from all
powdery residue.
When the reflective sheeting is applied to individual extruded aluminum channels, the channels
shall be assembled after the background sheeting has aged for 48 hours at 24C. The channels
shall be bolted together using the panel bolt assembly indicated on the Design Drawings which
shall be on 600mm maximum centers. Nuts on panel bolts shall be drawn tight.
a)
B.
Side-trim molding shall be installed on both vertical edges of the extruded aluminum panels
after the clear finish has dried. Any damage to the clear film shall be repaired and the contact
between the molding and the reflective sheeting shall be edge sealed as recommended by
the sheeting manufacturer.
Application of Background Sheeting

1.
The background reflective sheeting shall be applied to the aluminum sign panels or extruded
channels, which have been prepared as described above, in the manner recommended by the
manufacturer. Reflective sheeting shall be applied to all sign faces by an approved vacuum or
continuous roll applicator. The background reflective sheeting shall adhere over and around the
sides of all panels to a minimum distance of 2mm beyond the edges.
2.
Type III sheeting with Class 1 pressure sensitive adhesive: Pressure sensitive sheeting shall be
applied to the individual extruded channels, to assembled panels of extruded channels, and to those
sheet panels that are too large for the approved vacuum applicator. Type III sheeting shall be
applied by a continuous roll applicator. The process shall be in strict compliance with the
recommendations of the reflective sheeting manufacturer and shall be accepted by the Contract
Administrator.
3.
Type III sheeting with Class 2 heat activated adhesive: Heat activated adhesive shall be applied
to sheet panels capable of being inserted in the approved vacuum applicator. The legend for signs
which will have the legend screened onto a Type III reflective sheeting with Class 2 heat activated
adhesive shall be added to the background before the sheeting is applied to the panel.

01 June 2016
101453 / 7
AECOM Middle East

TRAFFIC SIGNAGE

Enabling Works
C.
4.
When vacuum applied, the pre-coated adhesive on the back of the Type III sheeting shall be activated
by a minimum temperature of 85C and with a minimum vacuum pressure of 635mm of mercury.
This operation shall be in effect for a minimum of 5 minutes. After aging for 48 hours at 24C the
adhesive shall form a bond equal to or greater than the strength of the reflective sheeting.
5.
Splicing of reflective sheeting shall not be permitted on signs or panels with dimensions up to and
including 1.2m in height or width unless the reflective sheeting specified does not come in this width,
then the widest width of material available shall be used. When sheeting joints are required, they
shall be lap-jointed with the top sheet overlapping the bottom sheet by no less than 5mm. The
fabricator shall endeavor to use the least number of seams possible with the horizontal lap preferable.
Roller applied or reverse screened sheeting may be butt-jointed with joint gap not to exceed 1mm.
No splice shall fall within 50mm of the edge of the panel.
6.
Sign faces comprising 2 or more pieces of reflective sheeting must be carefully matched for color
at the time of sign fabrication to provide uniform appearance and brilliance, both day and night.
Noncompliance may result in non-uniform shading and an undesirable contrast between adjacent
width of applied sheeting, which shall not be acceptable.
7.
Damaged reflective sheeting due to poor workmanship or defective material shall be rejected and
shall be replaced for use in the Work.
Application of Lettering
1.
The legend for the standard international signs shall be applied directly to the Type III background
sheeting with cut-out Type III sheeting.
2.
Black letters on a white or yellow background shall be screened with an opaque black stencil paste,
as recommended by the manufacturer of the reflective sheeting. The signs with silver-white letters
on a red, blue, brown or green background shall be applied to the sheeting using the reverse
screening process on a silver-white reflective sheet with screen paste meeting the recommendations
of the manufacturer of the silver-white reflective sheeting.
3.
For all other signs, the Arabic and English letters shall be cut out of Type III sheeting and applied
directly to the background sheeting.
4.
When the cut-out method shall be used, prepare templates for each letter and each height indicated
on the Design Drawings. These templates shall be accepted by the Contract Administrator prior to
fabrication.
a)
The templates shall be used as guides for cutting the letters out of Type III reflective sheeting.
b)
Legend and borders shall be reflective sheeting of the color specified on the Design Drawings
and shall be applied directly to clean, dust-free reflective sheeting background panels, and
shall be applied in a manner specified for the manufacture of traffic control signs by the sheeting
manufacturer.
5.
Legend and/ or borders shall be cut neatly at intersecting panel edges.
6.
The legend and border shall have clean, clear edges, true to line, and be strictly in accordance with
the Design Drawings for design of letters and positioning on the sign.
7.
Applied legend and borders shall be finished with materials and in a manner specified by the sheeting
manufacturer. Finish shall be as indicated:
a)
Type I adhesive coated sheeting legend and/ or borders shall be edge sealed after application
to Type III backgrounds.
b)
Sheeting cuts at intersecting panel edges shall be edge sealed following application.
c)
After message and/ or border application, the complete sign including edges shall be finished
with a clear coating approved by the sheeting manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION

01 June 2016
101453 / 8
AECOM Middle East

TRAFFIC SIGNAGE

Enabling Works
A.
Construction Requirements for Traffic Signs

1.
Installation of Ground Mounted Signs: Unless otherwise indicated on the Design Drawings, the
location of the ground mounted signs, including but not limited to guide signs, special designation
signs, warning signs and regulatory signs, as shown on the Design Drawings are approximate and
the exact location shall be established by the Contract Administrator in the field.
a)
Assume responsibility to determine the location of any underground electric cable, drainage
structures or utility lines in the vicinity before beginning Work, and conduct the Work of this
Section so as to avoid damage to these installations.
b)
Refer to the accepted project Shop Drawings and As-built Drawings in locating utilities, drainage
structures and other underground facilities that have been installed during the construction of
the interchange or roadway. Any damage caused by the construction operations shall be
repaired, at the Contractor's own expense, and to the satisfaction of the Contract Administrator.
c)
Assume responsibility for the proper elevation, offset and effective orientation of all ground
mounted signs.
d)
1.
They shall be erected so that the face of the sign is vertical and at an angle of 93 to the
centerline of the adjacent ramp or roadway measured from the back tangent
counterclockwise.
2.
Ground mounted signs on ramps or curves shall be oriented as indicated on the Design
Drawings, or by the Contract Administrator, to provide the most effective display for both
day and night.
3.
All signs shall be complete and installed to the satisfaction of the Contract Administrator.
Sign faces shall be examined by the Contract Administrator during conditions of both
daylight and darkness.
When notified by the Contract Administrator, cover certain signs to facilitate and control the
operation of the project.
1.
e)
B.
C.
The covering shall consist of burlap dyed with a green waterproof dye and shall extend
over the edges of the sign and be fastened on the back. Do not use any type of adhesive
tape on the face of the signs. Other methods of covering may be considered if acceptable
to the Contract Administrator.
Replace any sign or sign support included in the Contract which is damaged from any cause
whatsoever, including traffic damage, at the Contractor's own expense, prior to acceptance by
Foundations for Ground-Mounted Sign Supports

1.
Excavation for Ground-Mounted Sign Supports: The holes for all foundations shall be excavated to
the size and dimensions required for construction of the foundations. Dispose all of the unsuitable
excavated materials and do not use as backfill. All backfill shall be accepted material and compacted,
in layers not to exceed 150mm, to at least 95% maximum density in accordance with AASHTO T180.
2.
Foundation Requirements: All concrete for ground-mounted sign foundations shall be cast-in-place.
Forms shall include templates to hold the section of the stub post to be cast into the concrete
securely in place during the casting of concrete. The foundations shall be allowed to cure a minimum
of 7 days before erecting signs on the foundations.
Ground-Mounted Sign Supports

1.
Determine the length of the pipe posts for special designation sign panels, warning sign panels or
regulatory sign panels indicated on the Design Drawings before ordering, in order to meet the
existing field conditions and in accordance with sign-mounting heights indicated on the Design
Drawings. After fabrication the pipe post shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123/ A123M.
a)

01 June 2016
All fabrication shall be completed and ready for assembly before galvanizing. No punching,
drilling or cutting shall be permitted after galvanizing. Any part of the pipe on which the
galvanizing has been damaged in fabrication, transit, or erection or where bare metal is exposed
shall be repaired by coating such surfaces with material as recommended by the manufacturer
and as accepted by the Contract Administrator.
101453 / 9
AECOM Middle East

TRAFFIC SIGNAGE

Enabling Works
2.
Determine the length of the structural shapes for guide sign panels indicated on the Design Drawings
before ordering, in order to meet the existing field conditions and in accordance with sign-mounting
heights indicated on the Design Drawings. The structural shapes for ground-mounted guide signs
shall be as detailed on the Design Drawings and shall be the "break-away" type where indicated.
After fabrication the post and stub post shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123/ A123M.
a)
3.
The size and number of pipe posts or structural shapes required to support respective sign panel
installations, including but not limited to guide signs, warning signs or regulatory signs shall be as
indicated on the Design Drawings.
a)
4.
3.2
The "break-away" assembly shall be constructed by attaching the structural shape to the stub
structural shape with high strength bolts and 1 No. flat washer on each bolt between the plates
as indicated on the Design Drawings. Shims may be used between the plates to align the
shapes. The bolts shall be tightened in a systematic order to the required torque indicated on
the Design Drawings. Then each bolt in turn shall be loosened and retightened to the required
torque in the same order as the initial tightening. The threads shall be burred or center-punched
at the juncture of the bolt and nut to prevent the nut from loosening.
The pipe post or structural shapes shall be vertical. When 2 or 3 No. posts support the same
panel, they shall be erected vertical and parallel with each other with the tops of the posts or
shapes at the same height.
Structural shapes required for support of ground-mounted guide signs shall be steel wide-flanged
beams of the size and shape indicated on the Design Drawings.
a)
The structural steel sign posts shall be erected in a vertical position on a previously prepared
foundation, with the tops of the posts in each sign installation even, level with each other and
extending 50mm above the top of the sign panel or as directed by the Contract Administrator.
The faces of the supporting posts shall be flush with the sign throughout the contact areas.
b)
Springing or racking of posts to secure proper alignment shall not be permitted.
CLEANING
A.
Remove rubbish, debris, equipment and excess material from Site resulting from this work. Clean
adjoining surfaces soiled by and during this work.
END OF SECTION

01 June 2016
101453 / 10
AECOM Middle East

TRAFFIC SIGNAGE
Mall of Oman Enabling Works
SECTION 134713 CATHODIC PROTECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 2
1.1
SUMMARY..................................................................................................................... 2
1.2
STANDARDS ................................................................................................................. 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ...................................................................................................................... 2
2.1
MIXED METAL OXIDE ANODES ................................................................................... 2
2.2
SPECIALIST SUB-CONTRACTORS ............................................................................... 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION ...................................................................................................................... 3
3.1
INSTALLATION.............................................................................................................. 3
3.2
COMMISSIONING AND PROTECTION LEVELS ........................................................... 3
3.3
COMMISSIONING REPORTING .................................................................................... 4

07 June 2016
134713/ 1
AECOM Middle East

Cathodic Protection
SECTION 134713 CATHODIC PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A. General: Read this Section in conjunction with other related Sections, the Employer General
B. Work Section includes
1.
1.2
Cathodic protection to steel casings.
STANDARDS
A. The cathodic protection anodes of mix metal oxide shall conform in design, materials,
manufacture and performance with the latest revisions of the following standards:
1.
Standard Specifications issued by the Oman Gas Company (OGC) SAOC.
2.
BS EN 12954:2001 Cathodic protection of buried or immersed metallic structures.
3.
DNV RP-B401-2005 -Cathodic Protection Design.
4.
NACE SP0387-2006 - Metallurgical and Inspection Requirements for Cast Galvanic

Anodes for Offshore Applications.
5.
Australian Standard AS 2239 shall be used for the aluminium alloy composition and
methods for determining the consumption rate, open circuit potential and anode to core
resistance.
6.
NACE SP0387 and DNV RP-B401 shall be used for the inspection and metallurgical
testing requirements where not covered by AS 2239.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MIXED METAL OXIDE ANODES

A. Anode Identification
1. Anodes shall be legibly punch marked to identify the alloy and a unique identification
number traceable to each batch (heat).
B. Samples for Chemical and Electrochemical Performance Analysis
1. Representative samples shall be taken for chemical and electrochemical performance
analysis at the beginning and end of each heat run exceeding 1000kg. 1 No. sample is
required for this testing for each heat less than 1000kg and shall be taken near the
middle of the heat run.
2. The chemical composition shall be assessed by spectrometric analysis and tested
against a known chemical composition containing all of the alloying and impurity
elements. The test certificates shall be verified by an independent third party.
3. The open circuit potential of each performance sample shall be -1.05 V or more
negative with respect to a Ag/AgCl/sea water reference electrode.
The consumption rate of each performance sample shall be no more than 3.5 kg/A.y.
C. Freedom from Defects
1. In addition to the requirements specified in AS 2239, anodes shall not have cracks in
excess of the following:
a. Cracks that are seen to penetrate to the anode inserts.

07 June 2016
134713/ 2
AECOM Middle East

Cathodic Protection
b. Cracks greater than 2mm in width and longer than 100mm in the area fully
supported by the anode insert.
2.2
SPECIALIST SUB-CONTRACTORS
A. The following specialists for cathodic protection have been approved by the Oman Gas
Company (OGC) SAOC
1. Gulf Petrochemical Services and Trading L.L.C.
2. Amran Cathodic Protection System and Services L.L.C.
3. German Cathodic Protection and Partners L.L.C.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A. The Contractor shall ensure uninterrupted power connection to the new pit.
B. The new power cable specifications shall follow the existing cable and the Contractor shall
obtain OGC approval prior to the decommissioning of the existing cables.
C. Drill 5m depth for surface casing, and supply and install steel casing with minimum diameter
of 250mm.
D. Drill 100m depth of boreholes, and supply and install steel casing with minimum 200 mm
diameter.
2
E. Supply and install 10 pieces of mix metal oxide (MMO) anodes provided with 16mm
XLPE/PVC or PVC/PVC cable tail of sufficient length for connection to the ground bed
junction box without joining.
F. Supply and install inch uPVC slotted vent pipe for the whole ground bed depth.
G. Backfill the entire depth of steel casing with carbonaceous backfill material.
H. Supply and install Anode headwork with vent pipes, and the proposed design and materials
shall be approved by the Contract Administrator before fabrication.
I.
Supply and install Anode junction boxes with support frame, and the proposed design and
materials shall be approved by client before fabrication.
J.
Supply and install a 70mm2 cable from ground bed to the Transformer Rectifier unit, and the
existing cable shall be re-routed.
K. Supply and install 4m x 4m chain-link fence with 2m wide double lockable gate around the
Anode headwork.
L. Fabricate and install concrete cable route markers.
M. Carry out system commissioning, and provide full commissioning report.
3.2
COMMISSIONING AND PROTECTION LEVELS

A. Experienced, competent and trained cathodic protection personnel shall carry out the
commissioning. The commissioning shall include the following as a minimum:
1. Visual verification that all anodes have been installed at the correct location and height.
2. Confirmation of continuity between the test point plates and casing.
3. Measurement of the polarized potential of the casing at each test point location.
B. The casing potential shall be recorded using a portable silver/silver chloride/sea water
(Ag/AgCl/sea water) reference electrode, a digital voltmeter and solid connection to the
casing via the stainless steel test point plates.

07 June 2016
134713/ 3
AECOM Middle East

Cathodic Protection
C. Reference electrode placement shall be at locations midway between anodes. Three

measurements shall be taken at each test point location.
D. The Contractor shall undertake potential measurements as soon as practical after
completion of the structures and followed by potential surveys at regular intervals.
3.3
COMMISSIONING REPORTING
A. A detailed commissioning report shall be provided after the potential survey and a detailed
commissioning report. The report shall include identification of any faults or problems and
recommendations for any rectification works that may be necessary. A digital photographic
record shall be included in the reports.
END OF SECTION

07 June 2016
134713/ 4
AECOM Middle East

Cathodic Protection

Enabling Works
SECTION 265600 -- EXTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
1.2
SUBMITTALS
1.3
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION
2.2
DESIGN CRITERIA
2.3
FABRICATION
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
3.2
INSTALLATION

01 June 2016
265600
AECOM Middle East

EXTERIOR LIGHTING

Enabling Works
SECTION 265600 -- EXTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
1.
Municipality, Public Authority for Electricity and Water (PAEW), Sultanate of Oman Highway Design
Standards, Muscat Electricity Distribution Company (MEDC), and all other service authorities for
specification clauses that are not listed hereunder.
2.
regulations.
Section Includes
1.
1.2
Exterior luminaires.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.

1.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, description of materials and finishes, general construction,
specific modifications, component connections, anchorage methods, hardware, and installation
procedures, including specific requirements indicated.
a)
Submit Shop Drawings for each system or assembly.
b)
Submit Lighting Fixture Schedule coordinating luminaire accessories and lamps.
c)
Submit scaled drawings of custom fixtures.
d)
Submit photometric data.
e)
Submit photometric data in IES format on CD/ DVD.
2.
Product Data: Include manufacturer's specifications and technical data including performance,
construction and fabrication. Submit product data for each manufactured component.
3.
the system.
4.
5.
6.
Outline technical specifications reflecting proposed materials and systems.
7.
8.
Preliminary Method Statement.
9.
Preliminary Quality Plan.

01 June 2016
265600 / 1
AECOM Middle East

EXTERIOR LIGHTING
SECTION 260543 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
1.2
REFERENCES
1.3
SUBMITTAL
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
2.2
DUCT BANK
2.3
STUB-UPS
2.4
MANHOLES
2.5
HANDHOLES
2.6
EARTH ROD PITS
2.7
MARKER TAPE
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
3.2
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING
3.3
DUCT BANKS INSTALLATION
3.4
STUB-UPS INSTALLATION
3.5
CONSTRUCTION OF MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES

07 June 2016
260543/ 1
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
AECOM
Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
The Contractor shall refer to the latest edition of the Standard Specification issued by the Public Authority
for Electricity and Water (PAEW) for specification clauses that are not listed hereunder.
C.
Where clauses hereunder are similar to the clauses within the Standard Specifications issued by the Public
Authority for Electricity and Water (PAEW), the more stringent shall apply.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.3
Underground duct bank, but not limited to, the following:

1.
Trenching and backfilling.
2.
Duct banks (Medium voltage/ low voltage / communication / security systems)
3.
Stub-ups.
4.
Manholes, hand holes and earth rod pits.
5.
Cable warning tape.
REFERENCES
A.
ASTM C33 Concrete Aggregates.
B.
ASTM D1557 Compaction Density Test.
C.
ASTM D1785 PVC Plastic Pipes.
D.
NEMA TC 8 Underground Ducts.
E.
NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC).
F.
ASTM D 3350 Class PE 345434C (Designated as PE 3408).
G.
DIN 8074, 8075 HDPE Sub Duct and Mini Duct.
H.
DIN 8062.
I.
ISO 161-1.
1.4
SUBMITTAL
A.
1.5
Submit catalogues, brochures and samples of various items proposed for underground duct bank.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
All items for underground duct bank shall be standard construction and materials except civil works such as
excavation, backfilling and concreting. Where this contradicts any part of the Specifications, the Contractor
shall state so at the time of tender.
B.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of such items of the types and sizes required,
and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for a period not less than 5 years.
Preference shall be given to local manufacturers.
C.
All work shall conform to applicable standards of PAEW, NEC, NEMA and ASTM.
D.
All underground Communication duct bank shall comply with the requirements and standards of Public
Authority for Electricity and Water (PAEW).

07 June 2016
260543/ 2
AECOM
1.6

A.
During unloading of PVC pipes and other items for underground duct rough handling shall be avoided.
Chains or wire ropes may be used, provided they are suitably covered, to protect the pipes and other items
from damage.
B.
Unloading by mechanical means such as a crane or fork lift may be used where PVC pipes and other items
for underground electrical services are delivered in bundles or in crates. However, consideration shall be
given to the total weight and the lifting capacity of the mechanical equipment, and the observance of the
statutory safety requirements.
C.
PVC pipes and other items for underground electrical services shall not be dropped or thrown to the
ground, knocked against other conduits or against sharp objects that any cause permanent damage.
D.
In preparing for laying the pipes in trenches, the pipes and fittings may be unloaded along the trench direct
from the back of a truck. Ducts and fittings should be unloaded on the side opposite to backfill. Fittings
including end bells, couplings and other accessories such as solvent cement and lubricant shall be stored
at the trench site under cover to prevent loss or damage.
E.
When storing on site, PVC pipes and other similar items shall be placed a level surface and shall be
supported to minimize distortion, and protected from direct sunlight. Horizontal supports of adequate width
shall be spaced not more than 1.5 m center to center beneath pipes to provide continuous and even
support.
F.
Vertical side supports shall be provided at 3 m spacing on rectangular stacks. The maximum free height of
such stacks shall not exceed 1.5 m.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
Underground duct bank shall comprise manholes and hand holes interconnected via Reinforced concrete
encased PVC pipes, and sub-duct, all as shown on the Drawings and mentioned in the Specifications or
required on site for proper installation and maintenance of electrical systems.
B.
Any trenching, backfilling, compaction and general grading required for electrical works shall be carried out
in accordance with the requirements given in Section 312300 Excavation and Fill.
C.
Any cast in place concrete related to underground electrical services described under this Section shall be
carried out in Section 033000 Cast-In Place Concrete.
2.2
DUCT BANK
A.
Duct banks shall be Reinforced steel concrete encased type, as indicated in the drawings.
B.
110 dia, Schedule 40 PVC conduits, conforming to ASTM D 1785 shall be used for concrete encased
underground duct systems.
C.
PVC conduit shall be suitable for a temperature range of 4 C to 90 C. Conduits within the duct bank shall
be supported on plastic interlocking spacers, at intervals of approximately 2.4 m. A 25 mm minimum
separation, edge to edge, shall be maintained, both horizontally and vertically, between the ducts.
D.
All duct banks shall have a 75mm concrete cover on the top, sides, and bottom of the PVC ducts.
Anchorage shall be used to hold the ducts in place while pouring the concrete encasement.
E.
Where the duct bank enters a building below ground level, the conduit shall terminate in an appropriate
fitting. An end bell shall be used on conduits entering manholes.
F.
After completion of the installation of sub-duct cables and in the duct bank and sub-duct, seal the ends of
duct banks using special caulking compound of a putty-like consistency. It shall be workable with the hands
o
o
at temperatures as low as 1.7 C, and shall not slump up to a temperature of 149 C. It shall not be harden
significantly when exposed to air.
G.
A run of conduit shall not contain more than the equivalent of four quarter bends. Bends in conduit shall be
made without reducing the internal diameter of the conduit. The inside radius of the conduit bends shall
not be less than one metre.

07 June 2016
260543/ 3
AECOM
H.
Matching end bells and plugs, constructed of high impact plastic, shall be provided throughout the duct
bank at the ends and in manholes.
I.
Each length of conduit shall be provided with one standard coupling. Couplings shall have a center step to
ensure proper seating. Joints shall be made with the solvent cement as recommended by the conduit
manufacturer.
J.
Concrete encasement shall be class C20 concrete with 13 mm maximum size aggregate for all duct banks.
For warning purposes, a red dye shall be towelled into the top surface after pouring the concrete.
K.
Orange marker shall be used to identify telecommunication facilities. For telecom duct banks, this can be
accomplished by either of the following methods:
1.
Placing an orange marker tape above the concrete encasement of the duct bank. The marker tape
shall be located 300 mm minimum above the concrete encasement.
2.
Mixing orange dye with the concrete used for encasement.
3.
Applying orange dye on the top surface of concrete encasement.
L.
An expansion of 55 mm per 100 meters maximum shall be provided in the duct banks. Additionally, a
construction joint shall be installed if pouring of concrete is commenced any time after initial set of adjacent
concrete. Neither expansion nor construction joints shall be installed under a roadway.
M.
For duct banks in stable soils, the soil below the duct bank shall be compacted to 90 % of maximum
density to a minimum depth of 300 mm. A dewatering system shall be used to lower the water table below
the final excavation depth to eliminate disturbance of in-situ soil densities.
N.
Provide 1% slope to duct bank for draining.
O.
Join ducts using water proof cement, to Manufacturers recommendations with at least 80 mm over lap.
P.
DUCT BANK (Sub- duct)
2.3
1.
Four Sub-ducts High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) of 32 mm diameter to be installed in 110 mm

duct and conforming to DIN 8075 and ASTM D3350.
2.
Sub ducts to have pre-installed rope to facilitate, the pulling of Fiber Optic Cable through it.
3.
Colour Sub-duct to be used for easy identification.
STUB-UPS
A.
Stubs-up for future connections and other requirements shall consist of either 110 mm diameter uPVC rigid
conduit entirely encased in concrete.
B.
uPVC conduits and bends for stub-ups shall comply with the requirements of Standard Specification issued
by the Public Authority for Electricity and Water (PAEW).
C.
The bends for stub-ups shall be 90 degrees with a minimum radius of 1200 mm.
D.
Bends for stub-ups shall serve as transition between PVC conduits embedded below grade and new
conduit duct installed. Such bends shall be provided with PVC coupling on one end and a male or female
adapter on the other end.
2.4
MANHOLES
A.
Appropriate type and size of manholes for MV and LV network distribution, shall be provided as shown on
the Drawings or required on site in compliance with the requirements of PAEW, NEC and local Electricity
Supply Authority. Manholes shall be constructed of precast or cast-in situ concrete to sizes shown on the
Drawings
B.
Manholes for communication and low current systems shall be constructed in accordance with the standard
practice and as shown on communication drawings.
C.
A sump pit shall be built into the base slab directly beneath the manhole opening to collect and retain any
water present in the manhole. Periodic maintenance may be required since sump pumps will not be
permanently installed.
D.
The duct bank manhole/interface shall include an expansion joint to take up longitudinal movement due to
expansion and construction of the duct bank. This joint shall also act as water stop to prevent water from
seeping inside the manhole.

07 June 2016
260543/ 4
AECOM
E.
The exterior of the manhole shall be waterproofed, with a bituminous coating.
F.
Each manhole shall have two cable pulling irons opposite each duct bank entrance.
G.
Access to deep manholes shall be through a chimney. Permanent ladders or rungs shall be installed, if
required by the CONTRACT ADMINISTRATOR on site or shown on the Drawings.
H.
Manholes shall be provided with earth-rods and cable supports as per the requirements of PAEW and
NEC.
I.
The frames and covers of all manholes shall be heavy duty, cast iron, round with solid type gasket lids, and
countersunk locking devices. Covers shall seal tightly and not rock, when installed.
2.5
HANDHOLES
A.
Handholes may be formed either monolithically or built up to designed sizes by combining several concrete
sections cast in various shapes and sizes.
B.
Handholes shall be provided with cast iron covers, sumps, ground-rods, etc. as shown on drawings or
required as per the requirements of PAEW, NEC or other applicable standards. Section joints shall be
grouted.
C.
The frames and covers of all hand holes shall be heavy duty, cast iron, round with solid type gasket lids,
and countersunk locking devices. Covers shall seal tightly and not rock, when installed.
2.6
EARTH ROD PITS

A.
Earth rods pits shall be provided for all earth rods in accordance with the requirements of Standard
Specification issued by the Public Authority for Electricity and Water (PAEW).
B.
Earth rod pits shall be precast of either square or round section with cover.
C.
The cover of earth rod pits shall have appropriate marking as approved by the CONTRACT
ADMINISTRATOR.
2.7
MARKER TAPE
A.
To be as specified in the Standard Specification issued by the Public Authority for Electricity and Water
(PAEW).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
Establish and propose exact routes and requirements of underground electrical services for approval of the
CONTRACT ADMINISTRATOR, after co-ordination with all other existing or new underground services,
before commencement of the work on site.
B.
Examine the areas and conditions under which the underground electrical services are to be installed, and
correct any unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. The
Contractor shall not proceed with the work until all unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a
manner acceptable to the CONTRACT ADMINISTRATOR.
3.2
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING

A.
Before commencement of the excavation, check the presence of any existing underground service by
means of appropriate tools and equipment. The Contractor shall be penalized for damaging of any existing
services in accordance with the rules and regulations set forth by the Public Authority for Electricity and
Water (PAEW).
B.
3.3
Carry out excavation and backfilling in accordance with the requirements of Section 312300 Excavation
and Backfill.
DUCT BANKS INSTALLATION
A.
Top of concrete encased duct banks shall be installed 600 mm minimum below finished grade and shall
connect manholes and handholes as shown and required on site. Where a duct bank connects to a

07 June 2016
260543/ 5
AECOM
building, adapt the duct bank, at one meter beyond the building exterior wall, to the building conduit with
the required couplings.
B.
The concrete encasement surrounding the duct bank shall be rectangular in cross-section, having a
minimum concrete thickness of 75 mm beyond any surface of the conduit. Interlocking spacers shall be
used to secure a uniform spacing between conduits of not less than 75 mm.
C.
Duct banks shall be graded so that conduits will have a fall of at least 75 mm per 30 m towards the lower
manholes or from the high point of the section towards the manholes or from the building towards a
manhole.
D.
Changes in direction of duct bank runs shall be accomplished by using special couplings limited to 5
degrees and/or 45 degrees bends having a 1 m radius sweep with straight sections of ducts between
changes of direction and `S' sweep sections having a minimum of 500 m offset.
E.
Where duct bank enters manholes, conduits shall terminate in end bells. Clean each conduit thoroughly
before laying. During construction and after completion of the duct banks, plug the ends of conduits to
prevent water washing mud into the conduits. Take particular care to keep the conduits clean of concrete
or any other substance during the course of construction.
F.
Securely anchor duct and brace with intermediate and base plastic spacers to prevent movement during
the placement of concrete.
G.
After the completion of portion of duct bank, a mandrel not less than 300 mm long, with a diameter of
approximately 6 mm less than the inside nominal diameter of the conduits shall be pulled through each
conduit, after which a brush with stiff bristles shall be pulled through to make certain that no particles of
earth, sand or gravel have been left in the line. This cleaning shall be done one day after the concrete has
been poured.
H.
Install a nylon rope in each conduit after cleaning, after which the conduits shall be capped/plugged
immediately.
I.
All duct banks shall enter manholes through rectangular openings of suitable dimensions provided in walls.
Such holes shall be sized to properly receive the duct, but shall not be too large for proper caulking. The
space between duct banks and manhole walls shall be caulked tight with lead wool.
J.
Cable support shall be installed with appropriate material.

STUB-UPS INSTALLATION
3.4
A.
Exact stub-ups locations and termination requirements for each Plot shall be verified on site, before
commencement of laying underground duct bank.
B.
Where extensions of PVC conduits above grade are required as stub-ups, a transition bend having PVC
coupling on one end and male or female adapter on the other end shall be used.
C.
The PVC bend or conduit shall extend minimum 150 mm above grade. A concrete envelope 100 mm high
above the finished floor shall be formed around such risers to minimize corrosion at point of emergence.
The top of the envelope shall be sloped for drainage.
3.5
CONSTRUCTION OF MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES

A.
Manholes and handholes shall be constructed of precast or cast-in situ concrete to sizes shown on the
Drawings. Horizontal concrete surfaces of floors shall have a smooth steel trowel finish.
B.
Frames and covers shall be watertight and covers shall fit the frames without undue play. These shall be
free from warp and blow holes that may impair their strength of appearance.
C.
Steel and iron shall be formed to shape and size with sharp lines and angle and shall have a smooth finish.
D.
Provide all necessary lugs and brackets.
E.
Set pulling-in irons and other built-in items in place before pouring concrete.
F.
Provide a 3 m earth rod external to each manhole and handhole. Also provide an earth bar in each
manhole and handhole affixed to the wall above the duct bank box-outs. Connect to earth rod using 70
mm bare copper conductor and bond earth conductors associated with each power cable inside the
manhole or handhole.
END OF SECTION

07 June 2016
260543/ 6
AECOM

Enabling Works
1.3
1.
Submit sample fixtures.
2.
Submit 2 No. sets of samples for color selection or verification for all fixtures indicated to be painted
a specific color (other than the manufacturers' standard color) or where indicated "Color as selected
by the Contract Administrator" on the Design Drawings.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
General: Comply with the requirements of Employer General Requirements, and submit the following:
1.
Warranties.
2.
Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals: Include component list with manufacturer's reference
numbers, descriptions of materials and procedures for repairing and cleaning of finishes and cleaning
frequency.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Standards: In addition to the requirements indicated on the Design Drawings, or specified in Employer
General Requirements, and Specification, the Work shall be in accordance with the following standards,
codes and relevant statutory requirements.
1.
2.

a)
BS 5499 Graphical symbols and signs, Safety signs, including fire safety signs.
b)
BS EN 40 Lighting columns.
c)
BS EN 12767 Passive safety of support structures for road equipment, Requirements,

classification and test methods.
d)
BS EN 13032 Light and lighting Measurement and presentation of photometric data of lamps
and luminaires.
e)
BS EN 13201 Road lighting.
f)
BS EN 50107 Signs and luminous-discharge-tube installations operating from a no-load rated

output voltage exceeding 1 kV but not exceeding 10 kV.
g)
BS EN 60061 Lamp caps and holders together with gages for the control of interchangeability
and safety.
h)
BS EN 60079: Part 1 Explosive atmospheres. Equipment protection by flameproof enclosures.
i)
BS EN 60081 Double-capped fluorescent lamps. Performance specifications.
j)
BS EN 60238 Edison screw lampholders.
k)
BS EN 60400 Lampholders for tubular fluorescent lamps and starter holders.
l)
BS EN 60598 Luminaires.
m)
BS EN 60901 Single-capped fluorescent lamps, Performance specifications.
n)
BS EN 60929 AC-supplied electronic ballasts for tubular fluorescent lamps, Performance

requirements.
o)
BS EN 61184 Bayonet lampholders.
p)
BS EN 61347 Lamp controlgear.
Underwriters' Laboratories, UL Standards.

01 June 2016
265600 / 2
AECOM Middle East

EXTERIOR LIGHTING

Enabling Works
B.
Provide testing and inspections in accordance with Employer General Requirements.
C.
1.5
1.
2.
3.
responsibilities regarding the performance requirements, durability or service life requirements.

A.
Deliver to Site, store, protect and handle products as per manufacturer's recommendation and in
accordance with Employer General Requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION
A.
Manufacturers: Provide systems and products from one of the listed manufacturers within the approved
manufacturer list.
B.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1.
C.
General System Description

1.
D.
Provide manufacturers' catalog numbers or model descriptions indicating quality, type, and style.
Provide lighting fixtures having special details as noted in fixture descriptions.
Exterior lighting system complete with fixtures, lamps, accessories, poles, standards and
foundations. Wire, securely support, test and adjust fixtures when necessary.
Lighting Standards: Include foundations, poles, luminaires, lamps, ballasts, controls and miscellaneous
accessories for complete assembly.
1.
Foundations: Unless indicated otherwise, cast-in-place concrete with constructed forms for square
foundations or spirally wrapped treated paper forms for round foundations. Provide concrete as
specified in Section 033000 Cast-in-Place Concrete, anchor bolts and reinforcing steel as indicated
or required.
2.
Poles: Able to withstand winds of not less than 45m/ sec with 1.3 gust factor without damage to
poles or attached luminaires.
a)
Provide pole bases with handholes and flush mounted handhole covers of material and finish
to match pole.
b)
Provide concealed or surface hinge surface mechanism in pole base, to lower pole for ease
of relamping.
c)
Provide surface hinge mechanism in pole base to lower pole for ease of relamping.
d)
Provide recessed, flush mounted, 13Amp, ground fault circuit interrupter type receptacle and
weatherproof cover on pole base where indicated.
e)
Style of pole, either round, tapered or square as indicated on the Design Drawings.
f)
Material of pole, for example aluminum, as indicated on the Design Drawings.
g)
Provide photocell and socket, mounted in top of pole so it shall not be affected from either light
output of associated luminaire or other luminaires.

01 June 2016
265600 / 3
AECOM Middle East

EXTERIOR LIGHTING

Enabling Works
h)
E.
Fixtures in Damp Locations

1.
Provide fixtures and accessories with corrosion resistant, weatherproof enamel or epoxy finish.
2.
Fixtures approved for use in damp locations may be used in locations protected by building such
as canopies.
3.
F.
2.
Hangers chemically resistant, weatherproof finish.
b)
Fasteners stainless steel or anodized aluminum.
c)
Galvanized or plastic coated screws to be used for connection of dissimilar metals.
d)
Type of finish as indicated.
Fixtures shall be UL listed for use in damp locations.
For weatherproof and vapor-tight installation: Ballast, where applicable, incorporated in luminaire
housing unless otherwise indicated.
a)
Hangers chemically resistant, weatherproof finish.
b)
Fasteners stainless steel or anodized aluminum.
c)
Aluminum and bronze or brass parts in contact with each other to have neoprene gasket
between related parts.
d)
Use galvanized or plastic coated screws for connection of dissimilar metals.
e)
Type of finish as indicated.
Fixtures shall be UL listed for use in wet locations.
Wiring
1.
2.2
a)
Fixtures Approved for Wet Locations

1.
G.
Provide in-line fuse in handhole for pole.
Provide XLPE wiring in heavy-duty rigid 20mm diameter PVC conduit.
DESIGN CRITERIA
A.
2.3
Design Requirements: Refer to the Design Drawings for luminaire lamp, accessory and special installation
requirements.
FABRICATION
A.
Pole and Luminaire Shop Factory Finish

1.
Color: As noted on the Design Drawings, or as selected by the Contract Administrator" from the
manufacturer's standard colors.
2.
Finish to be powder coat, either polyester, epoxy, urethane or hybrid, or UV resistant duranodic type
anodizing. Powder coat finishes to have dipped chromate conversion coating during cleaning and
pretreatment process. Duranodic type finishes to have hot nickel acetate bath and final hot water
bath in temperature not less than 200F, to seal finish.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION

01 June 2016
265600 / 4
AECOM Middle East

EXTERIOR LIGHTING

Enabling Works
A.
3.2
Verification of Conditions: Examine areas for compliance with requirements for installation and conditions
affecting performance of the Work. Identify conditions detrimental to a proper and timely completion and
notify the Contract Administrator of the unsatisfactory conditions. Proceed with installation only after
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install lighting standard poles at approximate locations as indicated, with exact locations subject to Site
conditions and locations of curbing and walkways, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Install lighting standard foundations in sidewalks flush with top of sidewalks unless indicated otherwise.
Provide poles with hinge mechanism in pole base and construct lighting standard foundations to house
indicated type of hinge mechanism.
C.
Grounding
1.
Install continuous equipment grounding conductor bonded at standard and terminated at building
ground system.
2.
Install ground rod at lighting standard foundation. In addition, install continuous equipment grounding
conductor bonded to standard and ground rod and terminated at building ground system.
END OF SECTION

01 June 2016
265600 / 5
AECOM Middle East

EXTERIOR LIGHTING
SECTION 270543 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS

FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
SUMMARY
REFERENCES
SUBMITTALS
QUALITY ASSURANCE
PROJECT CONDITIONS
DELIVERY AND STORAGE
COORDINATION
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
PATHWAYS
UNDERGROUND DUCT BANKS
CONDUIT SYSTEMS
INNERDUCTS
IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
2
2
3
3
3
4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
PREPARATION
INSTALLATION
CLEANING
ACCEPTANCE

Issued For Tender Rev T2
07 June 2016
4
5
5
6
270543 / 1
AECOM Middle East

Underground Ducts and Raceways for
Communication Systems

COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
The Contractor shall refer to the latest edition of the Standard Specification issued by the
Telecommunications Regulatory Authority (TRA) and Omantel for specification clauses that are not
listed hereunder.
C.
Where clauses hereunder are similar to the clauses within the Standard Specifications issued by the
Telecommunications Regulatory Authority (TRA) and Omantel, the more stringent shall apply.
D.
Work Section includes
1.2
1.
Underground ducts and duct banks.
2.
Handholes.
3.
Maintenance holes.
REFERENCES
A.
Specific reference in specifications to codes, rules, regulations, standards, manufacturer's

instructions, or requirements of regulatory agencies shall mean the latest printed edition of each in
effect at the date of contract unless the document is shown dated.
B.
References:
1.
2.
National Electrical Manufacturer Association (NEMA):

a)
RN1 Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and
Electrical metallic Tubing.
b)
TC2 Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC-40 and EPC-80).
c)
TC3 PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):

a)
651 Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit.
b)
651A Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and HDPE Conduit.
3.
National Electrical Safety Code (NESC).
4.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) ANSI/ NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC).
5.
Telecommunications Industry Association/ Electronic Industries Alliance TIA-5698-B-2004

Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces.
6.
ANSI/ TIA/ EIA-758 Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Cabling Standard.
7.
Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI) Telecommunications Distribution

Methods Manual (TDMM).
8.
BICSI Customer Owned Outside Plant (CO-OSP) Design Manual.
9.
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Regulations.
10. Local Statutory Authority regulations and codes in effect as of date of purchase.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
The Contractor shall perform no portion of the work requiring submittal and review of record drawings,
Shop Drawings, product data, or samples until the respective submittal has been approved by the
Employer. Such work shall be in accordance with approved submittals.
B.
Qualifications: The Contractor shall submit qualification data sheets for firms and persons as specified
in the "Quality Assurance" article of this specification to demonstrate their capabilities and experience.
C.
Proposed product data sheets: The Contractor shall submit catalog cut-sheets that include
manufacturer, trade name, and complete model number for each product specified. Model number
shall be handwritten and/ or highlighted to indicate exact selection. Identify applicable specification
section reference for each product.
D.
Coordination Drawings: Contractor shall submit plan and section drawings showing total requirement
for duct banks.
E.
Contractor shall submit calculations associated with sizing and arrangements of ducts and cables.
F.
Record Drawings: Furnish CAD drawings of completed work including cable ID numbers following the

07 June 2016
270543 / 2
AECOM Middle East


Employer's labeling standards. Submit in hardcopy (two full size and two half size) and
electronic formats.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Contractor Qualifications:
1.
The Contractor shall submit references and other related evidence of installation experience for a
period of three years prior to the issue date of this Specification.
2.
All work shall be supervised on site by a BICSI Registered Communications Distribution

Designer (RCDD). Must demonstrate knowledge and compliance with all BICSI, TIA/ EIA, UL,
and NEC standards and codes. Contractor shall submit proof of RCDD designation.
B.
Provided products shall meet the following requirements: Items of the same classification shall be
identical. This requirement includes equipment, assembles, parts, and components.
C.
Verify duct banks do not interfere with existing or new underground facilities.
D.
Follow Annex B of National Electrical Code (NEC).
E.
Assure that the "as installed" systems is correctly and completely documented including engineering
drawings, manuals, and operational procedures in such a manner as to support maintenance and
future expansion of the system.
1.5
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Field Measurements: Verify dimensions in areas of installation by field measurements before

fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with
construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
B.
Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work,
establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating units without field measurements. Coordinate
supports, adjacent construction, and fixture locations to ensure actual dimensions correspond to
established dimensions.
1.6
DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A.
Equipment shall be delivered in original packages with labels intact and identification clearly marked.
B.
Equipment shall not be damaged in any way and shall comply with manufacturer's operating
specifications.
C.
Equipment and components shall be protected from the weather, humidity, temperature variations,
dirt, dust, or other contaminants. Equipment damaged prior to system acceptance shall be replaced at
no cost to the Employer.
D.
Containers shall be clearly marked "For Communications Duct Banks Only".
1.7
COORDINATION
A.
Field coordinate installation of ducts with other trades to ensure clearance requirements are met.
B.
Coordinate with all contractors providing equipment outside the scope of this contract.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PATHWAYS
A.
Definition:
B.
For the purpose of this document, the term "Telecommunication Underground Ducts and Raceways"
defines a portion of BWI's communication infrastructure. Telecommunication Underground Ducts and
Raceways include products provided for the routing, segregation and support of telecommunication
cabling both inside and outside of facilities.
2.2
UNDERGROUND DUCT BANKS

A.
Duct material: Schedule 40 rigid PVC with non-magnetic universal interlocking type spacers for both
horizontal and vertical duct arrangements. Where all dielectric cables are used below ground, an
additional insulated conductor shall be placed along with the cable to provide means of tone locating.
The trace conductor shall be 10 AWG or larger.
B.
Underground Duct Banks, Maintenance holes/ Handholes - Design Load Rating:
C.
1.
AASHTO Extra Heavy Duty Rating for Aircraft apron/ Taxiway/ Runway Areas.
2.
AASHTOH-20 Rating for Typical Roadway/ Commercial Traffic Areas.
Telecommunication Handholes and Maintenance holes (A.K.A. Manholes)

1.
Telecommunication Handholes:
a)
2.
The use of handholes should be limited to low density cable runs.
Telecommunication Maintenance holes:

a)

07 June 2016
Shall not be used by lighting and power cable plant.

270543 / 3
AECOM Middle East

D.
2.3
b)
Used for Telecommunication cable pulling and splicing.
c)
Maintenance hole covers and frames shall be load rated for expected traffic load.
d)
Standard Maintenance hole Configurations:

1.
Type A
2.
Type J
3.
Type V
4.
Application specific design as field and cable density/ routing conditions require.
5.
Typical Maintenance hole Corrosion Resistant Accessories:

a)
Sump
b)
Ladder
c)
Cable Rack/ Ladder
d)
Pulling Eyes
e)
Grounding hardware
Building Entrances
1.
Pulling Eyes
2.
Splice Frame
3.
Grounding/ Protection Hardware
4.
Sealing and capping of conduit and innerducts to prevent migration of, pests, water
and vapors into the facility. Concrete and Reinforcing Steel for Encasement: Furnish
products following Division 3, except strengths as follows:
1.
Comprehensive Strength: 2500 psi at 28 days, class A.
2.
Flexural Strength: 6500 psi at 28 days.
CONDUIT SYSTEMS
A.
B.
Conduit pathways shall be provided as complete Conduit systems including:

1.
Conduit with pull strings.
2.
Pull box/ Junction box assemblies.
3.
Mounting/ attachment hardware.
4.
Labeling.
5.
Grounding.
Conduit Fill Calculations.

1.
C.
Calculate and provide conduit systems with sizing and quantities to assure conduit wire/ cable fill
does not exceed pulling tensions, rush limits and performance properties of cables installed.
Conduit Trade Sizes:

1.
Typical conduit trade sizes used in Outside Plant Telecommunication Pathways are:
a)
2.4
Trade Size 4 Inch PVC Sch40
INNERDUCTS
A.
Outside plant innerduct shall be installed in UG conduits and duct banks.

1.
Outside Plant Inner Ducts shall be 1.25-inch and/ or 1.5-inch selected to optimize current and
future cable routing through underground conduits. Outside plant innerduct shall include the
following features:
a)
Innerducts shall be constructed of high-density polyethylene with internal and external

longitudinally ribs.
b)
Innerducts shall be furnished with factory installed nylon pull ropes.
c)
Innerducts shall have a UL 94 V-O rating for flame spread from final maintenance holes to
interconnection cabinets within buildings.
d)
Innerduct reel lengths shall be provided as necessary to insure that ducts are continuous;
one piece runs from maintenance hole/ handhole to maintenance hole/ handhole.
No
innerduct connectors will be allowed between maintenance holes/ handholes.
e)
Pulling accessories used for innerduct shall be compatible with materials being pulled.
Accessories shall be furnished as required to complete the installation, including but not
limited to, inner duct lubricants, spreaders, applicators, grips, swivels, harnesses, and line
missiles.

07 June 2016
270543 / 4
AECOM Middle East


f)
2.5
Each segment of innerduct shall extend at least twelve inches beyond the end of the service
conduit.
2.
At Building entrances locations, innerduct shall be extended into racking infrastructure and
securely fasten to prevent pull back into the conduit systems.
3.
In maintenance holes planned for cable pull through, (non-pull point for cable) innerduct shall be
properly racked and secure to minimize congestion in the maintenance holes. In maintenance
holes where cable pulling is required, innerducts shall be secured to racking to prevent pull back,
and sealed to minimize migration or water, vapors and pests.
4.
At each maintenance hole and cable entrance to the facility, the inner ducts shall be labeled to
indicate cable (s) supported inside the innerduct.
5.
Design Selection: Carlon, Integral or equal.
IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A.
2.6
Comply with TIA/ EIA-606-A and UL 969 for labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating
adhesives, and inks used by label printers.
MATERIALS
A.
All conduits, fittings, junction and pull boxes shall be UL rated.
B.
All conduits, fittings, junction and pull boxes shall comply with the NEC.
C.
Non-metallic Conduit and Fittings: Pass NEMA TC2, UL 651 and 651A and FS W-C- 1094A. EMT
fittings shall be formed steel compression ring type. Die cast fittings are not allowed.
D.
Conduit Bodies:
installation.
E.
Conduit Fittings
Follow UL 514B and FS W-C-58C.
Furnish sufficient coating for touch up after
1.
All fittings shall be compression or threaded.
2.
Fittings shall provide a secure connection for pulling communications cables.
3.
Setscrew fittings are not permitted.
F.
Conduit "condulets" are not permitted.
G.
Flexible conduit is not permitted.
H.
Non-metallic conduits are not permitted in above ground installations. Conversion fittings are required
for non-metallic (below ground) to metallic (above ground) transitions.
I.
Innerduct:
J.
K.
1.
All fiber shall be installed in innerduct.
2.
One part segmented
3.
UL Listed with Flame Propagation compliant with UL 2024
4.
Only manufacturer's fittings, transition adapters, terminators and fixed bends shall be used.
5.
1 -inch corrugated, non-metallic
Measured Pull Tape

1.
Pre-lubricated, woven polyester, low friction, and high abrasion resistant yarn
2.
Minimum average tensile strength shall be 1250 lbs. for 1-inch and smaller conduits and
innerduct.
3.
Minimum average tensile strength shall be 1800 lbs. for conduits larger than 1 inch.
Pull Boxes, Junction Boxes and Gutters

1.
All junction boxes, gutters and pull boxes shall comply with NEC Article 314.
2.
All junction boxes, gutters and pull boxes shall meet the following minimum material
requirements:
3.
a)
16-gauge steel or heavier.
b)
Seams shall be continuously welded and grounded smooth.
c)
External screws and clamps.
d)
External mounting feet (where possible).
e)
Oil-resistant gasket and adhesive.
f)
ANSI 61 gray polyester powder coating inside and out over phosphatized surface.
g)
UL 50 type 12.
All junction boxes, gutters and pull boxes shall be provided with bushings for conduits and/ or
cabling.

07 June 2016
270543 / 5
AECOM Middle East


4.
All junction boxes, gutters and pull boxes shall be securely installed.
5.
All junction boxes, gutters and pull box sizes for single and multiple conduit runs shall comply
with BICSI TDMM.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Contractor shall review, approve and stamp all shop drawings, coordination drawings and record
drawings.
B.
Verify materials are on site in proper condition and of sufficient quantity.
C.
Verify proper excavation depth (minimum 48 inches below finished grade), width, route and support of
work. Verify proper location of handholes and maintenance holes (minimum every 350 feet).
Communications facilities must be placed in separate handholes and maintenance holes from
Electrical facilities.
D.
Trenches greater than or equal to 5 feet deep:
E.
1.
Shall be shored to prevent cave-in.
2.
Shall have 2 feet clearance from the dirt pile.
Directional boring is a suitable substitute when trenching is impractical or impossible. Locating existing
underground utilities is crucial when directional boring is planned because of the potential for the
drilling unit to encounter high voltages. Although directional boring machines are manufactured with
electrical strike sensing capabilities, which can warn the operator of any contact with a high voltage
source, accidents may still occur.
1.
F.
G.
3.2
Operators of directional boring machines require special protection due to the potential for
exposure to high voltage. Therefore, operators must always have a ground mat grid underfoot as
insulation protection. In addition, operators must wear insulating boots and gloves, along with
hard hats and safety glasses.
Minimum electrical/ communications underground cable separation:

1.
Concrete: 3 inches
2.
Masonry: 4 inches
3.
Well-tamped earth: 12 inches
Before encasement, verify ducts are free of debris and properly installed in support and spacer
system, are properly fitted together and hold-down hardware is properly installed.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install work following drawings, manufacturer's instructions and approved submittal data.
B.
Install conduit in excavations following Drawings. If directional boring is utilized, cable or flexible
conduits can be attached to the unit and pulled back to the origination point (after the drilling unit
reaches its destination).
C.
Handholes shall be sized in accordance with BICSI CO OSP Manual but no larger than four feet by
four feet and shall be constructed of 2-inch thick cement covered with 3/ 8 inch steel plate. The
handhole or maintenance hole shall rest on a 4-inch blanket of sand, and four inches around the side
walls shall be filled with sand.
D.
Each handhole or maintenance hole which contains a pedestal shall have four bollards installed 18
inches diagonally from each corner, with a cross member welded at 30 inches connecting the four
corners. These barriers shall be constructed of four-inch rigid conduit filled with concrete, driven four
feet in the ground and extending 36 inches above the protective cover.
E.
Install watertight penetrations through foundation, handhole and maintenance hole walls. Wherever a
handhole is used to simply pass through, the conduit entrances and exits shall be situated at opposite
ends of the handhole instead of 90 degree angles.
F.
Assemble duct banks with non-magnetic saddles, spacers and separators. Position separators for 2inch minimum concrete separation between outer surfaces of adjacent ducts.
G.
1.
Make uniform required bends with a minimum of a 24-inch radius for conduits less than 3 inch
diameter, and a 48 inch radius for conduits 3 inches and larger.
2.
Maintain vertical or horizontal separations of 12 inches of well-packed topsoil from any electrical
service conduit run parallel to communications conduits.
Install reinforcing. Install concrete encasement fully surrounding reinforcing steel and ducts.
1.
Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, reinforce with No. 5 longitudinal steel bars placed at
each corner and along each face at maximum parallel spacing of 12 inches o.c., and No. 5 tiebars transversely placed at 12 inches o.c. maximum longitudinal. Maintain maximum clearance
of 2 inches from bars to edge of forms and ducts.
2.
Place concrete with minimum 3-inch cover surrounding ducts and reinforcement.

07 June 2016
270543 / 6
AECOM Middle East


3.
Maintain ducts in proper place during concrete placement.
H.
Transition from Schedule 40 rigid PVC non-metallic to metallic conduit where duct banks enter
structures or turn upward for continuation above grade.
I.
Where ducts enter structures such as handholes, maintenance holes, pullboxes, or buildings,
terminate ducts in proper end bells, insulated L-bushings, Meyers hubs or couplings on steel conduits.
J.
Extend below grade conduits to 4 inches above the finished floor inside a building.
K.
Tag conduits entering pull boxes with stamped stainless steel tags following cable and conduit
schedule.
L.
Backfill after concrete cures 24 hours.
M.
Install one bare stranded copper duct bank ground cable in each duct bank envelope. Make ground
electrically continuous throughout duct bank system. Connect to each handhole and maintenance
hole ground rod.
N.
Pull a 12-inch long mandrel (1/ 4 inch smaller than duct diameter) through ducts. Pull a rag swab or
sponge through to remove debris, until it shows clean.
O.
Where fiber optic cables will be installed, place innerducts inside each 4 inch conduit as designated
on the drawings for this purpose.
P.
Provide a measured pull tape in all underground conduits.
3.3
CLEANING
A.
3.4
Remove all unnecessary tools and equipment, unused materials, packing materials, and debris from
each area where Work has been completed unless designated for storage.
ACCEPTANCE
A.
Once all work has been completed, test documentation has been submitted and approved, and the
Employer is satisfied that all work has been completed in accordance with contract documents, the
Employer will notify Contractor in writing of formal acceptance of the system.
B.
Acceptance shall be subject to completion of all work and submittal and approval of full documentation
as described above.
End of Section

07 June 2016
270543 / 7
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
SECTION 311000 -- SITE CLEARING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
1.2
SUBMITTALS
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.4
DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.5
SITE CONDITIONS
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
3.2
PREPARATION
3.3
INSTALLATION
3.4

01 June 2016
311000
AECOM Middle East

SITE CLEARING

Enabling Works
SECTION 311000 -- SITE CLEARING

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
Section Includes
C.
1.2
1.
Clearing and grubbing.
2.
Tree and shrub removal and disposal/ replant.
3.
Removal of debris related to clearing and grubbing operations.
4.
Removal of fences, walls, gates and other obstructions interfering with the proposed work.
Definitions
1.
Clearing: Removal and disposal of above-ground items defined herein.
2.
Grubbing: Removal and disposal of below-ground items defined herein.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.

1.
Permits:
a)
Assume responsibility for procuring the necessary approvals/ permits from related agencies
with jurisdiction over affected existing features.
b)
Before removal of any trees or shrubs the Contractor shall obtain written consent from the
Muscat Municipality.
2.
Method Statement for Clearing and Grubbing: Prior to the commencement of work, detailed
proposals shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator for methods of construction, including
existing features to be demolished, temporary work and construction plant, indicating clearly the
limit of contract for all work related to clearing and grubbing. The detailed proposals shall include
but not be limited to the following: numbers and types of plant, routings and expected outputs,
locations of spoil heaps, installation and removal of temporary work, attendance and supervision,
and controls to ensure quality assurance and safety.
3.
Bench Marks: Before commencing the Work obtain from the Contract Administrator all information
pertaining to all main bench marks and establish all additional and supplementary bench marks as
directed by the Contract Administrator. All pertinent existing levels, lines and locations shall be
checked and verified before commencing the Work. All the above shall be at the expense of the
Contractor.
4.
Levels: Provide in accordance with the requirements of Section 312300 Excavation and Fill.
5.
Shop Drawings: Prepare Shop Drawings as necessitated by the nature of the work. Location of
additional sections shall be prepared at the Contractor's option and/ or as directed by the Contract
Administrator. The Shop Drawings should include but not be limited to existing features that shall
be affected by temporary or proposed work. Refer to the Employer General Requirements for the
procedure requirements for Shop Drawings.
6.
Set out the accepted construction limits and the Contract Administrator will designate all trees,
shrubs, plants, vegetation, and other items that shall remain. Carefully preserve all items from
damage or defacement.

01 June 2016
311000 / 1
AECOM Middle East

SITE CLEARING

Enabling Works
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with the requirements specified in the Employer General Requirements.
B.
All tree pruning, tree repair, and tree removal shall be performed by competent workers, under the
supervision of the Muscat Municipality.
C.
In the event unsuitable soil shall be encountered during the performance of work or when directed by
the Contract Administrator, carry out exploratory excavations and carry out such tests as shall be required
to determine the composition of the unsuitable material and what steps shall be taken at those areas.
D.
Perform the work of clearing and grubbing so as to remove only the material herein specified. In the
event the Contractor chooses to do such work with mechanical equipment, and thereby removes and
wastes suitable material, such material shall be replaced with acceptable borrow material by the
Contractor at his own expense.
1.4

A.
1.5
The removal of any guard fences shall be included as a part of clearing and grubbing. The material which
can be salvaged shall be carefully removed and stored as directed by the Contract Administrator.
SITE CONDITIONS
A.
Trees shall only be moved if they represent an absolute obstruction to the work and no diversion of
services or the road alignment shall be possible.
B.
Existing facilities, structures, and utilities are indicated in accordance with available surveys and records.
The indicated locations of underground utilities and structures are approximate. Other utilities may exist
which are not indicated.
C.
Trees that are protected species in the Sultanate of Oman shall only be pruned or moved under the
complete supervision and written approval of the Muscat Municipality.
D.
During construction, provide all protection for existing utilities and services as may be required by the
following items including but not limited to: the construction operations, the interruption of supplies or
services, any charges for damages, the requirements of the Specification, as indicated on the Design
Drawings and as directed by the Contract Administrator.
E.
The Contractor shall comply with the following requirements:

1.
Use all necessary precautionary and protective measures required to maintain existing utilities,
services and appurtenances that shall be imperative to keep in operation during the construction
work. Take adequate measures that shall prevent undermining of utilities and services presently in
service.
2.
Protect new utilities and services where required by the Contractor's operations and/ or as directed
by the Contract Administrator. Assume responsibility for bracing and supporting utilities and services
that shall prevent their settlement, displacement or damage.
3.
Where indicated on the Design Drawings or directed by the Contract Administrator, remove and
cap abandoned utility and service lines as acceptable to the Contract Administrator. The method of
capping the lines shall comply with the requirements of the local Service Authorities, and the Contract
Administrator.
4.
Where indicated on the Design Drawings or directed by the Contract Administrator, abandoned
utility and service lines shall be completely removed and disposed at a suitable dump area or as
directed by the Contract Administrator. No removal shall commence until the Contract Administrator's
acceptance has been obtained.
5.
No utility line, service line, conduit or any structures, above or below the ground, within the limits
of the Work shall be removed until receipt of written permission from the Service Authorities, the
Employer and the Contract Administrator.
6.
The locations of all existing service facilities including all utility or service vaults, valve boxes,
manholes, inlets, joining boxes and the like may not be indicated on the Design Drawings. Make
the determination of the existence and locations of such utility facilities by manual excavation.

01 June 2016
311000 / 2
AECOM Middle East

SITE CLEARING

Enabling Works
7.
Prepare and furnish all necessary Shop Drawings of the Permanent or Temporary Work required
to complete all adjustments to finished grade or level. The Shop Drawings shall be submitted and
accepted by the Service Authorities and the Contract Administrator prior to project implementation.
8.
Where any utility or service vaults shall be constructed under a separate contract by the Client within
the Site and concurrent with the execution of the Work, cooperate with the other separate Contractor's
and coordinate the project construction operations to avoid interference with the other Contractor's
operations.
9.
Prepare Shop Drawings for utility protection work and obtain the approval of the Service Authorities
before commencing with construction. Relocate certain utilities to services reservation areas as
indicated on the Design Drawings and as specified under other work sections of the Specification.
10. The review and comments given by the Contract Administrator during the Shop Drawings process
shall not relieve the Contractor of the full responsibility for all protection and precautions
against damages of utilities or services during execution of the Work and all requirements as required
by all Contract Documents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Following consultation with Muscat Municipality, propose two sites for disposal of unsuitable or surplus
material, one of which shall be specified as having priority and which must be filled before the second
is used, together with a separate location where hard debris, such as wood, building rubble, kerbing,
etc. shall be disposed of. Obtain approval for all the proposed sites from the Muscat Municipality before
work commences and disposal at such sites shall be at no extra cost to the Employer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify survey benchmarks and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated.
B.
Verify location and existence of all underground utilities and structures by contacting the Service
Authorities.
C.
Provide 72 hour notice to the Service Authorities, prior to beginning construction.
D.
Contact the Service Authorities to make arrangements for handling and disposal of utilities encountered
during construction.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Protect bench marks, survey control points, and existing structures to remain from damage or
displacement.
B.
Protect trees and vegetation to remain. Do not cut or injure trees and vegetation outside easement lines
and outside designated clearing areas.
C.
Protect all underground utilities and structures that shall remain in place. If damage occurs, immediately
notify the Service Authorities, the Contract Administrator and the Employer within the hour such a damage
occurs.
D.
Protect Site features that shall remain from damage by construction equipment and vehicular traffic.
E.
Identify waste and salvage areas for stockpiling of removed materials to the acceptance of the Contract
Administrator.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Clearing
1.
Remove and dispose material off Site including but not limited to the following items:

01 June 2016
311000 / 3
AECOM Middle East

SITE CLEARING

Enabling Works
2.
B.
C.
b)
Rocks, fences, tiles, lumps of concrete, trash piles, debris and rubbish. Remove all evidence
of their presence from the surface.
Clear ground within limits of work, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Remove and dispose of all stumps, buried logs, matted roots, roots larger than 50mm and organic
materials off Site.
2.
All embedded stumps or root mats larger than 50mm in diameter shall be removed to a depth of
not less than 900mm, and roots larger than 25mm in diameter to a depth of 450mm below the surface.
3.
Depressions formed by the removal of stumps or roots shall be refilled with acceptable borrow
material and shall be compacted.
4.
Within areas where fill shall be placed, the ground shall be cleared of all dead trees, brush or other
objectionable vegetation.
5.
Excavation operations shall not be started in any area until the operations of clearing and grubbing
within the area affected has been completed.
6.
Areas designated to receive pavement or structures shall be grubbed to formation level. Measure
depths of cut from existing ground surface or proposed finished grade, whichever is lower.
7.
Depressions made by grubbing shall be filled with suitable material and compacted to conform to
original adjacent grade.
8.
Do not grub areas, to avoid damage to the tree roots, within drip line of trees that shall remain.
Tree and Shrubs Removal
2.
As directed by the Contract Administrator and the Muscat Municipality, provide provisions at no
additional cost to the project cost, to remove trees obstructing the work and to replant those items
at the proper location identified by the Muscat Municipality. The following equipment shall be used
to remove and replant trees:
a)
A mobile crane of sufficient capacity with slings and other attachments enabling the lifting of
the particular tree and the trees in general.
b)
An excavator to carry out pre-tree removal work.
c)
A low-bed trailer and tractor or similar to transport the removed tree/ trees.
Remove Shrubs within permanent and temporary easement by felling or cutting individual vegetation
and grubbing.
Burning
1.
3.4
Snags, brush, shrubs, downed wood, decayed wood and other vegetative growth.
Grubbing
1.
D.
a)
Burning shall not be permitted on Site.

A.
Cleaning
1.
Promptly dispose of excess and unsuitable material off Site.
2.
Remove debris, junk and trash from Site.
3.
Leave Site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work.
4.
Clean up spillage and wind-blown debris before entering public or private property, adjacent to Site.

01 June 2016
311000 / 4
AECOM Middle East

SITE CLEARING

Enabling Works
B.
Adjusting
1.
Existing surfaces, features, utilities, or structures that shall remain but are damaged during
construction shall be restored to at least the condition in which they were found immediately before
work began, unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Restore damaged utilities to the satisfaction of the Service Authorities and the Contract Administrator.
3.
Restore damaged private property to the satisfaction of the Employer and the Contract Administrator.
END OF SECTION

01 June 2016
311000 / 5
AECOM Middle East

SITE CLEARING

Enabling Works
SECTION 312300 -- EXCAVATION AND FILL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
1.2
SUBMITTALS
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.4
1.5
PROJECT CONDITIONS
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
DESIGN CRITERIA
2.2
2.3
MATERIALS
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
3.2
PREPARATION
3.3
INSTALLATION
3.4
13
3.5
14
3.6
PROTECTION
14

01 June 2016
312300
AECOM Middle East

EXCAVATION AND FILL

Enabling Works
SECTION 312300 -- EXCAVATION AND FILL

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
Section Includes
1.
1.2
Excavation in all types of strata including rock, and filling.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.

1.
Method Statement for Deep Excavations: Submit method statements for review by the Contract
Administrator before commencing deep excavations for the foundations. Provide full details of all
support measures and dewatering systems to be supplied. Similarly submit method statements in
respect of filling operations, specifying compaction procedures, plant to be used and number and
depth of passes.
2.
The following particulars of the proposed materials and methods of construction for earthworks shall
be submitted to the Contract Administrator:
a)
Details of constructional plant and haulage vehicles.
b)
Methods of excavation and of deposition and compaction of fill material.
c)
Methods of excavation in rock.
d)
Use of different types of excavated material and sources of imported fill material.
e)
Arrangements for stockpiling excavated material and fill material and for disposing of
earthworks material.
f)
Methods of controlling the moisture content of fill material.
g)
Methods of controlling surface water and groundwater and of protecting earthworks and
earthworks material from damage due to water and from weather conditions which may affect
the earthworks or earthworks material.
h)
Methods of monitoring groundwater levels.
i)
Methods of monitoring the ground and structures for movements.
3.
Method Statement for Earthworks: Prior to the commencement of work, detailed proposals shall be
submitted to the Contract Administrator for methods of construction, including temporary work and
construction plant, for all earthworks. The detailed proposals shall include but not limited to the
numbers and types of plant, routings and expected outputs, locations of spoil heaps, installation
and removal of temporary work, attendance and supervision, and controls to ensure quality
assurance and safety.
4.
Levels: Existing Site survey drawings shall be furnished in good faith for the guidance of the
Contractor. Check and verify levels at Site. Contractor shall accept all risks associated.
a)

01 June 2016
Proposals shall be submitted for setting out and controlling the alignment of the Work, to the
Contract Administrator and obtain the Contract Administrator's acceptance prior to the start of
construction. Supply details of the value and location of all temporary benchmarks and
reference points which shall be established for the project.
312300 / 1
AECOM Middle East

EXCAVATION AND FILL

Enabling Works
b)
5.
Running Layers and Access Routes (Haul Roads)

a)
Where the Contractor's proposals include running over the location of the permanent work,
the Contractor shall provide, above the formation levels indicated on the Design Drawings, a
suitable running layer of 300mm minimum depth above formation levels for the movement and
operation of plant, materials and labor associated with his work ensuring that material at
formation and below is not adversely affected.
b)
Prior to commencement of work, submit to the Contract Administrator for his acceptance of
proposals for haul roads, machines and plant.
6.
Submit to the Contract Administrator proposals for the temporary work to ensure stability of the
excavation, temporary and permanent work, and these proposals shall include detailed Shop
Drawings and calculations, methods of installation and withdrawal and his means of keeping the
work free of water.
7.
Method Statement for Dewatering
8.
1.3
Should the Contractor dispute the original ground levels indicated on the Design Drawings,
the disputed ground levels shall be accepted by the Contract Administrator before disturbing
the original ground.
a)
Proposals shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator for his acceptance before starting
such operations and shall include for two dispersed observation wells for monitoring by the
Contractor and Contract Administrator.
b)
The Contractor or specialist sub-contractor shall be experienced in construction dewatering

on projects of similar size and complexity, in geology similar to that present on the site. The
proposals shall include the Contractor's assessment of likely settlement together with
calculations and conditions assumed.
Testing Agencies: Submit the names of proposed testing agencies to the Contract Administrator for
review and comment.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Standards, General: All Building Codes, Industry Standard specifications and applicable By-Laws referred
1.
B.
no relevant ASTM or ACI standard the Contractor shall make reference to the relevant British
Standard.
Refer to Section 033000 Cast-In Place Concrete for the references for all relevant ASTM, ACI and BS
standards and guidance documents not listed here
1.
ASTM D75 Standard Practice for Sampling Aggregates
2.
BS 1377 Methods of test for soils for civil engineering purposes
3.
BS EN ISO 14688: Part 1 and Part 2, BS EN ISO 14689: Part 1, BS EN ISO 22475: Part 1, BS EN
ISO 22476: Parts 2 and 3 and BS EN 1997: Part 2 Code of practice for site investigations
4.
BS 6031 Code of practice for earthworks
5.
BS EN 1997: Part 1 Code of practice for foundations
6.
BS 8006: Part 1 Code of practice for strengthened /reinforced soils and other fills
7.
CIRIA Guide C515 Ground Water Control, Design and Practice
8.
CIRIA Report 113 Control of ground waters for temporary works
9.
CIRIA Report 97 Trenching Practice

01 June 2016
312300 / 2
AECOM Middle East

EXCAVATION AND FILL

Enabling Works
C.
Shoring and Trench Wooding: In addition to requirements of local authorities, carry out in accordance
with requirements of local Occupational Health and Safety Regulations.
D.
Geotechnical Investigation Report

1.
1.4
Information given in the latest edition of the Geotechnical Investigation Report was obtained for the
use of the Contract Administrator in execution of design and shall be made available in good faith
to assist the Contractor. No guarantee is made as to its detailed accuracy for every Site location.
The Contractor shall assume all risks associated with its use.

A.
Stockpile materials in designated areas. Stockpile topsoil and each type of fill material separately to
prevent integration. Stockpile granular materials so as to prevent segregation.
B.
Keep surrounding roads free of soil deposits from material hauling trucks. Load trucks carefully to prevent
spillage and wind drift.
C.
Do not interfere with use of adjacent buildings.
D.
Take precautions against movement, settlement or collapse of sidewalks, public services adjoining
property and be liable for all damage to same.
E.
Take precautions against movement or settlement of existing piling and substructures. Provide and place
bracing and shoring necessary for the safety and support of the piles and execute the work in a manner
to prevent movement, settlement, damage or injury caused by existing pile or substructure movement
or settlement.
F.
Supply and maintain adequate and proper planking, cants and bridging over municipal sidewalks, curbs,
paving and boulevards to protect these areas from the pass of vehicles.
1.5
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Conditions
1.
Descriptions of soils and rocks shall be in accordance with the requirements of BS EN ISO 14688:
Part 1 and Part 2, BS EN ISO 22475: Part 1, BS EN ISO 22476: Parts 2 and 3 and BS EN 1997:
Part 2 when included or otherwise accepted by the Contract Administrator. The criteria which shall
be used to distinguish between the various types of soil, soft rock and hard rock shall be acceptable
to the Contractor and the Contract Administrator on Site.
2.
Earthworks after Site clearance, excavation or filling and earthworks materials after excavation shall
be kept free from water and shall be protected from damage due to water and from exposure to
weather conditions which may affect the earthworks or earthworks material. The measures to be
taken shall include the following:
3.
a)
Surfaces shall be maintained in a stable condition and shall be formed to falls to shed water
and to prevent ponding.
b)
The area of exposed surfaces shall be kept to a minimum.
c)
Temporarily exposed surfaces shall be sealed or covered with impermeable sheeting or

protected by other methods to the acceptance of the Contract Administrator.
Adverse Conditions:
a)
No excavation work or placing of fill materials when conditions shall be such that the work or
other work would be adversely affected shall be permitted. Once any operation has been
stopped, owing to adverse weather or other conditions, it shall not be re-started without the
b)
Plan operations so as to take account of the season and to take full advantage of favorable
climatic conditions. Additionally, the temporary drainage of the work shall take these factors
into account.

01 June 2016
312300 / 3
AECOM Middle East

EXCAVATION AND FILL

Enabling Works
c)
4.
5.
Seek the Contract Administrator's acceptance to any changes in the proposed method of
working deemed necessary to ensure full compliance with the adverse conditions requirement,
before the changes shall be implemented.
Contaminated, Disturbed or Man-Made Ground: Health and Safety:

a)
Attention shall be drawn to the possibility of contamination of ground and/ or of disturbed or

man-made ground masses and additional attention shall be paid to the potential problems that
shall be posed when working in such conditions.
b)
Ensure that full reference is made to any existing reports or other relevant information on
ground conditions, particularly with respect to possible physical or chemical hazards for
workers, whether in solid, liquid or gaseous forms.
c)
Suitable precautions shall be taken to protect the workforce and the neighborhood from
environmental hazards that shall result from construction operations. Such hazards could relate
to dust, flammability, explosiveness, skin contact, inhalation or ingestion. The Contract
Administrator shall advise the Contractor at the tender stage of any facts or well-founded
suspicions that exist regarding the potential hazards.
d)
If the Contractor has knowledge of, or encounters material and conditions in the ground mass,
which shall constitute an environmental hazard, or suspects they shall constitute an
environmental hazard, promptly advise the Contract Administrator and request instructions to
proceed. No further work shall be carried out until satisfactory clearances have been received
from the Contract Administrator and the local Environmental Health Officer when applicable.
Underground Services: Notify public utilities or municipal authorities in advance of planned

excavations adjacent to their services. Take care not to damage or displace encountered known
and unknown services. When such services shall be encountered, immediately notify the Contract
Administrator, and protect, brace and support active services.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
DESIGN CRITERIA
A.
General: The design of temporary work associated with earthworks, including temporary slopes,
stockpiles and drainage, shall be such that the risk of failure is not more than that which would be adopted
if the temporary work were to be permanent.
B.
Allowance may be made in the design of the temporary work for the shorter design life and for the risk
to persons and property and the surface water and groundwater conditions which shall be likely to occur
during construction.
2.2
A.
Earthwork material which is not stated in the Contract Conditions to be excavated but which in the opinion
of the Contract Administrator has inadequate strength, durability or stability shall be dealt with by additional
excavation or filling or by stabilization or by other methods instructed by the Contract Administrator.
B.
The sides of excavations for structures such as basements, Plant rooms, water retaining structures and
foundations shall be adequately supported at all times and, except where required as indicated on the
Design Drawings or allowed by the Contract Administrator, shall not be battered.
2.3
MATERIALS
A.
Earthwork material within the Site at the commencement of the Contract shall remain the property of the
Employer except as stated below.
B.
Earthwork material which is not stated in the Contract Conditions to be excavated and which the Contractor
causes or allows to deteriorate such that in the opinion of the Contract Administrator the permanent work
shall be affected shall be replaced or dealt with by methods to the acceptance of the Contract Administrator.
C.
Material provided to replace earthwork material, which has been allowed to become unsuitable or which
the Contractor causes or allows to deteriorate, shall be an equivalent material to the acceptance of the

01 June 2016
312300 / 4
AECOM Middle East

EXCAVATION AND FILL

Enabling Works
1. The replacement material shall have the same volume after compaction as the material replaced.
2. The material, which is to be replaced, shall be disposed of by the Contractor.
D. Earthwork material, which is required for use in the permanent work as fill material, shall not be removed
from the Site unless permitted by the Contract Administrator. The Contractor shall notify the Contract
Administrator before any earthwork material is removed from the Site.
E. Excavated material required for use in the permanent work which is capable of being selected, processed
and mixed to make it suitable for use as fill material shall not be used for any other purposes unless
permitted by the Contract Administrator.
F. Where excavation produces a combination of acceptable and unacceptable materials, carry out the
excavation in such a manner that acceptable materials shall be excavated separately for use in the work
without contamination by unacceptable materials which shall be removed off Site. Where excavation
produces a combination of acceptable materials with different characteristics, these materials shall be
excavated and stored separately.
G. Fill Material
1. Fill material required for the main works under slabs on grade and for backfill to the areas adjacent
to the retaining walls shall be stockpiled in the plot designated for the hotel, after suitable treatment
to meet the performance characteristics detailed hereunder.
2. Fill material shall consist of naturally occurring or processed material which at the time of deposition
is capable of being compacted in accordance with the specified requirements to form stable areas
of fill.
3. Naturally occurring excavated material consisting of rock shall be thoroughly crushed and processed to meet the parameters specified below under Clauses 2.3 G 4 to 2.3 G 9.
4. Suitable material fill shall be in accordance with the following limits:
a) Liquid Limit in accordance with AASHTO T89: 30% max.
b) Plasticity Index in accordance with AASHTO T90: 6% max.
c) Total Water Soluble Salts in accordance with BS 1377: 5% max.
d) Minimum soaked CBR of 15% when the material is compacted to 95% of the MDD.
e) Maximum particle size to be not more than 100mm.
f) MDD is the maximum dry density in accordance with BS 1377 Test 13.
g) CBR values shall be determined in accordance with BS 1377 Test 16.
5. Fill material shall not contain any of the following:
a) Material susceptible to volume change, including marine mud, soil with a liquid limit exceeding
30% or a plasticity index exceeding 6%, swelling clays and collapsible soils.
1. Peat, vegetation, wood, organic, soluble or perishable material,
b) Dangerous or toxic material or material susceptible to combustion, and;
c) Metal, rubber, plastic or synthetic material.
6. The different types of fill material shall have the particle size distributions within the ranges stated
in Table A 'Particle size distribution of fill material' within Appendix 312300.
7. Fill material shall consist of clean, hard, durable material.

01 June 2016
312300 / 5
AECOM Middle East

EXCAVATION AND FILL
Rev T2

Enabling Works
8.
The soluble sulfate content of fill material placed within 500mm of concrete, cement bound material
or cementitious material shall not exceed 1.9 grams of sulfate, expressed as SO3, per liter.
9.
The total sulfate content, expressed as SO3, of fill material placed within 500mm of metalwork shall
not exceed 0.5% by mass.
10. Granular sub-base:

a)
Material shall consist of hard, durable natural/ screened gravel or crushed stone, and free from
clay balls or other deleterious substances. Granular sub-base shall be well graded and lie
within the grading envelope stated below when tested in accordance with BS 1377: Part 2:
Test 9.2 and BS EN ISO 17892: Parts 1 and 2. The material should have a minimum CBR of
30% at 95% of maximum dry density. Organic impurities in accordance with BS 1377: Part 3
Method 3 shall not exceed 0.2%.
1.
For sieve size of 63mm the percentage passing is 100%.
2.
For sieve size of 37.5mm the percentage passing is between 85% and 100%.
3.
4.
5.
For sieve size 0.6mm the percentage passing is between 8% and 25%.
6.
For sieve size 0.075mm the percentage passing is between 0% and 10%.
11. Granular pipe-bedding materials

a)
b)
Granular material for bedding and filling around pipelines shall be in accordance with BS EN
12620 and unless otherwise indicated on the Design Drawings shall be as follows:
1.
10mm nominal single size for pipes with a nominal bore not exceeding 110mm.
2.
10mm or 14mm nominal single size for pipes with a nominal bore exceeding 110mm but
not exceeding 200mm.
3.
10mm, 14mm or 20mm nominal single size for pipes with a nominal bore exceeding
200mm but not exceeding 525mm.
4.
14mm, 20mm or 37.5mm nominal single size for pipes with a nominal bore exceeding
525mm.
A compaction fraction value not greater than 0.15 shall be used.
12. Pervious membranes, Geotextiles:

a)
Geotextiles, used as separation layers between different materials and functioning as a

pervious membrane shall be overlapped, jointed, protected (both temporarily and permanently)
and stored in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Before commencing work verify location of survey monuments in the areas in which the work is to be
executed. Should any of the monuments be disturbed due to the work, be responsible for the expenditures
incurred in restoring the monuments.
B.
Note all characteristics and features affecting work. No allowance shall be made for difficulties
encountered or expenses incurred on account of any Site conditions or any growth or item existing
thereon, visible or known to exist when tender is submitted.

01 June 2016
312300 / 6
AECOM Middle East

EXCAVATION AND FILL

Enabling Works
C.
3.2
Earthworks material which shall be used, or is required for use, in the permanent work and which becomes
unsuitable such that in the opinion of the Contract Administrator it no longer complies with the specified
requirements for that type of material shall be replaced or dealt with by methods to the acceptance of
PREPARATION
A.
Clear and remove, from Site, obstructions to excavations. Establish and maintain accurate lines and
levels as required. Provide batter boards, line stakes and templates, and establish permanent reference
lines and benchmarks required.
B.
Sequentially test each stage of backfill commencing at founding elevations and continuing through
installation of subsequent lifts or material and compaction thereof.
C.
Do not proceed with installation of any material until preceding surface or layer is in accordance with
design criteria. Engage and pay for independent testing agency to conduct testing.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Running Layers and Access Routes (Haul Roads)

1.
During the execution of the work maintain the running layer to the acceptance of the Contract
Administrator.
2.
The running layer shall be removed in a manner which does not adversely disturb the previous
construction or interfere with subsequent operations for the permanent Work.
Excavation
1.
Excavate with due regard for the peculiarities of soil conditions and take precautions to protect
adjacent foundations and property.
2.
Temporary supports or other methods shall be used to maintain excavations in a stable condition
and to prevent settlement of structures or utilities due to excavation or dewatering.
3.
Spread and level surplus excavated material at areas shall be accepted within the Site.
4.
Record the strata through which the project work scope is excavated together with their locations
and depths. A copy of the records shall be supplied to the Contract Administrator as the work
proceeds.
5.
Attention shall be drawn to the possibility of bottom heave occurring in deep excavations and in the
Contractor's proposals, the stability of excavation against bottom heave shall have been considered.
6.
Where for reasons of program the excavation cannot immediately be completed, sealed and the
permanent work placed, excavation is left a few millimeters above formation level as a protective
layer; the extent of further protection to be provided in each case shall be dependant on the situation
and material involved. Trafficking shall only be by acceptance of the Contract Administrator.
7.
When constructing structures and laying adjacent services, the construction or service requiring
the deepest excavation shall be excavated first and construction brought to a safe level before
starting further excavation.
a)
When this is impracticable obtain the acceptance of the Contract Administrator for the proposed
method for maintaining undisturbed the ground supporting the higher construction while
excavating, constructing and filling around and/ or over the lower one.
8.
Stockpile excavated material for re-use on the Site ensuring that such material shall not interfere
with Site drainage, drainage of adjacent properties, or building operations. Remove subsoil and
excavated material not required for re-grading from the Site, including material excavated by other
Section requirements.
9.
Excavate to extent, elevations and depths required for completion of the work, leaving sufficient
space for removal of formwork, application of and installation of weeping drains. Excavate and
construct for slabs and ramps, to lines, elevations and cross sections indicated on the Design
Drawings to allow finishing sections to install their work to required thicknesses.

01 June 2016
312300 / 7
AECOM Middle East

EXCAVATION AND FILL

Enabling Works
10. Keep excavation free of water by bailing, pumping or system of drainage as required, and provide
pumps, suction and discharge lines of sufficient capacity. Maintain until such time as permanent
drainage system is installed or until the Contract Administrator's review and comment for removal
of equipment is obtained. Take all necessary measures to prevent flow of water into excavation.
11. Constructional plant or other vehicles shall not be operated or parked adjacent to excavations and
earthworks material or other materials shall not be placed adjacent to excavations unless this has
been allowed for in the design of the temporary work for the support of the excavation.
12. Keep bottoms of excavations clean and clear of loose materials leveled and stepped at changes of
levels except excavations made for drainage purposes which shall slope as required.
13. If removal of earth causes displacement of adjacent earth, remove disturbed earth.
14. Remove soft, wet or unconsolidated ground, quicksand and organic material encountered in
excavating and fill void with well compacted, clean, dry fill of quality as specified in the Specification.
Where these conditions occur under or near footings, special arrangements shall be made by the
15. After completion of excavation and prior to placing concrete or fill, notify inspection Contract
Administrator so that he may inspect of exposed bearing surfaces. In the event that founding levels
shall be subjected to rain or other moisture after inspection and review and comment but prior to
installation of concrete, notify Contract Administrator to re-examine all exposed bearing surfaces.
Do not place concrete until re-examination has taken place and review and comment given.
16. Inform the Contract Administrator without delay of the nature and location of any unforeseen
obstruction encountered during excavation.
17. Should nature of subsoil on depths indicated prove to be unsatisfactory for placing of structural work
thereon, then upon the Contract Administrator written order, excavate to greater depth until
satisfactory bottom is reached.
18. If excavations reveal seepage zones, springs or other unexpected subsurface conditions, which
may necessitate revisions or additions to any drainage system, inform the Contract Administrator
immediately for remedial action.
19. Excavated surfaces scheduled to receive concrete blinding shall be protected from excessive traffic
and other disturbances and shall not be left exposed for extended periods of time.
20. On completion of the excavation the formation shall be neatly finished leaving no extraneous
material. The permanent work shall be placed immediately or the formation sealed to the acceptance
of the Contract Administrator after the formation has been inspected.
a)
Give adequate notice to the Contract Administrator to enable the inspection to be completed.
21. Excavations shall be kept free from noxious or explosive gases, whether generated in strata by
blasting or otherwise. Assume responsibility to ensure that each excavation is safe before allowing
entry.
C.
a)
Carry out tests detecting for the presence of noxious or explosive gases, or to detect a lack of
oxygen before allowing personnel to enter any confined space or excavation, and then
continuously monitor conditions during the period of work.
b)
Take such measures, including but not limited to ventilation, the provision of breathing
apparatus, and back-up personnel and equipment) as shall avoid any risk of injury to personnel.
c)
The Contract Administrator may order the withdrawal of personnel if dissatisfied with the
Contractor's arrangements.
Excavated Native Material

1.
The work of this Section includes excavation of all types of strata including rock. All excavated
material including broken asphalt and base material; broken concrete; abandoned foundations and
rubble fill at Site of previous buildings; catch basins, sumps and related piping, piling; concrete
sidewalks and paving; and the like, shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed
from Site and disposed of in location to be determined by the Contractor in accordance with governing
regulations.

01 June 2016
312300 / 8
AECOM Middle East

EXCAVATION AND FILL

Enabling Works
2.
D.
Obtain the Contract Administrator's review and comment prior to excavated material being used for
backfill and protect as necessary.
Trench and Pit Excavating for Services

1.
The sides of trenches and pits shall be adequately supported at all times and, except where indicated
on the Design Drawings, shall not be battered. Trenching practice and support shall follow the
recommendations of CIRIA Report 97 in so far as it is applicable.
2.
Trenches for drains and sewers shall be excavated to an even gradient between manholes and to
the depth required by the Design Drawings. Trenches for other services shall be excavated to give
the specified cover. Allowance shall be made for bedding where required.
3.
Unless indicated otherwise on the Design Drawings, trenches for pipelines and conduits shall not
exceed the width as listed in Table B within Appendix 312300. If the specified width is exceeded
notify the Contract Administrator immediately to enable him to check the design. If battering of the
sides is allowed by the Contract Administrator then the depth of batter shall not extend lower than
300mm above the crown of the pipe.
4.
Trenches for any pipe carrying water under pressure shall, except where otherwise required under
the Contract, be excavated to sufficient depth to ensure a minimum cover of 900mm to the top of
the pipe after completion of backfilling.
5.
Trenches and pits shall be kept free of water.
6.
Where trench formation for pipelines and conduits is in fine-grained soils such as soft clays, silts or
fine sands and a granular pipe bedding is to be placed, a pervious membrane shall be laid on the
formation prior to placing the bedding. This shall be done immediately after the formation has been
accepted.
7.
Excavate with suitable machinery or by hand as may be necessary to depths and dimensions
indicated or required.
8.
Cut and trim sides of trenches evenly and as near vertical as possible, shore as required to prevent
cave-ins.
9.
Keep bottoms of trenches clean and clear of loose material. Slope or grade as required. Hand trim
at least last 150mm of trench excavations to ensure minimum disturbance to loadbearing value of
trench bottoms.
10. Excavations shall be carried out by hand adjacent to utilities that are known, proven or suspected
to exist.
11. Unless otherwise permitted by the Contract Administrator excavations next to structures shall be
carried out by hand.
12. The length of trench excavation left open at any one time shall not exceed that agreed to the
13. Additional excavation shall be carried out and the resulting voids shall be dealt with as follows:
E.
a)
General fill material, fine fill material or special fill material shall be deposited and compacted
below areas of foundations and below formations other than in rock.
b)
Granular fill material shall be deposited below standing water.
Shoring and Bracing

1.
Erect and maintain necessary shoring and bracing for excavations in a manner that shall properly
retain banks of excavations and prevent cave-in. Shoring shall be erected in a manner that shall
allow all other work to be carried out while shoring is still in place.
2.
Shoring installation shall be entirely clear of footings, foundations, walls or other such work ensuring
that it may be removed entirely or in sections when it is no longer required or when directed without
causing any damage or injury to structural work that has been completed.

01 June 2016
312300 / 9
AECOM Middle East

EXCAVATION AND FILL

Enabling Works
F.
Backfilling
1.
Proceed promptly with backfilling as building progresses and work to be backfilled has been
inspected and review and comment to backfill obtained from the Contract Administrator. Place
backfill in 200mm thick maximum layers. Compact each layer before placing next. Maintain optimum
moisture content to achieve required densities.
2.
Backfill evenly on both sides of foundation walls to avoid unequal fill pressures on walls.
3.
Fill over-excavations under bearing surfaces and footings, or within pyramid enclosed by 7 in 10
slope from bearing surface with concrete of same strength as specified for footings. Fill overexcavation under all other areas with sand/ gravel mixture in accordance with the Specification and
compact as directed.
4.
Withdraw shoring material during backfill.
5.
Compaction equipment shall be of size and type to permit required compaction without causing
lateral forces resulting in displacement of foundation walls. Exercise caution in this regard to avoid
movement of foundations.
6.
Backfill and fill shall not be placed over debris wood or organic matter.
7.
Take care to avoid damage to waterproofing or displacement of waterlines, drains, conduit and other
underground installations.
8.
Prior to placing fill for concrete floor slabs on earth, consolidate subgrade to obtain same compaction
specified for fill material.
9.
Coordinate with work of other Sections for the lines and levels of uncompacted subgrade required
by those Sections.
10. Compact with mechanical tampers, any areas adjoining vulnerable building components including
but not limited to piling elements which cannot be thoroughly compacted by drawn equipment.
11. Unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Conditions, areas of fill shall be formed of general fill
material.
12. Fill material shall be obtained from excavation within the Site. If there is insufficient fill material of
the required types within the Site, provide imported fill material from sources outside the Site.
13. Except as stated surfaces on which fill material is to be deposited shall be prepared after Site
clearance in accordance with the following requirements:
a)
Topsoil, grass and other organic matter shall be removed.
14. Soft spots, boulders and other materials, which in the opinion of the Contract Administrator are
unsuitable or unstable, shall be removed.
15. Watercourses shall be diverted as stated in the Contract Conditions.
16. Benches shall be cut and sub-soil drainage systems installed as stated in the Contract Conditions.
17. Voids shall be dealt with as stated in the Contract Conditions or instructed by the Contract
Administrator.
18. Surfaces other than rock shall be scarified to a depth of 200mm and compacted to the same standard
as the fill material, which is to be deposited.
19. The permission of the Contract Administrator shall be obtained before deposition of fill material
starts in any area of fill.
20. Haulage of fill material to an area of fill shall proceed only when the compaction plant operating at
the area to be filled is sufficient to achieve the specified requirements for relative compaction of the
fill material.

01 June 2016
312300 / 10
AECOM Middle East

EXCAVATION AND FILL

Enabling Works
a)
Fill material obtained from excavations within the Site shall be deposited in its final location as
soon as practicable after it has been excavated.
b)
Fill material shall be deposited in layers of a thickness appropriate to the compaction method
to be used.
c)
Unless otherwise permitted by the Contract Administrator, layers to fill material shall be
horizontal, except for any gradient required for drainage, and the thickness of each layer shall
be uniform over the area to be filled.
d)
Except in excavations for structures, pits and trenches, if the difference in level between
adjacent areas to be filled exceeds 1m the edge of the higher area shall be benched before
fill material is placed against it.
e)
The construction of the work shall be controlled in such a manner that any compaction of the
fill material resulting from the passage of constructional plant or haulage vehicles is uniform.
21. In areas of fill formed of fill material other than rock fill material, earthworks final surfaces sloping
at a gradient exceeding 1 vertical 3 horizontal shall be formed by overfilling and cutting back after
compaction. Overfilling shall extend beyond the earthworks final surface by a horizontal distance
of 0.5m or 3 times the thickness of the compacted layer, whichever is greater.
22. Except as stated, fill material deposited within 0.5m of a structure or utility shall be fine fill material
unless otherwise stated in the Contract Conditions. In addition, the material may contain up to 5%
by weight of fresh, slightly decomposed or conditions moderately decomposed rock fragments of
up to 200mm provided that these do not cause any damage to structures, nor do they interfere with
the compaction requirements.
23. Fill material shall not be deposited adjacent to or above structures or utilities until the construction
of the structure or utility is sufficiently advanced to accept the imposed forces without disturbance
or damage.
24. Fill material shall be deposited evenly on all sides of structures and utilities and in such a manner
that the structure or utility is not disturbed or damaged.
25. Sheet piling, wood or other temporary supports to excavations for structures, pits and trenches shall
not be left in place, the sheet piling, wood or supports shall be removed as deposition of fill material
proceeds. The supports shall be removed in such a manner that the stability of the adjacent ground
is maintained and the compacted fill material is not disturbed.
G.
Compaction
1.
Fill material in areas of fill shall be compacted in layers to a stable condition as soon as practicable
after deposition and in a manner appropriate to the location and to the material to be compacted.
2.
The permission of the Contract Administrator shall be obtained before the next layer is deposited
on each layer of compacted fill material.
3.
Except as stated fill material shall be compacted to obtain a relative compaction of at least 95%
throughout unless otherwise stated in the Contract Conditions.
4.
Fill material other than rock fill material shall be at optimum moisture content during compaction.
The tolerance on the optimum moisture content percentage shall be + 3%, provided that the fill
material is still capable of being compacted in accordance with the specified requirements to form
stable areas of fill. All necessary measures shall be taken to achieve and maintain the specified
moisture content.
5.
Fill material shall be compacted in such a manner that structures or utilities shall not be disturbed
or damaged.
6.
Maintain optimum moisture content during backfill and fill compaction to achieve required density.
Deposit in layers of such thickness that equipment being used for compacting can produce specified
density.
7.
Puddling or flooding with water for consolidating granular fill shall not be permitted. Addition of water
is limited only to extent required to provide optimum moisture level of fill material.

01 June 2016
312300 / 11
AECOM Middle East

EXCAVATION AND FILL

Enabling Works
8.
During and immediately after leveling, thoroughly compact each layer of fill by use of compaction
equipment of size and type to permit required compaction without causing lateral forces resulting
in displacement of foundation walls. Exercise caution in this regard to avoid movement of
foundations.
9.
After a period adequate to reveal settlement has passed, place additional fill and compact in all
depressions. Make good any subsequent settlement.
10. The profile of the excavation for all exterior work, such as roads and footways, and for all structural
work, shall be treated as though it were the uncompacted profile of a layer of fill material, and the
same testing procedure, analysis, assessment of optimum moisture content, and evaluation of
compaction shall be carried out in order to provide proper compaction as specified for suitable
material.
11. Any irregularities in the excavation profile may be made up to an approximately level grade only
after this initial compaction of the existing subgrade.
12. Ensure the finished subgrade is available for inspection by the Contract Administrator, together with
supporting test results prior to the placement of any material upon it.
13. If the existing subgrade material fails to achieve the compaction requirements then the subgrade
material shall be removed to a suitable depth as determined by the Contract Administrator and
replaced with suitable material placed in accordance with the Specification or otherwise as directed
H.
Water on Prepared Surfaces

1.
Promptly remove water rising from seeping or resulting from rainfall wherever such water is on
surface of subgrade soil and compacted fill.
2.
Where proper drainage and pumping is not carried out as specified herein and any prepared
subgrade soil under structural work, and any compacted fill under concrete slabs is softened or
disturbed by water due to improper drainage and pumping, the Contractor under this Section shall,
remove unsatisfactory soil and fill.
I.
Rough Grading: Rough grade to profiles indicated on required levels to allow installation of follow-up
materials to produce final grades at levels indicated. Rough grade surface shall be suitable to accept
follow-up sections work.
J.
Dewatering
1.
K.
Refer to Section 312319 Dewatering.
Levels and Surfaces

1.
Vehicles employed in the cartage of this material shall neither be loaded beyond the rated limits nor
in such a manner as to cause spillage. Any spillage or tire tracking occurring upon public property
or upon the property of others, shall not be allowed to remain to become a hazard and a nuisance
but shall be cleaned up immediately.
2.
Break rock, concrete and unit masonry into pieces not exceeding 600mm in any dimension.
3.
Earthworks final surfaces shall be completed to a stable condition as soon as practicable after
excavation or after deposition and compaction of fill material has been completed. The subsequent
permanent work or surface protection shall be carried out as soon as practicable after the earthworks
final surface has been completed.
4.
Earthworks final surfaces shall be completed to smooth alignments without abrupt irregularities
unless otherwise stated in the Contract Conditions.
5.
Formations above structures or utilities shall be completed after construction of the structure or utility.
6.
Formations shall be compacted to obtain a relative compaction of at least 95% to a depth of 200mm
below the formation.

01 June 2016
312300 / 12
AECOM Middle East

EXCAVATION AND FILL

Enabling Works
7.
Unless otherwise permitted by the Contract Administrator, proof rolling shall be carried out on
formations. The formation shall be rolled in the presence of the Contract Administrator by at least
2 passes of a non-vibrating rubber tired roller. The roller shall have a static load per 100mm width
of roll of at least 4 kN and shall travel at a speed not exceeding 2 km/ h. Any defect in the formation,
which in the opinion of the Contract Administrator is excessive, shall be made good as instructed
8.
Unless otherwise permitted by the Contract Administrator, formations, which shall not be immediately
covered by the subsequent permanent work, shall be protected by methods to the acceptance of
9.
Earthworks final surfaces and formations shall be maintained in a stable condition and shall be
protected from damage due to water or other causes and from exposure to conditions which may
adversely affect the surface.
10. Formations shall not be used by constructional plant or vehicles other than those, which in the
opinion of the Contract Administrator shall be essential to construct the subsequent work.
11. Installation Tolerances:
3.4
a)
Earthworks final surfaces and formations shall be within the tolerances as listed within
Installation Tolerances Table C in Appendix 312300 of the specified lines and levels. The
tolerances for formations do not apply for pipes or preformed structures, which require to be
supported over their complete length or area.
b)
During excavation, a positive tolerance refers to insufficient excavation and a negative tolerance
refers to excess excavation. In areas of fill, a positive tolerance refers to excess fill material
and a negative.

A.
Testing Methods
1.
B.
C.
D.
A moisture-density test in accordance with BS 1377: Part 4, Method 3.5 or Method 3.6 shall be
made for each type of soil to be used in the construction of the work to determine the maximum dry
density, the optimum moisture content and the moisture range required of the soil for satisfactory
compaction. The field Density and actual moisture content of the compact embankment shall be
determined by field tests according to BS 1377: Part 9, Method 2.1 or Method 2.2.
Minimum Test Requirements

1.
For the Contractor's general guidance, the following tests shall be required prior to use, and during
the construction of the work.
2.
Backfill to Buried Structures

a)
Soil samples for soil classification according to BS 1377: Part 1; laboratory moisture/ density
relationship tests and California Bearing Ratio shall be taken prior to use, from any proposed
source of material. Each sample shall represent not more than 250m or part of as directed
by the Contract Administrator. Sampling shall be in accordance with ASTM D75.
b)
For every 6 completed layers of fill at least 1 field density test shall be performed for every
structure or as directed by the Contract Administrator.
c)
Carry out any additional compaction tests as ordered by the Contract Administrator.
Granular Subgrade
1.
Samples for soil classification, laboratory moisture density relationship tests and CBR tests shall
be taken prior to use, from any proposed source of material. Each sample shall represent not more
than 100m or as part of as directed by the Contract Administrator.
2.
For every completed layer of subgrade, one field density test shall be performed for each 500m of
area, or as directed by the Contract Administrator.
Unknown Services

01 June 2016
312300 / 13
AECOM Middle East

EXCAVATION AND FILL

Enabling Works
E.
3.5
1.
Forward detailed method statement of proposed repair work. Proceed immediately with repairs
upon receipt of written review and comment.
2.
In the case of damage to an essential service, notify the Contract Administrator immediately and
repair service under the Contract Administrator's direction. Inform the Contract Administrator of
services encountered, which require adjustments, relocation or abandonment and arrange for
disconnection and capping of pipe.
Testing for Pipe Bedding Materials

1.
For testing pipe bedding material a representative sample of approximately 40kg to 50kg shall be
heaped onto a clean surface and quartered to obtain approximately 10kg. The moisture content of
the sample should not differ materially from that of the main body of material at the time of use in
the trench.
2.
A 150mm internal diameter open ended cylinder, 250mm high, shall be placed on a firm flat surface
and loosely filled, without tamping, from the 10kg sample. Any surplus material shall be struck off
level with the top of the cylinder. The area around the filled cylinder shall be cleared of all surplus
material and the cylinder then lifted clear of its contents and placed on a fresh area of flat surface.
3.
Approximately one quarter of the contents shall then be placed in the cylinder and compacted by
tamping vigorously with a 40mm diameter metal rammer weighing 1kg until no further compaction
can be obtained. This operation shall then be repeated from each of the remaining quarters, tamping
the final surface as level as possible.
4.
The distance from the top of the cylinder to the surface of the final layer shall then be measured
and this value, divided by the height of the cylinder, shall be taken as the Compaction Fraction.

A.
Earthwork material, which shall be disposed by the Contractor, shall become the property of the Contractor
when it is removed from the Site and shall be disposed of in tips provided by the Contractor, unless
otherwise stated in the Contract Conditions.
B.
Remove from Site and legally dispose of all rubbish, rocks and surplus materials resulting from Site
stripping, excavation and grading work.
3.6
PROTECTION
A.
Protect the neighborhood from wind-blown sand and dust, sprinkle with water the entire excavated area
and stockpiled excavated materials when required.
B.
Protect adjacent property and existing constructed substructures from damage, which may occur from
any cause in the performance of the work of this Section.
END OF SECTION

01 June 2016
312300 / 14
AECOM Middle East

EXCAVATION AND FILL

Enabling Works
SECTION 312319 -- DEWATERING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
1.2
SUBMITTALS
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.4
PROJECT CONDITIONS
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
DESIGN CRITERIA
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
3.2
PROTECTION
3.3
INSTALLATION

01 June 2016
312319
AECOM Middle East

DEWATERING

Enabling Works
SECTION 312319 -- DEWATERING

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
Section Includes
1.2
1.
Dewatering that shall keep excavations for the basement dry and shall prevent damage to the
building due to hydrostatic pressure.
2.
All necessary water management measures for the creation of a watertight construction pit. The
dewatering system shall be designed, provided, installed, maintained and later removed in
accordance with local requirements and the penetration depth of the foundations. Dewatering shall
generally be de-activated once the progressing construction levies sufficient downward pressure
on the subsoil as confirmed by the Contract Administrator.
3.
Work of this Section shall be considered as specialist work.
4.
Work of this Section shall be considered as temporary work.
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: In accordance with the requirements of the Employer General Requirements.
B.
Pre-Contract Submittals
1.
2.
C.
Submit to the Contract Administrator a Method Statement consisting of the following submissions:
a)
Detailed method of the dewatering system proposed, including monitoring systems and
remedial measures.
b)
Datasheet and brochure of the dewatering and backup pumps.
c)
Diameter and length of the pipelines.
d)
Type and voltage of the backup power supply.
e)
Required safety devices.
f)
Type and scope of redundant systems to be installed.
g)
Methodology with detailed information on installation and de-installation, including pump

sumps.
h)
Hydraulic plan with documentation regarding the sufficiency of the designed system for
dewatering.
i)
Draft of deployment schedule as described in Post Contract Submittals described in Clause

1.2 C hereunder.
Include history of successful dewatering experiences.

1.
Permits: Obtain all necessary permits and approvals from Local Authorities having jurisdiction prior
to the start of dewatering. Provide copies of permits to the Contract Administrator.
2.
Deployment schedule for dewatering with all required details, pump sumps, measuring devices,
control manual and signature of the Contractor.

01 June 2016
312319 / 1
AECOM Middle East

DEWATERING

Enabling Works
3.
1.3
a)
Field test report as proof of compliance of the system with design requirements indicated in
this Section.
b)
Daily reports.
c)
Weekly chemical analyses.
d)
Survey data.
e)
Qualifications of the Site manager.
f)
Data regarding the lowering target and approximate duration of the dewatering process.
g)
Information regarding specific measures to safeguard adjacent plots and structures.
h)
Location and capacity of the receiving water, rerouting via pipelines.
i)
Visualization of the seepage areas with hydrological calculations and evidence.
j)
As-built Drawings, after completion: Provide visualization of the dewatering system in drawings.
Obtain approval of Muscat Municipality for dewatering, including but not limited to, the following:
a)
Soil report specifying thickness of soil layers.
b)
Grading and classification of soil.
c)
Factors governing permeability of soil.
d)
Detailed plans showing the Site coordinates and ground level for each point displaced.
e)
Horizontal and vertical dimensions to excavations.
f)
Type of vertical supports to the sides of the excavations.
g)
Type of method used for drainage.
h)
Calculations for the factors of the permeability of the soil, flow rate of drainage and total volume
of drainage based on soil properties.
i)
The overall period of the drainage process.
j)
Calculations of the amount of expected drop in water levels as a result of dewatering and its
impact on adjacent areas.
k)
Methods used to ensure that no damage occurs to existing facilities, infrastructure and roads
as a result of dewatering.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Standards, General: All Building Codes, Industry Standard specifications and applicable ByLaws referred
B.
All dewatering work shall be performed and monitored by a single specialist dewatering Subcontractor.
Dividing the responsibility for dewatering between several trades shall not be permitted.
1.
C.
The organization shall have experience, facilities, equipment and personnel necessary to complete
work promptly and in a manner that shall provide required results.
Dewatering work shall be in accordance with requirements of BS EN 1997: Part 1 and CIRIA guide
Groundwater Control: Design and Practice C515.

01 June 2016
312319 / 2
AECOM Middle East

DEWATERING

Enabling Works
D.
The following quality assurance measures shall be observed for gravity drain pipelines.
1.
2.
3.
1.4
Prior to the commencement of construction:

a)
Obtaining of water law permits.
b)
Determining the groundwater level.
c)
Defining characteristic soil values.
d)
Execution of a groundwater analysis.
e)
Collecting information on neighboring buildings.
f)
Design (Deployment planning) the dewatering management and dewatering monitoring with
disaster concept guidelines.
g)
Execution of test drillings.
During construction:
a)
Measurements of the pumped water volumes to be carried out every day.
b)
Monitor pumps regarding absence of sand.
c)
Monitor groundwater levels.
d)
Inspection of the pipework for proper seal.
e)
Ensure continuous power supply.
f)
Measure settlement of neighboring buildings.
g)
Provide 2 No. independent power sources.
h)
Install optical and acoustic warning signals.
i)
Install a switching system for power supply to the pumps.
j)
Install an automatic switch-over in case of pump failure.
k)
Carry out inspection for sintering, iron and manganese oxide deposits, and corrosion.
l)
Monitor pump capacity.
m)
Monitor the groundwater level within and outside the pit, with the setting up of an alarm system,
and provision of policy packages from disaster concept guidelines.
After completion of the construction project:

a)
Survey of neighboring buildings for settlement.
b)
Determine the groundwater level.
c)
Inspect all pumps and pipework for proper seal after dismantling the system.
d)
Check for proper sealing of the construction pit walls.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Refer to the Design Drawings prepared by the Contract Administrator as they affect the work of this
Section.

01 June 2016
312319 / 3
AECOM Middle East

DEWATERING

Enabling Works
B.
Refer to the Geotechnical Investigation Report and any subsequent revisions.

1.
Data in this document about subsurface conditions are not intended as representations or warranties
of accuracy or continuity between soil borings. It is expressly understood that the Contract
Administrator shall not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn therefrom by the
Contractor.
C.
Additional test borings and other exploratory operations shall be borne by the Contractor.
D.
The Contractor shall provide a minimum of 2 monitoring points for the Contract Administrator to facilitate
the collection of discharge samples.
E.
Carefully explore prevailing subsoil and groundwater conditions with a realistic interpretation in terms of
engineering and geological features, such that an efficient and successful deployment of dewatering
systems shall be implemented.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
DESIGN CRITERIA
A.
Provide a dewatering system to the acceptance of the Contract Administrator, that shall depress the
water table within the area surrounded by the excavation perimeter retention system below the bottom
of the lowest pit in the basement. The use of a deep well-point system shall be recommended as part of
the dewatering system. Provide additional dewatering systems, including but not limited to trench drains
and sumps, as may be necessary to obtain requirements of this Section, all costs connected with additional
dewatering systems shall be borne by the Contractor.
B.
Ensure the dewatering system is in accordance with Local Authorities' requirements for water discharge,
standby pumps and noise control levels.
C.
The dewatering system shall be sufficiently dimensioned in terms of scope, size and capacity to produce
dry and stable subsoil for construction. Groundwater flowing into the construction pit shall be drained so
that subsequent construction work can proceed on dry, solid subsoil. The impact of dewatering measures
on neighboring plots and structures shall be reduced to a minimum. Design, construct and operate a
dewatering system that does not cause any settling or damage to neighboring buildings, roads, streets,
walkways, building installations, utility networks or other structures. The Contractor shall be liable for any
settling, damage, downtime, defects or accidents due to dewatering.
D.
Any water removed by way of the dewatering processes shall be re-routed safely and in compliance with
legal provisions. The construction Site, adjacent public and private properties, streets and supply lines
shall not be flooded or endangered.
E.
Keep water table low enough to prevent hydrostatic pressure from being applied to the basement structure,
until such time as directed by the Contract Administrator and as a minimum until all concrete work up to
and including the ground floor slab shall be completed.
F.
Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Keep the bottom of the excavations dry and suitable
for other trades.
G.
Prevent softening of foundation bottoms, loss of fines due to heavily localized pumping, undercutting
footings and changes to rock and soil detrimental to stability of subgrades and foundations.
H.
Provide and maintain pumps, well points, sumps, suction and discharge lines and other dewatering
system components necessary. Provide stand-by equipment including pumps and other necessary
components to take over dewatering in the event of primary equipment failure.
I.
Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits to
convey rain water and water removed from excavations to collection or run-off areas. Do not use trench
excavations as temporary drainage ditches.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine conditions under which the work shall be performed for conditions detrimental to proper and
timely completion of work.

01 June 2016
312319 / 4
AECOM Middle East

DEWATERING

Enabling Works
B.
C.
3.2
PROTECTION
A.
3.3
Ensure no damage shall occur to adjacent buildings, structures and property.

INSTALLATION
A.
The dewatering system shall be carried out with the following features:
1.
Reduce lateral loads on the construction pit enclosure, with removal of sandy materials (soil),
prevention of cracks or buoyancy, and removal of pumped water.
2.
Maintain piezometric water level to a minimum of 600mm below the deepest foundation.
3.
Carry out dewatering that shall safeguard:
4.
a)
Against soil erosion.
b)
Stability of artificial slopes.
c)
Against flooding of the pit.
It must be ensured that no soil particles are contained in the drained water after 12 hours of pumping.
B.
Surface water shall be prevented from entering the construction pit by way of dams, ditches or similar.
C.
Where groundwater seeps from the joints, all the work shall be interrupted and the gap shall be grouted
immediately.
D.
More extensive seepage, particularly where soil is evident in the seepage, shall be sealed immediately
to prevent a settling of the pit enclosure. For emergency purposes, at least 1000kg of fast reacting twocomponent PU resin (polyurethane foam) shall be stored at the construction Site, and a further delivery
of 3000kg to the construction Site within 3 hours shall be guaranteed by the supplier. Ensure that an
emergency supply of all required drilling equipment, spare parts, emergency plates, sand bags, etc. shall
be stored on Site. All these measures shall be at no additional cost to the Contract Price.
E.
Dewatering systems shall be installed such that existing utilities and foundation work for the main buildings
are not affected.
F.
Allowance shall be made for prompt modification of the dewatering system in case of significant soil
disturbances that are likely to affect neighboring structures.
G.
The dewatering system shall be de-activated and removed only after the Employer is satisfied that the
dead weight of the various structures in the construction pit exceeds the buoyancy force of the groundwater
with a minimum factor of safety of 1.5.
H.
Groundwater shall be restored to its original level in such a way that:
I.
1.
Natural foundation soil strata shall not be modified or disturbed.
2.
Backfill soil shall not disturbed.
3.
Flotation and movement of buildings, pipelines and waste water lines shall be prevented.
Leakage Detection
1.
Leaks that are not detectable through observations must be located using thermal, hydraulic, seismic
or geophysical methods of instrumentation and detection.

01 June 2016
312319 / 5
AECOM Middle East

DEWATERING

Enabling Works
J.
For dewatering of groundwater involving wells, drilling for pipe network, along with installation of pipe
network and pumps shall be carried out prior to the excavation of the construction pit. Groundwater shall
be lowered thereafter and before the commencing pit excavation. Install the system clear of the
construction pit, but where the size of the pit warrants installation of wells within, additional measures
such as the installation of tightly sealed steel well pots, must be initiated.
K.
Care should be taken whilst installing the wells, and in particular with regard to the stability of the
excavation pit reinforcement.
L.
Lower the groundwater table to at least 500mm below the lowest level of the designed foundation. To
avoid contact the new drawdown cone must be located far enough from the excavation pit wall.
M.
In order to monitor the ground water table the Contractor shall drill boreholes and keep track of the
fluctuations on a daily basis.
N.
The workflow for the operation of gravity dewatering consists mainly of the following individual steps:
1.
Drilling of the wells, where necessary, including the installation of pipework and the removal of
excavated material.
2.
Installation of the well piping, consisting of sump, filter and pipework.
3.
Filling the manhole ring with filter grit.
4.
Pipe routing.
5.
Installation and connection of centrifugal or submersible pumps as deemed necessary.
6.
Installation of feed, stub, and manifold pipes from the pump through settling tanks to the storm water
network or the seepage areas.
7.
Installation, operation, maintenance and monitoring of the system.
8.
Dismantling and removal of all system parts and filling of the well holes after the conclusion of the
actual construction project.
END OF SECTION

01 June 2016
312319 / 6
AECOM Middle East

DEWATERING

Enabling Works
SECTION 312333 -- TRENCHING AND BACKFILL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
1.2
SUBMITTALS
1.3
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
1.4
QUALITY CONTROL
1.5
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
DESIGN CRITERIA
2.2
MATERIALS
PART 3 EXECUTION
11
3.1
PREPARATION
11
3.2
INSTALLATION
13
3.3
23
3.4
CLEANING
23

01 June 2016
312333
AECOM Middle East

TRENCHING AND BACKFILL

Enabling Works
SECTION 312333 -- TRENCHING AND BACKFILL

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
Section Includes
1.
C.
This Section specifies trench excavation, pipe installation and backfilling operations and includes,
but is not limited to the following:
a)
General requirements.
b)
Submittals and samples.
c)
Quality Control.
d)
Granular pipe surround.
e)
Concrete pipe surround.
f)
Suitable backfill material.
g)
Geotextile fabric.
h)
Buried marking tape.
i)
Service protection ducts.
j)
Marker posts.
k)
Trial holes.
l)
Temporary fencing and flagging.
m)
Trench support and stability.
n)
Pipe installation.
o)
Backfilling.
Definitions: The following definitions shall apply to words or phrases used in this Section.
1.
"Trench excavation" means excavation in all materials of whatever nature encountered for trenches
into which pipes, ducts or cables are to be laid, or appurtenances constructed.
2.
"Pipe" means pipe or pipes, bends, fittings, junctions and other specials and fittings and includes
joints, jointing parts and materials.
3.
"Formation level" means the designated bottom of the excavation.
4.
"Pipe surround" shall mean that material directly below, around and above the pipe.
5.
"MDD" shall mean maximum dry density.
6.
"OMC" shall mean optimum moisture content.
7.
"Stanks" shall mean concrete barriers placed in granular pipe surround.

01 June 2016
312333 / 1
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
8.
1.2
"Agglomerated particles" shall mean a number of individual particles gathered into a ball or mass.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product Approval
1.
C.
Submit sufficient information to the Contract Administrator, prior to purchase, in order to verify
compliance with the Specification. Such information shall include the following:
a)
Manufacturer's name.
b)
Supplier's name.
c)
Product name (if applicable).
d)
Product description.
e)
Manufacturer's technical data.
f)
Storage instructions.
g)
Application instructions.
h)
Supplier's name (borrow materials).
i)
Borrow pit location.
j)
Material name (if applicable).
k)
Borrow material description.
l)
MDD and OMC.
m)
Liquid and plastic limits.
n)
Sieve analysis.
o)
Percentage of water soluble salts.
p)
Test results as requested by the Contract Administrator.
Samples
1.
Samples shall be supplied in sufficient quantities for at least the following products or as requested
by the Contract Administrator:
a)
Granular pipe surround.
b)
Borrow pit material (if required).
c)
Excavated material (if requested).
d)
Geotextile.
e)
Buried marking tape.
f)
Marker post.
g)
Pipe wrap.

01 June 2016
312333 / 2
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
2.
D.
F.
1.3
Filler board.
i)
Temporary fencing.
j)
Continuous flagging.
Sampling of soils shall be conducted under the Contract Administrator's supervision.
Method Statement
1.
E.
h)
Provide method statements in compliance with the Specification and for at least the following
activities or as requested by the Contract Administrator:
a)
Dewatering activities (if required).
b)
Temporary fencing (as required).
c)
General trench excavation.
d)
Pipe installation.
e)
Placement of pipe surround.
f)
Placement of backfill and compaction.
g)
Trench excavation and reinstatement in roads.
Shop Drawings: Submit for the following items.

1.
Excavation elements showing typical dewatering, temporary fencing and typical trench cross
sections showing stepped or sloped sides.
2.
For any sheet piling, bracing or shoring.
Special Reports
1.
Stability investigations and reports shall be provided by a qualified geotechnical engineer for any
stepped excavations exceeding a 1 to 1 slope.
2.
Design calculations from a qualified Contract Administrator shall be provided for any bracing, shoring
or sheet piling required for excavations.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
General: Comply with the requirements of Section 017800 Closeout Submittals and submit the following.
1.
Warranties.
2.
Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals: Include component list with the manufacturer's
reference numbers, descriptions of materials and procedures for repairing and cleaning of finishes
and cleaning frequency.
QUALITY CONTROL
A.
and codes.
B.
Product manufacture, testing and installation shall comply with the following references, unless otherwise
specified or unless otherwise accepted by the Contract Administrator.
1.

a)

01 June 2016
BS 812 Testing aggregates.
312333 / 3
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
b)
C.
Prior to dispatch from the factory, notify the Contract Administrator in sufficient time to allow the Contract
Administrator or his representatives to inspect and test products, if so desired.
1.
All notifications shall be made by written "Inspection Requests" in accordance with the Employer
General Requirements.
a)
2.
D.
E.
An advance copy may be faxed to the Contract Administrator's office, but the original must
arrive before the scheduled day of inspection.
Minimum notification times shall be as follows:

a)
24 hours on Site.
b)
48 hours within Muscat City and surrounding area.
c)
72 hours for other areas within the Sultanate of Oman.
d)
2 weeks outside of the Sultanate of Oman.
Inspection Requests shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator during the on-Site installation work
prior to proceeding with at least the following activities. Minimum notification time shall be 24 hours.
1.
Start of excavation in new area.
2.
Casting of blinding concrete or placement of bedding.
3.
Placing of pipe surround or casting of concrete surround.
Testing Laboratory
1.
Testing of all materials shall be carried out by a suitably equipped Site laboratory or in an independent
laboratory as described in Sultanate of Oman.
2.
During the course of the work, tests shall be carried out under the supervision of the Contract
Administrator to:
3.
F.
BS 1377 Methods of test for soils for civil engineering purposes.
a)
Identify fill materials and determine suitability.
b)
Determine compaction characteristics of fill materials.
c)
Determine moisture content and field density.
d)
The allowable soil bearing load shall be verified by dynamic cone penetration test as directed
e)
Determine compaction fraction and grading for granular pipe surround.
f)
Concrete tests as specified in Section 033000 Cast-in-Place Concrete.
Maintain a daily log of all tests carried out for the Contract Administrator's review.
Test Methods
1.
Compaction tests to establish maximum dry density for all soils shall be determined by BS 1377:
Part 4: Method 3.5/ 3.6.
2.
Cast-in-place density of compacted soils shall be determined by BS 1377: Part 9 Method 2.1 or 2.2
(as appropriate).
3.
Cone penetration test: TRL Method or BS 1377.

01 June 2016
312333 / 4
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
4.
G.
Compaction fraction for granular surround shall be determined as described under determination
of compaction fraction within this Section.
Determination of Compaction Fraction

1.
General:
a)
2.
3.
A representative sample of pipe surround material, at least 25kg, shall be obtained under the
Contract Administrator's supervision.
Apparatus Required:
a)
An open ended rigid cylinder, 250 3mm long and 150mm 6mm internal diameter.
b)
Metal rammer with striking face of 40mm diameter 0.5mm and weighing 1000gm to 1100gm.
c)
Straight edge.
d)
Rule.
e)
Balance (minimum 12kg capacity).
Test Method:
a)
Obtain a representative sample more than sufficient to fill the cylinder, about 12kg.
1.
b)
Hold the cylinder firmly down on a flat surface to prevent movement and gently pour the sample
into it, from a height of approximately 50mm above the top of the cylinder, loosely and without
tamping.
c)
Strike off the top surface level with the top of the cylinder and remove all surplus spilled material.
d)
Lift the cylinder up clear of its contents and place on a clean area.
e)
Quarter the material and place one quarter of the material back into the cylinder and tamp
vigorously until no further compaction can be obtained.
f)
Repeat with the second quarter, tamping as before and so on for the third and fourth quarter,
tamping the final surface as level as possible.
g)
Measure down from the top of the cylinder to the surface of the compacted material.
1.
H.
The moisture content of the sample shall not differ significantly from that of the main body
of material at the time of its use in the trench.
Record the value to the nearest 1mm.
h)
Divide the measured distance by the height of the cylinder (measured to the nearest 1mm).
i)
Report the value as the compaction fraction to the nearest 0.01.
Testing
1.
Density tests shall be made prior to removal of dewatering systems.
2.
Adjust construction operations to permit time for tests and to excavate and fill such holes as may
be required for sampling and testing.
3.
A subsequent layer cannot be placed until the density of the proceeding layer has been tested and
approved.
4.
At least one field density test shall be conducted in each layer for every 100 LM of pipe trench
backfilled, unless otherwise agreed by the Contract Administrator.

01 June 2016
312333 / 5
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
5.
At lease one field density test shall be conducted for each layer, adjacent each structure, unless
otherwise agreed by the Contract Administrator.
6.
At least one compaction test shall be conducted for every 30 field density tests conducted or as
directed by the Contract Administrator due to changes in the soil.
a)
7.
1.5
The frequency of other specified tests shall be as directed by the Contract Administrator.
Testing Frequency for pipe surround material shall be as directed by the Contract Administrator.

A.
Delivery, storage and handling shall be according to the manufacturer's recommendations along with
the following provisions.
1.
Transportation, handling and storage shall at all times be performed in a manner to avoid product
damage.
2.
Only nylon slings shall be allowed for lifting products. Steel chains, clamps or cables shall not be
allowed for lifting purposes, unless accepted by the Contract Administrator.
a)
3.
Do not store products directly on ground, unless accepted by the Contract Administrator.
a)
B.
Steel chains or cables may be allowed for securing products during transport or storage
provided protective padding or wood blocking is utilized.
Ensure suitable wood blocking is utilized to provide sufficient support.
4.
Where product manufacturer recommends storage under controlled temperatures, the Contractor
must provide an enclosed, insulated, cool store maintained at the proper temperature, recommended
by the manufacturer, 24 hours a day.
5.
If stored outside, cover products to prevent UV degradation as recommended by the manufacturer.
6.
Visually inspect all products upon delivery and report any damage to the Contract Administrator.
a)
Any products damaged during delivery, storage or installation shall be marked by the Contractor
and set aside.
b)
Proposals for repair of any damaged products shall be submitted in writing to the Contract
Administrator for acceptance.
c)
No repairs to damaged products shall be attempted without the Contract Administrator's

acceptance.
d)
Any damaged products deemed unsuitable for repair by the Contract Administrator shall be
removed from Site and replaced at the Contractor's expense.
Soils shall be stockpiled as follows:

1.
At least 1.0m away from edge of trench.
2.
Granular pipe surround shall be stockpiled in sufficient quantities and in a manner to avoid
segregation and contamination.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
DESIGN CRITERIA
A.
General Requirements: Comply with the following requirements, unless otherwise accepted by the
1.
No trees or shrubs shall be disturbed without written consent of the Contract Administrator.

01 June 2016
312333 / 6
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
2.
Blasting shall not be permitted.
3.
All work shall be performed in dry conditions maintained in accordance with Section 312319
Dewatering.
4.
Continuous temporary fencing suitable to protect the general public (particularly children) shall be
provided to enclose all trenches and excavations located in or near urban areas.
5.
All excavations shall be stepped back at a safe and stable slope no steeper than 1 vertical to 1
horizontal.
6.
Trench boxes, cassions, sheet piling or other means of soil support shall not be used, unless allowed
7.
Trial holes shall be carried out as necessary to confirm existing soil conditions and determine exact
location of utilities or other obstructions.
8.
Line and level of pipes shall be as shown on the Design Drawings, unless otherwise instructed by
9.
a)
Do not make any deviation from the specified lines or levels without the written acceptance of
b)
Unless instructed by the Contract Administrator, any deviation in line and/ or levels, along with
any additional excavation, dewatering, backfilling, thrust blocks, valves, air and vacuum
assemblies, blow off assemblies, extra pipe lengths, manholes or other appurtenances which
may be required, shall be at the cost of the Contractor.
Before commencing the trench excavations, the route of the trench shall be pegged out accurately
and the existing ground level surveyed and recorded as agreed with the Contract Administrator.
10. If obstructions are encountered during excavation, make the necessary changes on the Shop
Drawings and issue the amended Shop Drawings to the Contract Administrator.
11. When the work is carried out adjacent to or across the line of existing services, assume responsibility
for maintaining all services and utilities.
12. All excavated materials shall be used in the backfill, unless the material is found to be unsuitable.
13. A minimum clear carriageway width of 3m shall be maintained to the satisfaction of the Contract
Administrator for vehicular traffic, unless otherwise accepted by the Contract Administrator.
14. Bottom of the trenches shall be properly trimmed off and compacted to provide a firm and uniform
bearing at formation level.
15. GRP pipe and uPVC pipe shall be placed in granular surround, unless otherwise indicated.
16. Trench excavation shall not be permitted until the pipes and fittings to be laid in the trench are
available on Site. The length of excavation in advance of pipe laying may be limited by the Contract
Administrator.
17. If the Contract Administrator considers that the Contractor is not complying with the foregoing
requirements, the Contract Administrator may not permit further trench excavation until he is satisfied
with the pipe excavation, dewatering, laying, pipe testing and backfilling of the excavations.
2.2
MATERIALS
A.
Pipe Surround Material

1.
Granular surround shall be free draining, hard, clean, chemically stable, crushed aggregate free of
agglomerated particles meeting the following requirements, unless accepted otherwise by the
a)

01 June 2016
10mm nominal size for all pipes diameters:
312333 / 7
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
b)
B.
Maximum particle size: 16mm.
2.
Maximum percentage passing 5mm sieve: 10%.
Maximum compaction fraction shall be 0.14.
2.
Concrete surround shall comply with Section 033000 Cast-in-Place Concrete.
3.
Sand surround shall be clean imported dune sand.
Backfill Material
1.
C.
1.
Suitable material placed above the pipe surround for general trench backfill (not within paved
roadways or paved parking areas) shall conform to the following requirements, unless otherwise
a)
b)
Liquid Limit: 40 Maximum.
c)
Plasticity index: 10 Maximum.
2.
If the excavated material is deemed to be unsuitable or insufficient for general backfilling, borrow
material (non-load bearing) conforming to Section 312300 Excavation and Fill shall be utilized.
3.
Backfill material below roadways or parking areas shall be approved sub-base or road base material.
Geotextile for Non-Perforated Pipe

1.
Geotextiles for granular surround of non-perforated pipe shall comply with the following
requirements, unless otherwise accepted by the Contract Administrator.
a)
Tensile Strength (Strip Test): Minimum 6kN/ m in accordance with EN ISO 10319 or ASTM
D5035.
b)
Puncture Resistance: Minimum 1000N in accordance with EN ISO 12236.
c)
Pore Size: Maximum 120Microns in accordance with EN ISO 12956.
d)
Water Permeability (10cm Water Column): 50 to 125 L/ m/ Sec in accordance with BS EN

ISO 11058.
e)
Weight: Minimum 130g/ m in accordance with EN 965.
2.
The fabric shall be woven or non-woven consisting of long chain synthetic polymeric filaments or
yarns formed in to a stable network such that the filaments or yarns retain their relative position to
each other when subjected to the proposed use within the limits of physical characteristics required
as specified herein.
3.
The geotextile shall be inert to commonly encountered chemicals in the soil and water and shall
contain an ultraviolet light inhibitor.
4.
Provide to the Contract Administrator a certificate stating the name of manufacturer, product name,
style number, chemical composition of filaments or yarns and other pertinent information to fully
describe the geotextile.
5.
Geotextile shall be subject to sampling and testing to verify conformance to the Specification.
a)
The frequency of the testing shall be as directed by the Contract Administrator.
b)
All samples shall be collected and tested in the presence of Contract Administrator in a
laboratory accepted by the Contract Administrator.

01 June 2016
312333 / 8
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
6.
Each geotextile roll shall be wrapped with a material that will protect the geotextile from damage
due to shipment, water, sunlight and contaminants.
a)
7.
D.
a)
Color: Yellow, or as directed by the Contract Administrator.
b)
Nominal width: 150mm.
c)
Nominal thickness: 100microns.
d)
Minimum longitudinal tensile strength: 100kg/ cm.
e)
Minimum longitudinal elongation, at break: 300%.
f)
Permanent black lettering 30mm height spaced at 2.0m o.c.
g)
Labeled "Sewage", "Storm Water" or "Irrigation" as accepted by the Contract Administrator in

both English and Arabic.
Protection ducts shall be unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (uPVC) pipe, minimum 150mm diameter.
a)
All pipes and fittings shall be new and unused.
b)
Pipe shall be free from visible cracks, holes, foreign materials, blisters, deleterious materials,
wrinkles and dents.
c)
Plastic pipe may be delivered to the Site in unbroken bundles or rolls, packaged in such a
manner as to provide adequate protection to pipe and pipe ends, either threaded or plain, from
damage or exposure to sunlight.
d)
All plastic pipe fittings to be installed shall be molded fittings manufactured of the same material
as the pipe and shall be push fit type with neoprene rubber gasket.
e)
No Site-made bends shall be permitted.
Filler Board
1.
G.
Polyethylene or polythene plastic tape with metallic trace wire or metallic strip for electronic detection
meeting the following criteria:
Service Protection Ducts

1.
F.
Geotextiles shall be transported and stored in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations.
Buried Marking Tape

1.
E.
The wrapping shall be maintained during shipment and storage.
Filler board utilized to form discontinuities in concrete pipe surround shall be one of the following:
a)
Bituminous fiber board.
b)
Styrofoam.
2.
Thickness shall be as shown on the Design Drawings.
3.
Multiple layers may be used.
Marker Posts
1.
Pipeline marker posts shall be fabricated from aluminum alloy components and shall conform to
the following requirements:

01 June 2016
312333 / 9
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
a)
Size and length shall be as shown on the Design Drawings.
b)
Tubing shall be Grade AA 6063 Aluminium Alloy.
c)
All cast parts shall be Aluminum Casting Alloy LM6.
d)
Minimum wall thickness for tubing shall be 5mm.
e)
A welded bar shall be provided for casting into concrete foundation.
f)
All welding shall be Tungsten Inert Gas (TIG).
g)
Entire assembly shall be chemically treated and polyester power coated 120microns nominal
thickness, and hot cured.
1.
h)
i)
H.
1.
Sewerage pumping main.
2.
Storm water pumping main.
Lettering shall be made from "High-Intensity" reflective sheeting.

1.
Minimum height of lettering: 70mm.
2.
Color shall be white.
Pipe wrap placed around pipe joints shall be suitable self-adhesive waterproof membrane or other
self-adhesive tape as accepted by the Contract Administrator.
Filter Material
1.
J.
Pipe line diameter (mm) shall be labeled in English and Arabic along with the following
appropriate service designation:
Pipe Wrap
1.
I.
Color shall be as directed by the Contract Administrator.
Filter material for french drains shall be 20mm single size natural screened aggregate.
a)
Maximum percentage passing 10mm sieve: 5%.
b)
c)
Aggregate crushing value: 25% max.
d)
Abrasion Value: 25% max.
Geotextile for French Drains

1.
Geotextile for perforated pipes shall conform to the following requirements, unless otherwise
accepted by the Contract Administrator. However it may be necessary to alter the following
requirements depending on the soil analysis.
a)
Geotextile shall be supplied from an ISO 9001 certified manufacturer and be of the woven
monofilament type.
b)
Filament weave shall be designed to maintain dimensional stability between filaments.
c)
Geotextile shall be resistant to ultraviolet degradation and to biological and chemical

environments normally found in soils.
d)
Geotextile shall conform to the following properties unless otherwise accepted by the Contract
Administrator.

01 June 2016
312333 / 10
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
1.
Physical:
a)
Mass per Unit Area: 200g/ m to 250g/ m in accordance with EN ISO 9864.
b)
Minimum Thickness: 1.0mm in accordance with EN ISO 9863-1.
2.
Mechanical, Minimum Tensile Strength: 40kN/ m.
3.
Hydraulic:
4.
a)
Minimum Permeability (Normal to Plane): 30mm/ sec in accordance with EN ISO

11058.
b)
Minimum Opening Size: 200m in accordance with EN ISO 12956.
UV Resistance, % Strength Retained: 80% in accordance with EN 12224.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Trial Holes
1.
B.
C.
Trial holes shall be excavated well ahead of the trench excavation operation to depths sufficient to
determine the soil conditions and confirm the locations of underground utilities or other obstructions.
a)
Excavations shall be carried out by hand where required or instructed by the Contract
Administrator, to locate and avoid damage to utilities encountered during the excavation work.
b)
Arrange for the refilling and reinstatement of trial holes to be carried out immediately after the
required information is obtained.
c)
Reinstatement of trial holes shall be accepted by the Contract Administrator.
d)
Excavation and reinstatement of trial holes shall be carried out at Contractor's cost.
Backfill Adjacent to Structures

1.
Backfill around structures shall be conducted according to Section 312300 Excavation and Fill and
2.
Backfill adjacent to structures shall be placed in a manner to avoid damage to the structures,
protective coatings or waterproof membranes.
3.
No backfill material shall be placed around structures until the exterior protective coating or
membrane has been inspected and accepted by the Contract Administrator.
Control of Water
1.
All activities shall be carried out in dry conditions.
2.
All dewatering shall meet the requirements found in Section 312319 Dewatering.
3.
The excavations must be wide enough to avoid undermining the dewatering system.
a)
D.
If excavation faces become unstable, the dewatering system (well points) shall be shifted as
necessary to allow further excavation to reduce slope.
Temporary Fencing and Flagging

1.
Continuous temporary fencing suitable to protect the general public (particularly children) shall be
provided to enclose all trenches and excavations in or near urban areas.

01 June 2016
312333 / 11
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
2.
a)
Temporary fencing shall be provided at no extra cost to the Employer.
b)
Temporary fencing shall not be removed without the Contract Administrator's permission, which
will not be given until the trench excavation has been completely refilled.
Continuous flagging or barricades shall be provided along both sides of trenches in rural or
undeveloped areas to protect vehicular traffic.
a)
3.
E.
F.
H.
Provide for the safety of animals which may be introduced to the construction area and ensure that
all open excavations, access routes and steep or loose slopes arising from the construction
operations are adequately fenced and protected.
Fence and Wall Intersections

1.
Where trench excavation crosses barriers such as fences and walls obtain written acceptance of
the Contract Administrator before breaching the barrier.
2.
Provide temporary fencing for any parts of such barriers as have had to be removed.
3.
After trench excavation has been reinstated, carry out such work as the Contract Administrator may
order for permanent restoration of such barriers.
Crossing Watercourses
1.
G.
Continuous trench spoil at least 1.0m high may be accepted in lieu of flagging, with the Contract
Administrator's acceptance.
Provide all the additional measures necessary for the proper construction of the pipeline where it
crosses under or over streams, culverts, pipes and other watercourses including maintaining the
full flow of water.
Existing Services and Facilities

1.
Assume responsibility for ascertaining from inspection of the Site and coordination with respective
utility Statutory Authorities and other public companies within Muscat Municipality, the position of
all mains, pipes and cables whether underground or overhead, within or near the Site or existing
structures.
2.
Where excavation is carried out close to or across existing pipes, cables or other services assume
responsibility for maintaining all services and facilities.
a)
Provide all necessary support or slings to maintain existing services.
b)
If any utilities are disturbed or damaged, immediately notify the relevant Statutory Authority or
public company.
c)
Do not undertake repairs without the authorization of the concerned Statutory Authority or
public company.
d)
All costs for such work shall be at the Contractor's expense.
e)
If repairs are carried out by the concerned utility Statutory Authority or public company, the
Contractor shall reimburse all costs related to such work.
3.
Where specified on the Design Drawings or by the relevant utility Statutory Authority in their
Standards, split ducts shall be provided as specified herein.
4.
Where, in the opinion of the Contract Administrator, construction of the pipeline cannot reasonably
be carried out unless the pipe, cable or other service is permanently severed, permanently diverted
or permanently supported by concrete, he shall instruct the Contractor to undertake such work.
5.
Any relocation of existing services shall be done in accordance with the requirements of the
responsible Statutory Authorities.
Trench Excavation

01 June 2016
312333 / 12
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
1.
3.2
Refer to Section 312300 Excavation and Fill.
INSTALLATION
A.
Trench Stability and Support

1.
2.
All excavations shall be stepped back at a safe and stable slope no steeper than 1 vertical to 1
horizontal, unless otherwise agreed with the Contract Administrator.
a)
Maximum step height shall be 1.5m.
b)
Minimum bench width shall be 1.0m.
c)
Stability investigations and reports shall be provided by a qualified geotechnical for any stepped
excavations exceeding a 1 to 1 slope.
d)
Additional excavation may be directed by the Contract Administrator at the Contractor's

expense to reduce slopes on any unstable excavations.
Trench boxes, cassions, sheet piling or other means of soil support may only be used, in areas of
limited access and only with the Contract Administrator's consent.
a)
b)
c)
Before utilizing any soil support systems, furnish a method statement and Shop Drawings
showing all details of the soil support system proposed for use, together with all relevant
calculations prepared by a qualified structural engineer.
1.
No excavation Work shall commence until the Contract Administrator's consent has been
obtained.
2.
Such consent shall in no way relieve the Contractor from any of his contractual obligations
and responsibilities to provide a safe, dry and stable excavation.
All components of any soil support systems shall be removed, unless otherwise agreed with
1.
Removal shall be conducted in a manner to prevent damage to pipe or structures.
2.
Any voids left behind shall be carefully filled and compacted.
3.
Take every precaution to prevent slips and falls of earth and other materials in excavations.
If in the opinion of the Contract Administrator, the trench support provided is not satisfactory,
the Contractor shall provide trench support as directed by the Contract Administrator.
1.
B.
The absence of either the Contract Administrator's direction or action by the Contractor
in accordance with the direction of the Contract Administrator shall not relieve the
Contractor of his obligations under the Contract.
d)
Provide underpinning, shoring or other protective measures required for buildings, structures
and apparatus or adjoining excavations as accepted by the Contract Administrator.
e)
If for any reason, any portion of the excavation shall give way, the Contractor shall at his own
expense take all necessary remedial measures, including the excavation and removal of all
soil thereby disturbed.
Material Disposal from Excavations

1.
Subject to any other specific requirements of the Contract, arrange for the temporary storage of
any excavated material which is required for use in refilling trench or structure excavations, including
any necessary double handling.
2.
The height and slope of any temporary tips alongside the trench excavation must be stabilized at
all times.

01 June 2016
312333 / 13
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
C.
3.
Where the nature of the material permits, the Contractor's temporary storage facilities shall allow
for separate storage for various grade materials.
4.
Any excavated material that is not required or is found to be unsuitable for re-use, shall be removed
from Site and disposed in a legal manner by the Contractor.
Trench Formation
1.
Bottom of the trenches shall be properly trimmed off and compacted to provide a firm and uniform
bearing at formation level.
a)
b)
Minimum compaction shall be 90% MDD.

1.
Compaction shall be verified by field density tests conducted to BS 1377: Part 9.
2.
At least one filed density test shall be conducted for every 100 LM of trench formation.
Minimum bearing value shall be 150kN/ m.

1.
Bearing value shall be verified by Dynamic Cone Penetrometer Test.
2.
Dynamic Cone Penetrometer tests shall be conducted as directed by the Contract

Administrator.
2.
If loose or unsuitable soil is encountered at formation level, such material shall be removed as
directed by the Contract Administrator and replaced with Class 20 concrete or approved granular
material.
3.
When excavating to designated formation levels or to specified limits, do not excavate the last
150mm until immediately before commencing construction work.
a)
If the Contractor excavates the last 150mm before he is ready or able to commence the Work,
he may be required to remove and replace additional material as directed by the Contract
Administrator.
1.
4.
Should the trench bottom while acceptable to the Contract Administrator at the time of his inspection,
subsequently become puddled, soft or loose due to exposure or flooding during the progress of the
work, the Contractor shall remove such damaged softened or loosened material and replace it with
acceptable material as directed by the Contract Administrator.
a)
D.
Any such further excavation and replacement of additional foundation material ordered by the
Contract Administrator shall be at the cost of the Contractor.
5.
Any stones or flints greater than 50mm in size shall be picked out of the trench bottom. Any holes
so formed shall be filled in with suitable material and trimmed to the correct level.
6.
All shattered and loose materials shall be removed from the bottom of the trench excavations so
that the pipe surround rests on a solid and clean foundation.
Excess Excavation
1.
E.
Any such further excavation and replacement of additional foundation material ordered
by the Contract Administrator shall be at the cost of the Contractor.
Care shall be taken to prevent excess excavation beyond designated levels or limits.
a)
Any excess excavation from the bottom or sides of the trench shall be filled with the designated
pipe surround material, unless otherwise accepted by the Contract Administrator.
b)
Either utilize or remove from the Site all material resulting from excess excavation.
c)
Any additional cost due to over-excavation shall be at the Contractor's expense.
Trench Width

01 June 2016
312333 / 14
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
1.
2.
The minimum trench width for single line pipes shall be as indicated on the Design Drawings, unless
otherwise instructed by the Contract Administrator.
a)
Minimum spacing between 2 or more pipes in the same trench, laid in parallel with similar
invert level, shall be 500mm.
b)
Minimum trench width for conduits and cables shall be made in accordance with the
requirements of the relevant utility authority.
If soft or unsuitable material is encountered in the trench banks, the trench width shall be increased
as directed by the Contract Administrator.
a)
3.
F.
The designated pipe surround material shall be utilized to fill the additional void full width across
the trench.
If the Contractor allows the trench banks to collapse due to his own negligence, the collapsed
material shall be removed and replaced with the designated pipe surround material at the
Contractor's cost.
Trenching Requirements
1.
Trench excavation and backfill shall be carried out expeditiously.

a)
Refilling and surface reinstatement of trench excavations shall be commenced and completed
as soon as reasonably practicable after the pipes have been laid and jointed.
b)
Pipe laying shall follow closely upon the progress of trench excavation.
c)
Do not permit unreasonably excessive lengths of trench excavation to remain open while
awaiting testing of the pipeline.
1.
2.
Take precautions to prevent flotation of pipes in locations where open trench excavations may
become flooded. This may include the partial refilling of the trench, leaving pipe joints exposed for
tests of the joints, or any other methods accepted by the Contract Administrator.
a)
If flotation has occurred, remove and replace the pipes after drying the trench, unless otherwise
agreed with the Contract Administrator.
1.
3.
G.
Trench excavation may not proceed more than 200m ahead of the pipe laying operations,
unless accepted otherwise by the Contract Administrator.
All additional work shall be carried out at the Contractor's cost.
If the Contract Administrator considers that the Contractor is not complying with any of the foregoing
requirements he may prohibit further trench excavation until he is satisfied with the progress of
laying and testing of pipes and refilling of trench excavation.
Pipe Surround Placing

1.
Pipe surround shall be placed as follows, unless otherwise accepted by the Contract Administrator.
2.
Granular Pipe Surround

a)

01 June 2016
Approved geotextile shall be placed completely around all granular pipe surround.
1.
The trench formation shall be smooth and free from debris.
2.
The geotextile shall be placed loosely with no wrinkles or folds.
3.
Void spaces shall not be left between the geotextile and ground surface.
4.
Successive sheets of geotextile shall be overlapped a minimum of 300mm with the

upstream sheet over lapping the downstream sheet.
312333 / 15
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
3.
5.
The geotextile shall be folded over the pipe surround material in a manner to produce a
minimum overlap of 300mm.
6.
If the geotextile is damaged during installation or aggregate placement, a geotextile patch

shall be placed over the damaged area extending beyond the damaged area a minimum
distance of 300mm.
7.
Placement of bedding material shall proceed immediately following the placement of

geotextile.
b)
Granular pipe surround shall be placed across the full width of the excavated trench.
c)
The thickness of granular pipe surround below the pipe shall be as shown on the Design
Drawings.
d)
Granular pipe surround material shall be compacted in layers not exceeding 200mm with one
pass of plate vibrator or other approved equivalent mechanical method.
1.
Hand tamping shall only be permitted where insufficient space is available to allow the
use of mechanical equipment.
2.
Granular pipe surround shall be brought up equally on both sides of the pipe and carefully
compacted in layers not exceeding 200mm thickness.
3.
Ensure pipe surround is in contact with the under side of the pipe barrel.
4.
The thickness of bedding material above the crown of pipe shall be as shown on the
Design Drawings.
e)
Particular care shall be given to avoid damage to pipe or geotextile.
f)
Where practicable the placing and compaction of backfill material shall be carried out in
sequence with the removal of trench supports, unless the Contractor is instructed to leave
them in place as directed by the Contract Administrator.
Concrete Pipe Surround

a)
Where indicated on the Design Drawings or ordered by the Contract Administrator, pipe shall
be encased with Grade 20 concrete in accordance with the details shown on the Design
Drawings.
b)
Approved polythene sheeting, 100microns thick shall be placed below blinding and around
concrete pipe surround, unless otherwise agreed by the Contract Administrator.
c)
For RC pipes 50mm layer of blinding concrete shall be placed in the bottom of the trench.
d)
Concrete shall not be placed until the joints at each end of the pipe have been completed.
e)
All joints shall be wrapped with a suitable self-adhesive membrane at least 300mm wide, to
prevent grout entry into the joint.
f)
The pipes shall be initially supported above the trench bottom on at least two purpose-built
pre-cast concrete blocks.
g)
The blocks shall be laid accurately to line and level and covered with 1.5mm thick waterproof
sheeting beneath the pipe barrel or two hard wood wedges of approved pattern.
h)
Concrete surround shall be placed in a sufficient number of lifts to prevent pipes from floating
or moving.

01 June 2016
1.
The concrete shall first be placed on one side of the pipe in order to be worked under the
pipe along its full length to ensure that no voids develop.
2.
The concrete shall then be brought up equally on both sides of the pipe until the required
level is reached.
312333 / 16
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
3.
i)
If the surround is cast in one operation, measures shall be taken to secure the pipe from floating
or moving. These measures must be accepted by the Contract Administrator prior to the start
of the operation.
j)
The continuity of the concrete pipe surround shall be broken at each joint, unless otherwise
k)
Discontinuities in concrete pipe surround shall be provided over their full cross sectional area
at each pipe joint with approved filler board.
l)
Unless otherwise indicated on the Design Drawings, the thickness of filler board shall be:
1.
m)
H.
All concrete pipe surround must be vibrated to assure proper consolidation, but care must
be taken to avoid floating the pipe.
18mm for pipe diameter less than 450mm.
2.
36mm for pipe diameters 450-1200mm.
3.
50mm for pipe diameters greater than 1200mm.
Cure concrete pipe surround with polythene sheeting at least 24 hours immediately after
placement.
Pipe Installation
1.
General Requirements
a)
Supply all necessary tools for cutting, chamfering, jointing, testing and for any other requirement
for satisfactory installation of the pipe.
b)
Furnish all necessary equipment for properly lowering and placing sections of the pipe in the
trench without damage.
c)
Just before laying, each length of pipe shall be cleaned and inspected for defects, both inside
and outside.
d)
Any damaged pipe or fittings shall be marked and placed aside for repair.
1.
Proposals for any pipe repairs shall be presented for the Contract Administrator's
acceptance prior to action being taken.
2.
Any specified material required for the repair of pipe, sheathing, lining or coating shall be
obtained by the Contractor and shall be used in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
3.
All sheathed pipes shall be checked for continuity of the applied protection by a "Holiday"
detection unit.
4.
Discontinuities and pinholes indicated by the test shall be properly repaired.
5.
All damage shall be repaired before installation.
e)
Remove from the Site any pipe or appurtenance which in the opinion of the Contract
Administrator is so damaged as to be unfit for incorporation in the Work.
f)
Replacement for damaged pipes or fittings shall be at the Contractor's expense.
g)
Each pipe shall be carefully lowered on to its prepared bed by means of appropriate slings
and tackle.
h)
A recess shall be left in the prepared bed to permit lifting slings to be withdrawn.

01 June 2016
312333 / 17
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
i)
If the prepared bed is damaged, the pipe shall be raised and the bed restored before pipe
laying is continued.
j)
In no case shall pipes be jointed before being lowered into position.
k)
No pipe shall be dragged or rolled into place for lowering into the trench.
l)
Pipes shall be laid so that each one is in contact with the bed throughout the length of its barrel.
m)
n)
1.
The bed shall be cut away and removed at each socket or sleeve to give a clearance of
50mm.
2.
After the joint has been made bedding material shall be carefully placed and had
compacted beneath the joint barrel to close any voids left by results.
Pipes shall be laid with identification marks uppermost.

1.
Bedding material shall be prevented from entering the joints.
2.
Pipe shall be laid and jointed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations
except as modified in this Section.
Each Section of pipe shall be fitted together correctly and shall be laid true to line and grade
in accordance with the bench marks established by the Contractor.
1.
The bench mark shall be accepted by the Contract Administrator.
o)
Any pipe which is not in true alignment, both vertically and horizontally, or shows any undue
settlement after laying, shall be taken up and relaid correctly by the Contractor at his own
expense.
p)
For granular pipe surround, all adjustments in line and grade shall be made by scraping away
or filling and tamping under the barrel of the pipe, not by wedging or blocking.
q)
Concrete pipe surround shall not be utilized for pressure pipe, unless accepted by the Contract
Administrator.
r)
Spigot and socket pipes shall be laid upgrade without break from structure to structure and
with the socket end upgrade.
s)
Sub-soil water shall be kept below the joint when jointing.
t)
Pipes shall be laid in straight lines, both in the horizontal and vertical planes, unless deflected
joints are accepted by the Contract Administrator.
u)
For pipe lines laid in trenches, the permissible tolerance shall be as follows, unless otherwise
shown on the Design Drawings or accepted by the Contract Administrator.
1.
Vertical deviation: 3mm.
2.
Horizontal deviation from the centerline at any point: 12mm.
v)
Whenever work ceases on any pipeline, the unfinished end shall be securely closed with a
tight fitting plug or cover, unless otherwise directed by the Contract Administrator.
w)
Excavator buckets shall not be used to push joints home.
x)
Pipe sections shall be so laid and fitted together that the pipeline will have a smooth and uniform
interior.
y)
Pipeline shall be clean and unobstructed at the time of its completion and acceptance.
z)
If any damage should occur to any pipes through failure of the Contractor to comply with these
conditions, the damage shall be made good at the Contractor 's expense.

01 June 2016
312333 / 18
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
aa) All pipelines adjoining structures shall have a flexible joint as detailed on the Design Drawings.
bb) For pipeline jointing systems incorporating flexible jointing rings a gap shall be left between
the ends of the pipe, unless otherwise agreed by the Contract Administrator.
2.
Joints
a)
Requirements of this clause shall be read in conjunction with the particular requirements
specified elsewhere for joints of particular kinds.
b)
Joints shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and as specified herein.
c)
Before making any joints, ensure that the interior of each pipe or fitting is clean and that it
remains clean.
d)
Immediately before starting a joint, clean the end of each pipe to be joined and shall otherwise
specially prepare the ends for jointing as may be necessary for the particular kind of joint.
e)
Use only the proper jointing materials (gaskets, nuts, bolts, washers, lubricants, etc.) as
obtained from the designated supplier for the specified for pipe service and exposure conditions.
f)
Only approved lubricant (or soap) provided by the pipe manufacturer may be utilized on the
gaskets. Axel grease or chassis grease shall never be allowed.
g)
All joints shall be accurately made and shall be capable of passing the designated tests for
individual joints and for the completed pipeline as may be specified.
h)
Graphite grease shall be applied to the threads of bolts before mechanical or flanged joints
are made.
i)
After completing a joint, any damaged paint or coating shall be restored and any metal joint
which is not already coated shall be cleaned and painted with two coats of pure epoxy paint
or other painting system accepted by the Contract Administrator.
j)
Additional external protection of joints where ordered by the Contract Administrator shall be
carried out as specified herein under External Protection of Joints.
k)
Anchorage of Joints at Bends and Discontinuities:
l)
3.
1.
Anchorage lugs shall be provided for socket, spigot fittings and socket clamps and tie
rods used on all pipes under pressure.
2.
Concrete thrust blocks may be used in lieu of the above where socket and spigot pipe is
used below ground subject to the availability of adequate space and acceptance of the
External Protection of Joints:

1.
Unless otherwise specified, all metallic mechanical joints, flanged joints, ferrule and saddle
straps shall be protected on Site by the cold application of an approved tape wrap.
2.
The application of tape with accessories and wrapping shall be strictly in accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations and at no additional cost to the Employer.
Closures and Short Sections

a)
For the purpose of reducing the angular deflections at pipe joints and for closure sections, the
Contractor may be permitted to install pipe sections of less than standard length with the
Contract Administrator's acceptance.
b)
Fabricate and install closing pieces and short sections of pipe as deemed necessary in the
field at no additional cost to the Employer.
c)
Assume responsibility for taking the measurements required to determine the lengths of cut
portions of pipes for insertion as closing lengths in pipelines.

01 June 2016
312333 / 19
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
d)
Pipe and methods of jointing shall be such that the locations of fittings and lengths of pipe can
be adjusted in the field to suit field conditions and variations in stationing.
e)
No extra payment shall be made for such adjustments nor for any welding, couplings, fittings,
or special lengths required to meet this requirement.
f)
A reasonable tolerance in the location of lines, fittings and appurtenances shall be permitted
by the Contract Administrator to enable the minimum use of special lengths.
g)
Special lengths of GRP pipes shall be manufactured for closures as required.

1.
h)
4.
1.
Cutting Ring for ND 100 to 150.
2.
Cutting Chain for ND 100 to 450.
3.
Disc cutter for all diameters, if accepted by the Contract Administrator.
4.
The cut ends of pipes all shall be properly chamfered.
5.
Only experienced men shall be employed by the Contractor on this Work.
6.
Take every precaution to ensure that both the measurements and the cutting of pipes are
to the accuracy required.
7.
Should any errors occur, the error shall be remedied by the Contractor as directed by the
Contract Administrator directs and at the Contractor's expense.
All buried pipes built into a concrete wall or structure shall be provided with two flexible joints
adjacent to the structure.
1.
For flexible pipes including but not limited to uPVC and GRP, the first joint shall be at the
exterior face of the structure and the second shall be at 1.5 times the pipe diameter or
500mm minimum away from the structure.
2.
For rigid pipes including but not limited RC to AC the 2nd joint may be at a typical pipe length.
b)
Pipes which extended more than 100mm beyond concrete wall shall be protected with a
concrete surround (nib) built integral with the external face of the structure.
c)
All internal and external protection membranes to the concrete shall be sealed around the pipe
openings as recommended by the membrane manufacturer.
d)
Any over-excavation adjacent to a structure and/ or beneath the formation level of a pipeline,
either to be constructed under the contract or in a future contract, shall be backfilled with Grade
20 concrete.
Pipe Supports
a)
6.
Cutting of uPVC pipes for inserting specials, fittings or closure pieces shall be carried out in
professional manner with an approved cutting machine described below in order to leave a
smooth end at right angles to the axis of the pipe.
Building-in Pipes
a)
5.
Cutting of GRP pipes in the field shall not be allowed unless expressed permission is
granted by Contract Administrator.
Pipe hangers and supports shall be in compliance with the Service Authority standards or as
accepted by Contract Administrator.
Deflection at Curves

01 June 2016
312333 / 20
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
7.
a)
If accepted by the Contract Administrator, a change of direction in either the horizontal or

vertical planes may be made by deflecting straight pipes provided the amount of joint deflection
does not exceed 75% of the manufacturer's recommended maximum value and subject to
satisfactory performance of the joints.
b)
Where a change of direction cannot be made by deflection at the joints of ordinary straight
pipes, bends shall be used.
1.
Locations of such bends and other specials are indicated on the Design Drawings and
their exact positions shall be determined by the Contractor and accepted by the Contract
Administrator.
2.
All pressure pipelines shall be secured at all changes in direction by concrete anchor
blocks and or by the provision of restrained joints.
Cleanliness of Pipelines
a)
Pipeline and chambers shall at all times be kept free of all silt, mortar, debris, trash and other
obstructions.
b)
When work is not in progress the open ends of the pipeline shall be securely plugged with an
approved watertight plug or stopper firmly fixed to resist unauthorized removal.
c)
Claw type plugs or any type liable to damage the pipe shall not be approved.
d)
All such stoppers, plugs or caps shall be provided with a vent incorporating a valve for the
purpose of testing whether the pipeline is under pressure or vacuum and to enable pressures
to be equalized prior to its removal.
e)
Clear the inside of each fitting and pipe length immediately prior to jointing.
1.
I.
f)
After jointing, the interior of the pipes shall be free from any dirt, stones or other matter that
may have entered them.
g)
For this purpose, a rubber disc, brush or other suitable implement that shall not harm the
internal lining of the pipe shall be pulled through the pipe after jointing.
Stanks Installation
1.
J.
Swab all fittings and pipe lengths to remove all dirt, sand or other matter that may clog
the line or contaminate the fluid to be transported in the pipeline.
Concrete stanks shall be placed in all granular pipe surround, unless otherwise indicated on the
Design Drawings.
a)
Stanks shall be provided adjacent to each structure, within 3m to 5m and at a maximum spacing
of 50m.
b)
Concrete stanks shall be made of Grade 20 concrete.
c)
Stanks shall be installed across the full cross-section of the granular pipe surround and into
the trench walls as shown on the Design Drawings.
General Trench Backfilling

1.
All excavated materials shall be used in the backfill, unless the material is found to be unsuitable.
a)
All suitable excavated material not directly incorporated in the work shall be stockpiled for reuse in areas accepted by the Contract Administrator.
b)
Soil utilized for landscaping or agricultural purposes shall be stockpiled separately.
c)
Unsuitable materials shall be removed and disposed of by the Contractor at his own expense.

01 June 2016
312333 / 21
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
2.
d)
Any temporary storage along side of the trench excavation shall be to stable slopes and heights
and deposited in a manner to avoid any damage and to cause as little inconvenience as
possible.
e)
The screening of excavated trench material shall not be permitted on Site without the written
General trench backfill pertains to all areas outside paved roadways and paved parking areas.
a)
These areas include, but are not limited to, service corridors, landscaped areas, undeveloped
areas, non-asphalted roads, lanes, alleys and all private lands.
b)
Backfilling of trenches shall commence as soon as practicable after the pipe line work have
been completed, tested and accepted by the Contract Administrator.
c)
No fill material shall be placed and no compaction shall be permitted adjacent concrete
structures until 70% of the designated compressive strength has been reached.
3.
Suitable material for general trench backfill shall comply with the requirements found in Part 2 of
this Section.
4.
Any soils utilized for landscaping shall be replaced in their original position and condition.
5.
Backfill material shall be compacted to at least 90% MDD, as determined by BS 1377: Part 4, Method
3.5/ 3.6.
6.
a)
Cast-in-place density test shall be carried out to BS 1377: Part 9.
b)
Maximum thickness of each loose lift shall be 250mm.
c)
Moisture content shall be maintained within the range of 3% of the optimum.
Testing
a)
7.
Allowable Tolerances
a)
K.
Buried marking tape shall be placed in the trenches above all pipes.
a)
M.
Finished surfaces: +25mm from specified level, unless otherwise accepted by the Contract
Administrator.
Buried Marking Tape Installation

1.
L.
Refer to the testing requirements indicated within this Section.
Depth shall be 0.50m below finished grade.
Pipeline Marker Post Installation

1.
Marker posts shall be placed over pumping or pressure mains at locations indicated on the Design
Drawings.
2.
All labeling and lettering shall be complete before installation.
3.
Marker posts shall be set in concrete as shown on the Design Drawings.
4.
Extreme care shall be taken to avoid damage to reflective sheeting and/ or lettering.
5.
Any posts with damage sheeting or lettering shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense.
Service Protection Ducts Installation

01 June 2016
312333 / 22
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
N.
O.
1.
Protection ducts shall be supported on suitable non-corrosive spacers before placing concrete
encasement.
2.
Diameter of the uPVC pipe shall be at least 150mm and must be accepted by the Contract
Administrator.
3.
All concrete work shall be in accordance with Section 033000 Cast-in-Place Concrete.
4.
Concrete surround shall be with concrete as shown on Design Drawings.
5.
Minimum thickness shall be 150mm, all around.
Reinstatement of Roadway and Footpath Surfaces

1.
Restore all roadways and footpaths surfaces to their original condition.
2.
Maintain temporary reinstatement for the duration of the Contract.
3.
Make permanent repair only at the end of the project.
4.
These reinstatements are deemed to be entirely covered by the Contractor's rates for pipeline
installation.
Excavation for Structures in the Pipeline

1.
Carry out further excavation as may be necessary to accommodate structures such as manholes
and chambers.
a)
2.
Reinstate any roadways and footpaths disturbed by excavation for appurtenances.

a)
3.3
Such excavation shall include disposal of surplus materials.
These reinstatements are deemed to be entirely covered by the Contractor's rate on the
appurtenances.

A.
Pipe Testing
1.
3.4
Pipe testing shall be conducted as specified in Section 331000 Water Utilities, Section 333000
Sanitary Sewerage Utilities and Section 334000 Storm Drainage Utilities.
CLEANING
A.
Upon completion of Work, all rubbish, debris, fluids and excess or waste material shall be removed from
the Site.
B.
All construction equipment and implements of service shall be removed and the entire area involved
shall be left in a neat, clean condition acceptable to the Contract Administrator.
END OF SECTION

01 June 2016
312333 / 23
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
SECTION 314100 -- SHORING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
1.2
SUBMITTALS
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.4
PROJECT CONDITIONS
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
DESIGN CRITERIA
2.2
2.3
MATERIALS
2.4
TOLERANCES
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
3.2
INSTALLATION
3.3

01 June 2016
314100
AECOM Middle East

SHORING

Enabling Works
SECTION 314100 -- SHORING

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
Section Includes
1.2
1.
Excavation perimeter retention systems.
2.
Guide walls.
3.
Hard/ Hard secant pile walls.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Pre-Contract Submittals
C.
1.
Method Statement Retaining Wall Construction: Submit all relevant details of the method of
constructing the retaining wall and the plant and monitoring equipment intended to be used.
Alternative methods may be stated provided it is demonstrated that they satisfy the requirements
of the Specification.
2.
Retaining Wall Program

a)
Submit a provisional program for the execution of the work at the time of tender and a detailed
program prior to commencement of the work. Inform the Contract Administrator each day of
the intended program of retaining wall construction for the following day and give 24 hours'
notice for any intention to work outside normal hours and at weekends.
b)
Ensure that during the course of the work, displacement or damage which shall impair either
performance or durability does not occur to completed elements.

1.
Progress Report: Submit to the Contract Administrator on the first day of each week a progress
report showing the current rate of progress and progress during the previous period on all important
items of each section of the work.
2.
Records: Keep records for the installation of each element as listed in Table 11.2 of ICE Specification
for Piling and Embedded Retaining Walls, 2nd Edition published June 2007, and submit 2 No. signed
copies of these records to the Contract Administrator not later than 12:00 hours of the next working
day after the element was constructed. These records shall form a record of the work.
a)
Any unexpected driving or boring conditions shall be noted in the records.
3.
Quality Plan: Submit to the Contract Administrator 1 week prior to commencement of retaining wall
work the proposed Quality Plan for the work. Subsequent revisions, amendments or additions shall
be submitted to the Contract Administrator prior to project implementation. Quality Assurance and
Quality Control documentation shall be made available to the Contract Administrator on request.
4.
Installation Sequence Plan: Submit to the Contract Administrator the planned sequence and timing
for installing wall elements. Demonstrate procedures that shall avoid damage to adjacent wall
elements.
a)

01 June 2016
Submit boring sequence of construction in accordance with Employer General Requirements

prior to work commencing.
314100 / 1
AECOM Middle East

SHORING

Enabling Works
1.3
5.
Method Statement Steel Reinforcement Procedures: Submit details of the proposed means of steel
reinforcement procedures that shall ensure the correct cover to and position of the reinforcement,
prior to commencement of the work.
6.
Method Statement Movement and Vibration Monitoring: Submit plans for making surveys and
monitoring movements or vibration that could damage adjacent structures, before the
commencement of the work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
Definitions for Excavation Perimeter Retention Systems: In this Section the terms 'submitted',
'demonstrated', 'notified' and 'required' mean 'submitted to the Contract Administrator', 'demonstrated to
the Contract Administrator', 'notified' to the Contract Administrator' and 'required by the Contract
Administrator' respectively.
1.
Commencing surface: The level at which the piling equipment first enters the ground.
2.
Cut-off-level: The level to which the pile is trimmed.
3.
Element: An individual component used in a particular embedded retaining walling system, for
example a diaphragm wall panel, or a primary or secondary pile in a secant wall, which can be
constructed in isolation.
4.
Embedded retaining wall: A retaining wall with shuttering provided either by the surrounding ground
that is cast against soil or sheet piles inserted into the ground.
Standards and other Codes of Practice: All materials and workmanship shall be in accordance with the
appropriate British Standards, Codes of Practice and other specified standards current at the date of
tender except where the requirements of these Standards or Codes of Practice conflict with this Section
in which case the requirements of this Section shall take precedence.
1.
List of Applicable Codes and References: The applicable codes and references shall include but
not necessarily be limited to the following:
a)
BS 1881.
b)
BS EN ISO 17660: Parts1 and 2.
c)
BS EN 1997: Part 1.
d)
BS EN 1992: Part 3.
e)
BS 8008.
f)
BS EN 1992-1-1.
g)
Local Municipality Requirements.
h)
CIRIA Guide C580.
i)
Health and Safety Executive Publication 399.
j)
CIRIA Guide Design and construction of ground anchors, 2nd Edition (R065M).
k)
CIRIA Guide Design and construction of ground anchors, 2nd Edition (R065M).
C.
Safety Standards: Safety precautions through the piling operations shall comply with Muscat Municipality
Health and Safety requirements and with BS EN 1997: Part 1, BS 8008 and BS EN 1992: Part 3.
D.
Life Saving Appliances: Provide and maintain on the Site sufficient proper and efficient lifesaving
appliances. The appliances shall be conspicuous and available for use at all times.
1.
Site operatives shall be conversant with the use of safety equipment and drills shall be carried out
sufficiently and frequently ensuring all necessary procedures can be correctly observed.

01 June 2016
314100 / 2
AECOM Middle East

SHORING

Enabling Works
E.
Supervision and Control of the Work: Maintain on Site a competent Site Supervisor who shall be in charge
of the retaining wall construction and installation.
1.
1.4
The Site Supervisor shall be experienced in the type of retaining wall construction that shall be
performed by the Contractor. Submit the curriculum vitae for the Site Supervisor prior to
commencement. The entire working time of the Site Supervisor shall be devoted to the retaining
wall work. The Site Supervisor shall not be removed from the work without the Contract Administrator
being notified in advance with a least one week's notice.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Ground Conditions
1.
No responsibility shall be accepted by the Contract Administrator or Employer for any opinions or
conclusions given in any factual or interpretative ground investigation reports. Report immediately
to the Contract Administrator any circumstance which indicates that in the Contractor's opinion the
ground conditions differ from those reported in or which could have been inferred from the ground
investigation reports or preliminary pile results.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
DESIGN CRITERIA
A.
Wall Layout, Design and Construction

1.
B.
Contractor design: The Contractor shall be required to design and construct the specified embedded
retaining wall having the qualities of materials and workmanship specified and which meet the
requirements of the Specification. The Contractor's design shall comprise the calculation of individual
element sizes based on the ground conditions revealed by the Site investigation.
a)
The embedded retaining wall shall be designed to support the imposed loads from the soil,
groundwater and any surcharge loads as assessed by the Contractor based on the Soil
Investigation Report, Design Drawings provided and a full inspection of the Site. The wall shall
retain the basement excavation during the construction period and prevent water entering the
excavations ensuring the excavation is dry and suitable for other trades until such time as the
permanent internal reinforced concrete shall be constructed and accepted by the Contract
Administrator.
b)
All design shall be in accordance with CIRIA guide C580, CIRIA Guide Design and construction
of ground anchors, appropriate British Standards and Muscat Municipality Requirements
current at the time of tender.
Hard/ Hard Secant Pile, Guide Walls

1.
The design and construction of guide walls shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall
take into account the actual Site and ground conditions and the equipment to be used on Site to
ensure stability and avoid undercutting as appropriate.
2.
Guide walls shall be constructed in reinforced concrete or other suitable materials. The minimum
depth of guide wall shall be 0.5m and the minimum shoulder width shall be 0.3m for walls in reinforced
concrete.
3.
Steel Reinforcement
a)
The number of joints in longitudinal steel bars shall be kept to a minimum. Joints in steel
reinforcement shall be such that the full strength of each bar is effective across the joint and
shall be made ensuring there is no detrimental displacement during the construction of the pile
in accordance with BS EN 1992-1-1.
b)
Reinforcement shall be maintained in its correct position during concreting of the wall element.
Where the reinforcement shall be made up into cages, they shall be concreted without damage.
If the cage is welded together, welding shall be in accordance with the requirements of BS EN
ISO 17660: Parts1 and 2.
c)
Spacers shall be designed and manufactured using durable materials which shall not lead to
corrosion of the reinforcement or spilling of the concrete cover.

01 June 2016
314100 / 3
AECOM Middle East

SHORING

Enabling Works
d)
2.2
The minimum projecting bond lengths required in accordance with BS EN 1992-1-1 shall be
maintained.
A.
Noise and Disturbance: Carry out the work in such a manner and at such times as shall minimize noise,
vibration and other disturbance in order to be in accordance with current environmental legislation.
B.
Damage to Adjacent Structures

1.
Assume responsibility for the rectification of any damage to adjacent structures or services. If, in
the opinion of the Contractor, damage may be caused to other structures or services by his execution
of the work, the Contract Administrator shall be notified immediately.
2.
Determine the positions of all known services and structures before commencing piling work on Site.
C.
Damage to Completed Wall Elements: Ensure that during the course of the work, displacement or damage
which shall impair either performance or durability does not occur to completed wall elements.
D.
Boring near Recently Cast Piles: Piles shall not be bored in close proximity to other piles which have
recently been cast and which contain workable or partially set concrete where a flow of concrete or
instability could be induced or damage caused to any installed piles.
E.
Stability of Boring: Temporary casing shall be used in unstable ground with or without support fluid to
maintain the stability of the bore unless continuous flight augers shall be used. The process of advancing
the bore and the temporary casing shall be such that soil shall not be drawn into the bore from outside
the area of the pile and cavities shall not be created outside the temporary casing.
2.3
MATERIALS
A.
Excavation Perimeter Retention System Materials: The sources of supply of materials shall not be
changed until the Contractor has demonstrated to the Contract Administrator that the materials from the
new source shall meet all the requirements of the Specification. Materials failing the requirements in
accordance with the Specification shall be removed promptly from the Site.
B.
Hard/ Hard Secant Pile Wall, General: All materials and work shall be in accordance with the Specification
except where there shall be a conflict of requirements, in which case this Section shall take precedence.
1.
2.4
Concrete and steel reinforcement: Cement materials, aggregates, additives, water and steel
reinforcement shall be in accordance with Section 033000 Cast-In-Place Concrete.
TOLERANCES
A.
B.
Excavation Perimeter Retention System

1.
Setting Out: Set out and install marker pins for the retaining wall positions. Prior to installation of
the retaining wall, check the element positions before proceeding.
2.
Position and Verticality Tolerances: The permitted deviation of element positions and alignment to
the vertical shall be dependent upon the method of retaining wall construction and as specified in
this Section. The position, verticality and spacing shall be chosen ensuring the required interlock
to the required depth shall be achieved.
Hard/ Hard Secant Pile Walls

1.
2.
Guide Walls
a)
The finished internal face of the guide wall closest to any subsequent main excavation shall
be vertical to a tolerance of 1:200 and shall represent the reference line. There shall be no
ridges on the face and the center line of the guide wall shall not deviate from its specified
position by more than 15mm in 3m.
b)
The minimum clear distance between the guide walls shall be the pile diameter plus 25mm
and the maximum distance shall be the pile diameter plus 50mm.
Secant Piles

01 June 2016
314100 / 4
AECOM Middle East

SHORING

Enabling Works
a)
At cut-off-level the maximum permitted deviation of the pile center from the center point
indicated on the setting-out Shop Drawings shall be 25mm in any direction except that an
additional tolerance of 5mm shall be permitted for each additional 1m that the cut-off level shall
be below the top of the guide wall unless otherwise indicated.
b)
The exposed face of the pile shall be vertical within a tolerance of 1:200 unless otherwise
c)
An additional tolerance of 100mm shall be allowed for concrete protrusions resulting from
cavities formed by overbreak in the ground. Where very soft clay layers or peat layers are
anticipated, obstructions shall be removed prior to or during boring.
3.
Recesses: If recesses in the form of box-outs shall be formed within a pile shaft, the vertical tolerance
shall be in accordance with the steel reinforcement tolerance noted below and the rotational tolerance
shall be 10.
4.
Steel Reinforcement: A vertical tolerance of +150mm/ -50mm shall generally be permitted on the
level of steel projecting from a pile cut-off.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Cleanliness of Pile Base: Prior to placing steel or concrete, remove from the base of the pile as much
remolded or loose disturbed materials as practical and in accordance with the method of construction.
B.
Cleaning of Support Fluid: Prior to placing steel or concrete, any support fluid, including water, shall be
wholly or partly removed and replaced while maintaining the fluid head if the fluid amount is not in
accordance with the Contractor's stated limits for support fluid prior to concreting.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Placing and Compacting Concrete, General

1.
The workability and method of placing of the concrete shall be such that a continuous monolithic
concrete shaft of the full cross-section shall be formed and the concrete in its final position shall be
dense and homogeneous. Concrete shall be transported from the mixer to the position of the pile
in such a manner that it does not cause segregation of the mix.
2.
Before commencement of concreting of a pile, ensure that the concrete mix supplier has available
a sufficient quantity of concrete on Site to construct the pile in one continuous operation.
3.
Each batch of concrete in a pile shall be placed before the previous batch has achieved a stiffness
which prevents proper amalgamation of the 2 No. concrete batches. Removal of temporary casings,
when used, shall be completed before the concrete within the casing loses its workability.
4.
No spoil, liquid or other foreign matter shall be allowed to contaminate the concrete.
B.
Workability of concrete: The concrete workability shall be determined using the slump or flow table in
accordance with BS 1881. The slump or flow shall be measured at the time of discharge into the pile boring.
C.
Compaction: Internal vibrators shall not be used to compact concrete.
D.
Placing Concrete in Dry Boreholes: The concrete shall be placed through a hopper attached to a length
of tremie pipe and in such a way that the flow shall be directed to not hit reinforcing bars or the side of
the bore. The tremie pipe shall be at least 3m long.
E.
Placing Concrete Under Water or Support Fluid

1.
Concrete that shall be placed under water or support fluid shall be placed through a tremie pipe in
one continuous operation.

01 June 2016
314100 / 5
AECOM Middle East

SHORING

Enabling Works
F.
2.
The hopper and pipe of the tremie shall be clean and watertight throughout. The pipe shall extend
to the base of the boring and a sliding plug or barrier shall be placed in the pipe to prevent direct
contact between the first charge of concrete in the pipe of the tremie and the water or support fluid.
The pipe shall at all times penetrate the concrete which has previously been placed with a minimum
penetration of 3m and shall not be withdrawn from the concrete until completion of concreting.
3.
At all times a sufficient quantity of concrete shall be maintained within the tremie pipe to ensure that
the pressure from it exceeds that from the water or support fluid and workable concrete above the
tremie base.
4.
The internal diameter of the pipe of the tremie shall be of sufficient size to ensure the easy flow of
concrete. It shall be so designed that external projections are minimized, allowing the tremie to pass
through reinforcing cages without causing damage. The internal face of the pipe of the tremie shall
be free from projections.
5.
The depths to the surface of the concrete shall be measured and the embedded length of the tremie
pipe recorded at regular intervals corresponding to the placing of each load of concrete. The depth
measured and volumes of concrete placed shall be plotted immediately on a graph during the
concreting process and compared with the theoretical relationship of depth against volume.
Time Period for Excavation and Placing Concrete: The time period after a pile shall be excavated and
before the concrete shall be placed shall not exceed 12 hours unless otherwise indicated.
1.
G.
Concrete Level: No pile shall be cast with its final cut-off-level below standing water level unless the
Contractor's method of construction includes measures to prevent inflow of water that shall locally reduce
the pile's cross-sectional area, necking, or that shall contaminate the concrete as the temporary casing
is withdrawn. The standing water level shall be treated as the cut-off level for the purpose of calculating
the casting level tolerance.
1.
H.
3.3
If temporary casing has the same diameter as the pile bore used, this period shall start when
excavation below the temporary casing commences.
For piles cast in dry bores using temporary casing and for piles cast under water, the casting level
above cut-off level shall be within the casting tolerances given in Section 316319 Bored and Socketed
Piles except for continuous flight auger piles, which shall be cast to ground level.
Backfilling of Empty Bore: Where concrete shall not be brought to the top of the guide wall, the empty
pile bore shall be backfilled as soon as possible with acceptable material. Prior to backfilling, the bore
shall be clearly marked and fenced off ensuring prevention of any safety hazards.
A.
Water Retention: Assume responsibility for the repair of any joint, defect or pile where on exposure of
the wall, visible running water leaks shall be found which shall result in leakage. Any leak resulting in
water flow emanating from the surface of the retaining wall shall be sealed, to the acceptance of the
B.
Instrumentation: Movement of the wall, the surrounding ground and existing structures shall be monitored.
END OF SECTION

01 June 2016
314100 / 6
AECOM Middle East

SHORING

Enabling Works
SECTION 321116 -- SUBBASE COURSES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
1.2
REFERENCE STANDARDS
1.3
SUBMITTALS
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

01 June 2016
321116
AECOM Middle East

SUBBASE COURSES

Enabling Works
SECTION 321116 -- SUBBASE COURSES

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
The Contractor shall refer to the latest edition of the Sultanate of Oman Standard Specifications for Road
and Bridge Construction for specification clauses that are not listed hereunder.
C.
Where clauses hereunder are similar to the clauses within the Sultanate of Oman Standard Specifications
for Road and Bridge Construction, the more stringent shall apply.
D.
Section Includes
1.
1.2
This Section for materials and equipment is used in the construction of subbase courses, as indicated
on the Design Drawings and as specified herein and/ or in the Specification and included in the Bills
of Quantities.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
AASHTO: American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials

1.
M-145
Purposes.
Classification of Soils and Soil Aggregate Mixtures for Highway Construction
2.
T-2 Sampling Aggregates.
3.
T-85 Specific Gravity and Absorption of Course Aggregate.
4.
T-89 Determining the Liquid Limit of Soils.
5.
T-90 Determining the Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils.
6.
T-96 Resistance to Abrasion of Small Size Coarse Aggregate by Use of the Los Angles Machine.
7.
T-104 Soundness (Sodium), Soundness (Magnesium).
8.
T-165 Effect of Water on Cohesion of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures.
9.
T-176 Plastic Fines in Graded Aggregates and Soils by Use of the Sand Equivalent Test.
10. T-180 Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 10-lb. (4.54kg) Rammer and an 18-inch (457mm)
Drop.
11. T-191 Density of Soil In-Place by the Sand-Cone Method.
12. T-193 The California Bearing Ratio.
13. T-205 Density of Soil In-Place by the Rubber-Balloon Method.
B.
C.
BS: British Standards

1.
BS EN 933-3 Methods for determination of particle shape. Elongation index of coarse aggregate.
2.
BS 1377: Part 3 Methods of test for soils for engineering purposes. Chemical and electro-chemical
tests.
ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials

01 June 2016
321116 / 1
AECOM Middle East

SUBBASE COURSES

Enabling Works
1.
D.
1.3
D1559 Resistance to Plastic Flow of Bituminous Mixtures using Marshall Apparatus.
Sultanate of Oman Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction.

SUBMITTALS
A.
Environmental Information Submittals

1.
Documentation indicating percentage of post-industrial and post-consumer recycled content per

unit of product. Indicate relative value of recycled content products to total value of products included
in this Project.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
Description
1.
Aggregate subbase courses, upon approval, shall consist of crushed mineral aggregates or natural
mineral aggregates of the gradation and thickness specified in this Section and as indicated on the
Design Drawings. Where the type of aggregate is not specified, it is intended that natural mineral
aggregates shall be used.
2.
The Contractor shall furnish, place and compact aggregate subbase course for paved roadways,
service roads and parking areas complying with the lines, grades, thicknesses and typical sections
indicated on the Design Drawings, as specified herein or as directed by the Contract Administrator.
3.
Unless otherwise indicated on the Design Drawings, specified in the Specification or directed by
the Contract Administrator, all aggregate subbase materials shall comply with the requirements of
Aggregate Subbase (Gradation B) of Appendix 321116.
Material Requirements for Subbase Courses

1.
The materials for subbase courses shall comply with the requirements as specified herein and shall
be as approved by the Contract Administrator. The Contractor shall submit samples of all materials
to the Contract Administrator for approval prior to furnishing and placing any materials. The material
sample shall meet the following criteria.
2.
Aggregate Subbase shall meet the following test requirements: Refer to Table 1 Appendix 32116
Subbase Couses.
3.
Natural Aggregate Subbase Courses shall consist of coarse and fine mineral aggregates which
have been screened and blended to the various gradations specified herein and constructed to the
thickness as indicated on the Design Drawings.
4.
Crushed Aggregate Subbase Courses shall consist of crushed coarse aggregate and crushed or
natural fine aggregate screened and blended in accordance with the gradation specified herein and
constructed to the thicknesses as indicated on the Design Drawings.
Fine Aggregates
1.
Fine aggregate (passing the No. 4 sieve) shall consist of natural sand and/ or crushed sand and
shall be of such gradation that when combined with other required aggregate fractions in proper
proportions, the resultant mixture will meet the gradation specified.
2.
The fine aggregate shall be clean and free from organic matter, clay and other extraneous or
detrimental materials.
3.
The portion of fine aggregates passing the No. 200 sieve shall not exceed 2/ 3 of the portion passing
the No. 40 sieve.
4.
The material passing the No. 40 sieve shall have a maximum liquid limit of 35 and the plasticity
index shall not exceed 6.

01 June 2016
321116 / 2
AECOM Middle East

SUBBASE COURSES

Enabling Works
5.
D.
E.
When the source of fine aggregates does not meet the above requirements, the Contractor may,
with the Contract Administrator's approval, add additional fine aggregate and/ or filler to correct the
gradation or to change the characteristics of the material passing the No. 40 sieve so as to meet
the Specification. Such additional material shall be added in a manner which ensures a completely
homogeneous gradation as approved by the Contract Administrator.
Coarse Aggregates
1.
Coarse aggregate (retained on the No. 4 sieve) shall consist of crushed stone, crushed gravel or
natural gravel and shall be of such gradation that when combined with other required aggregate
fractions in proper proportion, the resultant mixture will meet the gradation specified.
2.
When crushed aggregate is required, not less than 50% by weight of the particles retained on the
No. 4 sieve shall have at least one fractured face. The Flakiness Index of the crushed aggregate
shall not exceed 35%.
3.
The percentage of wear of coarse aggregate shall not exceed 40% when tested for resistance to
abrasion (AASHTO T-96).
4.
The course aggregate shall be hard and durable and free from organic matter, clay and other
extraneous or detrimental materials.
5.
Coarse aggregate shall have a maximum sodium sulfate soundness loss of 12% and magnesium
sulfate soundness loss of 15%.
Types of Aggregate Subbase Courses

1.
The combined gradation including fine and coarse aggregates shall conform to the gradation of
Type (A) or (B) or (C) in Appendix 321116.
2.
The gradation of materials to be used in the aggregate subbase courses as shown in Table 2
indicates the limits within which the material could be accepted. The continuous smooth gradation
of materials used shall be kept within the specified gradation limits and gap grading shall be avoided.
Selection of one of the gradations shown in table 2 shall be as indicated on the Design Drawings
and/ or in these Standard Specifications. Unless otherwise specified, Gradation B shall be used
when aggregate subbase is specified.
3.
Mixing of material can be achieved through the use of the central mixing plant or travel mixer. Refer
to Table 1 Appendix 321116 Subbase Courses.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
Finished Subgrade Levels

1.
B.
Prior to commencing the construction of the subbase courses, the Contractor shall make sure that
the subgrade complies with the Specification and is compacted to the maximum dry density, and
that the surface thereof complies with the levels and slopes indicated in the Design Drawings. In
all cases the approval of the Contract Administrator shall be obtained before commencing spreading
of material for the subbase courses.
Spreading and Compacting

1.
After carrying out the screening and mixing of aggregate material, samples of the approved material
shall be taken in order to determine the optimum moisture content by the site QC Engineer.
2.
Material shall then be spread on the prepared surface in layers not more than 15cm compacted
thickness to achieve the total thickness as indicated on the Design Drawings.
3.
Care shall be taken in spreading and compacting the aggregate subbase not to affect the geotextile
fabric.

01 June 2016
321116 / 3
AECOM Middle East

SUBBASE COURSES

Enabling Works
C.
D.
E.
4.
The natural moisture content of materials constituting the subbase courses shall be determined. If
the natural moisture content is less than the optimum moisture content, the necessary amount of
water must be added to obtain the optimum moisture content allowing for the quantity which may
be lost by evaporation in the process of raking, leveling and compacting, depending on atmospheric
temperature, quantity of material and the equipment and plant to be used in this operation, provided
that the layer shall be compacted when the moisture content therein is within -2 and +4% of the
optimum moisture content in order to obtain maximum dry density, and the moisture content is
uniform in all parts of the section where the work is being carried out and in the various depths of
the layer thickness.
5.
If the natural moisture content in materials exceeds the optimum moisture content, then the
Contractor shall aerate the material in order to reach the optimum moisture content.
6.
Compaction shall start immediately thereafter, by means of pneumatic and steel rollers or vibratory
rollers (10 Tons minimum) and in accordance with the instructions of the Contract Administrator.
7.
Compaction shall start with rollers from extreme sides proceeding gradually toward the road axis.
Rolling shall continue until a relative density of not less than 98% of the maximum dry density has
been obtained as determined by the Moisture-Density Relationship Test AASHTO T-180. The CBR
of the subbase material shall not be less than 65.
Multi-Layers
1.
During the operations of mixing, spreading, compacting and leveling of subbase material, care shall
be taken so that layers already compacted under the layer being executed are not affected, or that
the finished subgrade surface is also not affected. This requirement shall be given special attention
in places where equipment makes turns in going back and forth and any such damage resulting in
mixing the various layers constituting the different subgrades and subbase courses shall be carefully
made good by the Contractor at his expense and to the satisfaction of the Contract Administrator.
2.
If more than one subbase course is required for reaching the required thickness described in the
specifications, each such course shall be constructed as specified herein.
3.
Where the finished total compacted thickness exceeds 15cm, each layer shall be executed in
composite layers not exceeding 15cm in thickness after compaction unless otherwise approved by
the Contract Administrator in writing.
Protection of Surface
1.
The Contractor shall protect the subbase course so that it shall be maintained sound during work
progress, after its completion and prior to receiving the bituminous layers or prior to laying the
surface overlay thereon. Any damage caused to the layer if exposed to traffic or natural conditions
resulting in damage to its surface should be made good to the satisfaction of the Contract
Administrator.
2.
The subbase courses shall not be rolled when the underlying material is soft or yielding or when
the rolling causes a wave-like motion in this course.
3.
When the rolling develops irregularities, the irregular surface shall be loosened, then shaped and
rolled according to specifications. Along places inaccessible to rollers, the subbase course material
shall be tamped thoroughly with mechanical tampers.
4.
Work on the subbase course shall not be permitted during rainy weather.
5.
Hauling equipment may be routed over completed portions of the subbase courses provided no
damage results and provided that such equipment is routed over the full width of the course to avoid
rutting or uneven compaction.
6.
The Contract Administrator has the right to stop all hauling over completed or partially completed
subbase courses when in his opinion such hauling is causing damage.
Preparing the Surface Before Priming

1.
Following the completion of the subbase course the Contractor shall perform all maintenance work
necessary to keep the course in a condition for priming. The prime coat shall be applied after
preparation of the previously compacted surface.

01 June 2016
321116 / 4
AECOM Middle East

SUBBASE COURSES

Enabling Works
3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A.
Requirements for Compaction

1.
B.
Requirements for Gradation

1.
C.
D.
Wherever the degree of compaction is found to be less than the 98% specified, the area of subbase
course involved shall be satisfactorily corrected so that the minimum specified density is achieved.
Wherever the gradation is found to be outside the limits specified, the area of subbase course
involved shall be scarified, removed or otherwise reworked as directed by the Contract Administrator
to provide a material within the specified limits.
Thickness Requirements
1.
The total constructed thickness of aggregate subbase course used for new construction,
reconstruction or widening of roadways shall not vary more than 8mm from the total thickness
2.
In the event the constructed thickness of the aggregate subbase course is 8mm more than the total
thickness indicated on the Design Drawings, the area involved shall be corrected as directed by
the Contract Administrator by removing excess material in an approved manner to provide the
required thickness.
3.
In the event the constructed thickness of the aggregate subbase course is 8mm less than the total
thickness indicated on the Design Drawings, the Contractor shall provide additional material in the
next course (base course or wearing course). In no case shall the deficiency of the subbase course
exceed 25mm.
4.
The aggregate subbase course shall be constructed to the grade level as indicated on the Design
Drawings, as specified and as approved by the Contract Administrator.
5.
In no case shall the total sum thickness of the subbase course, base course and wearing course
be less than the total sum thickness of all courses as indicated on the Design Drawings.
Requirements for Evenness of Surface and Grade Level

1.
The final surfaces of the subbase course shall be tested by means of a 5m long straight edge; and
no rises or depressions in excess of 1cm shall appear on the surface; otherwise such areas shall
be stripped, corrected and recompacted to comply with all specification requirements and as
approved by the Contract Administrator. Further, the finished surface of the subbase course shall
be constructed to within 12mm of the grade levels indicated on the Design Drawings.
END OF SECTION

01 June 2016
321116 / 5
AECOM Middle East

SUBBASE COURSES

Enabling Works
SECTION 321216 -- ASPHALT PAVING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
1.2
SUBMITTALS
1.3
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5
1.6
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION
2.2
2.3
MATERIALS
2.4
ASPHALT MIXES
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
3.2
SURFACE PREPARATION
3.3
INSTALLATION
3.4
10
3.5
WASTE HANDLING AND DISPOSAL
11

01 June 2016
321216
AECOM Middle East

ASPHALT PAVING

Enabling Works
SECTION 321216 -- ASPHALT PAVING

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
D.
Section Includes
1.2
1.
Hot-mix asphalt paving.
2.
Imprinted asphalt paving.
3.
Asphalt curbs.
4.
Asphalt traffic-calming devices.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.

1.
Shop Drawings
2.
Product Data on materials and components for use.

a)
Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties.
b)
Job-Mix Designs: Certification by authorities having jurisdiction of approval of each job mix
proposed for the Work.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Method Statement.
8.
Quality Plan.
9.
10. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.

11. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
12. Material Certificates: For each type of paving material.
13. Material Test Reports: For each paving material, by a qualified testing agency.
01 June 2016
321216 / 1
AECOM Middle East

ASPHALT PAVING

Enabling Works
14. Field quality-control reports.

1.3
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Comply with the requirements of the Employer General Requirements and submit the following:
1.
1.4
Warranties.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A paving-mix manufacturer registered with and approved by Muscat

Municipality.
B.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM D3666 for relevant testing.
C.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with materials, workmanship, and other applicable requirements of
Muscat Municipality for asphalt paving work.
1.
Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in standard
specifications do not apply to this Section.
D.
Provide quality benchmark installations, testing and inspections in accordance with the Employer General
Requirements .
E.
Quality Benchmark Installation

1.
F.
1.5
Following agreement of samples, an area of 25m of each type of paving in locations to be agreed
with the Contract Administrator.

1.
2.
3.
responsibilities regarding the performance requirements, durability or service life requirements, etc.
4.
resisting abrasion from pedestrian traffic and any other abrasion resulting from adjacent traffic
movements.

A.
Delivery: Schedule delivery of asphalt paving components to avoid delaying the work. Deliver bulk
materials in sealed bags clearly marked with their weight and products in unopened manufacturer's
packaging, clearly identified with relevant information.
B.
Store: Store asphalt paving components as recommended by the manufacturer. Store aggregates where
grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.
C.
Handling: Handle asphalt paving components as recommended by the manufacturer. Reject damaged
materials or those otherwise unfit for use.
1.6
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if sub-grade is wet or excessively damp, if rain
is imminent or expected before time required for adequate cure, or if the following conditions shall not
be met.
1.
Prime Coat: Minimum surface temperature of 15.6C.

01 June 2016
321216 / 2
AECOM Middle East

ASPHALT PAVING

Enabling Works
2.
Tack Coat: Minimum surface temperature of 15.6C.
3.
Slurry Coat: Comply with weather limitations in ASTM D3910.
4.
Asphalt Base Course: Minimum surface temperature of 15.6C and rising at time of placement.
5.
Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature of 15.6C at time of placement.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION
A.
B.
C.
2.2
Asphalt Paving
1.
Description: Dense-graded, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt paving laid on suitable substrate to achieve
the requirements specified, including all necessary accessories to complete the application.
2.
Substrate, Base Course and Surface course: As indicated on the Design Drawings.
3.
Pavement Marking Paint: As indicated on the Design Drawings.
4.
Other requirements: As indicated on the Design Drawings or as agreed with the Contract
Administrator.
Asphalt Traffic Calming Device

1.
Description: Hot-mix asphalt speed humps over compacted pavement surfaces.
2.
Substrate: As indicated on the Design Drawings.
3.
Asphalt Mix: Same as pavement surface-course mix.
4.
Finish: Tamp to a smooth finish.
5.
Asphalt Traffic Calming Device Marking Paint: As indicated on the Design Drawings.
Asphalt Curb
1.
Description: Hot-mix asphalt curbs over compacted pavement surfaces.
2.
Substrate: As indicated on the Design Drawings.
3.
Asphalt Mix: Same as pavement surface-course mix.
4.
Finish: Tamp to a smooth finish.
5.
Asphalt Curb Marking Paint: As indicated on the Design Drawings.
A.
Specific Movements
1.
The works shall be detailed, manufactured and installed to accommodate all movements of the
substrates without damage or any reduction in the performance.
2.
Provide all necessary movement joints to accommodate the movements to which the paving is
expected to be subjected, whether indicated on the Design Drawings or not.
3.
Show all movement joints on the Shop Drawings, which shall be subject to acceptance by the
4.
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that movement joint thicknesses are adequate.

01 June 2016
321216 / 3
AECOM Middle East

ASPHALT PAVING

Enabling Works
5.
B.
C.
Specific Dead Loads

1.
The works' own dead load shall be accommodated locally and without causing deflections or
movements that affect abutting elements.
2.
The dead loads derived from permanent fixtures or services attached to the surfaces of the works
shall be accommodated without any reduction in performance.
Specific Live Loads

1.
D.
The works shall not deflect under loading in any way that is detrimental to any element of the works
The works shall be capable of accommodating the following live loads without any reduction in
performance:
a)
All loads imposed upon them, as indicated on the Design Drawings.
b)
All loads resulting from movements of the structure as a whole.

1.
Thermal Movement: It shall be ensured that the works are capable of withstanding differential surface
temperatures without any reduction in the specified performance. Any movement joints, as
necessary to cater for any thermal movement, shall be provided.
2.
Moisture Movement:
a)
2.3
The works shall withstand the following movement without permanent deformation or any
reduction in the specified performance:
1.
Due to changes in the moisture content of its components, resulting from variations in
the moisture content of the air.
2.
Due to drying shrinkage, both short term and long term.
MATERIALS
A.
Aggregates: Generally, use materials and gradations that have performed satisfactorily in previous
installations.
1.
Coarse Aggregate: In accordance with ASTM D692/ D692M, sound, angular crushed stone, crushed
gravel, or cured, crushed blast-furnace slag.
2.
Fine Aggregate: In accordance with ASTM D1073 or AASHTO M29, sharp-edged natural sand or
sand prepared from stone, gravel, cured blast-furnace slag, or combinations thereof.
a)
3.
B.
For hot-mix asphalt, limit natural sand to a maximum of 20% by weight of the total aggregate
mass.
Mineral Filler: In accordance with ASTM D242/ D242M or AASHTO M17, rock or slag dust, hydraulic
cement, or other inert material.
Asphalt Materials
1.
Asphalt Binder: In accordance with AASHTO M320, PG 64-22/ PG 58-28/ PG 70-22.
2.
Asphalt Cement: In accordance with ASTM D3381/ D3381M for viscosity-graded material and in
accordance with ASTM D 946/ D946M for penetration-graded material.
3.
Cutback Prime Coat: In accordance with ASTM D2027, medium-curing cutback asphalt, MC-30,
MC-70 or MC-250.

01 June 2016
321216 / 4
AECOM Middle East

ASPHALT PAVING

Enabling Works
C.
2.4
4.
Emulsified Asphalt Prime Coat: In accordance with ASTM D977 or AASHTO M140 for emulsified
asphalt, or in accordance with ASTM D2397 or AASHTO M208 for cationic emulsified asphalt, slow
setting, diluted in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application.
5.
Tack Coat: In accordance with ASTM D977 or AASHTO M140 for emulsified asphalt and in
accordance with ASTM D2397 or AASHTO M208 for cationic emulsified asphalt, slow setting, diluted
in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application.
6.
Water for emulsified asphalts: Potable.
7.
Undersealing Asphalt: In accordance with ASTM D3141/ D3141M; pumping consistency.
Auxiliary Materials
1.
Recycled Materials for Hot-Mix Asphalt Mixes: Reclaimed asphalt pavement, reclaimed, unboundaggregate base material and recycled asphalt shingles from sources and gradations that have
performed satisfactorily in previous installations, equal to performance of required hot-mix asphalt
paving produced from all new materials.
2.
Sand: In accordance with ASTM D1073 or AASHTO M29, Grade No. 2 or No. 3.
3.
Paving Geotextile: In accordance with AASHTO M288 paving fabric, nonwoven polypropylene,
resistant to chemical attack, rot, and mildew and specifically designed for paving applications.
4.
Joint Sealant: In accordance with ASTM D6690 or AASHTO M324, Type I, hot-applied, singlecomponent, polymer-modified bituminous sealant.
ASPHALT MIXES
A.
Recycled Content of Hot-Mix Asphalt: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer
recycled content not less than 20% or more than 25% by weight.
1.
B.
C.
Surface Course Limit: Recycled content no more than 10% by weight.
Hot-Mix Asphalt: Dense-graded, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mixes approved by Muscat Municipality
and designed according to procedures in the latest edition of Asphalt Institute (AI) Handbook "MS-2 Mix
Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot-Mix Types", and in accordance with the following
requirements:
1.
Provide mixes with a history of satisfactory performance in geographical area where Project is
located.
2.
Provide mixes complying with composition, grading, and tolerance requirements in accordance with
ASTM D 3515.
Emulsified-Asphalt Slurry: In accordance with ASTM D3910, Type 1.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that sub-grade is dry, sound, free of debris, mud and soft spots, close textured, and in a suitable
condition to begin paving.
B.
Proof-roll sub-grade below pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and
areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated sub-grades.
1.
Completely proof-roll sub-grade in one direction, repeating proof-rolling in direction perpendicular

to first direction. Limit vehicle speed to 5km/ h.
2.
Proof roll with a loaded 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 13.6 tonnes.
3.
Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined
by Contract Administrator, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed.

01 June 2016
321216 / 5
AECOM Middle East

ASPHALT PAVING

Enabling Works
C.
The levels and falls of the sub-base shall be as detailed and within the specified tolerances of 20mm
(vehicular areas) and 12mm (pedestrian areas).
D.
Drainage outlets are shall be within +0 to -10mm of the required finished level.
E.
Curbs and edgings are complete, adequately bedded and haunched and to the required levels.
F.
Proceed with paving only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
G.
Verify that utilities, traffic loop detectors, and other items requiring a cut and installation beneath the
asphalt surface have been completed and that asphalt surface has been repaired flush with adjacent
asphalt prior to beginning installation of imprinted asphalt.
3.2
SURFACE PREPARATION
A.
B.
General
1.
Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material, foreign
material and standing water from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared sub-grade is ready to
receive paving.
2.
Clean the edges of manholes, curbs and other abutments and paint with a thin uniform coating of
bitumen.
Herbicide Treatment: Apply herbicide according to manufacturer's recommended rates and written
application instructions. Apply to dry, prepared sub-grade or surface of compacted-aggregate base
before applying paving materials.
1.
C.
D.
E.
Mix herbicide with prime coat if formulated by manufacturer for that purpose.
Cutback Prime Coat: Apply uniformly over surface of compacted unbound-aggregate base course at a
rate of 2.3L/ m. Apply enough material to penetrate and seal, but not flood, surface. Allow prime coat
to cure.
1.
If prime coat is not entirely absorbed within 24 hours after application, spread sand over surface to
blot excess asphalt. Use enough sand to prevent pickup under traffic. Remove loose sand by
sweeping before pavement is placed and after volatiles have evaporated.
2.
Protect primed substrate from damage until ready to receive paving.
Emulsified Asphalt Prime Coat: Apply uniformly over surface of compacted unbound-aggregate base
course at a rate of 0.5L/ m to 1.40L/ m per 25mm depth. Apply enough material to penetrate and seal,
but not flood, surface. Allow prime coat to cure.
1.
If prime coat is not entirely absorbed within 24 hours after application, spread sand over surface to
blot excess asphalt. Use enough sand to prevent pickup under traffic. Remove loose sand by
sweeping before pavement is placed and after volatiles have evaporated.
2.
Protect primed substrate from damage until ready to receive paving.
Existing Asphalt Pavement Preparation

1.
Cold Milling: Clean existing pavement surface of loose and deleterious material immediately before
cold milling. Remove existing asphalt pavement by cold milling to grades and cross sections
indicated.
a)
Mill to a depth of 50mm.
b)
Mill to a uniform finished surface free of excessive gouges, grooves and ridges.
c)
Control rate of milling to prevent tearing of existing asphalt course.
d)
Repair or replace curbs, manholes and other construction damaged during cold milling.

01 June 2016
321216 / 6
AECOM Middle East

ASPHALT PAVING

Enabling Works
2.
3.3
e)
Excavate and trim unbound-aggregate base course, if encountered, and keep material separate
from milled hot-mix asphalt.
f)
Patch surface depressions deeper than 25mm after milling, before wearing course is laid.
g)
Keep milled pavement surface free of loose material and dust.
h)
Do not allow milled materials to accumulate on Site.
Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to surfaces of existing pavement at a rate of 0.7L/ m.

a)
Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving.
b)
Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings. Remove

spillages and clean affected surfaces.
INSTALLATION
A.
Laying of Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving

1.
a)
Place hot-mix asphalt base course in number of lifts and thicknesses indicated.
b)
Place hot-mix asphalt surface course in single lift.
2.
Spread mix at a minimum temperature of 121C.
3.
Begin applying mix along centerline of crown for crowned sections and on high side of one-way
slopes unless otherwise indicated.
4.
Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls and tears in
asphalt-paving mat.
5.
Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 3m wide unless infill edge strips of a lesser width
shall be required.
6.
B.
Machine lay hot-mix asphalt on prepared surface, spread uniformly and strike off. Place asphalt
mix by hand in areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation of mix. Place
each course to required grade, cross section, and thickness when compacted.
a)
After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling to overlap
previous strips. Overlap mix to 38mm to adjoining strip to ensure proper compaction of mix
along longitudinal joints.
b)
Complete a section of asphalt base course before placing asphalt surface course.
Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools to
remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix asphalt to prevent
segregation of mix. Use suitable hand tools to smooth surface.
Joints: Construct joints ensuring a continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Construct joints
free of depressions, with same texture and smoothness as other sections of hot-mix asphalt course.
1.
Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat to joints.
2.
Offset longitudinal joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 150mm.
3.
Offset transverse joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 600mm.
4.
Construct transverse joints at each point where paver ends a day's work and resumes work at a
subsequent time. Construct these joints using either "bulkhead" or "papered" method according to
Asphalt Institute (AI) Handbook MS-22, for both "Ending a Lane" and "Resumption of Paving
Operations".
5.
Compact joints as soon as hot-mix asphalt shall bear roller weight without excessive displacement.

01 June 2016
321216 / 7
AECOM Middle East

ASPHALT PAVING

Enabling Works
6.
C.
Compact asphalt at joints to a density within 2% of specified course density.
Compaction
1.
General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving shall bear roller weight without
excessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or with vibratory-plate
compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers.
a)
2.
Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and outside
edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade and
smoothness. Correct laydown and rolling operations to comply with requirements.
3.
Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling while hot-mix
asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot-mix asphalt course
has been uniformly compacted to the following density:
a)
D.
E.
Average Density: 96% of reference laboratory density in accordance with ASTM D6927 and
AASHTO T245, but not less than 94%.
4.
Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is still warm.
5.
Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to proper
alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot; compact thoroughly.
6.
Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign materials and replace
with fresh, hot-mix asphalt. Compact by rolling to specified density and surface smoothness.
7.
Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and
hardened.
8.
Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become marked.
Asphalt Curbs
1.
Construct hot-mix asphalt curbs over compacted pavement surfaces. Apply a light tack coat unless
pavement surface is still tacky and free from dust. Spread mix at a minimum temperature of 121C.
2.
Place hot-mix asphalt to curb cross section indicated or, if not indicated, to local standard shapes,
by machine or by hand in wood or metal forms. Tamp hand-placed materials and screed to smooth
finish. Remove forms after hot-mix asphalt has cooled.
Asphalt Traffic-Calming Devices, Site-Formed

1.
Construct hot-mix asphalt speed humps over compacted pavement surfaces. Apply a tack coat
unless pavement surface is still tacky and free from dust. Spread mix at a minimum temperature
of 121C.
a)
F.
Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185C.
Tack Coat Application: Apply uniformly to surfaces of existing pavement at a rate of 0.7L/ m.
2.
Before installation, mill pavement that shall be in contact with bottom of traffic-calming device. Mill
to a depth of 25mm from top of pavement to a clean, rough profile.
3.
Place and compact hot-mix asphalt to cross section indicated, by machine or by hand in wood or
metal forms. Tamp hand-placed materials and screed to smooth finish. Remove forms after hot-mix
asphalt has cooled.
Imprinting Asphalt
1.
General: Imprint asphalt according to the manufacturer's written instructions, using the
manufacturer's recommended equipment.
2.
Freshly Laid Asphalt: Immediately after asphalt has been laid and compacted but still plastic, begin
the surface imprinting process.

01 June 2016
321216 / 8
AECOM Middle East

ASPHALT PAVING

Enabling Works
3.
G.
a)
Monitor asphalt surface temperature in compliance with the manufacturer's written

recommendations to ensure required temperature to perform surface imprinting.
b)
Reheat asphalt if surface temperature drops below that required.
Reheating Asphalt: Soften asphalt pavement surface by heating to a depth of at least 13mm without
burning asphalt.
a)
Heat to a temperature of 149 to 163 C immediately before applying templates.
b)
Regularly monitor the pavement temperature to prevent overheating.
c)
Direct flame heaters are not permitted.
d)
If pavement is overheated and begins to emit black smoke, remove damaged pavement by
milling down 25mm and replace removed pavement with new, compacted surface course prior
to resuming imprinting work.
4.
Surface Imprinting: Apply and imprint templates to a minimum depth 6mm as required to embed
precut marking material flush or barely beneath pavement surface.
5.
Coating Application: After imprinted surface has cooled, apply two layers of base coating followed
by two layers of top coating or four layers of top coating as recommended by the manufacturer. Do
not allow traffic until coating has completely dried and cured.
6.
Precut Marking Material Application: Position precut marking material aligned with imprinted pattern
and slowly heat to a temperature no higher than 163 C until marking material begins to liquefy and
flow. Do not allow traffic until installed marking material has cooled to ambient temperature
Patching and Repairs on Existing Pavement

1.
2.
Patching Existing Pavement

a)
Asphalt Pavement: Saw cut perimeter of patch and excavate existing pavement section to
sound base. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending 300mm into perimeter of
adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut excavation faces vertically. Remove
excavated material. Re-compact existing unbound-aggregate base course to form new subgrade.
b)
Tack Coat: Before placing patch material, apply tack coat uniformly to vertical asphalt surfaces
abutting the patch. Apply at a rate of 0.2L/ m to 0.7L/ m.
c)
Placing Patch Material: Fill excavated pavement areas with hot-mix asphalt base mix for full
thickness of patch and, while still hot, compact flush with adjacent surface.
d)
Placing Patch Material: Partially fill excavated pavements with hot-mix asphalt base mix and,
while still hot, compact. Cover asphalt base course with compacted, hot-mix surface layer
finished flush with adjacent surfaces.
Repairs on Existing Pavement

a)
Leveling Course: Install and compact leveling course consisting of hot-mix asphalt surface
course to level sags and fill depressions deeper than 25mm in existing pavements.
1.
b)

01 June 2016
Install leveling wedges in compacted lifts not exceeding 75mm thick.
Crack and Joint Filling: Remove existing joint filler material from cracks or joints to a depth of
6mm.
1.
Clean cracks and joints in existing hot-mix asphalt pavement.
2.
Use emulsified-asphalt slurry to seal cracks and joints less than 6mm wide. Fill flush with
surface of existing pavement and remove excess.
321216 / 9
AECOM Middle East

ASPHALT PAVING

Enabling Works
3.
H.
Installation Tolerances
1.
2.
3.
I.
Pavement Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the following
tolerances:
a)
Base Course: 13mm.
b)
Surface Course: +6mm, no minus.
Pavement Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within
the following tolerances as determined by using a 3m straightedge applied transversely or
longitudinally to paved areas:
a)
Base Course: 6mm.
b)
Surface Course: 3mm.
c)
Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown. Maximum
allowable variance from template is 6mm.
Asphalt Traffic-Calming Devices, Site Formed: Compact and form asphalt to produce the contour
indicated and within a tolerance of 3mm of height indicated above pavement surface.
Surface Treatments
1.
Fog Seals: Apply fog seal at a rate of 0.45L/ m to 0.7L/ m to existing asphalt pavement and allow
to cure. With fine sand, lightly dust areas receiving excess fog seal.
2.
Slurry Seals: Apply slurry coat in a uniform thickness in accordance with ASTM D3910 and allow
to cure.
a)
J.
Roll slurry seal to remove ridges and provide a uniform, smooth surface.
Pavement Markings
1.
Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified with
2.
Allow paving to age for 30 days before starting pavement marking.
3.
Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust.
4.
Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings, of dimensions indicated,
with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a minimum
wet film thickness of 0.4mm.
a)
3.4
Use hot-applied joint sealant to seal cracks and joints more than 6mm wide. Fill flush with
surface of existing pavement and remove excess.
Broadcast glass beads uniformly into wet pavement markings at a rate of 0.72 kg/ L.

A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Thickness: In-place compacted thickness of hot-mix asphalt courses shall be determined according to
ASTM D3549.
C.
Surface Smoothness: Finished surface of each hot-mix asphalt course shall be tested for compliance
with smoothness tolerances.
D.
Asphalt Traffic-Calming Devices, Site-Formed: Finished height of traffic-calming devices above pavement
shall be measured for compliance with tolerances.

01 June 2016
321216 / 10
AECOM Middle East

ASPHALT PAVING

Enabling Works
E.
In-Place Density: Testing agency shall take samples of uncompacted paving mixtures and compacted
pavement in accordance with ASTM D979.
1.
Reference maximum theoretical density shall be determined by averaging results from four samples
of hot-mix asphalt-paving mixture delivered daily to Site, prepared in accordance with ASTM D2041,
and compacted according to job-mix specifications.
2.
In-place density of compacted pavement shall be determined by testing core samples in accordance
with ASTM D1188 or ASTM D2726.
a)
One core sample shall be taken for every 836m or less of installed pavement, with no fewer
than three cores taken.
b)
Field density of in-place compacted pavement shall also be determined by nuclear method in
accordance with ASTM D2950 and correlated with ASTM D1188 or ASTM D2726.
F.
Replace and compact hot-mix asphalt where core tests were taken.
G.
Remove and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt where test results or measurements indicate
that it does not comply with specified requirements.
3.5
WASTE HANDLING AND DISPOSAL

A.
Except for materials indicated to be recycled, remove excavated materials and milled asphalt from Site
and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.
1.
Do not allow milled materials to accumulate on Site.

END OF SECTION

01 June 2016
321216 / 11
AECOM Middle East

ASPHALT PAVING

Enabling Works
SECTION 321600 -- CURBS AND GUTTERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
1.2
SUBMITTALS
1.3
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1.6
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION
2.2
2.3
MATERIALS
2.4
MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
2.5
FABRICATION
2.6
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
3.2
PREPARATION
3.3
INSTALLATION
10
3.4
12
3.5
13
3.6
PROTECTION
13

01 June 2016
321600
AECOM Middle East

CURBS AND GUTTERS

Enabling Works
SECTION 321600 -- CURBS AND GUTTERS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
D.
Section Includes
1.
1.2
Curbs, gutters and sidewalks.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
1.3
1.
Shop Drawings.
2.
Product Data on materials and components for use.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Method Statement.
8.
Quality Plan.
9.

1.
3 No. samples of each type of curbs.
2.
Joint fillers.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.
1.4
Warranties.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Curb and Gutter Suppliers

1.
Obtain units and associated materials from manufacturers having at least 10 years' experience of
producing similar items.

01 June 2016
321600 / 1
AECOM Middle East

CURBS AND GUTTERS

Enabling Works
2.
Certification to ISO 9001 or operates a quality system acceptable to the Contract Administrator.
B.
Provide quality benchmark installations, testing and inspections in accordance with the Employer General
Requirements.
C.
Quality Benchmark Installation

1.
D.
Following agreement of samples, an area of 25m of each type of module in location to be agreed.

1.
resisting abrasion from pedestrian traffic (hands, rings, luggage, cloth, shoes, etc.) and any other
abrasion resulting from adjacent traffic movements.
2.
Adhesion and Compatibility Test Reports: From latex-additive manufacturer for mortar and grout
containing latex additives.
3.
Sieve Analyses: For aggregate setting-bed materials, in accordance with ASTM C 136.
4.
Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Submit to latex-additive manufacturer, for

testing as indicated below, samples of paving materials that will contact or affect mortar and grout
that contain latex additives.
a)
1.5
Use manufacturer's standard test methods to determine whether mortar and grout materials
will obtain optimum adhesion with, and will be non-staining to, installed pavers and other
materials constituting paver installation.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.
Delivery: Carefully pack and load the curb and gutter units to prevent damage without causing staining
or discoloration. Deliver bulk materials in sealed bags clearly marked with their weight and products in
unopened manufacturer's packaging, clearly identified with relevant information.
B.
Storage
C.
1.6
1.
Store curb and gutter units on wood platforms at least 100mm clear of the ground and protect with
waterproof covers to prevent staining. Store products in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. Store bulk materials on impervious bases and in separate bins to prevent
contamination.
2.
Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use
cementitious materials that have become damp.
3.
Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination avoided.
4.
Store liquids in tightly closed containers protected from freezing.
5.
Store asphalt cement and other bituminous materials in tightly closed containers.
Handling: Handle curb and gutter units carefully to avoid damage to face and edges. Reject damaged
materials or those otherwise unfit for use.
A.
B.
Temperature
1.
Do not use any cement-based materials when the temperature is below 4C and falling.
2.
Protect uncured work from damage, sunlight and rapid drying. Provide insulated and polyethylene
as applicable.
Precipitation

01 June 2016
321600 / 2
AECOM Middle East

CURBS AND GUTTERS

Enabling Works
C.
D.
1.
Do not use saturated materials.
2.
Do not perform grading or compaction of sub-bases when the ground is saturated or covered with
standing water.
3.
Protect formed levels and prepared bases from heavy rainfall.
4.
Do not carry out paving work during rainfall.
5.
Protect items set with mortar from rain until fully cured, with suitable covers.
Weather Limitations for Bituminous Setting Bed

1.
Install bituminous setting bed only when ambient temperature is above 4C and when base is dry.
2.
Apply asphalt adhesive only when ambient temperature is above 10C and when temperature has
not been below 2C for 12 hours immediately before application. Do not apply when setting bed is
wet or contains excess moisture.
Weather Limitations for Mortar and Grout

1.
Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI

530.1/ ASCE 6/ TMS 602. Provide artificial shade and windbreaks and use cooled materials as
required. Do not apply mortar to substrates with temperatures of 38C and higher.
a)
When ambient temperature exceeds 38C or when wind velocity exceeds 13 km/ h and ambient
temperature exceeds 32C, set pavers within 1 minute of spreading setting-bed mortar.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION
A.
Source of Supply
1.
B.
Concrete Curb
1.
C.
Obtain each type of unit curb or gutter, joint material and setting material from single source with
resources to provide materials and products of consistent quality in appearance and physical
properties.
Description: Precast concrete curbs with slip resistant finish to areas indicated on the Design
Drawings of suitable thickness and bedding to achieve the required performance criteria stated in
the Specification.
a)
Nominal Size: As indicated on the Design Drawings.
b)
Color: Natural/ buff.
2.
Sub-base: Refer to the Structural Engineer's specification.
3.
Bedding: Sand/ cement mortar.
4.
Joints: 10mm dry mortar joints.
5.
Pattern: As indicated on the Design Drawings.
6.
Edge Restraints: Manufacturer's standard plastic or metal edge restraints.
Concrete Gutter
1.
Description: Precast concrete gutters with slip resistant finish to areas indicated on the Design
Drawings of suitable thickness and bedding to achieve the required performance criteria stated in
the Specification.

01 June 2016
321600 / 3
AECOM Middle East

CURBS AND GUTTERS

Enabling Works
2.2
a)
Nominal Size: As indicated on the Design Drawings.
b)
Color: Natural/ buff.
2.
Sub-base: Refer to the Structural Engineer's specification.
3.
Bedding: Sand/ cement mortar.
4.
Joints: 10mm dry mortar joints.
5.
Pattern: As indicated on the Design Drawings.
A.
B.
C.
Specific Movements
1.
The works shall be detailed, manufactured and installed to accommodate all movements of the
substrates without damage or any reduction in the performance.
2.
Provide all necessary movement joints to accommodate the movements to which the paving is
expected to be subjected, whether indicated on the Design Drawings or not.
3.
Show all movement joints on the Shop Drawings, which shall be subject to acceptance by the
4.
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that movement joint thicknesses are adequate.
5.
The work shall not deflect under loading in any way that is detrimental to any element of the work
Specific Dead Loads

1.
The work's own dead load shall be accommodated locally and without causing deflections or
movements that affect abutting elements.
2.
The dead loads derived from permanent fixtures or services attached to the surfaces of the work
shall be accommodated without any reduction in performance.
Specific Live Loads

1.
The work shall be capable of accommodating the following live loads without any reduction in
performance:
a)
Movements of the concrete slabs and loads imposed upon them.
b)
All loads resulting from movements of the structure as a whole.
c)
Working loads up to 11.5-ton axle load shared between two wheels with assumed 300mm x
300mm area of tyres producing an ultimate load of 1.8N/ mm.
D.
Stone Abrasion Resistance: Minimum value of 10, based on testing according to ASTM C 241 or ASTM
C 1353.
E.
Static Coefficient of Friction (slip resistance): To ASTM C 1028, minimum value of 0.6 for level surfaces.
F.

1.
Thermal Movement: It shall be ensured that the work is capable of withstanding differential surface
temperatures without any reduction in the specified performance. Any movement joints, as
necessary to cater for any thermal movement, shall be provided.
2.
Moisture Movement

01 June 2016
321600 / 4
AECOM Middle East

CURBS AND GUTTERS

Enabling Works
a)
3.
The work shall withstand the following movement without permanent deformation or any
reduction in the specified performance:
1.
Due to changes in the moisture content of its components, resulting from variations in
the moisture content of the air.
2.
Due to drying shrinkage of building components, both short term and long term.
Strength and Physical Properties of Stone

a)
b)
c)
Stone supplied for use in accordance with the Specification shall comply with the following:
1.
Slip resistance, to recognized procedure.
2.
Staining potential, to recognized procedure.
3.
Coefficient of thermal expansion, to recognized procedure.
4.
Cyclic heating and cooling, to recognized procedure.
Provide information and values for review by the Contract Administrator for the following test
criteria:
1.
Petrographic description: No deleterious constituents.
2.
Density: 2560kg/ m minimum.
3.
Water absorption: 0.40% maximum.
4.
Flexural strength under concentrated load shall be 10.34 Mpa minimum (wet). Note: Tests
shall be performed at proposed project thickness.
5.
Abrasion resistance: Provide values for assessment.
6.
Slip resistance: Provide values for assessment (dry and wet). Note: Tests shall be
performed at proposed project thickness.
Surface Finish
1.
2.3
Staining potential: Non-susceptible.
MATERIALS
A.
B.
Curbs and Edge Restraints

1.
Plastic Edge Restraints: Manufacturer's standard triangular PVC extrusions designed to serve as
edge restraints for unit pavers.
2.
Steel Edge Restraints: Manufacturer's standard painted steel edging.
3.
Aluminum Edge Restraints: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum edging.
4.
Precast Concrete Curbs: Made from normal-weight concrete.
5.
Stone Curbs: Granite curbing, produced in random lengths not less than 900mm from granite in
accordance with ASTM C 615.
Accessories
1.
Cork Joint Filler: Preformed strips in accordance with ASTM D 1752, Type II.
2.
Compressible Foam Filler: Preformed strips in accordance with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1.

01 June 2016
321600 / 5
AECOM Middle East

CURBS AND GUTTERS

Enabling Works
C.
Bedding Materials
1.
Aggregate Setting-Bed Materials

a)
Graded Aggregate for Subbase: Sound, crushed stone or gravel in accordance with ASTM D
448 for Size No. 57 for light traffic uses and ASTM D 2940, subbase material for heavy-duty
applications.
b)
Graded Aggregate for Base: Sound, crushed stone or gravel in accordance with ASTM D 448
for Size No. 8 for light traffic uses and ASTM D 2940, base material for heavy-duty applications.
c)
Sand for Leveling Course: Sound, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone complying
with gradation requirements in ASTM C 33 for fine aggregate.
d)
Stone Screenings for Leveling Course: Sound stone screenings in accordance with ASTM D
448 for Size No. 10.
e)
Sand for Joints: Fine, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone with 100% passing 1.18mm
sieve and no more than 10% passing 0.075mm sieve.
1.
f)
g)
h)
2.
Provide sand of color needed to produce required joint color.
Separation Geotextile: Woven geotextile fabric, manufactured for separation applications;

made from polyolefins or polyesters, with elongation less than 50%; complying with AASHTO
M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced:
1.
Survivability: Class 2, AASHTO M 288.
2.
Apparent Opening Size: 0.250mm sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751.
3.
Permittivity: 0.02 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491.
4.
UV Stability: 50% after 500 hours' exposure, ASTM D 4355.
Drainage Geotextile: Nonwoven needle-punched geotextile fabric, manufactured for

subsurface drainage applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters, with elongation greater
than 50%, complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods
referenced:
1.
Survivability: Class 2, AASHTO M 288.
2.
Apparent Opening Size: 0.425mm sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751.
3.
Permittivity: 0.5 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491.
4.
UV Stability: 50% after 500 hours' exposure, ASTM D 4355.
Herbicide: Commercial chemical for weed control, registered with the EPA. Provide in granular,
liquid or wettable powder form.
Bituminous Setting-Bed Materials

a)
Primer for Base: ASTM D 2028, cutback asphalt, grade as recommended by unit curb or gutter
manufacturer.
b)
Fine Aggregate for Setting Bed: ASTM D 1073, No. 2 or No. 3.
c)
Asphalt Cement: ASTM D 3381, Viscosity Grade AC-10 or Grade AC-20.
d)
Neoprene-Modified Asphalt Adhesive: Curb or gutter manufacturer's standard adhesive

consisting of oxidized asphalt combined with 2% neoprene and 10% long-fibered mineral fibers
containing no asbestos.

01 June 2016
321600 / 6
AECOM Middle East

CURBS AND GUTTERS

Enabling Works
e)
Sand for Joints: Fine, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone with 100% passing 1.18mm
sieve and no more than 10% passing 0.075mm sieve.
1.
3.
D.
Mortar Setting-Bed Materials

a)
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II.
b)
Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
c)
Sand: ASTM C 144.
d)
Latex Additive: Manufacturer's standard water emulsion, serving as replacement for part or all
of gaging water, of type specifically recommended by latex-additive manufacturer for use with
field-mixed Portland cement and aggregate mortar bed, and not containing a retarder.
e)
Thinset Mortar: Latex-modified Portland cement mortar complying with ANSI A118.4.
f)
Water: Potable.
g)
Reinforcing Wire Fabric: Galvanized, welded wire fabric, in accordance with ASTM A 185/ A
185M and ASTM A 82/ A 82M except for minimum wire size.
Grout Materials
1.
Natural Stone Grout: The grouting compound shall be accepted by the tile manufacturer. Confirm
details of the proposed grout to the Contract Administrator.
2.
Sand-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.10, composed of white or gray cement and white or
colored aggregate as required to produce color indicated.
a)
2.4
Provide sand of color needed to produce required joint color.
Colored Mortar Pigments for Grout: Natural and synthetic iron and chromium oxides,
compounded for use in mortar and grout mixes. Use only pigments that have proved, through
testing and experience, to be satisfactory for use in Portland cement grout.
3.
Standard Cement Grout: In accordance with ANSI A118.6, sanded.
4.
Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: In accordance with ANSI A118.7, sanded.
5.
Thinset Mortar: Latex-modified Portland cement mortar complying with ANSI A118.4.
6.
Water: Potable.
E.
Grout Sealer: A proprietary water-based sealer that resists water, oil and acid-based contaminants,
simplifies maintenance and does not change the appearance of the grout.
F.
Stone Sealer: Thin uniform film of proprietary seal to be applied to stone and slate.
G.
Reinforcement
1.
Reinforcement in mortar bedding shall be in accordance with the Structural Engineer's requirements.
2.
The final selection/ type of reinforcement shall be determined subject to acceptance by the Contract
Administrator.
H.
Sealant Movement Joints: Sealant movement joints shall be provided where necessary.
I.
Preformed Strip/ Section Movement Joints: Where indicated on the Design Drawings, preformed strip/
section movement joints shall be provided and fixed in accordance with the manufacturer's written
recommendations.
MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

01 June 2016
321600 / 7
AECOM Middle East

CURBS AND GUTTERS

Enabling Works
A.
General: Comply with referenced standards and with manufacturers' written instructions for mix
proportions, mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing times and other procedures
needed to produce setting-bed and joint materials of uniform quality and with optimum performance
characteristics. Discard mortars and grout if they have reached their initial set before being used.
B.
Mortar-Bed Bond Coat: Mix neat cement, water and latex additive to a creamy consistency. Use water
only when stated as appropriate by the manufacturer in the mix instructions.
C.
Portland Cement-Lime Setting-Bed Mortar: Type M in accordance with ASTM C 270, Proportion
Specification.
D.
Latex-Modified, Portland Cement Setting-Bed Mortar: Proportion and mix Portland cement, sand and
latex additive for setting bed in accordance with written instructions of latex-additive manufacturer and
as necessary to produce stiff mixture with a moist surface when bed is ready to receive pavers.
E.
Latex-Modified, Portland Cement Bond Coat: Proportion and mix Portland cement, aggregate and liquid
latex for bond coat in accordance with written instructions of liquid-latex manufacturer.
F.
Thinset Mortar Bond Coat: Proportion and mix thinset mortar ingredients according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
G.
Job-Mixed Portland Cement Grout: Proportion and mix job-mixed Portland cement and aggregate grout
to match setting-bed mortar except omit hydrated lime and use enough water to produce a pourable
mixture.
H.
2.5
1.
Pigmented Grout: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required.
Do not exceed pigment-to-cement ratio of 1 to 10 by weight.
2.
Colored-Aggregate Grout: Produce color required by combining colored aggregates with Portland
cement of selected color.
Packaged Grout Mix: Proportion and mix grout ingredients according to grout manufacturer's written
instructions.
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate stone in accordance with requirements indicated and with the following references.
1.
B.
Cut to the required shape out of solid stone blocks.
C.
Form units in the largest lengths practical, with ends cut to maintain a consistent joint width of 10mm.
Form curved sections with parallel sides except for a tight radius bend where they shall be cut from an
appropriately sized square of stone.
D.
Apply the required finish to exposed faces.
E.
Mixing: Mix mortar materials in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
F.
Tolerances
G.
2.6
For stone not otherwise indicated, comply with recommendations in Marble Institute of America's
(MIA) "Dimension Stone - Design Manual."
1.
The specified slab thickness dimensions shall be minimum, with an upper limit of +5mm.
2.
Width and lengths of varying sizes shall not deviate by more than 2mm of the described size.
Manufacturing Tolerances
1.
Curb and gutter sizes stated in the Specification are nominal and the actual sizes required to meet
the joint sizes shall be determined by the Contractor.
2.
Units shall be butted/ manufactured with the tolerance of 0.5mm.

01 June 2016
321600 / 8
AECOM Middle East

CURBS AND GUTTERS

Enabling Works
A.
B.
Testing of Curb and Gutter

1.
All sampling and testing of the natural stone units shall be carried out in accordance with the
standards specified.
2.
Additional testing and sampling shall be performed if the works do not comply with the Specification.
3.
Acceptance shall only be given to complying curb and/ or gutter. Inform the Contract Administrator
of test results for paving not originally complying. The official certification of test results shall be
given after acceptance and before manufacture of the curb and/ or gutter.
4.
As soon as the sources of the units have been accepted, instruct the testing authority to carry out
the following tests:
a)
Compressive strength.
b)
Absorption percentage.
c)
Soluble salt content.
d)
Drying shrinkage or moisture expansion.
e)
Mechanical test on completion, 5% of units shall be tested to prove adequate bedding adhesion.
Mortar Testing
1.
All tests on wet or hardened mortar samples shall be carried out in accordance with the standards
specified.
2.
Samples shall be taken at the point of mixing or use. The frequency of sampling shall be in accordance
with the standards specified.
3.
Additional tests and sampling shall be performed if the mortar does not comply with the Specification.
4.
Subject to the test results, the specified nominal mix proportions shall be adjusted and tested.
5.
Unless acceptance is obtained to the contrary, the consistency of fresh mixed mortar shall comply
with the quality recommended in the standards specified.
6.
Any curb and/ or gutter containing mortar that does not comply with the requirements of the
Specification shall be demolished and removed.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verification of Conditions: Prior to commencing installation, examine the substrate, adjacent construction
and conditions in which the work will be installed. Verify dimensions, bases and surfaces to receive the
work of this Section. Notify the Contract Administrator of unsatisfactory conditions.
B.
Where curbs and gutters are to be installed over waterproofing, waterproofing installation shall be
examined with waterproofing Installer present, for protection from paving operations, including areas
where waterproofing system is turned up or flashed against vertical surfaces.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and waterproofing
protection is in place.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Remove substances from concrete substrates that could impair mortar bond, including curing and sealing
compounds, form oil and laitance.
B.
Sweep concrete substrates to remove dirt, dust, debris and loose particles.

01 June 2016
321600 / 9
AECOM Middle East

CURBS AND GUTTERS

Enabling Works
C.
Acceptance of Base
1.
3.3
Before starting work, the points stated below shall be followed:

a)
The base shall be sound, clean and suitably close textured.
b)
The levels and falls of the base shall be as detailed, within the specified tolerance of 12mm.
c)
Drainage outlets shall be within +0 to -10mm of the required finished level.
INSTALLATION
A.
General
1.
Do not use unit curbs and gutters with chips, cracks, voids, discolorations or other defects that might
be visible or cause staining in finished work.
2.
Cut curb and gutter units with motor-driven masonry saw equipment to provide clean, sharp,
unchipped edges. Cut units to provide pattern indicated and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full
units without cutting where possible. Hammer cutting shall not be acceptable.
3.
Joint Pattern: As indicated on the Design Drawings or match and continue existing curb and gutter
unit joint pattern.
4.
Curbs and/ or Gutters over Waterproofing: Exercise care in placing curbs and/ or gutters and setting
materials over waterproofing so protection materials are not displaced and waterproofing is not
punctured or otherwise damaged. Carefully replace protection materials that become displaced
and arrange for repair of damaged waterproofing before covering with paving.
a)
5.
Tolerances: Do not exceed 0.8mm unit-to-unit offset from flush (lippage) nor 3mm in 3m from level,
or indicated slope, for finished surface of curb and/ or gutter.
6.
Expansion and Control Joints: Provide for sealant-filled joints at locations and of widths indicated.
Provide compressible foam filler as backing for sealant-filled joints unless otherwise indicated.
Where unfilled joints are indicated, provide temporary filler until curb and/ or gutter installation is
complete. Install joint filler before setting curbs and/ or gutters.
7.
Provide curb edge restraints as indicated. Install edge restraints before placing curb units.
8.
B.
Provide joint filler at waterproofing that is turned up on vertical surfaces unless otherwise
indicated; where unfilled joints are indicated, provide temporary filler or protection until curb
and/ or gutter installation is complete.
a)
Install curb edge restraints in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Install stakes
at intervals required to hold edge restraints in place during and after curb unit installation.
b)
For metal curb edge restraints with top edge exposed, drive stakes at least 25mm below top
edge.
Regularity:
a)
Sudden irregularities shall not occur.
b)
Where appropriate in relation to the geometry of the surface, the variation in gap under a 3m
straightedge (with feet placed anywhere on the surface) shall be not more than 6mm.
c)
The difference in level between adjacent curb and/ or gutter units shall be not more than 2mm.
Aggregate Setting-Bed Applications

1.
Compact soil subgrade uniformly to at least 95% of laboratory density in accordance with ASTM D
698 or ASTM D 1557.

01 June 2016
321600 / 10
AECOM Middle East

CURBS AND GUTTERS

Enabling Works
2.
Proof-roll prepared subgrade to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Excavate soft
spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined by the Contract
Administrator, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed.
3.
Place separation geotextile over prepared subgrade, overlapping ends and edges at least 300mm.
4.
Place aggregate subbase and base, compact by tamping with plate vibrator and screed to depth
indicated.
5.
Place aggregate subbase and base, compact to 100% of ASTM D 1557 maximum laboratory density
and screed to depth indicated.
6.
Place drainage geotextile over compacted base course, overlapping ends and edges at least
300mm.
7.
Place leveling course and screed to a thickness of 25mm-38mm, taking care that moisture content
remains constant and density is loose and uniform until curbs and/ or gutters are set and compacted.
8.
Treat leveling course with herbicide to inhibit growth of grass and weeds.
9.
Set curb and/ or gutter units with a minimum joint width of 1.5mm and a maximum of 3mm, being
careful not to disturb leveling base. If curbs have spacer bars, place curbs hand tight against spacer
bars. Use string lines to keep straight lines. Fill gaps between units that exceed 10mm with pieces
cut to fit from full-size curb units.
a)
When installation is performed with mechanical equipment, use only curb units with spacer
bars on sides of each unit.
10. Spread dry sand and fill joints immediately after setting curb units into leveling course. Add sand
until joints are completely filled, then remove excess sand. Leave a slight surplus of sand on the
surface for joint filling.
11. Do not allow traffic on installed curbs until sand has been suitably filled into joints.
12. Repeat joint-filling process 30 days later.
C.
D.
Bituminous Setting-Bed Applications

1.
Place bituminous setting bed where indicated and in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions. Spread mix at a minimum temperature of 121C.
2.
Apply neoprene-modified asphalt adhesive to cold setting bed by squeegeeing or troweling to a

uniform thickness of 1.6mm. Proceed with setting of curb units only after adhesive is tacky and
surface is dry to touch.
3.
Place curb units carefully by hand in straight courses, maintaining accurate alignment and uniform
top surface. Protect newly laid curb units with plywood panels on which workers can stand. Advance
protective panels as work progresses but maintain protection in areas subject to continued
movement of materials and equipment to avoid creating depressions or disrupting alignment of curbs.
4.
Joint Treatment: Place curb units with hand-tight joints. Fill joints by sweeping sand over paved
surface until joints are filled. Remove excess sand after joints are filled.
Mortar Setting-Bed Applications

1.
Saturate concrete subbase with clean water several hours before placing setting bed. Remove
surface water about one hour before placing setting bed.
2.
Apply mortar-bed bond coat over surface of concrete subbase about 15 minutes before placing
mortar bed. Limit area of bond coat to avoid its drying out before placing setting bed. Do not exceed
1.6mm thickness for bond coat.
3.
Apply mortar bed over bond coat; spread and screed mortar bed to uniform thickness at subgrade
elevations required for accurate setting of curbs to finished grades indicated.

01 June 2016
321600 / 11
AECOM Middle East

CURBS AND GUTTERS

Enabling Works
4.
Place reinforcing wire over concrete subbase, lapped at joints by at least one full mesh and supported
so mesh becomes embedded in the middle of mortar bed. Hold edges back from vertical surfaces
approximately 13mm.
5.
Place mortar bed with reinforcing wire fully embedded in middle of mortar bed. Spread and screed
mortar bed to uniform thickness at subgrade elevations required for accurate setting of curbs to
finished grades indicated.
6.
Mix and place only that amount of mortar bed that can be covered with curb units before initial set.
Before placing curb units, cut back, bevel edge, and remove and discard setting-bed material that
has reached initial set.
7.
Place curb units before initial set of cement occurs. Immediately before placing curbs on mortar
bed, apply uniform 1.5mm thick bond coat to mortar bed or to back of each paver with a flat trowel.
8.
Tamp or beat curb units with a wooden block or rubber mallet to obtain full contact with setting bed
and to bring finished surfaces within indicated tolerances. Set each curb unit in a single operation
before initial set of mortar; do not return to areas already set or disturb curb units for purposes of
realigning finished surfaces or adjusting joints.
9.
Spaced Joint Widths: Provide suitable joint width as recommended by the manufacturer with
variations not exceeding 1.5mm.
10. Grouted Joints: Grout curb joints in accordance with ANSI A108.10.
11. Grout joints as soon as possible after initial set of setting bed.
a)
Force grout into joints, taking care not to smear grout on adjoining surfaces.
b)
Clean curb units as grouting progresses by dry brushing or rubbing with dry burlap to remove
smears before tooling joints.
c)
Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint
thickness unless otherwise indicated.
d)
If tooling squeezes grout from joints, remove excess grout and smears by dry brushing or
rubbing with dry burlap and tool joints again to produce a uniform appearance.
12. Cure grout by maintaining in a damp condition for seven days unless otherwise recommended by
grout or liquid-latex manufacturer.
E.
Movement Joint Metal Edgings: Fastening shall be bedded in cement and sand/ screwed to plugs at
600mm centers, to exact finished level of curbs.
F.
Sealant Movement Joints: Joints shall extend through curbs and/ or gutters and bedding to substrate.
Joints shall coincide with any movement joints left in the substrate.
3.4

A.
Testing Apparatus
1.
On Site, the following apparatus shall be maintained in good repair:

a)
Maximum and minimum thermometers as and where required.
b)
Soil thermometers as required for measuring the mortar and ground temperatures.
c)
Apparatus for carrying out the test described in the standards specified.
d)
Syphon can, Gammon Morgan or Speedy apparatus for measuring the moisture content of
aggregate.
e)
Apparatus for carrying out the test described in the standards specified.
f)
Apparatus for making mortar cubes or prisms in accordance with the standards specified.

01 June 2016
321600 / 12
AECOM Middle East

CURBS AND GUTTERS

Enabling Works
g)
3.5
Apparatus for measuring the air content of the mortar in accordance with the standards
specified.

A.
Cleaning: Remove dirt, stains, and discoloration without damage to installed materials. Clean drains,
channels and gullies of debris.
1.
Remove temporary protective coating as recommended by coating manufacturer and as acceptable

to curb and/ or gutter and grout manufacturers.
2.
Do not allow protective coating to enter floor drains. Trap, collect and remove coating material.
B.
Adjusting: Remove and replace broken, chipped, stained or otherwise defective units, or units which do
not match as intended. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in same manner as original
units, with same joint treatment and with no evidence of replacement. Make good or replace adjoining
work marred by the curb and/ or gutter installation, to the acceptance of the Contract Administrator.
C.
Pointing: During tooling of joints, enlarge voids or holes and completely fill with grout. Point joints at
sealant joints to provide a neat, uniform appearance, properly prepared for sealant application.
3.6
PROTECTION
A.
Curb units bedded on mortar shall be kept free from pedestrian traffic as recommended by the
manufacturer.
B.
Access to curbed areas shall be restricted as necessary to prevent damage from Site traffic.
C.
Site traffic to areas with geotextile shall be avoided until the upper granular sub-base has been fully laid
with the prior acceptance of the Contract Administrator.
END OF SECTION

01 June 2016
321600 / 13
AECOM Middle East

CURBS AND GUTTERS

Enabling Works
SECTION 331000 -- WATER UTILITIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
1.2
SUBMITTALS
1.3
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
2.2
PRODUCT SELECTION
2.3
DESIGN CRITERIA
2.4
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
3.2
INSTALLATION
3.3

01 June 2016
331000
AECOM Middle East

WATER UTILITIES

Enabling Works
SECTION 331000 -- WATER UTILITIES

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
the Design Drawings, Preliminaries and the Contract Conditions.
B.
The Contractor shall refer to the latest edition of the Standard Specification issued by the Public Authority
for Electricity and Water (PAEW) for specification clauses that are not listed hereunder.
C.
Where clauses hereunder are similar to the clauses within the Standard Specifications issued by the
Public Authority for Electricity and Water (PAEW), the more stringent shall apply.
D.
Section Includes
E.
1.2
1.
Potable water supply and distribution system.
2.
Potable/ fire fighting water pipeline.
Definitions: The following terms shall have the meanings hereby assigned to them except where the
Contract clearly renders these meanings inapplicable.
1.
"Pipe" means pipe or pipes, bends, fittings, junctions and other specials and fittings and includes
joints, jointing parts and materials.
2.
"Installation" means supplying, hauling, handling, placing, fixing, jointing in position and testing
whether in trench or elsewhere in the Work.
3.
"Pipeline" means those parts of the Work comprising pipe, fittings, connections to the existing
system, chambers, inspection chambers, laterals and all other appurtenances required for proper
functioning, operation and maintenance of the pipeline.
4.
"Utilities" shall mean services ranging from the water, gas and oil supply network, electrical and
telephone network, poles, pylons, lighting columns and traffic signals, storm water drainage and
sewerage network as well as roads, gardens, squares, trees and other public or private services.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product Data
C.
1.
Manufacturer's printed brochures and catalogs with relevant information highlighted (or irrelevant
information struck out), along with unit up of selection criteria.
2.
Include material specification lists which shall summarize the Specification features as outlined in
this Section.
3.
Other necessary data as would provide a complete and adequate specification for re-ordering any
spare part or an exact duplicate of the original from the manufacturer at some future date.
Shop Drawings
1.
Shop Drawings describing the items being submitted and showing the following:
a)
Dimensions.
b)
Physical configurations.
c)
Components and their composition.

01 June 2016
331000 / 1
AECOM Middle East

WATER UTILITIES

Enabling Works
d)
1.3
Coating system.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4

1.
Warranties.
2.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Standards and other Codes of Practice: The Work shall be in accordance with the Standard Specifications
issued by the Public Authority for Electricity and Water (PAEW).
B.
Product manufacture, testing and installation shall comply with the requirements in the Standard
Specification issued by the Public Authority for Electricity and Water (PAEW), unless otherwise accepted
C.
Manufacturers
D.
1.
Obtain materials from manufacturers having at least 10 years' experience of producing similar items.
2.
Manufacturers shall be selected from the list of manufacturers/ vendors as indicated in Standard
3.
All valves shall be manufactured in and supplied from PAEW approved manufacturer.
4.
Certification to ISO 9001 or operates a quality system acceptable to the Contract Administrator.
5.
Shall have a fully equipped technical back-up and service facility in the Sultanate of Oman.
6.
Shall confirm the particular application of the valves for the intended use.
7.
Shall provide a minimum warranty of 5 years based on a replacement basis including labor and
material at no extra cost.
Prior to dispatch from the factory, notify the Contract Administrator, in sufficient time to allow the Contract
Administrator or his representatives to inspect and test the pipes, if so desired.
1.
a)
2.
1.5

a)
24 hours on Site.
b)
48 hours within Muscat and surrounding area.
c)
2 weeks outside the Sultanate of Oman.

A.
General requirements for delivery, storage and handling of products and materials shall be as specified
in the Employer General Requirements.
B.
Storage of Pipes and Appurtenances

01 June 2016
331000 / 2
AECOM Middle East

WATER UTILITIES

Enabling Works
1.
C.
The suppliers shall properly unload and stack the pipes in the storage area and stacks shall be laid
out a regular pattern at no extra cost.
Handling and Transport of Pipeline Materials

1.
The supplier's arrangement for handling, lifting, transporting and stacking pipes and valves shall
ensure that these articles are delivered at store in undamaged and good condition.
2.
Crane and other appliances accepted for use shall be provided wherever it is necessary to lift or
lower pipes, fittings and valves. Such articles shall not be dropped and the suppliers shall provide
the facilities and supervision necessary to ensure that the ends of pipes prepared for jointing and
coating of valves are not damaged or distorted in transit or storage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
The Work included in this Section comprises furnishing all plant, labor, equipment, appliances and
materials and performing all operations in connection with potable water supply and distribution system
in accordance with Standard Specification issued by the Public Authority for Electricity and Water (PAEW)
and other international standards.
B.
Manufacture, factory testing and supply pipes and appurtenances of different materials for potable/ fire
fighting water pipeline as indicated in this Section.
C.
Provide laying, jointing, testing, repairing and retesting where necessary, for the commissioning and
disinfection of pipelines as indicated in this Section.
2.2
PRODUCT SELECTION
A.
B.
Pipes and Fittings

1.
HDPE pipe and fittings shall conform to the requirements as specified in the Standard Specification
2.
Ductile Iron pipe and fittings shall conform to the requirements as specified in the Standard
Pipe Surround
1.
C.
Aluminum Ladders/ Steps

1.
D.
All water supply related concrete and steel structures shall be carried out in accordance with the
Standard Specification issued by the Public Authority for Electricity and Water (PAEW).
Cast Iron Covers and Frames

1.
G.
Concrete and accessories shall conform to the Standard Specification issued by the Public Authority
for Electricity and Water (PAEW).
Inspection and Valve Chambers and Pits

1.
F.
Aluminum ladders/ steps shall conform to Standard Specification issued by the Public Authority for
Electricity and Water (PAEW)..
Concrete
1.
E.
Pipe surround shall conform to the requirements as specified in the Standard Specification issued
by the Public Authority for Electricity and Water (PAEW).
Cast iron covers and frames shall comply with the Standard Specification issued by the Public
Authority for Electricity and Water (PAEW).
Valves and Appurtenances

01 June 2016
331000 / 3
AECOM Middle East

WATER UTILITIES

Enabling Works
1.
H.
Detectable/ Warning Tape

1.
I.
Saddle straps shall comply with the Standard Specification issued by the Public Authority for
Electricity and Water (PAEW)..
Ferrules
1.
2.3
Pipeline marker post, valve sign post and chamber marker post shall comply with the Standard
Saddles Straps
1.
K.
Pipeline detectable/ warning tape shall comply with the Standard Specification issued by the Public
Authority for Electricity and Water (PAEW)..
Pipeline Marker Post, Valve Sign Post and Chamber Marker Post
1.
J.
Valves and appurtenances shall comply with the relevant Work Sections of the Specification
governing the manufacturer and installation in addition to compliance with the Standard Specification
Ferrules shall comply with the Standard Specification issued by the Public Authority for Electricity
and Water (PAEW).
DESIGN CRITERIA
A.
1.
Provide all labor, materials and equipment necessary for providing the pipes, fittings and jointing
materials, transporting to sites, excavation, backfilling and compaction, laying, jointing and testing,
disposal of excess excavated materials and removal of surplus pipes, fittings and jointing materials.
2.
Responsibility for the safety and soundness of all material shall rest with the Contractor.
3.
Carry out any tests, at his cost, needed to satisfy himself regarding the soundness of the pipes,
fittings and jointing materials prior to acceptance testing by the Contract Administrator.
4.
Refer to and comply with the current regulations and Standard Specifications of the Service
authorities in Muscat before commencing any Work adjacent to other utilities. This requirement will
not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for taking every precaution to avoid damage to these
utilities and he shall be held responsible for the cost of repair of all damage and other liability claims
in accordance with the Contract Conditions and the Specification.
5.
Each length of pipe and each fitting shall be marked with the following:
6.
a)
Manufacturing Standard.
b)
Serial number.
c)
Pressure rating in Bars.
d)
Nominal diameter in mm.
e)
Name or trade mark of manufacturer.
f)
Date of manufacture.
g)
Inspection Mark.
All water pipeline materials, fittings, valves and components shall be suitable for carrying potable
water.
a)

01 June 2016
At temperatures up to 50C.
331000 / 4
AECOM Middle East

WATER UTILITIES

Enabling Works
b)
2.4
In climatic and soil conditions encountered in Muscat.
7.
The acceptability of the pipes and fittings will be based on the results of tests carried out in Muscat
at the Contractor's expense and carried out by the Qualified Testing Agency. The frequency and
type of tests required for each pipe material as defined in the Standard Specifications of the Public
Authority for Electricity and Water (PAEW), and certified copies of all records of inspections and
test results shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator.
8.
Services Coordination
a)
Notify other Service Authorities whose services might be affected by the Work regarding the
construction program.
b)
Curtail the construction activities in areas where the services are being relocated by others
until the relocation work is complete.

A.
Inspection and Testing During Manufacturing

1.
The Contract Administrator shall be entitled during manufacturing to inspect, examine and test on
the factory the materials and workmanship of all materials to be supplied under the contract, and if
part of the materials are being manufactured at other factory the supplier shall obtain for the Contract
Administrator permission to inspect, examine and test as if the said materials/ equipment were being
manufactured on the supplier's premises. Such inspection, examination or testing, if made, shall
not release the supplier from any obligation under the Contract Conditions. Facilities shall also be
afforded to the Contract Administrator to carry out inspection of materials and equipment prior to
dispatch to establish the suitability of packing methods and materials.
2.
The supplier shall give the Contract Administrator notice in writing of the date on and the place at
which any material/ equipment will be ready for testing as provided in the Contract Conditions and
unless the Contract Administrator shall attend at the place so named within 14 days of the date
which the supplier has stated in his notice, the supplier may proceed with the tests which shall be
deemed to have been made in the Contract Administrator's presence and shall forthwith forward to
the Contract Administrator duly certified copies of the test readings. The Contract Administrator shall
give the supplier 48 hours' notice in writing of his intention to attend the tests.
3.
Where the supplier provides for tests at the factory, the supplier shall provide such assistance, labor,
materials, electricity, fuel, stores, apparatus and instruments as may be requisite and as may be
reasonably demanded to carry out such tests efficiently.
4.
As and when any material/ equipment shall have passed the tests referred to in this Section, furnish
a certificate in writing to that effect. The supplier shall furnish to the Contract Administrator for his
acceptance the relevant test data in respect of the tests carried out.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
B.
Excavation Support
1.
In accordance with the relevant Sections of the Specification, the Contractor shall provide, install
and maintain supports to the sides to prevent from collapsing or from affecting in any way whatever
the surrounding utilities and properties, whether as a result of collapse of the sides of excavation
and/ or as a result of sliding.
2.
Pipe trench shall be prepared as described in Section 312333 Trenching and Backfill.
Public Safety and Convenience

1.
Do not deposit the earth obtained from excavation and/ or store up or deploy equipment, tools and
plant necessary in locations that will affect the safety of the public, public services or properties
and/ or in such a way that impedes traffic or pedestrians and any other work or public authorities
or private concerns.

01 June 2016
331000 / 5
AECOM Middle East

WATER UTILITIES

Enabling Works
3.2
2.
Backfill promptly all trenches and open cuttings to the standards required by the Contract
Administrator.
3.
Assume responsibility for the sufficiency of the construction safety measures and be liable for
keeping the Work safe at all times.
INSTALLATION
A.
Debris Disposal
1.
B.
C.
Keep the Construction Site neat and clean to the satisfaction of the Contract Administrator by daily
removal of unwanted material arising from demolished pipes and manholes, sewer cleaning and
excavations, rubbish, temporary installations and daily cleaning to remove wind blown sand and
other debris.
a)
All debris shall be removed from the Site to a public disposal location accepted by the Contract
Administrator. The disposal location may be at any distance from the Site, and may be changed
by the Contract Administrator during the time of construction.
b)
Determine any requirements for the disposal of construction material at the accepted location
and comply. Ascertain and allow for these requirements in the Tender return.
2.
Keep the Site free from insect and rodent infestation and shall endeavor to control offensive odors.
Ascertain and comply with the requirements of the Contract Administrator and the Oman Wastewater
Services Company (Haya) for the sanitary precautions.
3.
Upon final completion of the Work, the Contractor shall clear away and remove from the Site all
remaining constructional plant, surplus materials, rubbish and temporary work of every kind and
leave the whole of the Site clean to the satisfaction of the Contract Administrator.
Excavation Work Requirements

1.
The Contractor shall pump out underground water and/ or percolating water that is encountered in
the excavations using well-point dewatering system or as directed by the Contract Administrator
and dispose of such water to places indicated by the Contract Administrator. The Contract
Administrator may allow the disposal of such water in rainwater gullies provided there is no technical
hindrance.
2.
The Contractor shall not dispose of water into sewer pipes, roads, private property or open areas
such as parks or undeveloped lots.
Temporary Work Requirements

1.
Protection of Streets and Sidewalks

a)
Protect streets and sidewalks and shall repair damage caused by construction activity. Comply
with the regulations issued by Muscat Municipality in connection with the use of streets.
b)
Protect all private roads and walks and shall maintain them during the course of the work.
Repair all damage caused by construction activity.
2.
Services Coordination: Provide as described under design criteria within Part 2 of this Section.
3.
Existing Services
a)
Include for all Temporary Work to maintain and protect existing power, lighting, water and
telephone services while the Work are being executed. Temporary shutdown of the services
shall only be made with the prior acceptance of the Contract Administrator and the owner of
the services.
b)
Allow for protecting and maintaining all pipes, ducts and cables met in excavations, for keeping
all ditches, gullies and channels clear and unobstructed and for making good any damage
caused to public or private roads, paths, curbs and drains and paying all costs and charges
incurred.

01 June 2016
331000 / 6
AECOM Middle East

WATER UTILITIES

Enabling Works
c)
4.
Weather Protection
a)
5.
D.
E.
Workmanship
a)
Ensure that all temporary installations are executed in accordance with the requirements of
the authorities concerned.
b)
All Temporary Work shall be properly and adequately maintained and on completion of the
Contract, or when directed by the Contract Administrator, shall be cleared away by the
Contractor. Damage to new or existing work that arises as a result of failure by the Contractor
to provide proper protection shall be repaired or replaced as directed by the Contract
Administrator and shall be at the Contractor's expense.
1.
Above grade exposed installations of uPVC and cPVC shall be solvent welded or flanged according
to the manufacturers' recommendations.
2.
Supports and hangers shall comply with requirements of the Standard Specification issued by the
Public Authority for Electricity and Water (PAEW).
Saddles Straps Installation

Saddle Straps installation shall comply with relevant Sections of the Specification governing the
manufacturer and installation of the material or product in question.
Ferrules Installation
1.
3.3
Provide protection against rain, wind, storms or heat to maintain the work, materials, apparatus
and fixtures free from injury or damage. Work likely to be damaged shall be covered at the
end of each day's work.
Exposed Installations
1.
F.
Refer to other requirements described under design criteria within Part 2 of this Section
regarding Statutory Authority regulations and service authority Standard Specifications
compliance.
Ferrules installation shall comply with relevant Sections of the Specification governing the
manufacturer and installation of the material or product in question.

A.
Pipe Testing
1.
General
a)
Submit a method statement as described in the relevant section of the Standard Specification
issued by the Public Authority for Electricity and Water (PAEW) to the Contract Administrator
for acceptance, covering details of the proposed methods and program for testing, including
details of test equipment.
b)
Provide all necessary components and equipment for carrying out testing and cleaning
including water, pumps, gages, piped connections, stop ends and all other temporary work.
c)
Gages used for testing pressure pipelines shall either be of conventional circular type, not less
than 300mm diameter, calibrated in bars or shall have a digital indicator capable of reading
increments of 0.1bar.
d)
Before any gage is used, arrange for it to be checked independently and a recent certificate
of its accuracy shall be provided to the Contract Administrator.

01 June 2016
1.
One additional gage as above shall be handed over to the Contract Administrator's
representative for purposes of verification during testing.
2.
Calibration of pressure gages shall be carried out by the Contractor at regular intervals
as required by the Contract Administrator at no additional cost to the Employer.
331000 / 7
AECOM Middle East

WATER UTILITIES

Enabling Works
e)
f)
Pipelines shall be properly secured and supported before being put under test.
1.
At pipe ends, provide for transmitting the end thrust into the sides of the trenches.
2.
Ensure that anchorage of bends is sufficient and thrusts from all branch outlets are properly
restrained.
Note that since valves cannot be guaranteed to be perfectly drip-tight, testing against closed
valves shall not be permitted, unless accepted by the Contract Administrator.
1.
Testing against valve chambers or other structures will also be prohibited.
2.
No claims will be entertained on account of leaking valves or any other difficulties

encountered, including the isolation of certain lengths of pipework for testing.
g)
No testing will be permitted until 7 days after other holding down work have been completed,
unless otherwise accepted by the Contract Administrator.
h)
Trenches may not be left open at joints prior to testing pipelines, except as permitted by the
Contract Administrator who may lay down certain restricting conditions.
i)
In addition to any tests of individual joints or other interim tests which may be specified
elsewhere, submit all parts of the pipelines to a final test.
j)
Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Contractor may at any stage of construction carry out such
other tests as he considers desirable to check materials and workmanship on the pipeline.
1.
B.
This shall not relieve the Contractor of his obligations to complete all testing designated
under the Contract.
k)
All water required for testing and cleaning the pipelines shall be potable water and all cost to
supply and transport the water shall be deemed to have been included in the rates bid.
l)
The Contract Administrator shall have power to require the Contractor to vary any test procedure
or pressure as the Contract Administrator thinks fit at no extra cost to the Employer.
m)
Submit an inspection request to the Contract Administrator at least 24 hours before his intention
to test a section of pipeline after having satisfied himself that the section of pipeline to be tested
in the presence of the Contract Administrator is satisfactory in all aspects.
n)
Note that neither the satisfactory testing of a pipeline, section of a pipeline or any other pipework,
nor the acceptance of such testing by the Contract Administrator shall in any way relieve the
Contractor of any of his responsibilities and obligations under the Contract.
o)
When leakage or infiltration exceeds the amount allowed by the Specification, the Contractor
shall, at his own expense, make the necessary repairs or replacements in accordance with
the Specification to reduce the leakage or infiltration to the specified limits.
p)
Any individual detectable leaks shall be repaired, regardless of the results of the test, unless
Interim Pressure Testing

1.
Any pressure lines in the system shall be given an interim pressure test after placement of the pipe
surround.
a)
Unless otherwise indicated, all pressure tests shall be conducted at 1.5 times the working
pressure or the maximum shut-off head, whichever is higher.
2.
Joints shall be left exposed to visually inspect for leaks.
3.
Pipeline shall be divided into sections not exceeding 500m in length, unless otherwise accepted by

01 June 2016
331000 / 8
AECOM Middle East

WATER UTILITIES

Enabling Works
4.
Submit to the Contract Administrator detailed procedures for performing hydrostatic pressure tests
for installed piping, fittings, valves and appurtenances.
5.
If required, suitable stop ends (section of steel pipe about 0.5m to 1.0m long onto which a closing
plate has been welded) containing the necessary openings for accommodating in-going water and
out-coming air may be utilized during the test.
6.
a)
Stop end may also include an opening through which the test water may be pumped from the
line, if necessary.
b)
Stop end may be jointed to the pipe to be tested by means of a standard coupling or other
method accepted by the Contract Administrator.
c)
Thrust blocks or temporary anchorages shall be provided to hold the stop end in place against
the test pressure.
d)
Proprietary restrained joints in lieu of thrust blocks may also be used.
Procedures for performing hydrostatic pressure tests for each section of pipeline shall include:
a)
Location and capacity of the test pump.
b)
Test pressure at the pump as well as that at the highest and lowest points.
c)
Procedures for venting the air from the pipeline.
d)
Disposing the water after satisfactory testing.
7.
Each pipeline or section thereof shall be filled with water and all air removed as far as possible.
8.
Line shall be filled slowly to prevent possible water hammer.
9.
Test pump and gage shall be connected to the pipeline at a location other than the highest point in
the line to facilitate the release of air from the highest point.
10. After filling and before application of the test pressure, maintain the test section at the rated pressure
for a standing period of not less than 24 hours to achieve conditions as stable as possible for testing.
a)
The standing period will commence from the time at which the rated pressure was reached
successfully, after which all exposed joints shall be carefully inspected for evidence of leakage.
11. If neither appreciable movement of the pipeline, nor any leakage has been observed during the
standing period, the section shall be subjected to the specified test pressure.
12. Pumping shall be resumed and the pressure slowly raised to the specified test pressure at the
highest point in the pipeline (or section under test) provided that the pressure at the lowest point of
the pipeline (or section under test) shall not exceed the maximum allowable test pressure.
13. The specified test pressure shall be continuously maintained by the use of the pump for a period
of at least 4 hours and the amount of make up water required to maintain the pressure shall be
accurately measured (to the nearest 1/ 8L) regularly every 30 minutes throughout the test.
14. Pipeline shall be deemed to have passed the test if:
a)
No water is visibly coming out of the pipe or joints at any point.
b)
Amount of make-up water required does not exceed the rate of 0.1L/ mm of pipe diameter, per
km of pipeline, per 24 hours for each 30m head of pressure applied.
c)
Maximum drop in pressure (during the last half hour of the test period, when no further makeup water may be pumped in) shall not exceed 10% of the maximum test pressure.
15. During all testing, the trench and the joint pockets in particular shall be kept clear of water.

01 June 2016
331000 / 9
AECOM Middle East

WATER UTILITIES

Enabling Works
a)
Should the trench become unstable due to leaking from testing or re-testing, it shall be
excavated to solid ground and made up with lean mix concrete or such other material as the
Contract Administrator may direct, all at the Contractor's expense.
16. Should a test fail, the Contractor shall at his own expense replace defective pipes or fittings, repair
leaking joints or otherwise rectify defective work.
17. Cleaning, inspection and testing shall then be repeated until the Work is accepted by the Contract
Administrator at no extra cost to the Employer.
C.
Final Pressure Testing

1.
After interim testing has been satisfactorily completed, all pressure lines shall be given a final
pressure test to be carried out on the entire length of the pipeline after all sections have been joined
together.
2.
Final pipeline test pressures and procedures shall be conducted as described under interim pressure
testing.
3.
Valves and all pipeline appurtenances shall be hydraulically tested together with the pipeline in
which they are installed.
4.
Valves shall be tested for operation under working pressure.

a)
D.
Valves shall be adjusted so that they operate smoothly, seat properly and are installed to
tolerances recommended by the manufacturer.
Inspection of Valve Chambers and Pits

1.
Gate valve chambers, air release valve chambers and washout chambers shall be constructed as
2.
All pipe fittings to be cast into chamber walls shall have a puddle flange with OD at least 25% greater
than the OD of the pipe.
3.
Concrete work shall not begin until the pipe fittings to be cast into the chamber walls are on Site.
4.
a)
Thereafter the chamber shall be cast with proper concrete protection as defined in the Standard
Specification issued by the Public Authority for Electricity and Water (PAEW) and backfilled as
quickly as possible.
b)
No "box outs" will be allowed.
All pipes cast into chamber walls shall be fitted with a temporary internal "jig" to assure proper
alignment and flange orientation is maintained between all interconnecting pipes and fittings during
casting.
a)
Jigs may be made from uPVC pipes, GRP pipes or steel tubing.
5.
Electro fusion coupler shall be provided at one end of the chamber.
6.
Unless otherwise indicated on the Design Drawings, all exterior surfaces below grade shall be
covered with damp-proof membrane.
7.
Chamber covers in traffic areas shall be set to the paved area profile and be flush with the paved
area surface.
8.
Chamber covers located in non-traffic areas shall be set to an elevation as indicated on the Design
Drawings or as directed by the Contract Administrator.
9.
Lifting hook and other hardware as required shall be as described in relevant section of the Standard
10. All chambers shall be watertight on completion.

01 June 2016
331000 / 10
AECOM Middle East

WATER UTILITIES

Enabling Works
a)
No testing for leakage of water into chambers shall be conducted unless it is deemed necessary
in the opinion of the Contract Administrator.
11. Take all measures deemed necessary by the Contract Administrator to ensure that chambers are
not left in a flooded or unprotected condition.
a)
If the designated covers are not on Site after placing the cover slab, a temporary plywood
cover shall be securely fitted in all openings.
END OF SECTION

01 June 2016
331000 / 11
AECOM Middle East

WATER UTILITIES

Enabling Works
SECTION 333000 -- SANITARY SEWERAGE UTILITIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
1.2
SUBMITTALS
1.3
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
3.2
PREPARATION
3.3
INSTALLATION
3.4
SITE QUALITY TESTING
3.5
3.6
PROTECTION

01 June 2016
333000
AECOM Middle East

SANITARY SEWERAGE UTILITIES

Enabling Works
SECTION 333000 -- SANITARY SEWERAGE UTILITIES

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
The Contractor shall refer to the latest edition of the Standard Specification issued by the Oman
Wastewater Services Company (Haya) for specification clauses that are not listed hereunder.
C.
Where clauses hereunder are similar to the clauses within the Standard Specification issued by the
Oman Wastewater Services Company (Haya), the more stringent shall apply.
D.
Section Includes
1.
E.
Definitions
1.
1.2
Precast and cast-in-place concrete manholes, and cast-iron frames and covers.
"Appurtenances": Additional piping items to provide a complete piping system suitable to convey
wastewater as specified and intended. These items may or may not be specified but are necessary
to complete the piping system.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Comply with the requirements of Employer General Requirements and submit the following.
B.

1.
Submit the following in accordance with the Standard Specification issued by the Oman Wastewater
Services Company (Haya).
a)
Pipe materials.
b)
Precast/ cast-in-place manholes.
c)
Manhole frame and covers.
d)
Pipe fittings.
e)
Pipe couplings.
f)
Pipe thrust restraint.
g)
Valves.
h)
Accessories.
i)
Appurtenances.
2.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
3.
Instructions: Provide manufacturer's installation instructions for all materials including but not limited
to pipes and valves.
4.
Field Test Reports: Provide results for all testing performed as indicated in this Section.
5.
Project Record Documents: Provide marked-up set of drawings showing actual locations of piping,
valves, connections, thrust restraints and invert elevations. Identify and describe unexpected
variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities.

01 June 2016
333000 / 1
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
1.3
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Provide in accordance with the Employer General Requirements.
B.
Warranty
1.
1.4
Provide standard product warranties for all sanitary sewerage utility materials and as required by
the Standard Specification issued by the Oman Wastewater Services Company (Haya).
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with the requirements specified in the Standard Specification issued by the Oman Wastewater
Services Company (Haya) .
B.
Perform Work in accordance with Oman Wastewater Services Company (Haya) standards.
1.5

A.
Comply with the requirements specified in the Standard Specification issued by the Oman Wastewater
B.
Deliver and store valves in shipping containers with labeling in place.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION
A.
Provide gravity sanitary sewers and sanitary force mains beyond 1.5m from buildings to municipal sewers
or other discharge system.
B.
Manufacturers: All the manufacturers of following items shall be approved manufacturers of the Oman
Wastewater Services Company (Haya).
1.
Sanitary Sewer Pipe.
2.
Precast Concrete Manhole Structures.
3.
Manhole Frames and Covers.
4.
Valves: Provide valves of the following types:

a)
Gate valves.
b)
Ball valves.
c)
Swing check valves.
d)
Butterfly valves.
e)
Globe valves.
f)
Air relief valves.
g)
Vacuum-relief valves.
h)
Combination air-vacuum valves.
5.
Valve vaults.
6.
Mechanical joint restraint.

01 June 2016
333000 / 2
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
C.
Gravity sanitary sewer pipes, precast and cast-in-place concrete manholes, manhole frame and covers,
valves, valve vaults, bedding and cover materials.
1.
D.
E.
Thrust Restraint
1.
Mechanical Joint Restraint: Wedge action restrained joint retainer gland devices. Mechanical joint
restraint incorporated into the design of the follower gland.
2.
Thrust Blocks: Dimensions according to the Standard Specification issued by the Oman Wastewater
Shop Painting and Coatings

1.
F.
All the sewer pipes and above mentioned accessories used for construction should follow the
Standard Specification issued by the Oman Wastewater Services Company (Haya).
Unless otherwise specified or indicated, provide standard manufacturer paint and coatings for all
piping and valves to prevent corrosion for the life of the component. Additionally comply with the
Standard Specification issued by the Oman Wastewater Services Company (Haya).
Shop Testing
1.
Test all pipes and valves per manufacturer requirements and as required by applicable specification
issued by the Oman Wastewater Services Company (Haya).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Verify that trench cut and excavation base is ready to receive work and that excavations, dimensions
and elevations are as indicated for sanitary sewer pipe. Verify excavation for manholes to proper depth
and proper placement of bedding material.
PREPARATION
A.
Sanitary sewer pipe: Hand trim excavations to required elevations. Correct over-excavation with bedding
material and lean concrete. Remove large stones or other hard matter which could damage pipe or
impede consistent backfilling or compaction.
B.
Manholes: Coordinate placement of inlet and outlet pipe sleeves. Seal exterior surface of sanitary sewer
manholes.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Sanitary Sewer Pipe Installation

1.
Maintain separation of sanitary sewers pipe and water mains as described in the Standard
Specification issued by the Oman Wastewater Services Company (Haya).
2.
Install pipe, fittings, and accessories in accordance with the Standard Specification issued by the
Oman Wastewater Services Company (Haya), and manufacturer's instructions. Joints shall be
sealed watertight.
3.
Lay pipe to slope indicated with maximum variation from true slope of 3.175mm in 3048mm. Lay
pipe upgrade with spigot ends pointing in direction of flow. Lay pipe to form a close concentric joint
with adjoining section and to prevent sudden offsets in flow line.
4.
Install bedding to depths and dimensions as indicated and according to the Standard Specification
issued by the Oman Wastewater Services Company (Haya).
5.
Backfill each section of pipe as it is laid and as indicated at least up to centerline before next joint
is made. Do not completely conceal or bury pipe prior to being tested for water-tightness and prior
to being accepted by the Contract Administrator. Do not displace or damage pipe when compacting.

01 June 2016
333000 / 3
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
6.
Clear the interior of the pipe of dirt and superfluous materials as the work progresses. Keep a
suitable swab or drag in the pipe and pull it forward past each joint immediately after the jointing
has been completed.
7.
Keep trenches and other excavations free of water until final inspection. Do not lay pipe or construct
masonry work in water. Do not allow water to rise over the work until concrete or mortar has had
ample time to set.
8.
Close open ends of pipe and fittings in a manner acceptable to the Contract Administrator when
the work is not in progress so that trench water, earth and other substances shall not enter the pipe
or fittings.
9.
Handle pipe and fittings to avoid damage. Carefully inspect pipe and fittings for defects before
lowering into the trench.
10. Where necessary, deflect pipelines to avoid obstructions or where long-radius curves are indicated.
Do not exceed the maximum deflection recommended by pipe manufacturer. Provide short sections
of pipe as necessary to maintain required line.
11. Provide compatible pipe connections to each valve and to equipment. Provide unions on pipelines
with welded soldered or threaded joints to allow removal of each valve and equipment without
disturbing connecting pipelines. Connect different types of pipe and accessories with flexible
couplings or accepted transition fittings. Provide insulation fittings where ferrous pipe connects to
nonferrous metallic pipe.
12. Verify invert of each existing manhole prior to commencing work. Connect to each existing manhole
where indicated or directed. Prevent debris from entering the pipelines. The work shall include all
necessary concrete work, cutting and shaping of invert.
13. Repair linings, coatings and coverings damaged during construction with accepted materials equal
to and compatible with original lining, coating or covering. Repair damaged galvanizing with zincrich paint.
14. Connect to building sanitary sewer outlet and municipal sewer system as indicated.
15. Construction of New Manholes Over Existing Sanitary Pipelines: Expose existing pipeline and fieldverify its location and invert. Construct each manhole using cast-in-place concrete base slab and
precast manhole section. After invert is shaped, cut top of existing pipe and remove and form channel
on bottom inside manhole.
B.
Precast and Cast-In-Place Concrete Manhole Installation

1.
Maintain separation of sanitary sewer precast concrete manholes and water mains as indicated in
Section 331000 Water Utilities.
2.
Place precast manhole sections plumb and level, adjust to correct elevation. Provide bedding
material as indicated in the Standard Specification issued by the Oman Wastewater Services
Company (Haya).
3.
After manhole assembly, plug lift holes with no shrink grout.
4.
Cut and fit for pipe connections.
5.
Invert Channels:
6.
a)
Build up with concrete, grout or brick and mortar covered smooth and semicircular, conforming
to inside of adjacent sewer section.
b)
Changes in direction of flow made with a smooth curve radius as large as manhole size will
permit.
c)
Slope floor of manhole outside channels, smooth and not less than 25.4mm per 305mm and
not more than 50.8mm per 305mm.
Set manhole frames and covers level to correct elevations.

01 June 2016
333000 / 4
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
7.
C.
3.4
Sanitary sewer drop connections: Provide where indicated. Construct drop connection as indicated
according to the Standard Specification issued by the Oman Wastewater Services Company (Haya).
Valve Installation
1.
Set valves on solid bearing.
2.
Install valves according to applicable Standard Specification issued by the Oman Wastewater
SITE QUALITY TESTING

A.
B.
General
1.
Perform field testing under the provisions of the Standard Specification issued by the Oman
Wastewater Services Company (Haya).
2.
Request inspection by Contract Administrator prior to and immediately after placing bedding.
Cleaning and Testing

1.
Test for Displacement of Buried Sanitary Sewers: After trench has been backfilled and compacted,
after cover over pipeline has been brought to finished grade, and after debris and silt has been
removed, pipelines shall be tested by the Qualified Testing Agency as follows: Light will be flashed
between manholes or, if manholes have not yet been constructed, between locations of manholes
by means of flashlight or by reflecting sunlight with mirror. Correct poor alignment, displaced pipe
and other defects indicated by the Contract Administrator's Closed Circuit Television Inspection if
necessary.
2.
Measure pipelines for vertical ring deflection within 15 days after completion of backfill and at least
4 months after installation, but no later than 30 days before Taking-Over of the project. Limit maximum
ring deflection of pipeline under load to 5% of vertical internal pipe diameter. Relay or replace pipe
exceeding this deflection and retest.
3.
Use deflectometer that produces continuous record of pipe deflection or pull mandrel, sphere or
pin-type go/ no-go device through the pipeline. Make diameter of the go/ no-go device 95% of
undeflected inside diameter of pipe.
4.
Cleaning: Flush out and clean sanitary force mains of foreign matter before placing systems into
operation. Use flushing velocity of 3m per second, minimum. Take care to prevent scale and other
objectionable matter from entering piping. Properly dispose of water used for flushing.
5.
Testing of Sanitary Sewers: At such times as Contract Administrator may direct, prove water tightness
of buried sanitary sewer or portions thereof by one of the following tests:
a)
Conduct tests under supervision of the Contract Administrator. Furnish materials, labor and
equipment required for tests and repair system until test results are satisfactory.
b)
Infiltration: When, in opinion of the Contract Administrator, trench or excavation is sufficiently

saturated by groundwater or rain, tests may be made on basis of infiltration. Infiltration tests
will only be allowed when hydrostatic head outside pipe is minimum of 1.2m above crown of
pipe for entire length of pipe being tested. Measure flow of water at nearest downgrade manhole.
Make 3 series of measurements at intervals of not less than 1 hour and average results. Using
this average, calculate infiltration rate for 24 hour period.
c)
Infiltration rate: Not greater than 100 gallons per inch of pipe diameter per mile per day in any
section of system including manholes.
d)
Ex-filtration: When conditions are not suitable for infiltration test, subject pipe to hydrostatic
head of at least 1.2m above pipe crown. Fill line until appropriate water level is obtained at
selected upstream manhole. Observe rate of drop at this manhole for 1 hour.
e)
Leakage rate: Not to exceed maximum rate allowed for infiltration.
f)
Air Test: At Contractor's option, low-pressure air test may be used instead of ex-filtration test
for vitrified clay, PVC and concrete pipelines 300mm and smaller. Perform tests in accordance
with the Standard Specification issued by the Oman Wastewater Services Company (Haya).

01 June 2016
333000 / 5
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
3.5
g)
Vacuum test: For precast concrete manholes 7.6m deep and less, a vacuum test may be used
instead of ex-filtration test. Conduct tests prior to backfilling and include joint between manhole
cover and frame. Plug and brace pipe openings. Draw vacuum of 255mm inches of mercury.
h)
If manhole fails the test, make necessary repairs and repeat the vacuum test and repairs until
manhole passes test. Submit test results.

A.
Coordinate with Contract Administrator for any field adjustments. The Contract Administrator reserves
the right to reject any field adjustments.
B.
Repair any shop painting and coatings damaged during storage or installation to the Contract
Administrator's satisfaction.
C.
Repair and Restoration

1.
3.6
Repair any existing utilities and structures or features damaged during installation of sanitary
sewerage utilities to Contract Administrator's satisfaction, and at no cost to the project.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect sanitary sewerage utilities from damage throughout storage, installation, testing and final
acceptance.
END OF SECTION

01 June 2016
333000 / 6
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
SECTION 334000 -- STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
1.2
SUBMITTALS
1.3
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION
2.2
DESIGN CRITERIA
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
3.2
INSTALLATION
3.3

01 June 2016
334000
AECOM Middle East

STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES

Enabling Works
SECTION 334000 -- STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
the Design Drawings, Preliminaries and the Contract Conditions.
B.
C.
D.
Section Includes
1.
2.
E.
1.2
General requirements, installation and testing for Storm Water Drainage systems that includes, but
is not limited to, the following:
a)
Pipe testing.
b)
Storm water manholes.
c)
Connections to existing pipelines.
d)
Storm water pipeline and culverts.
Excluded from this Section are the following:

a)
Storm water drainage systems within 1.5m from buildings.
b)
Interceptors, storm separators or sub drainage systems.
Definitions: The following definitions shall pertain to words or phrases as utilized in this Section.
1.
"uPVC" shall mean unplasticized polyvinyl chloride.
2.
"GRP" shall mean glass reinforced plastic.
3.
"RCP" shall mean reinforced concrete pipe.
4.
"DI" shall mean ductile iron.
5.
"Pipe Surround" shall mean that material directly below, around and above the pipe.
6.
"Formation" shall mean the bottom of the trench excavation or in some cases fill just below the pipe
surround.
7.
"Stanks" shall mean concrete barriers within granular pipe surround material.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product Data
1.
Submit sufficient information to the Contract Administrator prior to purchase in order to verify
compliance with the Specification. Such information shall include at least the following items.
a)

01 June 2016
Manufacturer's name.
334000 / 1
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
b)
Supplier's name.
c)
Product name (if applicable).
d)
Product description.
e)
Manufacturer's Technical Data.
f)
Storage instructions.
g)
Installation instructions.
C.
Material samples shall be submitted as required in the relevant sections within the Specification or as
requested by the Contract Administrator.
D.
Method Statements
1.
E.
1.3
Provide method statements meeting the requirements of the Employer General Requirements for
at least the following activities or as requested by the Contract Administrator.
a)
Pipe testing.
b)
Manhole and chamber construction.
c)
Precast channel construction.
Shop Drawings: Submit for the following items.

1.
Manhole and chamber construction.
2.
Precast channel construction.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
1.
Warranties.
2.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
and codes.
B.
Product manufacture, testing and installation shall comply with the following references, unless otherwise
stated in this Section or unless otherwise accepted by the Contract Administrator.
1.
American Society for Testing and Materials, ASTM International Standards:

a)
C.
ASTM D2321 Recommended practice for underground installation of flexible Thermoplastic

sewer pipe.
Prior to dispatch from the factory, notify the Contract Administrator, in sufficient time to allow the Contract
Administrator or his representatives to inspect and test the pipes, if so desired.
1.
a)

01 June 2016
334000 / 2
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
2.
3.

a)
24 hours on Site.
b)
48 hours within Muscat City and surrounding area.
c)
72 hours for other areas within the Sultanate of Oman.
d)
2 weeks outside the Sultanate of Oman.
Inspection Requests shall be submitted to the Contract Administrator during the on Site installation
work prior to proceeding with the following activities. Minimum notification time shall be 24 hours.
a)
1.5
Pipe testing.

A.
General requirements for delivery, storage and handling of products and materials shall be as specified
in the Employer General Requirements.
B.
Specific requirements shall be as specified in the relevant Work Section of the Specification governing
the manufacture and installation of the material or product in question.
C.
Additional requirements may be required as per the manufacturer's recommendations and/ or the
directives of the Contract Administrator.
D.
Products shall be delivered, handled and stored according to the manufacturer's recommendations.
E.
Recommendations along with the following provisions.

1.
Transportation, handling and storage shall at all times be performed in a manner to avoid product
damage.
2.
Only nylon slings shall be allowed for lifting products. Steel chains, clamps or cables shall not be
allowed for lifting purposes, unless accepted by the Contract Administrator.
a)
Steel chains or cables may be allowed for securing products during transport or storage
provided protective padding or wood blocking is utilized.
3.
Do not store products directly on the ground, unless accepted by the Contract Administrator. Ensure
adequate wood blocking is utilized to provide sufficient support.
4.
Visually inspect all products upon delivery and report any damage to the Contract Administrator.
a)
Any products damaged during delivery, storage or installation shall be marked and set aside.
b)
Proposals for repair of any damaged products shall be submitted in writing to the Contract
Administrator for acceptance.
c)
No repairs to damaged products shall be attempted without the Contract Administrator's

acceptance.
d)
Any damaged products deemed unsuitable for repair by the Contract Administrator shall be
removed from Site and replaced at the Contractor's expense.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION
A.
Pipes and Fittings

1.
GRP pipes and fittings shall conform to the requirements of the Sultanate of Oman Standard
Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction.

01 June 2016
334000 / 3
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
B.
Pipe Surround
1.
C.
GRP Fabrications
1.
D.
Multi-part covers.
b)
Surface boxes.
Valves, gates and appurtenances shall comply with the Sultanate of Oman Standard Specifications
for Road and Bridge Construction.
Pipeline warning tape shall comply with the requirements of the Sultanate of Oman Standard
Pipeline Marker Posts

1.
2.2
a)
Pipeline Warning Tape

1.
K.
Manhole covers and frames, along with the following items shall comply with the requirements of
the Sultanate of Oman Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction.
Values, Gates and Appurtenances

1.
J.
Waterproofing shall comply with the requirements of the Sultanate of Oman Standard Specifications
for Road and Bridge Construction.
Cast Iron Covers and Frames

1.
I.
Concrete linings and protective coatings shall comply with the requirements in Section 033000 Castin-Place Concrete.
Waterproofing
1.
H.
Precast concrete for drainage channel shall conform to Section 5 Concrete and Concrete Structures
of the latest edition of the Sultanate of Oman Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge
Construction.
Concrete Linings and Coatings

1.
G.
Concrete and accessories shall comply with Section 033000 Cast-in-Place Concrete.
Precast Concrete
1.
F.
GRP Fabrications shall conform to the Sultanate of Oman Standard Specifications for Road and
Bridge Construction.
Concrete
1.
E.
Pipe surround shall conform to the requirements of Section 312300 Excavation and Fill.
Pipeline marker posts shall comply with the requirements of the Sultanate of Oman Standard
DESIGN CRITERIA
A.
1.
Provide all labor, materials and equipment necessary for providing a complete operating system.
2.
Responsibility for the safety and soundness of all material shall rest with the Contractor.

01 June 2016
334000 / 4
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
3.
Carry out any tests (at the Contractor's cost) needed to satisfy himself regarding the soundness of
the pipes, fittings and jointing materials prior to acceptance testing by the Contract Administrator
as described in this Section.
4.
Pipe materials to be utilized shall be as indicated on the Design Drawings or as described in the
Specification.
5.
Each type of pipe and fittings shall be furnished by a single manufacturer, unless otherwise accepted
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
3.2
Connections to Existing Pipelines

1.
At the locations indicated on the Design Drawings or directed by the Contract Administrator at Site,
connect the new pipelines to the existing pipelines or structures but not until the new Work have
passed the final tests.
2.
Existing mains and service pipes shall only be cut using special equipment accepted by the Contract
Administrator.
a)
Cuts shall be perpendicular to the center line of the pipe and special care shall be taken with
respect to the location of the cut to ensure that the new pipework indicated on the Design
Drawings may be installed.
b)
Contractor shall agree with the Contract Administrator, the exact length of existing pipework
to be removed.
3.
Take every precaution to prevent any dirt or extraneous material from entering the existing main or
service pipe.
4.
Provide at the connection Site sufficient dewatering pumps to keep the excavation dry at all times.
a)
Work shall be carried out in a clean and efficient manner.
b)
The Employer may put the interconnection into use as soon as possible after its installation
and will carry out an inspection to detect any evidence of leakage.
1.
Any remedial work necessary to eliminate leakage shall be carried out by the Contractor.
2.
No pipework shall be covered or backfilled until the Contract Administrator is totally

satisfied that the interconnection is free of all leakage.
INSTALLATION
A.
Pipe Installation
1.
B.
Trench excavation, pipe installation and backfill shall comply with Section 312300 Excavation and
Fill, unless otherwise accepted by the Contract Administrator.
Storm Water Manholes and Wet Wells Installation

1.
General: Unless otherwise indicated, manholes shall be constructed:

a)
At each change of gradient or direction.
b)
At each change in diameter.
c)
At each intersection with other pipes.
d)
At such other points as indicated on the Design Drawings.

01 June 2016
334000 / 5
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
e)
2.
As directed by the Contract Administrator.
Concrete work shall not begin until the pipe fittings to be cast into the manhole walls, are on Site,
no box outs will be allowed, unless accepted by the Contract Administrator.
a)
Thereafter the manhole shall be cast, waterproofed and backfilled as quickly as possible.
3.
Channel inverts shall be accurately laid to meet pipe invert elevations.
4.
Channel bends in the benching shall be as "slow" as possible by setting the manholes off-center at
changes in direction.
5.
Short lengths of pipe with flexible joints shall be provided at all entries and exits to manholes.
6.
Unless otherwise indicated, all exterior surfaces below grade shall be covered with waterproof
membrane in accordance with the Sultanate of Oman Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge
Construction.
7.
Unless otherwise indicated, all interior concrete surfaces (except un-reinforced benching) shall be
covered with suitable cast-in-place plastic liner.
8.
Unless otherwise indicated, all exterior exposed concrete surfaces shall be epoxy coated.
9.
Manhole covers in traffic areas shall be set to the paved area profile and be flush with the paved
area surface.
10. Manhole covers located in non-traffic areas shall be set to an elevation as indicated on the Design
11. Unless otherwise indicated on the Design Drawings, manhole covers for storm water systems need
not incorporate a GRP sealing plate.
12. Unless otherwise indicated, storm water manholes shall be fitted with GRP ladders.
a)
All fastening bolts and accessories shall be stainless steel Type 316.
13. Handrails shall be stainless steel Type 316, unless otherwise indicated.
a)
All safety chains, fastening bolts and other hardware shall be stainless steel Type 316.
b)
Safety chains shall be 8mm nominal size, unless otherwise indicated.
14. All manholes shall be watertight on completion.

15. No testing for leakage of water from manholes shall be conducted, unless it is deemed necessary
16. Take all measures deemed necessary by the Contract Administrator to ensure that manholes are
a)
C.
Pumping Chambers and Other Structures Installation

1.
For any pressure lines within the system, valve chambers and/ or junction chambers shall be
constructed at each intersection with other pipes and at other points as indicated on the Design
Drawings.
2.
Concrete work shall not begin until the pipe fittings to be cast into the chamber walls are on Site.
a)
Thereafter the chamber shall be cast, waterproofed and backfilled as quickly as possible.
b)
No box outs shall be allowed.

01 June 2016
334000 / 6
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
3.
All pipes cast into chamber walls shall be fitted with a temporary internal jig to assure proper alignment
and flange orientation is maintained between all interconnecting pipes and fittings during casting.
a)
Jigs may be made from uPVC pipes, GRP pipes or steel tubing.
4.
Short lengths of pipe with flexible joints shall be provided at entry and exit to all chambers.
5.
Unless otherwise indicated on the Design Drawings, all exterior surfaces below grade shall be
covered with water proof membrane as described in service authority specification..
6.
Unless otherwise indicated, all interior and exterior exposed surfaces shall be epoxy coated.
7.
Manhole covers in traffic areas shall be set to the paved area profile and be flush with the paved
area surface.
8.
Manhole covers located in non-traffic areas shall be set to an elevation as indicated on the Design
9.
Unless otherwise indicated on the Design Drawings, manhole covers for irrigation work need not
incorporate a GRP sealing plate.
10. Unless otherwise indicated on the Design Drawings, irrigation chambers shall be fitted with aluminum
ladders.
a)
All fastening bolts and accessories shall be stainless steel Type 316.
11. Handrails, if indicated on the Design Drawings shall be aluminum.

a)
All fastening bolts and other hardware shall be stainless steel Type 316.
12. Safety chains and other hardware as required shall be stainless steel Type 316.
a)
Size shall be 8mm, unless otherwise indicated.
13. All chambers shall be watertight on completion.

a)
No testing for leakage of water into chambers shall be conducted, unless it is deemed necessary
14. Take all measures deemed necessary by the Contract Administrator to ensure that chambers are
a)
D.
Thrust Blocks Installation

1.
For pressure lines, construct thrust blocks at all changes in pipe direction greater than seven degrees
as well as at all tee and wye connections and/ or at locations as indicated on the Design Drawings.
2.
Thrust blocks shall be constructed to the dimensions indicated on the Design Drawings, unless
3.
Thrust blocks are designed for the soil parameters designated in the applicable soil report.
a)
If actual ground conditions differ from the soil reports, the Contract Administrator shall be
notified.
b)
Where actual ground conditions do not meet anticipated soil conditions, the Contract
Administrator may redesign the thrust block.
c)
Where considerably better ground conditions, such as rock, are encountered, the dimensions
of a particular thrust block may be reduced, with the Contract Administrator's acceptance.

01 June 2016
334000 / 7
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
d)
4.
Supporting calculations for any reduced size thrust blocks must be submitted to the Contract
Administrator at least 72 hours before construction of that particular thrust block commences.
Unless otherwise indicated, thrust blocks shall be provided on pipelines laid to gradients steeper
than 1:20.
a)
Up to 1:15 every third pipe.
b)
Up to 1:10 every second pipe.
c)
At 1:5 every pipe shall be anchored.
5.
Concrete shall extend to undisturbed ground on thrust faces (of thrust blocks) and on both faces of
anchor blocks.
6.
Each thrust block shall be designed to have a sufficient bearing area and shall be placed to safely
transmit the unbalanced force to the surrounding area.
7.
Thrust blocks shall be casted between the pipe fitting and the trench wall or trench bottom, as the
case may be.
8.
Bearing faces of the block shall be placed against freshly cut, undisturbed sound material.
9.
If the thrust exceeds the bearing value of the surrounding soil, the soil may be pre-compacted with
the Contract Administrator's acceptance before placing concrete.
10. All concrete shall be kept behind the sockets and flanges of fittings.
11. Formwork may be constructed with the acceptance of the Contract Administrator wherever
necessary to confine the concrete to the prescribed dimensions for the block.
a)
All form lumber shall be removed before testing.
12. Blocks shall, unless otherwise indicated or directed by the Contract Administrator, be so placed that
the pipes, fittings and joints will be accessible for repair.
13. Thrust blocks for GRP fittings shall completely encase the fittings, except for the joint area.
a)
E.
Over-pumping and Flow Diversion Installation

1.
2.
F.
For fittings larger than 300mm diameter, a 10mm thick, 150mm wide rubber wrap shall be
provided on the ends of the GRP fitting such that the rubber protrudes slightly from the encasing.
If necessary, maintain storm water flow arising from any source.

a)
Submit the proposed method of over-pumping or flow diversion to the Contract Administrator
for acceptance prior to the start of construction.
b)
Proposed method shall include proposed alignments and design requirements of the discharge
to the terminal point.
Furnish, install and operate pumps, plugs, conduits and other equipment required to divert flow
around the pipe segment upon which work is to be performed.
a)
Storm water shall not be allowed to flow into streets or over sidewalks.
b)
After the work has been completed, tested and accepted by the Contract Administrator, flow
shall be restored to normal.
Pipe Stoppers Installation

1.
If necessary, storm water flow shall be plugged off using an accepted type of mechanical pipe
stopper having a circumferential compressible rubber ring.

01 June 2016
334000 / 8
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
2.
G.
a)
Stopper shall be fully inserted inside the pipe before tightening up.
b)
Suitable inflatable stoppers may be accepted for small diameter pipes.
c)
Stopper shall be as accepted by Contract Administrator.
Stopping Off Flow

a)
For work on any length of pipeline, plug off all inlets to the upstream manholes as required.
b)
Next manhole upstream shall be used as a pumping sump with the outlet to that manhole also
being plugged.
c)
Where there is a possibility of storm water backup from downstream, the outlet to the
downstream manhole shall also be plugged.
d)
Additional stoppers shall be used as necessary to ensure safe working conditions.
Pumping Equipment Installation

1.
2.
Over-pumping shall be carried out from one manhole to another located downstream.
a)
Pumping system shall be of sufficient capacity to handle peak existing flow.
b)
Pumping shall be done by the Contractor in such a manner that no damage to public or private
property results and no nuisance or public health problem is created.
c)
Pumped storm water shall be in an enclosed hose or pipe that is free of all leaks and shall be
re-inserted into the storm water system.
Verify the peak average flows ahead of time and design the pumping system accordingly.
a)
3.
4.
3.3
Submit proposed design for the Contract Administrator's acceptance.
Submersible Portable Pump

a)
A submersible electrically driven, non-clog pump shall be installed in the manhole.
b)
Pump shall be capable of handling all the required flow and any material likely to be transported
to the host manhole.
c)
Pump shall be slender and capable of passing through the manhole cover.
d)
Bottom side of the pump, i.e. suction inlet, shall be connected to a suction stand constructed
of cast iron or protected steel and resting on the manhole bottom.
e)
Discharge side of the pump shall be connected to the external pipe by means of a flexible hose
or other material as deemed appropriate.
f)
Pump shall be controlled by float switches installed to operate at levels pre-accepted by the
Suction Lift Pump

a)
In areas where the submersible pump described above is not sufficient to handle the existing
flow, one or more suction lift pumps may be installed temporarily on the street level with suction
hose(s) lifting from one or more manholes as necessary.
b)
Pumps shall be centrifugal of a special design suitable for this work.

A.
Pipe Testing

01 June 2016
334000 / 9
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
1.
General
a)
Submit a method statement covering details of the proposed methods and program for testing,
including details of test equipment.
b)
Provide all things necessary for carrying out testing and cleaning including water, pumps,
gages, piped connections, stop ends and all other temporary work.
c)
Gages used for testing pressure pipelines shall either be of conventional circular type, not less
than 300mm diameter, calibrated in bars or shall have a digital indicator capable of reading
increments of 0.1bar.
d)
Before any gage is used, arrange for it to be checked independently and a recent certificate
of its accuracy shall be provided to the Contract Administrator.
e)
f)
1.
One additional gage as above shall be handed over to the Qualified Testing Agency for
purposes of verification during testing.
2.
Calibration of pressure gages shall be carried out by the Contractor at regular intervals
as required by the Contract Administrator at no additional cost to the Employer.
Pipelines shall be properly secured and supported before being put under test.
1.
At pipe ends, provide for transmitting the end thrust into the sides of the trenches.
2.
Ensure that anchorage of bends is sufficient and thrusts from all branch outlets be
properly restrained.
Note that since valves cannot be guaranteed to be perfectly driptight, testing against closed
valves shall not be permitted, unless accepted by the Contract Administrator.
1.
Testing against valve chambers or other structures will also be prohibited.
2.
No claims will be entertained on account of leaking valves or any other difficulties

encountered, including the isolation of certain lengths of pipework for testing.
g)
No testing will be permitted until 7 days after thrust blocks and other holding down work have
been completed, unless otherwise accepted by the Contract Administrator.
h)
Trenches may not be left open at joints prior to testing pipelines, except as permitted by the
Contract Administrator who may lay down certain restricting conditions.
i)
In addition to any tests of individual joints or other interim tests which may be specified
elsewhere, submit all parts of the pipelines to a final test.
j)
Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Contractor may at any stage of construction carry out such
other tests as he considers desirable to check materials and workmanship on the pipeline.
1.
This shall not relieve the Contractor of his obligations to complete all testing designated
under the Contract.
k)
All water required for testing and cleaning the pipelines shall be potable water or irrigation
water and shall be provided by the Contractor at his cost.
l)
All flexible pipelines, including but not limited to uPVC and GRP must be tested for deflection,
m)
The Contract Administrator shall have power to require the Contractor to vary any test
Procedure or pressure as the Contract Administrator thinks fit at no extra cost to the Employer.
n)
Submit an inspection request to the Contract Administrator at least 24 hours before his intention
to test a section of pipeline after having satisfied himself that the section of pipeline to be tested
in the presence of the Contract Administrator is satisfactory in all aspects.

01 June 2016
334000 / 10
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
B.
o)
Note that neither the satisfactory testing of a pipeline, section of a pipeline or any other pipe
work, nor the acceptance of such testing by the Contract Administrator shall in any way relieve
the Contractor of any of his responsibilities and obligations under the Contract.
p)
When leakage or infiltration exceeds the amount allowed by the Specification, the Contractor
shall, at his own expense, make the necessary repairs or replacements in accordance
with the Specification to reduce the leakage or infiltration to the specified limits.
q)
Any individual detectable leaks shall be repaired, regardless of the results of the test, unless
Deflection Testing
1.
All flexible pipelines, including but not limited to GRP and uPVC shall be subjected to deflection
tests at Site using veroc deflectometer or similar device accepted by the Contract Administrator.
a)
2.
Deflection shall be calculated as a percentage of the difference between the measured in-place
diameter (on any axis) and the stated non-deflected diameter divided by the non-deflected diameter.
a)
3.
4.
5.
a)
After completion of surround (at Contractor's option): 0%.
b)
Within one month after backfilling trench (mandatory): 2%.
c)
Immediately prior to final assembly and pressure test (mandatory): 4%.
Any sections of pipe failing to meet the specified deflection criteria shall be removed from the trench,
a)
Undamaged pipes may be relaid and tested again.
b)
All action taken to correct the pipe deflection shall be at the Contractor's expense.
If the permanent set or deflection, after removal, exceeds the limits set out above, the pipes shall
be deemed to be damaged and will therefore be rejected.
Pipes so rejected shall be indelibly marked, removed from the Site and replaced at the
Contractor's expense.
Infiltration Tests
1.
D.
A reduction in the diameter shall be considered to be a negative deflection.
Maximum deflection Criteria for Flexible Pipes with Granular Bedding (Measured-In-Place) shall be
as follows:
a)
C.
The above requirement shall not apply to pipes 100mm diameter and smaller.
Prior to handover, all gravity, non-pressure, pipelines shall undergo an infiltration test as follows:
a)
Maximum length to be tested at one time shall be 1.0km, unless otherwise accepted by the
b)
Dewatering shall be discontinued for at least 3 days prior to test.
c)
Upper ends of the pipe shall be closed to prevent entry of water.
d)
Volume of water infiltrating into the pipe shall be accurately measured for a minimum period
of 1 hour.
e)
Maximum infiltration shall not exceed 1 L/ mm of pipe diameter per km of pipe per day.
Interim Pressure Testing

01 June 2016
334000 / 11
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
1.
Any pressure lines in the system shall be given an interim pressure test after placement of the pipe
surround.
a)
Unless otherwise indicated, all pressure tests shall be conducted at 1.5 times the working
pressure, or the maximum shut-off head, whichever is higher.
2.
Joints shall be left exposed to visually inspect for leaks.
3.
Pipeline shall be divided into sections not exceeding 500m in length, unless otherwise accepted by
4.
Submit to the Contract Administrator detailed procedures for performing hydrostatic pressure tests
for installed piping, fittings, valves, meters and appurtenances.
5.
If required, suitable stop ends (section of steel pipe about 0.5m to 1.0m long onto which a closing
plate has been welded) containing the necessary openings for accommodating in-going water and
out-coming air may be utilized during the test.
6.
7.
a)
Stop end may also include an opening through which the test water may be pumped from the
line, if necessary.
b)
Stop end may be jointed to the pipe to be tested by means of a standard coupling or other
method accepted by the Contract Administrator.
c)
Thrust blocks or temporary anchorages shall be provided to hold the stop end in place against
the test pressure.
d)
Proprietary restrained joints in lieu of thrust blocks may also be used.
Procedures for performing hydrostatic pressure tests for each section of pipeline shall include:
a)
Location and capacity of the test pump.
b)
Test pressure at the pump as well as that at the highest and lowest points.
c)
Procedures for venting the air from the pipeline.
d)
Disposing the water after satisfactory testing.
Each pipeline or section thereof shall be filled with water and all air removed as far as possible.
a)
If permanent air vents are not located at all high points, install suitable cocks at such points
so that the air can be expelled as the line is filled with water.
8.
Line shall be filled slowly to prevent possible water hammer.
9.
Test pump and gage shall be connected to the pipeline at a location other than the highest point in
the line to facilitate the release of air from the highest point.
10. After filling and before application of the test pressure, maintain the test section at the rated pressure
for a standing period of not less than 24 hours to achieve conditions as stable as possible for testing.
a)
The standing period will commence from the time at which the rated pressure was reached
successfully, after which all exposed joints shall be carefully inspected for evidence of leakage.
11. If neither appreciable movement of the pipeline, nor any leakage has been observed during the
standing period, the section shall be subjected to the specified test pressure.
12. Pumping shall be resumed and the pressure slowly raised to the specified test pressure at the
highest point in the pipeline (or section under test) provided that the pressure at the lowest point of
the pipeline (or section under test) shall not exceed the maximum allowable test pressure.
13. The specified test pressure shall be continuously maintained by the use of the pump for a period
of at least 4 hours and the amount of make up water required to maintain the pressure shall be
accurately measured (to the nearest 1/ 8L) regularly every 30 minutes throughout the test.
01 June 2016
334000 / 12
AECOM Middle East


Enabling Works
14. Pipeline shall be deemed to have passed the test if:

a)
No water is visibly coming out of the pipe or joints at any point.
b)
Amount of make-up water required does not exceed the rate of 0.1L/ mm of pipe diameter, per
km of pipeline, per 24 hours for each 30m head of pressure applied.
c)
Maximum drop in pressure (during the last half hour of the test period, when no further makeup water may be pumped in) shall not exceed 10% of the maximum test pressure.
15. During all testing, the trench and the joint pockets in particular shall be kept clear of water.
a)
Should the trench become unstable due to leaking from testing or re-testing, it shall be
excavated to solid ground and made up with lean mix concrete or such other material as the
Contract Administrator may direct, all at the Contractor's expense.
16. Should a test fail, the Contractor shall at his own expense replace defective pipes or fittings, repair
leaking joints or otherwise rectify defective work.
17. Cleaning, inspection and testing shall then be repeated until the Work is accepted by the Contract
Administrator at no extra cost to the Employer.
E.
Final Pressure Testing

1.
After interim testing has been satisfactorily completed, all pressure lines shall be given a final
pressure test to be carried out on the entire length of the pipeline after all sections have been joined
together.
2.
Final pipeline test pressures and procedures shall be conducted as described under interim pressure
testing.
3.
Valves and all pipeline appurtenances shall be hydraulically tested together with the pipeline in
which they are installed.
4.
Valves shall be tested for operation under working pressure.

a)
Valves shall be adjusted so that they operate smoothly, seat properly and are installed to
tolerances recommended by the manufacturer.
END OF SECTION

01 June 2016
334000 / 13
AECOM Middle East

APPENDIX 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
AGGREGATES, TABLE A
A.
Table of Limits For Physical, Chemical and Mechanical Properties of Aggregates for Concrete
Sl No
Requirement
Test Methods
BS 812 - 103.2
(dry)
1.
2.
Permissible Limits
ASTM
Standard
max.3% max.7%
max.l% max.l%
C142
C123
max.l%
max.0.5%
max.l%
max.0.5%
C40
The color of the

supernatant liquid
be lighter than
color solution
C128/C12
max. 2.3%
max. 2%
C128/C12
min. 2.6
min. 2.6
N/A N/A max.10%
max. 5% max.
15% none
Finer than 2.36mm
max.10%
none
Hollow shells
none
none
Material finer than 0.075mm
3.
4.
Clay lumps and friable particles

Light weight pieces
5.
Organic impurities
6.
Water absorption
7.
Specific gravity (apparent)
8.
Shell content in aggregates:

Coarser than 10mm
Between 5mm & 10mm
Between 2.36mm & 5mm
10..
Particle shape :
Flakiness index
Elongation/flakiness factor
Acid soluble chlorides, Cl :
For reinforced concrete made
SRPC cements
OPC & MSRPC cements
BS 812 - 103.2
(wet)
BS 1377
BS EN 933-7
BS EN 933-3
See Note 1
BS EN 1744-5
max. 0.01%
max. 0.02%
For mass concrete made with

SRPC cements
max. 0.03%
max. 0.02%
OPC & MSRPC cements
max. 0.05%
max. 0.04%
For prestressed concrete &

steam cured structural concrete
max. 0.01%
max. 0.01%
max. 0.3%
max. 0.3%
max.12%
max.10%
max.12%
max.10%
Acid soluble sulfates,
12.
Soundness
BS EN 1744-1
(5 cycles)
Sodium sulfate NaS04
14.
15.
max.25%
max. 0.03%
max. 0.03%
11.
13.
Coarse
Standard
Grading
Natural, uncrushed/crushed
Crushed rock
9.
Fines
C88
C88
Mechanical strength
10% fines value
or Impact value
BS 812-111
BS 812-112
Los Angeles abrasion

Drying shrinkage
BS EN 1367-4
min. 100KN
max. 30%
C131/C53
max. 0.075%
Potential reactivity
Aggregates, chemical method
C289
Innocuous
6 month expansion
Cement-aggregate
C227,
0.10% max.

07 June 2016
Appendix 033000/ 1
max.30%
max.0.075%
Innocuous
AECOM Middle East

Cast-in-Place Concrete
Note 1: Not more than 5% of particles shall have ratios greater than 1:2:3 (flakiness) and 1:1:3
(elongation) when tested by visual inspection of 100g of sand under a microscope where the
ratio represents width: breadth: length.
Note 2: The aggregate shall be fully protected from contamination and loss of fines prior to its
incorporation into the concrete. Stockpiles should be covered to protect them from windblown
dust.
1.2
AGGREGATES, TABLE B
A.
Table of Frequency of Routine Tests on Aggregates
Kind of Requirement
Test Method
Test Frequency Rate
Grading
BS EN 933-1
A test every four weeks, or every 100m3, whichever is more frequent.
Material finer than 0.075
BS EN 933-1
as above
Clay lumps and Friable Particles
ASTMC142
as above
Lightweight pieces
C123
Organic impurities
BS 1377,ASTMC40
A test biweekly or for every 200 m3, which-ever is

more frequent
as above
Water absorption
ASTM C128/C127
Twice weekly
Specific gravity
ASTM C128/C127
as above
Shell content
BS EN 933-7
A test every two months, or every 100m3, whichever is more frequent.
Particle shape
BS EN 933-3
as above
Acid soluble chlorides, C\W:

Qualitative Quantitative
BS EN 1744-5
Appendices A, B and C
Acid soluble sulphates S03
BS EN 1744-1
Soundness, Mg S04 (5 cycles)
ASTM C88-05
A test on every delivery of aggregate to site if

results reach the limits specified, or a test every
month if results are less than 75% of the specified
limit.
A test every 12 days of concreting if results are
more than 75% of the limit, or a test every two
months if results are less than 75% of the limit.
A test every 48 days of concreting.
Mechanical strength 10% Fines

or impact value Los Angeles
abrasion
BS EN 1097-2
ASTM C131-06
ASTM C535-09
A test every 72 days of concreting.
Drying shrinkage
BS EN 1367-4
A test at the start of the project, and whenever

there is a change in the source of supply.
Potential reactivity of aggregates

:
ASTM C295, C289, C586,

C227, C1260
as above
by moisture meters
In accordance with the Specification, but not less

than twice daily
mm
of carbonate
of cement/aggregate
Moisture variation

07 June 2016
Appendix 033000/ 2
AECOM Middle East

1.3
TABLE FOR RECYCLED MATERIAL CEMENT REPLACEMENT AND EMBODIED GHG EMISSIONS
Mixes
Type
Volume,
m3
Proportion
of
Total
used, %
28
Day
Strength,
N/mm2
Cement
Content,
kg/m3
Slag
Content,
kg/m3
Embodied
GHG,
CO2e/m3
Mix 1
Cast in Place
3,142
3%
40
220
150
201
Mix 2
Cast in Place
2,357
3%
40
220
150
201
Mix 3
Cast in Place
12,771
14%
40
220
150
201
Mix 4
Cast in Place
47,709
51%
40
220
150
201
Mix 5
Cast in Place
27,522
29%
40
130
240
144
Mix 6
Cast in Place
106
0%
40
220
150
201
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
TOLERANCES, DIAGRAM 1
A.
3.2
The distance from any one corner to the plane containing the other three corners will be accurate to
within the following:
Height
mm
Up to and including 33m height

Over 33m height
25mm
50mm
A.
Permitted deviation on Cast-in Fastenings:
No fastening shall be more than 5mm from the intended position, as

illustrated.

07 June 2016
Appendix 033000/ 3
AECOM Middle East


3.3
A.
Permitted deviation on Cast-in Foundation Bolts:
Pre-set foundation bolt or bolt groups when prepared for

adjustment. Deviation from specified position.
Pre-set foundation bolt or bolt groups when not prepared for

Wall bolt or bolt groups when not prepared for

3.4
CURING, TABLE C
A.
Table for Normal Curing Periods
Minimum periods of protection for different types of cement
Conditions under which Concrete

is maturing
Conditions not covered above
Numbers of days of curing

when concrete temperature
exceeds 5C in a day
Equivalent maturity (degree hours)

calculated as the age of concrete in
hours multiplied by the number of
degrees Celsius by which the
average surface temperature of the
concrete exceeds 5C
Other*
OPC
Other*
OPC
10
3500
1500
2000
1000
comprises all permitted cements except OPC, and includes combinations of OPC with PFA
or GGBS and Microsilica.
3.5
DURABILITY TESTS, TABLE D, PART 1

A.
Chloride Permeability to AASHTO T277:
Type of Concrete

07 June 2016
Maximum Charge Pass (Coulombs) at 28 days
Appendix 033000/ 4
AECOM Middle East

Concrete general
Mass Concrete Foundations
Concrete in contact with soil and/or water
3.6
3,500
2,000
1,000

A.
Later Permeability to DIN 1048:
Type of Concrete
Maximum Penetration (mm) at 28 days
Concrete general
3.7
15mm
15mm
8mm

A.
Initial Surface Absorption to BS 1881-208:
Type of Concrete
Maximum ISAT at 28 days: 10 minute test

0.30ml/m2/sec.
0.30ml/m2/sec.
0.15m/m2 /sec.
Concrete general
3.8

A.
30 Minute Absorption to BS 1881-122:
Type of Concrete
30 Minute Absorption
Concrete general
3.9
2.0% at 28 days
2.0% at 28 days
1.5% at 28 days

A.
The chloride and sulfate levels in the concrete mix to BS 1881-124:
Type of Concrete
Maximum Chlorides as C (a)
Sulphates as SO3 (a)
0.40
0.20
4.00
4.00
0.10
0.20
4.00
3.00
For reinforced concrete:

OPC/MSRPC
SRPC
For Pre-stressed concrete & heat-cured:
Reinforced concrete mass concrete Foundations
Note: When any cement additive (SF, GGBS, PFA) is used it shall not be included as cement
binder for the purpose of chloride and sulfate limitations.
3.10
A.
OTHER TESTS, TABLE E

Table for the Rate of Sampling Concrete
Type of Structure

07 June 2016
Sampling To Represent a Volume of Concrete (m 3)
Appendix 033000/ 5
AECOM Middle East

Critical structures e.g. masts, cantilevers,

columns
10
Flexural Strength &

Durability Tests
50
Intermediate structures e.g. beams, slabs,

walls
20
250
Heavy concrete construction e.g. Rafts
50
500
Cube Strength Tests
END OF SECTION

07 June 2016
Appendix 033000/ 6
AECOM Middle East

APPENDIX 101453 TRAFFIC SIGNAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
General: Read this Appendix Section in conjunction with Section 101453 Traffic Signage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
COLOR SPECIFICATION LIMITS, TABLE A

A.
Table of Color Specification Limits and Reference Standards for Type III Materials
Chromaticity Coordinates*
(Corner Points)
Color
Ref. Std. ***

(Munsell Papers)
x
.303
y
.287
x
.368
y
.353
x
.340
Y
.380
x
.274
y
.316
Min
27.0
Max
Red
.613
.297
.708
.292
.636
.364
.558
.352
2.5
Orange
.550
.360
.630
.370
.581
.418
.516
.394
Yellow
.498
.412
.557
.442
.479
.520
.438
Green
.030
.380
.166
.346
.286
.428
Blue
.144
.030
.244
.202
.190
.247
White
**
Reflectance
Limits
(%Y)
Y
5.0PB
7/1
11.0
7.5 R
3/12
14.0
30.0
2.5YR
5.5/14 .0
.472
15.0
40.0
1.25 Y
6/12
.201
.776
3.0
8.0
10 G
3/8
.066
.208
1.0
10.0
5.8PB
1.32/6 .8
The four pairs of chromaticity coordinates determine the acceptable color in terms of the CIE 1931
standard colorimeteric system measured with standard illumination source C.
Silver white is an acceptable color designation.
Available from Munsell Color Company: 2441 Calvert St. Baltimore MD 21218.
**
***
2.2
SIA LIMITS, TABLE B

A.
Table of Minimum Specific Intensity per Unit Area (SIA) for Type III Sheeting Material
1.
SIA is measured in candelas per footcandle per ft.
Glass Bead Retro-Reflective Element Material

Observation
Entrance
Angle (*)
Angle (*)
White
0.2
-4
250
Red
45
Orange
100
Yellow
170
Green
45
Blue
20
0.2
+30
150
25
60
100
25
11
0.5
-4
95
15
30
62
15
7.5
0.5
+30
65
10
25
45
10
5.0

07 June 2016
Appendix 101453/1
AECOM Middle East

Traffic Signage

Prismatic Retro-Reflective Element Material
Observation
Entrance
White
Angle (*)
Angle (*)
0.2
-4
250
Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
45
100
170
45
20
0.2
+30
95
13.3
26
64
11.4
7.6
0.5
-4
200
28.0
56
136
24.0
18
0.5
+30
65
10.0
25
45
10
5.0
Test samples shall be mounted in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION NOT USED

END OF SECTION

07 June 2016
Appendix 101453/2
AECOM Middle East

Traffic Signage
APPENDIX 312300 EXCAVATION AND FILL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
General: Read this Appendix Section in conjunction with Section 312300 Excavation and Fill.
FILL MATERIAL, TABLE A

A.
Table A: Particle size distribution of fill material.

Type of fill material
Percentage by mass passing
Size BS test sieve
1.3
400mm
200mm
Fine fill material
General fill material
100
75mm
20mm
600mm
63mm
100
75-100
TRENCH AND PIT EXCAVATING, TABLE B
A.
Trench and Pit Excavating For Services

Internal diameter
of pipes
Not exceeding
Maximum trench width
Rigid pipes
Flexible pipes
700mm
Outside
300mm nominal
diameter
plus 300mm
Over 300mm and
Outside diameter
less than 840mm
plus 400mm
nominal
840mm nominal
and over
1.
1.4
Outside diameter
plus 600mm
Note: Where trench supports are necessary all widths may be increased by 150mm.
INSTALLATION TOLERANCES, TABLE C

A.
Tolerances for earthworks final surfaces and formations

07 June 2016
Appendix 312300 / 1
AECOM
Excavation and Fill
Type of surface
Formations for
structures and utilities
Method of forming surface
Tolerance (mm)
+
Excavation except in rock
25
Excavation in rock
150
25
50
150
50
Deposition
material
and
compaction
of
fill
Formations for
pavements, including
carriageways, footways,
cycle tracks, paved
areas, aircraft
pavements.
Earthworks final
surfaces other than
formations, with a
gradient not exceeding 1
vertical to 10 horizontal
100
Excavation in rock
200
50
Other earthworks final

surfaces
50
Excavation in rock
100
200
50
Excavation in rock
Deposition
material
Deposition
material
Deposition
material
and
and
and
compaction
compaction
compaction
of
of
of
fill
fill
fill
END OF SECTION

07 June 2016
Appendix 312300 / 2
AECOM
Excavation and Fill
APPENDIX 321116 SUBBASE COURSES

A.
Material Requirements for Sub-base Courses

1.
The materials for sub-base courses shall comply with the requirements as specified herein and
shall be as approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit samples of all materials to
the Engineer for approval prior to furnishing and placing any materials. The material sample
shall meet the following criteria.
2.
Aggregate Sub-base shall meet the following test requirements:
Table 1: Sub-base Materials Criteria
B.
C.
Test
Standard
Limits
Sampling
Classification
Los Angeles Abrasion
Soundness (Sodium)
Soundness (Magnesium)
Sand Equivalent
Liquid Limit
Plasticity Index
Sulfate Content
Chloride Content
Flakiness Index
Elongation
Specific Gravity
Max Dry Density
C.B.R. at 98% of M.D.D.
AASHTO - T2
AASHTO - M 145
AASHTO - T96 (ASTM C131)
AASHTO - T104
AASHTO - T140 (ASTM C88)
AASHTO - T176 (ASTM D-2419)
AASHTO - T89 (ASTM D4318)
B.S. 1377
B.S. 812
B.S. 812
B.S. 812
AASHTO-T100 & T85
AASHTO - T180D
40 Max.
12% Max.
15% Max.
25% Mini.
35% Max.
6.0% Max.
0.50% Max.
1.0% Max.
35% Max.
35% Max.
2.20 Min.
2.10 gr/cc Min.
65% Min.
3.
Natural Aggregate Sub-base Courses shall consist of coarse and fine mineral aggregates
which have been screened and blended to the various gradations specified herein and
constructed to the thickness as indicated on the Design Drawings.
4.
Crushed Aggregate Sub-base Courses shall consist of crushed coarse aggregate and crushed
or natural fine aggregate screened and blended in accordance with the gradation specified
herein and constructed to the thicknesses as indicated on the Design Drawings.
Fine Aggregates
1.
Fine aggregate (passing the No. 4 sieve) shall consist of natural sand and/or crushed sand and
shall be of such gradation that when combined with other required aggregate fractions in
proper proportions, the resultant mixture will meet the gradation specified.
2.
The fine aggregate shall be clean and free from organic matter, clay and other extraneous or
detrimental materials.
3.
The portion of fine aggregates passing the No. 200 sieve shall not exceed 2/3 of the portion
passing the No. 40 sieve.
4.
The material passing the No. 40 sieve shall have a maximum liquid limit of 35 and the plasticity
index shall not exceed 6.
5.
When the source of fine aggregates does not meet the above requirements, the Contractor
may, with the Engineer's approval, add additional fine aggregate and/or filler to correct the
gradation or to change the characteristics of the material passing the No. 40 sieve so as to
meet the Specification. Such additional material shall be added in a manner which ensures a
completely homogeneous gradation as approved by the Engineer.
Coarse Aggregates
1.
Coarse aggregate (retained on the No. 4 sieve) shall consist of crushed stone, crushed gravel
or natural gravel and shall be of such gradation that when combined with other required
aggregate fractions in proper proportion, the resultant mixture will meet the gradation specified.
2.
When crushed aggregate is required, not less than 50% by weight of the particles retained on
the No. 4 sieve shall have at least one fractured face. The Flakiness Index of the crushed

07 June 2016
321116 / 1
AECOM Middle East

Sub-base Courses
aggregate shall not exceed 35%.
D.
3.
The percentage of wear of coarse aggregate shall not exceed 40% when tested for resistance
to abrasion (AASHTO T-96).
4.
The course aggregate shall be hard and durable and free from organic matter, clay and other
extraneous or detrimental materials.
5.
Coarse aggregate shall have a maximum sodium sulfate soundness loss of 12% and
magnesium sulfate soundness loss of 15%.
Types of Aggregate Sub-base Courses

1.
The combined gradation including fine and coarse aggregates shall conform to the gradation of
Type (A) or (B) or (C) in Table 2 below.
2.
The gradation of materials to be used in the aggregate sub-base courses as shown in Table 2
indicates the limits within which the material could be accepted. The continuous smooth
gradation of materials used shall be kept within the specified gradation limits and gap grading
shall be avoided. Selection of one of the gradations shown in table 2 shall be as indicated on
the Design Drawings and/or in these Standard Specifications. Unless otherwise specified,
Gradation B shall be used when aggregate sub-base is specified.
3.
Mixing of material can be achieved through the use of the central mixing plant or travel mixer.
Table 2: Gradation Limits for Aggregate Sub-base Courses

Percent Passing by Weight
Sieve
Size
50.8mm
41.75mm
25.4mm
19.05mm
9.53mm
No. 4
No. 10
No. 40
No. 200
Gradation A
100
70-100
50-80
35-65
25-50
15-30
5-15
Gradation B
Gradation C
100
70-100
60-90
45-75
30-60
20-50
10-30
5-15
100
75-100
55-85
50-80
40-70
30-60
20-50
10-30
5-15
END OF SECTION

07 June 2016
321116 / 2
AECOM Middle East

Sub-base Courses
APPENDIX 321216 ASPHALT PAVING

1.1
COMMERCIAL MINERAL FILLER.

A.
Commercial mineral filler shall consist of finely ground particles of limestone, cement, or hydrated lime
in accordance with AASHTO M-17. It shall be thoroughly dry and free from lumps and shall meet the
gradation requirements of AASHTO M-17.
B.
When hydrated lime is used as mineral filler, the hydrated lime shall comply with ASTM C-1097. When
cement is used as mineral filler, it shall meet the requirements of Type V cement in accordance with
AASHTO M-85 (ASTM C-150).
1.2
ASPHALT CEMENT.
A.
The asphalt cement specified for use in the asphalt mixes shall be 60-70 Penetration Grade in
accordance with AASHTO M-20 and as shown in the Table 1 below:
60 70
Test
40 50
Min
Max
Min
Max
60
70
40
50
Flash Point, Cleveland Open Cup C
232
232
Solubility in Trichloroethylene, percent
99
99
0.8
0.8
54
58
50
Penetration @ 25 C 100 g. 5 sec.

o
Thin Film Oven Test, 3.2 mm 163 C 5-hour

Loss on Heating, percent
Penetration of Residue, % of original
o
Ductility of Residue @ 25 C
5 cm per minute cm.
1.
B.
Table 1: 60-70 and 40-50 Penetration Grade Asphalt Cement
Asphalt cement not meeting the requirements of 60-70 Penetration Grade may be accepted if it
complies with Viscosity Grade AC-40 in accordance with AASHTO M-226 as shown in Table 2 below:
Test
Min.
o
Viscosity, 60 C N.s/m (Pa.S)
320
480
Viscosity, 135 C Cs (mm/sec.)
300
20
Flash Point, Cleveland Open Cut C
232
Solubility in Trichloroethylene, percent
99.0
Test on Residue, Thin Film Oven Test:

o
Viscosity, 60 C
o
Ductility, 25 C 5 cm per min.cm.
10
Penetration 25 C, 100 g. 5 sec.

o
1.
C.
1.3
Max.
16000
Table 2: AC-40 Viscosity Grade Asphalt Cement
The asphalt cement shall be prepared by the refining of petroleum. It shall be uniform in character and
o
shall not foam when heated to 175 C. Blending of asphalt cement materials from different refineries
will be permitted only with the written approval of the Engineer.
LIQUID AND EMULSIFIED ASPHALTS.
A.
Liquid asphalt for use in asphalt works shall be MC-70 medium curing cutback asphalt in accordance
with AASHTO M-82 as modified by Table 3 below:

Issued for Tender T2
07 June 2016
AECOM Middle East

Asphalt Paving.
Appendix 321216 / 1
MC-70
Min.
Description
Saybolt Furol Viscosity @ 50 C sec.
o
Flash Point (Tag Open Cut) C
Distillation:
Distillate (% of total distillate
o
to 360 C)
o
To 225 C
o
To 260 C
o
To 315 C
o
Residue from distillation to 360 C
percent by volume
Tests on residue from distillation:
o
Penetration 25 C,
100 g., 5 sec.
o
Ductility, 25 C cm.
Solubility in Trichloroethylene, %
Water percent
1.
Max.
60
38
120
-
20
65
60
80
100
55
120
100
99
250
0.2
Table 3: Medium Curing Liquid Asphalt
B.
Rapid curing cutback asphalt for cold mix applications shall be as specified in the Particular
Specifications for cold patching as approved by the Engineer.
C.
Emulsified asphalt for use in asphalt works shall be CSS 1h cationic emulsified asphalt in accordance
with AASHTO M-208 or SS 1h anionic emulsified asphalt in accordance with AASHTO M-140.
1.4
HYDRATED LIME.
A.
Hydrated lime shall comply with the definitions given in ASTM C-51. Sampling, packaging and
marking of hydrated lime shall be in accordance with ASTM C-50. Storage and use of the hydrated
lime shall at all times be such as to protect the material from the weather.
B.
Hydrated lime shall comply with the gradation shown in Table 4 when tested in accordance with
AASHTO T-219.
1.
C.
U.S. Standard
Sieve Size
Minimum
% Passing
No. 30
97
No. 200
70
Table 4: Gradation of Hydrated Lime
When tested by ASTM C-25 the hydrated lime shall comply with the chemical requirements shown in
Table 5
Test
Requirement
Min.
Max.
Free Moisture (%)
3.0
Available Lime Index as CaO (%)
50
Carbon Dioxide CO2 (%)
Unhydrated Lime (%)
Table 5: Chemical Requirements for Hydrated Lime

END OF SECTION

Issued for Tender T2
07 June 2016
AECOM Middle East

Asphalt Paving.
Appendix 321216 / 2
APPENDIX 333000 SANITARY SEWERAGE UTILITIES

1.1
FIELD TESTING, TABLE A

A.
Table for Vacuum Test Criteria Used for Precast Concrete Manholes
Table 33 30 00-1
Manhole Diameter in mm
Depth in mm
Up to 3048mm
3049mm to 4572mm
4573mm to 7620mm
1219mm
60 sec.
75 sec.
90 sec.
1524mm
75 sec.
90 sec.
105 sec.
1829mm
90 sec.
105 sec.
120 sec.
END OF SECTION

07 June 2016
333000 / 1
AECOM Middle East

Sub-base Courses
AECOM Middle East Limited

PO Box 53, Capital Gate, Abu Dhabi

United Arab Emirates
T +971 2 613 4000
F +971 2 613 4001
E www.aecom.com
To create, enhance
andcreate,
sustainenhance
the
To
worlds
built,the
natural
and sustain
and social
worlds
built, natural
environments
and social
environments

Enabling Works Specification

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Enabling Works Specification

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MALL OF OMAN

Package 1 - Enabling Works Specification

Ref OMA-004-001-AEC-CE-SPN-00-0007-T2 Date 07 June 2016

C. Lakshmanan Reviewed by Infrastructure and Structural Teams

Issued for Tender

Issued for Tender Rev T1

Issued for Tender Rev T2

015213 - Field Offices And Sheds

Deleted Clauses referring to 132 KV transmission lines in

Added Section 134713 Cathodic Protection

Added Clause 2.3G for stockpiling fill material to

Added Clause 3.2 C to Section 024100

Added Clause 2.3 G 3 to Section 312300

Mall of Oman - Package 1

SECTION 015213 -- FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS

CONTRACT ADMINISTRATOR'S OFFICES

CONTRACT ADMINISTRATOR'S OFFICE EQUIPMENT

SITE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

MAINTENANCE AND CLEANING